Home

FUS G1E/ 3G1E, Commissioning instructions

1. For inverters with a capacity of 500 kW or 630 kW two L2 S input terminals are arranged vertically to the terminal block When connecting wires to these terminals use the bolts washers and nuts that come with the inverter as shown below A WARNING When wiring the inverter to the power source insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the path of each pair of power lines to inverters Use the recommended devices within the recommended current capacity Be sure to use wires in the specified size Tighten terminals with specified torque Otherwise a fire could occur When there is more than one combination of an inverter and motor do not use a multicore cable for the purpose of handling their wirings together Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output secondary circuit Doing so could cause a fire Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code Be sure to ground the inverter s grounding terminals G Otherwise an electric shock or fire could oc
2. Keypad enclosure Power switching connectors CN UX Fan power _ supply switching M E connectors 2 1 CN R and J LEE m AE oo te CN W Ma mn e Auxiliary fan ooo power input OOO ay terminals Power PCB EB Auxiliary EREHRHRERERHER power input terminals Auxiliary fan power input 7 F terminals J 1 supe S T Power switching testes esd bees switching Auxiliary power input connectors CN UX E m Ed Feed connectors terminals CN R and CN W a FRN37G1B 2LI to FRN75G1 20 b FRN90G1 20 FRN75G1 401 to FRN110G1 40 FRN132G1 40 to FRN630G1 40 Figure 2 6 Location of Switching Connectors and Auxiliary Power Input Terminals Note A box W in the above figure replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box L1 in the above figure replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 2 14 z deyo 23LH3ANI JHL ONIMIM ANY ONILNNOW Note To remove each of the jumpers pinch its upper side between Wwl CN UX your fingers unlock its fastener and pull it up When mounting it fit the jumper over the connector until it YW CN R CN W snaps into place Figure 2 7 Inserting Removing the Jumpers Main circuit power inpu
3. 5 o c 2 etat Drive control Refer Name Data setting range zc 8 setting to co S Vit PG w o w Torque page amp a vit PG PG control o b35 Motor 3 0 096 to 300 096 Y v1Y2 7 Y Y Y Y Y Magnetic saturation extension factor a b36 Magnetic saturation extension 0 096 to 300 0 Y v1Y2 7 Y Y vYi v Y factor b b37 Magnetic saturation extension 0 096 to 300 096 Y v1Y2 7 Y Y vYi v Y factor c b39 Motor 3 Selection 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series N Y1Y2 0 EYE Y Y 1 Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors 2 Motor characteristics 2 Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector control 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series 4 Other motors b40 Slip Compensation 3 0 Enable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or N Y 0 Y Y N N N Operating conditions above 1 Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency O or above gt 2 Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency m or above 3 Disable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or o above b41 Output Current Fluctuation Damping 0 00 to 0 40 Y Y 020 Y Y N N N T Gain for Motor 3 c b42 Motor Parameter Switching 3 0 Motor Switch to the 3rd motor N Y 0 Y Y vY Yv Y 5 117 5 Mode selection 1 Parameter Switch to particular b codes J b43 Speed Control 3 0 000 to 5 000 s Y Y 0020 N Y Y Y N O
4. H H L3IT NO 51 im s o ojlo O O x2 E een 1a V w OOO0 sw s a Refer to ry zE A ec Section 51 zer 7o es Oo 2 3 3 9 o E 51 51 2 5 Table 2 6 Recommended Wire Sizes 2 Nominal Recommended wire size mm E 2 applied Inverter type Main circuit power input Grounding Inverter peg Braking z g motor LUR L2 S L3 T Tec output PL P resistor 2 amp W HD mode LD mode MD mode w DCR w o DCR U V W gt P DB 0 4 FRNO 4GIB 2L 0 75 FRN0 75G1m 20 1 5 FRNI 5GIB2L 20 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 2 FRN2 2G1 1 20 3 7 FRN3 7G1 1 200 5 5 FRN5 5GIB2L 3 5 3 5 35 3 5 FRN5 5GIB2L x 2 0 Z is FRN7 5G1 20 d m 5 5 5 5 33 S il FRNIIGIB2L FRN7 5G1 20 5 5 14 8 0 8 0 2 15 FRNISGIB2L FRNIIGIB 2LI 14 2 80 14 14 A 18 5 FRN18 5G1M 20 FRNISGIB2LI 22 8 22 FRN22G1 20 FRNI8 5GIB2L 22 38 2 22 30 FRN22G1 20 38 2 60 3 14 38 2 38 2 FRN30G1 20 38 60 38 38 37 FRN37GIB 2L FRN30GIB2LI 60 45 FRNA5GIBI2L FRN37GIB2LI 60 100 60 100 55 FRN55GIBI
5. c o o E a gt neaui Drive control Refer to Code Name Data setting range g E g setting page cel g vig PG wo wi Torque 5 a Vif PG PG control E30 Frequency Arrival Hysteresis width 0 0 to 10 0 Hz Y Y 25 Y Y Yj Y N 5 82 E31 Frequency Detection 1 Level 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Y Y 1 YIYJYJ Y N E32 Hysteresis width 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Y Y 10 Y Y Y Y N E34 Overload Early Warning Current 0 00 Disable Current value of 1 to 200 of the inverter Y Y1Y2 4 Y Nn Y 5 83 Detection Level rated current E35 Timer 0 01 to 600 00s Y Y 1000 Y Y Y Y Y E36 Frequency Detection 2 Level 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Y Y 1 X x rx y Y 5 82 5 83 E37 Current Detection 2 0 00 Disable Current value of 1 to 200 of the inverter Y Y1Y2 4 Y Y Yj Y M 5 83 Low Current Detection Level rated current E38 Timer 0 01 to 600 00 s Y Y 1000 Y Y Y Y Yi E40 PID Display Coefficient A 999 to 0 00 to 9990 Y Y 100 Y Y Y Y N 5 84 E41 PID Display Coefficient B 999 to 0 00 to 9990 Y Y 000 Y Y Y Y N E42 LED Display Filter 0 0to 5 0s Y Y 0 5 Y Y vY Y Y 5 85 E43 LED Monitor Item selection 0 Speed monitor select by E48 Y Y 0 X p X pM Y Y 5 86 3 Output current 4 Output voltage 8 Calculated torque 9 Input power 10 PID command 12 PID feedback amount 14 PID output 15 Load factor 16 Motor output 17 Analog input 23 Torque current 24 Magnetic flux command 25 Input watt hour E44 Display when
6. Go to Section 6 5 If an abnormal pattern appears on the LED monitor 3J Go to Section 6 6 while neither an alarm code nor light alarm indication 77 is displayed If any problems persist after the above recovery procedure contact your Fuji Electric representative 9 deyo ONILOOHS3 I8n0 L 6 3 If Neither an Alarm Code Nor Light Alarm Indication 77 Appears on the LED Monitor This section describes the troubleshooting procedure based on function codes dedicated to motor 1 which are marked with an asterisk For motors 2 to 4 replace those asterisked function codes with respective motor dedicated ones refer to Chapter 5 Table 5 5 1 For the function codes dedicated to motors 2 to 4 see Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 6 3 1 Abnormal motor operation 1 The motor does not rotate Possible Causes 1 No power supplied to the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the input voltage and interphase voltage unbalance gt Turn ON a molded case circuit breaker MCCB a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor MC gt Check for voltage drop phase loss poor connections or poor contacts and fix them if necessary gt Ifonly the auxiliary control power input is supplied also supply the main power to th
7. LD 30 HD FRN30G1 m 40 250 IEC60269 4 LD 37 HD FRN37G1m 40 315 IEC60269 4 LD 45 D FRN45G1 m 40 Lp 315 EC60269 4 55 HD 400 IEC60269 4 FRN55G1 m 40 E m LD 350 1EC60269 4 FRN75G1 40 HD 350 TEC60269 4 LD 90 Bb FRN90G1 m 40 350 IEC60269 4 m MD LD FRN110Gm 40 HD 400 TEC60269 4 m MD LD FRN132Gm 40 HD 450 IEC60269 4 is MD LD FRN160Gm 40 HD 500 1EC60269 4 2d MD LD FRN200Gm 40 HD 550 IEC60269 4 MD LD 220 HD 250 FRN220GI 4L MD _ 630 IEC60269 4 280 LD HD 315 FRN280Gm 40 MD 355 LD 2 up 200 IEC60269 4 355 FRN315GI ALI MD 400 LD 355 HD 400 FRN355Gm 40 MD 450 LD 1250 400 HD IEC60269 4 450 FRN400Gm 40 MD 500 m FRN500Gm 40 E LD 2000 FRN630Gm 40 HD _ IEC60269 4 710 5 LD Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Continued ANWARNING A 3 When used with the inverter a molded case circuit breaker MCCB residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB or magnetic contactor MC should conform to the EN or IEC standards 4 When you use a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB for protection from electric shock in direct or indirect contact power lines or nodes be sure to install type B of RCD ELCB on the input primary of the inverter if the power supply is three phase 200 400 V 5 The inverter should be used in an environment that does
8. FRN37G1 1 40 Three phase 400 V FRN45GIB 4L1 1 0 FRNSSG1M 40 53 5 Uo 53 5 FRN75GIBI 4L 2 0 4 0 67 4 107 2 FRN90G1 40 1 0x2 1 0x2 53 5x2 53 5x2 2 0x2 67 4x2 3 0x2 3 0x2 85x2 85x2 4 0x2 250x2 107 2x2 127x2 250x2 300x2 FRN220G1 B 4L1 127x2 152x2 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter type is FRNA 0GIWBI A4E FRN110G1 40 FRN132G1 8 40 FRN160G1 8 40 FRN200G1 1 40 Note 1 Control circuit terminals Tightening torque 6 1 Ib in 0 7 N m Recommended wire size AWG 19 or 18 0 65 to 0 82 mm Note 2 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box L1 in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 1 No terminal end treatment is required for connection 2 Use 75 C Cu wire only 3 The wire size of UL Open Type and Enclosed Type are common Please contact us if UL Open Type exclusive wire is necessary xi Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada continued ANCAUTION Required torque ON 2 Ib in N m Wire size AWG mm Main terminal LI R L2 S L3 T U V W Inverter type Power supply voltage Nominal applied motor HD MD LD mode Class J fuse size A Circuit breaker trip size A Main te
9. 7 Switch IP20 IP40 enclosure IP20 IP40 0 IP20 An example of conversion from binary to decimal for the number configured by the factory default setting shown above Decimal Bit 7 x 2 Bit 6 x 2 Bit 5 x 2 Bit 4 x 24 Bit 3 x 274 Bit 2 x 27 Bit 1 x 2 Bit 0 x 2 Bit 7 x 128 Bit 6 x 64 Bit 5 x 32 Bit 4 x 16 Bit 3 x 8 Bit 2 x 4 Bit 1 x2 Bit0 x 1 0x128 1x64 0x32 1x16 0x8 0x4 1x2 1x1l 64 16 2 1 83 5 2 6 A codes Motor 2 Parameters b codes Motor 3 Parameters r codes Motor 4 Parameters The FRENIC MEGA can switch control parameters even when it is running so that a single inverter can drive four motors by switching them or turn the energy saving operation ON or OFF for the setup change e g gear switching that causes the moment of inertia of the machinery to change Function code F E P and other codes Motor to drive Motor 1 Remarks Including function codes commonly applied to motors 1 to 4 A codes Motor 2 b codes Motor 3 r codes Motor 4 This manual describes function codes applied to motor 1 only For ones applied to motors 2 to 4 except A42 b42 and r42 Motor Parameter Switching 2 to 4 refer to the corresponding function codes prepared for motor 1 in Table 5 5 on the next page Note A42 b42 r42 Motor Parameter Switching 2 3 and 4 Mode selection d25 ASR Switching Time The combination of di
10. deyo H2LH3ANI SHL ONISN 30H38 DCR models Input power factor Remarks DCR2 4 OO OOA OOB Approx 90 to 95 The last letter identifies the capacitance Exclusively designed for nominal applied motor of 37 kW or above DCR2 4 LILIC Approx 86 to 90 Note Select a DCR matching not the inverter but the nominal applied motor Applicable reactors differ depending upon the selected HD MD or LD mode even on the same type of inverters 4 PWM converter for correcting the inverter input power factor Using a PWM converter High power factor regenerative PWM converter RHC series corrects the inverter power factor up to nearly 100 When combining an inverter with a PWM converter disable the main power loss detection by setting the function code H72 to 0 If the main power loss detection is enabled H72 1 by factory default the inverter interprets the main power as being shut down ignoring an entry of a run command 5 Molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB Install a recommended MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect the wiring Since using an MCCB or RCD ELCB with a lager capacity than recommended ones breaks the protective coordination of the power supply system be sure to select recommended ones Also select ones with short circuit breaking capacity suita
11. 1 0 to 10 VDC negative value of voltage is regarded as 0 V 5 30 W Gain and bias Reference frequency Gain C32 C37 or C42 Bias F18 Analog input 0 Bias Gain 100 base base point point C50 C34 C39 or C44 Note If F01 3 the sum of 12 C1 is enabled the bias and gain are independently applied to each of the voltage and current inputs given to terminals 12 and C1 and the sum of the two values is applied as the reference frequency F18 C50 C32 and C34 2 Rias meo Reference frequency Gain R Bias 1 Gain F18 C50 C37 and C39 In the case of unipolar input terminal 12 with C35 1 terminal C1 terminal V2 with C45 1 As shown in the graph above the relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency specified by frequency command 1 can arbitrarily be determined by points A and B Point A is defined by the combination of the bias F18 and its base point C50 Point B by the combination of the gain C32 C37 or C42 and its base point C34 C39 or C44 The combination of C32 and C34 applies to terminal 12 that of C37 and C39 to C1 C1 function and that of C42 and C44 to C1 V2 function Configure the bias F18 and gain C32 C37 or C42 assuming the maximum frequency as 100 and the bias base point C50 and gain base point C34 C39 or C44 assuming th
12. Station address yO1 for port 1 and y11 for port 2 y01 or y11 specifies the station address for the RS 485 communications link The table below lists the protocols and the station address setting ranges Protocol Station address Broadcast address Modbus RTU protocol 1 to 247 FRENIC Loader protocol 1 to 255 FUJI general purpose inverter protocol l to31 If any wrong address beyond the above range is specified no response is returned since the inverter will be unable to receive any enquiries except the broadcast message To use FRENIC Loader via the RS 485 communications link port 1 set the station address that matches the connected computer W Communications error processing y02 for port 1 and y12 for port 2 y02 or y12 specifies the error processing to be performed if an RS 485 communications error occurs RS 485 communications errors include logical errors such as address error parity error framing error transmission protocol error and physical errors such as no response error specified by y08 and y18 The inverter can recognize such an error only when it is configured with a run or frequency command sourced through the RS 485 communications link and it is running If none of run and frequency commands is sourced through the RS 485 communications link or the inverter is not running the inverter does not recognize any error occurrence Data for y02 y12 Function Immediately trip displaying an RS 4
13. Dynamic torque vector control F42 Droop control H28 Torque detection E78 to E81 Vector control without with speed sensor F42 Brake Signal Brake OFF torque J95 5 96 P06 to P08 Motor 1 No load current R1 and X P06 through P08 specify no load current R1 and X respectively Obtain the appropriate values from the test report of the motor or by calling the manufacturer of the motor Performing auto tuning automatically sets these parameters W No load current P06 Enter the value obtained from the motor manufacturer W R1 P07 Enter the value calculated by the following expression RI RI Cable RI 100 V 43x1 where R1 Primary resistance of the motor Q Cable R1 Resistance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V I Rated current of the motor A W X P08 Enter the value calculated by the following expression X1 X2 x XM X2 XM Cable X V 3x1 X x 100 where Xl Primary leakage reactance of the motor Q X2 Secondary leakage reactance of the motor converted to primary Q XM Exciting reactance of the motor Q Cable X Reactance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V I Ratedcurrent of the motor A Note For reactance use the value at the base frequency F04 P09 to P11 Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for driving Slip compensation response time and Slip compensation gain for braking
14. Inverter type FRN GIN Dimensions mm i 20 40 Unit mm 200 V 400V W WI W2 H HI H2 D D1 D2 D3 A 0 4 0 4 132 19 110 96 0 75 0 75 baits 6 e T 22 22 150 136 T 37 33 Qo 5 5 5 5 7 5 7 5 220 196 238 5 Grounding terminal 27 8 x Ho 16 mm for input line 11 11 11 1195 105 90 10 EeHNHUGRGGRCRREEE provided only on the EMC 15 15 g al filter built in type of 200 V 400 V class series inverters with a 18 5 18 5 250 226 400 378 ai capacity of 5 5 to 11 kW 22 22 30 10 10 30 320 240 550 530 255 140 D 37 W D1 D2 37 45 615 595 d i 12 115 oh Dis n 55 675 655 is 355 275 270 155 S 75 740 55 720 s eras 75 530 430 750 285 145 140 4 90 630 290 880 850 360 180 e a E 90 Oo 740 710 315 135 zs zi 110 O 530 430 a 1132 co L60 1000 970 360 180 15 15 5 M 15 Las 220 i i o m 680 290 2 Oo 280 7 315 O 355 1400 1370 440 260 o 880 260 6 4 400 z 500 1000 300 1550 1520 500 313 2 186 8 o 630 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter type is FRN4 0G1S 4E Note A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box L1 in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 8 4 2 DC reactor Power Nominal Inverter type LD Dimensions mm supply applied FRN GIB MD LD Reactor pos Mounting Terminal ey voltage motor 20 40 mode WwW wi D Di
15. 4 Input 2 General purpose timer Flip flop Input 1 E Output p 8 a l P i L Input 2 6 Reset priority flip flop General purpose timer Flip flop Output Input 1 ae Input 2 7 Rising edge detection OFF 8 Falling edge detection Previous output Output Previous nput 2 output OFF OFF value OFF Hold previous value Reset priority 9 Both edges detection Rising edge detection General purpose timer Falling edge detection General purpose timer Both edges detection General purpose timer Input 1 LE Output Input 1 v IE Output Input 1 Ay LE Output Input 2 Input 2 Input 2 10 Hold 11 Increment counter 12 Decrement counter General purpose timer Increment counter Decrement counter Input 1 r Output Input 1 Output Input 1 Output p s l p p 5 p l p ils Clear counter Initialize the counter Input 2 Input 2 13 Timer with reset input ON timer Input 1 o or ON orr on OFF Input 1 Output OFF ON OFF E Input 2 Reset OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Output Input 2 Timer A Timer
16. Otherwise an electric shock could occur 2 Check the control circuit terminals and main circuit terminals for short circuits or ground faults 4 1 y deu YOLOW AHL ONINNAY 3 Check for loose terminals connectors and screws TOR 4 Check that the motor is separated from mechanical equipment amp G UR LXS L3T 5 Make sure that all switches of devices connected to the inverter are turned OFF Powering on the inverter with any of those switches being ON may cause an unexpected motor operation 6 Check that safety measures are taken against runaway of the equipment e g a defense to prevent people from access to the Power equipment supply Figure 4 2 Connection of Main Circuit Terminals 4 1 3 Powering ON and checking ANWARNING Be sure to mount the front cover before turning the power ON Do not remove the cover when the inverter power is ON Do not operate switches with wet hands Otherwise an electric shock could occur Turn the power ON and check the following points The following is a case when no function code data is changed from the factory defaults 1 Check that the LED monitor displays 7 7 indicating that the reference frequency is 0 Hz that is blinking See Figure 4 3 KEYPAD PRG MODE CONTROL X10 Timin m min Hz A kW If the LED monitor displays any number except 7 7 press N Okey to set LL iL 2 Check that the built in cooling fans r
17. The DC brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism Injuries could occur Ensure safety before modifying the function code settings Run commands e g Run forward FWD stop commands e g Coast to a stop BX and frequency change commands can be assigned to digital input terminals Depending upon the assignment states of those terminals modifying the function code setting may cause a sudden motor start or an abrupt change in speed When the inverter is controlled with the digital input signals switching run or frequency command sources with the related terminal commands e g SS7 82 SS4 SS8 HzZ Hz1 Hz PID IVS and LE may cause a sudden motor start or an abrupt change in speed Ensure safety before modifying customizable logic related function code settings U codes and related function codes or turning ON the Cancel customizable logic terminal command CLC Depending upon the settings such modification or cancellation of the customizable logic may change the operation sequence to cause a sudden motor start or an unexpected motor operation An accident or injuries could occur Maintenance and inspection and parts replacement ANWARNING A Before proceeding to the maintenance inspection jobs turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above Make sure
18. FRNI8 5GIB 2L FRNI8 5GIB 4L FRN22GIB2LI FRN22GIB 4LI Figure D FRN30GIB 4L FRN30GIB2LI FRN37GIB 4L FRNASGIBI 4L FRN55GIB 4LI Figure E FRN75GIB 4LI Figure F FRN90GIB 4L FRN110G1 40 Figure G Figure M FRN132G1 8 40 FRN160G1 40 Figure H FRN200G1 1 40 FRN220GIB 4L Figure I FRN280GIB 4L FRN315GIB 4L Figure J FRN355GIB 4L FRNA400GI1B 4L Figure K FRN500G1 8 40 4 0 kW for the EU FRN630GIB 4L Figure L The inverter type is FRN4 0G1 M 4E Note A box Bl in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box L1 in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination Tightening torque Nm Screw size AWARNINGA Y5A Y5C Insulation level When the inverter power is ON a high voltage is applied to the following terminals Main circuit terminals L1 R L2 S L3 T P1 P N DB U V W RO TO R1 T1 AUX contact 30A 30B 30C z deyo S2LH3ANI JHL ONIMIM ANY ONILNNOW Main circuit Enclosure Basic insulation Overvoltage category III Pollution degree 2 Main circuit Control circuit Reinforced insulation Overvoltage category III Pollution degree 2 Relay output Control circuit Reinforced insulation Overvoltage category II Pollution degree 2 An electric shoc
19. Bit otation Binary 1 0 Hexa decimal on the LED monitor LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 B Hexadecimal expression A 4 bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal 1 hexadecimal digit Table 3 10 shows the correspondence between the two notations The hexadecimals are shown as they appear on the LED monitor Table 3 10 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion Binary Hexadecimal Hexadecimal 7 7 LI e ce i Oo 7 n PI z 11 o o 3 99 Wag Psy ocOj oilojoilo o c o o o o DN oO o o jo jc ojo j o c o o o j oce e ejej EN cojo o oc o oj o i o s 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status Menu 4 I O Checking Using Menu 4 I O Checking displays the I O status of external signals including digital and analog I O signals without using a measuring instrument Table 3 11 lists check items available The menu transition in Menu 4 I O Checking is shown in Figure 3 4 QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOILVYsAdO List of I O check items I O data Unc gt By LED segment ON OFF ete gt pE I O status in binary format Es RUNE T ete GOGS Input status in hex format Oto AIO OGG Output status in hex format X p By
20. Digital input 1 1 Various signals such as Coast to a stop Enable external alarm trip and Select multi frequency can be assigned to terminals X1 to X7 FWD and REV by setting function codes E01 to E07 E98 and E99 For details refer to Chapter 5 Digital input 3 Section 5 2 Details of Function Codes 2 Input mode i e SINK SOURCE is changeable by using the slide switch SW1 Refer to Section 2 3 6 Setting up the slide switches The factory default for Digital input 5 FRN GIB2A 4Ais SINK and for FRN_ GIB 4E SOURCE 3 Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals X1 to X7 FWD or REV If the logic value for ON of the terminal X1 is 1 in the normal logic system Digital input 7 for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa Digital input 2 Digital input 4 a AS E EZ Jo a Digital input 6 Run forward 4 Digital input terminal X7 can be defined as a pulse train input terminal with the command function codes Maximum wiring length 20 m Maximum input pulse 30 kHz When connected to a pulse generator with open collector transistor output Needs a pull up or pull down resistor See notes on page 2 20 100 kHz When connected to a pulse generator with complementary transistor output For the settings of the function codes refer to FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES Run reverse command Digital i
21. Remote mode Run and frequency commands are selected by function codes or source switching signals except Select local keypad operation LOC Local mode The command source is the keypad regardless of the settings specified by function codes The keypad takes precedence over the settings specified by communications link operation signals Run commands from the keypad in the local mode The table below shows the input procedures of run commands from the keypad in the local mode When F02 data run command is Input procedures of run commands from keypad 0 Enable amp 3 keys on keypad Pressing the u key runs the motor in the direction specified by command Motor rotational direction from digital F WD or REV assigned to terminal FWD or REV respectively terminals FWD REV Pressing the 609 key stops the motor 1 Enable terminal command FWD REV Pressing the amp w key runs the motor in the forward direction only Pressing the 69 key stops the motor No specification of the motor rotational direction is required 2 Enable Gun keys on keypad Forward Pressing the key runs the motor in the reverse direction only Pressing 3 Enable vy 69 keys on keypad Reverse the key stops the motor No specification of the motor rotational direction is required Switching between remote and local modes The remote and local modes can be switched by a digital input signal provided from the outside of th
22. S3dO9 NOILONNA Frequency Run command ON OFF ON uP terminal command ON Initial frequency for the UP DOWN control when the frequency command source is switched When the frequency command source is switched to the UP DOWN control from other sources the initial frequency for the UP DOWN control is as listed below Initial frequency for UP DOWN control Frequency command source Switching command H61 0 H61 1 Other than UP DOWN Select frequency Reference frequency given by the frequency F01 C30 command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 command source used just before switching PID control Cancel PID control Hz PID Reference frequency given by PID control PID controller output Select multi frequency Reference frequency Reference frequency at Multi frequency SS1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 given by the frequency the time of previous Enable communications Tdi command source used UP DOWN control Communications link via RS 485 or fieldbus LE just before switching 4 Using pulse train input F01 12 W Selecting the pulse train input format d59 A pulse train in the format selected by the function code d59 can give a frequency command to the inverter Three types of formats are available the pulse train sign pulse train input the forward rotation pulse reverse rotation pulse and the A and B phases with 90 degree phase difference If no optional PG interface card is mounted the inverte
23. Three phase average voltage V x 67 IEC 61800 3 If this value is 2 to 396 use an optional AC reactor ACR 6 Required when a DC reactor DCR is used 7 Average braking torque for the motor running alone It varies with the efficiency of the motor 8 A DC reactor DCR is optionally provided Note that inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW or above in all modes require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters Note A box LI in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 8 2 Standard Model 2 EMC Filter Built in Type 8 2 1 Three phase 200 V class series HD High Duty mode inverters for heavy load meen oea o4 ors s 22 sz 55 75 5 6s z 9 amp 55 55 75 99 n applied moor kw Output rating ed capacity kVA 2 ed voltage V 3 Three phase 200 to 240 V with AVR function Tega E 230 Overload capability AREA re 1 min 200 3 0 s 200 to 220 V 50 Hz Voltage frequency 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz 200 to 230 V 60 Hz Allowable age frequency equired capacity with DCR kVA 6 12 22 31 52 74 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 116 Torque 150 100 10 to 15 g Braking transistor Buin pax ee ilt in braking resistor S Duty cyce ED 5 3 5 3 2 3 2 EMC filter Compliant with EMC Directives Emission and Immunity Category C3 2nd Env EN61800 3 2004
24. Unit Cumulative run time of electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards which is calculated by multiplying the cumulative run time count by the coefficient based on the surrounding temperature condition Counter range 0 to 99 990 hours Display range to 7777 The x10 LED turns ON Actual cumulative run time of electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards hours Displayed value x 10 When the count exceeds 99 990 the counter stops and the LED monitor sticks to 2775 Cumulative run time of the cooling fan Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the cooling fan This counter does not work when the cooling fan ON OFF control function code H06 is enabled and the fan stops ru The display method is the same as for 5_ 4 5 above Number of startups Shows the content of the motor 1 startup counter 1 e the number of run commands issued Counter range 0 to 65 530 times Display range to 5757 If the count exceeds 10 000 the x10 LED turns ON and the LED monitor shows one tenth of the value When the count exceeds 65 530 the counter will be reset to 0 and start over again Input watt hour Shows the input watt hour of the inverter Display range ZL to 9999 Input watt hour Displayed value x 100 kWh To reset the integrated input watt hou
25. keys on the keypad balanceless bumpless switching available 11 Digital input interface card option 12 Pulse train input C31 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 5 0 to 5 0 Y Y 0 0 YivY Y v Y 5 94 Offset C32 Gain 0 00 to 200 00 y y Mmoo v v v v l v C33 Filter time constant 0 00 to 5 00 s y ly loo lylylylyly C34 Gain base point 0 00 to 100 00 v v 10000 v v v v v C35 Polarity 0 Bipolar 1 Unipolar N Y 1 Y lvY vi v Y C36 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 5 0 to 5 0 Y Y 0 0 YiY Y v Y Offset C37 Gain 0 00 to 200 00 v v 100 00 vY Y Y Y Y C38 Filter time constant 0 00 to 5 00s y ly loo flylylylyly C39 Gain base point 0 00 to 100 0096 v y hooo v v v vl v C41 Analog Input Adjustment for V2 5 0 to 5 0 yA Y 0 0 351 y YI OY Y Offset C42 Gain 0 00 to 200 00 v y hooo v v v v v C43 Filter time constant 0 00 to 5 00 s y ly loo lylylylyly C44 Gain base point 0 00 to 100 0096 v y hoco v v v vl v C45 Polarity 0 Bipolar 1 Unipolar N Y 1 Y vY vi v Y C50 Bias Frequency command 1 0 00 to 100 0096 Y Y 000 Y Y Y Y Y 5 29 Bias base point 5 95 C51 Bias PID command 1 Bias value 100 00 to 100 0096 Y Y 000 Y Y Y Y Y 5 95 C52 Bias base point 0 00 to 100 0096 y v loo v v v vl v C53 Selection of Normal Inverse 0 Normal operation Y Y 0 YIY YI Y Y 5 67 Operation Frequency command 1 5 95 1 Inver
26. 2 When the 7LF is displayed holding the amp key down for at least 5 seconds alternates data protection status between enabled or disabled Note For switching the data protection status be sure to hold the amp key down for at least 5 seconds Once the key is released within 5 seconds press the amp key to go back to the A display and perform the keying operation again Enabling the disabled data protection Hold key down for at least 5 seconds Displayed item changes Efod Prof While 7L AY is displayed holding down the amp key for at least 5 seconds shows i for 5 seconds and then switches to Fai enabling the data protection Disabling the enabled data protection Hold key down for at least 5 seconds y Displayed item changes Prof gt r Efl While 7 4 is displayed holding down the key for at least 5 seconds shows ia for 5 seconds and then switches to EAch disabling the data protection The followings are restrictions and special notes concerning Data Copying W f data copying does not work Check whether 77 or 4 is blinking 1 If Er is blinking a write error any of the following problems has arisen No data exists in the keypad memory No data read operation has been performed since shipment or a data read operation has been aborted Data stored in the keypad memory contains any error The models of copy source and destination inverters are diffe
27. 4 1 12 Running the inverter for motor operation check ANWARNING If the user configures the function codes wrongly without completely understanding this Instruction Manual and the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine Accident or injury may result After completion of preparations for a test run as described above start running the inverter for motor operation check using the following procedure ANCAUTION If any abnormality is found in the inverter or motor immediately stop operation and investigate the cause referring to Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 Turn the power ON and check that the reference frequency 7 7 4 Hz is blinking on the LED monitor 2 Set a low reference frequency such as 5 Hz using W QO keys Check that the frequency is blinking on the LED monitor 3 Press the uN key to start running the motor in the forward direction Check that the reference frequency is displayed on the LED monitor 4 To stop the motor press the 69 key lt Check points during a test run gt Check that the motor is running in the forward direction Check for smooth rotation without motor humming or excessive vibration Check for smooth acceleration and deceleration When no abnormality is found press the amp v9 key again to start driving the motor then increase the reference frequency using e QO keys Check the
28. Positive i Negative gt polarity gt polarity Reverse rotation pulse i Forward rotation pulse Forward rotation pulse Reverse rotation pulse A and B phases with 90 degree phase difference ie D Run i Run Eis forward _ gt _ reverse __ gt n signal H signal A phase input l T E c B phase input 5 ase inpu B i recht JL LJ LL x 90 degree O z B phase advanced B phase delayed Oo O O m n W Pulse count factor 1 d62 Pulse count factor 2 d63 For the pulse train input function codes d62 Command Pulse rate input Pulse count factor 1 and d63 Command Pulse rate input Pulse count factor 2 define the relationship between the input pulse rate and the frequency command reference Frequency reference f Hz Pulse count factor 2 d63 Pulse train input rate 0 Np kp s Pulse count factor 1 d62 Relationship between the Pulse Train Input Rate and Frequency Command Reference As shown in the figure above enter the pulse train input rate into function code d62 Command Pulse rate input Pulse count factor 1 and enter the frequency reference defined by d62 into d63 Command Pulse rate input Pulse count factor 2 The relationship between the pulse train input rate kp s inputted to the PIN terminal and the frequency reference f Hz or speed command is given by the expression below Pulse count factor 2 d63 f Hz Np kp s x P
29. Rated slip frequency P12 Magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 Magnetic saturation extension factors a to c P16 to P23 X correction factor 1 and 2 P53 and P54 Tuning the R1 and X with the motor stopped Tuning the no load current and magnetic saturation factor with the motor running at 50 of the base frequency Tuning the rated slip frequency again with the motor stopped Can rotate the motor provided that it is safe Note that little load should be applied during tuning Tuning with load applied decreases the tuning accuracy Tune while the motor is rotating under vector control No load current P06 Primary resistance R1 P07 Leakage reactance 96 X P08 Rated slip frequency P12 Magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 Magnetic saturation extension factors a to c P16 to P23 9 X correction factor 1 and 2 P53 and P54 Tuning the R1 X and rated slip frequency with the motor stopped Tuning the no load current and magnetic saturation factor with the motor running at 50 of the base frequency twice Can rotate the motor provided that it is safe Note that little load should be applied during tuning Tuning with load applied decreases the tuning accuracy Y Tuning available unconditionally Y Tuning available conditionally N Tuning not available The tuning results of motor parameters will be automatically saved into
30. orma When the PID control is disabled The normal inverse operation selection for the manual reference frequency is as follows Selection of normal inverse operation for frequency Final opetation command 1 C53 P 0 Normal operation Normal 1 Inverse operation Inverse When the process control is performed by the PID control facility integrated in the inverter the IVS is used to switch the PID processor output reference frequency between normal and inverse and has no effect on any normal inverse operation selection of the manual frequency setting Refer to the descriptions of JO1 through J19 and J56 through J62 Note Wi Universal DI U DI Function code data 25 Using U DI enables the inverter to monitor digital signals sent from the peripheral equipment via an RS 485 communications link or a fieldbus option by feeding those signals to the digital input terminals Signals assigned to the universal DI are simply monitored and do not operate the inverter Q For an access to universal DI via the RS 485 or fieldbus communications link refer to their respective Instruction Manuals Wi Force to stop STOP Function code data 30 Turning this terminal command OFF causes the motor to decelerate to a stop in accordance with the H56 data Deceleration time for forced stop After the motor stops the inverter enters the alarm state with the alarm 5 4 displayed Ll Refer to the description of F07 B
31. power driven motor 1 CRUN M1 73 1073 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 2 CRUN M2 74 1074 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 3 CRUN M3 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 4 Select droop control Cancel PG alarm 80 1080 Cancel customizable logic CLC 81 1081 Clear all customizable logic timers CLTC 98 Run forward FWD 99 Run reverse REV 100 No function assigned NONE Setting the value in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal Drive control Vit PG w o w Torque Vif PG PG control Y Y Yj Yv N Y Y Y N YANYA Y N Y Y A g N Y A 4 ENE N Ne NY N YITY Y Y Y YITY Y Y Y YITY Y Y Y Ys ex s A Y Y Y Y Y N Y in a a N Y Y Y Y Y pr Yeu N Ye Ye Y Y Y NN N Y NN N Y Ys Y N Y qo Ysn ey N Y TRY 1 e Y Y Y re Ye N oa ievetl Py N Y UY Ms Y N N Y YITY Y Y Y YITY Y Y Y Y L Y YN Y Y Ye Y NI N JY Y IN Yo YOY N YST Y N va a SY A Y Y X NS Ley Y YITY Y Y Y YITY Y Y Y Y NON N Y NON N NINOY N YIY Y Y YITY Y Y N YIv v v N Y Y NN Y Y NN Y Y Y NN Y Y NON y Yol Y Y N Fal NUY Y Y pa NS X Y YITY Y Y Y YITY Y Y Ys YITY Y Y Y PT Y Y Refer to page G deyo S3dO9 NOILONNA F codes C codes P codes H codes A codes b codes r codes J codes d codes
32. 0 1000 Select multi frequency 0 to 1 steps SS1 Y 6 1006 Enable 3 wire operation HLD 7 1007 Coastto a stop BX 8 1008 Reset alarm RST 9 1009 Enable external alarm trip THR 9 Active OFF 1009 Active ON Enable data change with keypad WE KP Cancel PID control Switch norma Interlock Cancel torque control Enable communications link via RS 485 or fieldbus LE Universal DI U DI 26 1026 Enable auto search for idling motor J speed at starting STM 30 1030 Forcetostop ssti lt lt 2 CSCS STOP 30 Active OFF 1030 Active ON 32 1032 Pre excitation StS EXITE 33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential J components PID RST 34 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD 35 1035 Select local keypad operation Loc 36 1036 Select motor 3 M3 37 1037 Select motor 4 M4 39 Protect motor from dew condensation DWP 40 Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 50 Hz ISW50 41 Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 60 Hz ISW60 47 1047 Servo lock command LOCK 49 1049 Pulsetrainsign sIGN 70 1070 Cancel constant peripheralspeed control Hz LSC 71 1071 Hold the constant peripheral speed control frequency in the memory LSC HLD 72 1072 Count the run time of commercial
33. 14 Torque generated by the motor was insufficient 9 deyo Check that the motor starts running if the value of torque boost F09 is increased gt Increase the value of torque boost F09 and try to run the motor Check the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 H51 H52 H53 H65 and H66 gt Change the V f pattern to match the motor s characteristics Check that the motor switching signal selecting motor 1 2 3 or 4 is correct and the data of function codes matches each motor gt Correct the motor switching signal 2 Modify the function code data to match the connected motor Check whether the reference frequency is below the slip compensated frequency of the motor ONILOOHS3 I8n0O4 L gt Change the reference frequency so that it becomes higher than the slip compensated frequency of the motor 15 Wrong connection or poor contact of DC reactor DCR Check the wiring Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW or above require a DCR to be connected Without a DCR these inverters cannot run gt Connect the DCR correctly Repair or replace DCR wires 2 The motor rotates but the speed does not increase Possible Causes 1 The maximum frequency currently specified was too low What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function code F03 Maximum frequency gt Correct the F03 data 2 The data of frequency limiter Hig
34. Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious consequences These safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all times Application AWARNING The FRENIC MEGA is designed to drive a three phase induction motor Do not use it for single phase motors or for other purposes Fire or an accident could occur The FRENIC MEGA may not be used for a life support system or other purposes directly related to the human safety Though the FRENIC MEGA is manufactured under strict quality control install safety devices for applications where serious accidents or property damages are foreseen in relation to the failure of it An accident could occur Installation A WARNING Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non flammable material Otherwise a fire could occur Do not place flammable object nearby Doing so could cause fire Inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above whose protective structure is IPOO involve a possibility that a human body may touch the live conductors of the main circuit terminal block Inverters to which an optional DC reactor is connected also involve the same Install such inverters in an inaccessible place Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur ANCAUTION Do not support the inverter by its front cover during transportation Doing so could cause a drop of the inverter and in
35. IP20 UL open type IP00 UL open type ERN method Fan cooling UIT se Weight Mass Kg 90 to 630 kW ae ratings i 0 aM fe a 2 a Item Specifications MeeR ersam so 170 192 160 200 200 29 sis ses OO sO Mm i applied igo re Output rating petting epu p m m n d 1 1 Rated voltage V 3 voltage V Three phase 380 to 480 V with AVR function eee aere ze oe or us 59 eo yo eo 59 759 1 Overload capability Overload capability 1209 4 min OS 1 1209 4 min OS 380 to 440 V 50 Hz Voltage frequency 380 to 480 V 60 Hz Allowable v ltage freduency eem pe Dew m n e Te ee e e T T 1 Built in braking resistor Braking time s Duty cycle a DC reactor DCR Option l Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 5 Frequency 5 to 5 Input power Applicable safety UL508C C22 2No 14 EN61800 5 1 2003 EN954 1 Cat 3 standards Enclosure IEC60529 IP00 UL open type Cooling method Fan cooling Fang CCS Weight Wass a 62 9 9 o mo o 29 25 50 59 59 59 Fuji RR standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the rated output voltage as 220 V for 200 V class series and 440 V for 400 V class series 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 380 to 440 V 50 Hz 380 to 480 V 60 Hz Max voltage V Min voltage V 5 Voltage unbalance 96
36. If it is necessary to return the LED monitor to the normal display state showing the running status such as reference frequency before the light alarm factor is removed e g when it takes a long time to remove the light alarm factor follow the steps below 1 Press the key to return the LED monitor to the light alarm indication A 2 With Ai being displayed press the amp key The LED monitor returns to the normal display state while the KEYPAD CONTROL LED continues blinking W Releasing the light alarm 1 Remove the light alarm factor that has been checked in 5_ 5 5 Light alarm factor latest under Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode in accordance with the troubleshooting procedure The reference page for the troubleshooting corresponding to each light alarm factor is shown in Ref page column in Table 6 1 2 Once the light alarm factor is removed the light alarm indication on the LED monitor disappears and the KEYPAD CONTROL LED stops blinking If the KEYPAD CONTROL LED continues blinking it means that any light alarm factor has not completely been removed and the inverter is still in the light alarm status Proceed to other troubleshooting procedures When all of the light alarm factors have been removed the digital output L ALM is also turned OFF automatically 6 21 9 deyo ONILOOHS3 I8n0 L 6 6 If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the LED Monitor while Neither an Alarm Code no
37. Inverter s ROM version Shows the inverter s ROM version as a 4 digit code Keypad s ROM version Shows the keypad s ROM version as a 4 digit code Number of RS 485 communications errors COM port 2 Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in RS 485 communication COM port 2 connection to terminal block after the power is turned ON Once the count exceeds 9999 the counter will be reset to 0 Content of RS 485 communications error COM port 2 Shows the latest error that has occurred in RS 485 communication COM port 2 connection to terminal block in decimal For error contents refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual Option s ROM version 1 Shows the ROM version of the option to be connected to A port as a 4 digit code If the option has no ROM appears on the LED monitor Option s ROM version 2 Shows the ROM version of the option to be connected to B port as a 4 digit code If the option has no ROM appears on the LED monitor Option s ROM version 3 Shows the ROM version of the option to be connected to C port as a 4 digit code If the option has no ROM appears on the LED monitor Cumulative run time of motor 1 Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of motor 1 Counter range 0 to 99 990 hours 55355 Thexl0 LED turns ON Display range to Actual cumulative motor run time hours Displayed valu
38. PV gt AL J13 AL J12 AH deviation Upper lower range limit when SV AL lt PV lt SV AL Deviation alarm deviation G deyo S3GdO9 NOILONNA A negative logic signal should be assigned to absolute PID ALM Upper lower range limit when SV AL lt PV lt SV AH Deviation alarm deviation Upper lower range limit when AL lt PV lt AH Absolute value alarm J15 to J17 PID Control Stop frequency for slow flowrate Slow flowrate level stop latency and Starting frequency Refer to J08 J18 J19 PID Control Upper limit of PID process output Lower limit of PID process output The upper and lower limiters can be specified to the PID output exclusively used for PID control The settings are ignored when PID cancel is enabled and the inverter is operated at the reference frequency previously specified E01 to E07 data 20 W PID Control Upper limit of PID process output J18 J18 specifies the upper limit of the PID processor output limiter in If you specify 999 the setting of the frequency limiter High F15 will serve as the upper limit W PID Control Lower limit of PID process output J19 J19 specifies the lower limit of the PID processor output limiter in If you specify 999 the setting of the frequency limiter Low F16 will serve as the lower limit J21 Dew Condensation Prevention Duty When the inverter is stopped dew cond
39. Stop frequency 1 Holding time F39 Speed Starting frequency 1 Holding time F24 Stop frequency F25 Starting frequency 1 F23 Time 0 Run command 5 51 W Starting Frequency 1 F23 Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 Hz F23 specifies the starting frequency at the startup of an inverter W Starting Frequency 1 Holding time F24 Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 s F24 specifies the holding time for the starting frequency 1 W Stop Frequency F25 Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 Hz F25 specifies the stop frequency at the stop of the inverter W Stop Frequency Holding time F39 Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 s F39 specifies the holding time for the stop frequency W Zero Speed Control d24 To enable zero speed control under vector control with speed sensor it is necessary to set the speed command frequency command at below the starting and stop frequencies If the starting and stop frequencies are 0 0 Hz however the zero speed control is enabled only when the speed command is 0 00 Hz d24 specifies the operation for the zero speed control at the startup of the inverter Data for d24 Zero speed control Descriptions G deyo Even setting the speed command at below the starting and stop frequencies and turning a run command ON does not enable the zero 0 Not allowed at startup speed control To enable the zero speed control set the speed command at above
40. Table 3 13 Segment Display for I O Signal Status in Hexadecimal Example LED No LED4 Bit 15 14 13 Input terminal RST XR XF Output terminal Binary 0 0 0 0 Hexa LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 decimal on I 1 I 1 I l E LILI No corresponding control circuit terminal exists XF XR and RST are assigned for communications control Refer to B Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control on the next page deyo QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOILV H3dO m Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control Under communications control input commands function code S06 sent via RS 485 or other optional communications can be displayed in two ways with ON OFF of each LED segment and in hexadecimal The content to be displayed is basically the same as that for the control I O signal terminal status display however XF XR and RST are added as inputs Note that under communications control the I O display is in normal logic using the original signals not inverted For details about input commands sent through the communications link refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual and the instruction manual of communication related options as well m Displaying control I O signal terminals on options The LED monitor can also show the signal status of the terminals on the optional digital i
41. to F31 F34 These function codes allow terminals FM1 and FM2 to output monitored data such as the output frequency and the Analog Output FM1 and FM2 Mode selection Voltage adjustment Function output current in an analog DC voltage or current The magnitude of such analog voltage or current is adjustable W Mode selection F29 and F32 F29 and F32 specify the property of the output to terminals FM1 and FM2 respectively You need to set the slide switches on the control printed circuit board control PCB Refer to Chapter 2 Mounting and Wiring of the Inverter Terminal FM1 Terminal FM2 Position of slide switch Position of slide switch Output form Data for F29 SW4 on the control PCB Data for F32 SW6 on the control PCB Voltage 0 to 10 VDC 0 vol 0 VO2 Current 4 to 20 mA DC 1 IO1 1 102 Note The output current is not isolated from analog input and does not have an isolated power supply Therefore if an electrical potential relationship between the inverter and peripheral equipment has been established e g by connecting an analog cascade connection of a current output device is not available Keep the connection wire length as short as possible W Voltage adjustment F30 and F34 F30 allows you to adjust the output voltage within the range of 0 to 30096 Terminals FM1 and FM2 output voltage W Function F31 and F35 10V a lt ov F30 300 F
42. within the range where the feedback signal does not oscillate Refining the system response waveforms is shown below 1 Suppressing overshoot Increase the data of J04 Integral time and decrease that of J05 Differential time r Controlled Response Natural Time 2 Quick stabilizing moderate overshoot allowable Decrease the data of J03 Gain and increase that of J05 Differential time r Controlled Response j Natural gt Time 3 Suppressing oscillation whose period is longer than the integral time specified by J04 Increase the data of J04 Integral time r Controlled Response Natural Time 4 Suppressing oscillation whose period is approximately the same as the time specified by J05 Differential time Decrease the data of J05 Differential time Decrease the data of J03 Gain if the oscillation cannot be suppressed even though the differential time is set at 0 sec r Controlled Response Natural Time 5 125 W Feedback filter J06 Data setting range 0 0 to 900 0 s J06 specifies the time constant of the filter for feedback signals under PID control This setting is used to stabilize the PID control loop Setting too long a time constant makes the system response slow To specify the filter for feedback signals finely under PID dancer control apply filter time constants for analog input C33 C38 and C43 J
43. z kika lt k k 5 78 Function code data Drive control Related f Functions assigned PG w o w Torque NO d Active ON Active OFF vif PG PG control g 48 1048 Motor 1 selected SWMI Y Y Y Y Y 49 1049 Motor 2 selected M2 XXe oS LY Y otor 2 selecte SW A42 b42 142 50 1050 Motor 3 selected SWM3 YIYJYJ Y Y 51 1051 Motor 4 selected SWM4 an ep NP HER d Y 52 1052 Running forward FRUN Y Y Y Y Y 53 1053 Running reverse RRUN Y Y Y Y Y 54 1054 In remote operation RMT y xev oe e o ee 56 1056 Motor overheat detected by thermistor THM Ye i Ye ys o Y H26 H27 57 1057 Brake signal BRKS Y Y Y Y N J68 to J72 58 1058 Frequency speed detected 3 FDT3 XS Y NY Y E32 E54 59 1059 Terminal C1 wire break CIOFF Y Y Y Y Y 70 1070 Speed valid DNZS N Y Y Y Y F25 F38 71 1071 Speed agreement DSAG NIYJYJ Y N d21 d22 72 1072 Frequency speed arrival signal 3 FAR3 Y Y Y Y N E30 76 1076 PG error detected PG ERR NIYJYJ Y N d21 to d23 82 1082 Positioning completion signal PSET N N INJ Y N J97 to J99 84 1084 Maintenance timer MNT a ard a d 98 1098 Light alarm L ALM Y Y YY Y H81 H82 99 1099 Alarm output for any alarm ALM Y Y Y Y Y 101 1101 Enable circuit failure detected DECF YYYY Y 102 1102 Enable input OFF EN OFF YY IY Y Y 105 1105 Braking tr
44. 22 kW or below 6 00 s T Note may not run the motor properly 30 kW or above 20 00 s T Feedback input Pulse count of the target motor d Encoder pulse encoder 0400 hex resolution 0400 hex 1024 P R a ot Feedback input Reduction ratio between the motor it Nee Pulse count factor 1 and the encoder i ag Feedback input Motor speed i Pulse count factor 2 Encoder speed x d17 d16 Note W Tuning procedure 1 Selection of tuning type When accessing the function code P02 take into account that changing the P02 data automatically updates the data of the function codes P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 Check the situation of the machinery and select Tuning with the motor stopped P04 1 or Tuning with the motor running P04 2 For the latter tuning adjust the acceleration and deceleration times F07 and F08 and specify the rotation direction that matches the actual rotation direction of the machinery X correction factor 1 and 2 P53 and P54 P04 f Select under the data Tuning type Motor parameters subjected to tuning Tuning following conditions T hil Primary resistance R1 P07 une while y 1 heriot Leakage reactance X ee TAR the motor Canhotroiate themotoi stops Rated slip frequency P12 stopped X correction factor 1 and 2 P53 and P54 Tuning the R1 and X No load current P06 with the motor stopped Can rotat
45. 4 5 5 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the rated output voltage as 220 V for 200 V class series and 440 V for 400 V class series 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 To use the inverter with the carrier frequency of 3 kHz or more at the surrounding temperature of 40 C or higher manage the load so that the current comes to be within the rated ones enclosed in parentheses in continuous running Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V i z s 2 2 a E S a 5 voltage unbalance x 67 IEC 61800 3 If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 6 Required when a DC reactor DCR is used 7 Average braking torque for the motor running alone It varies with the efficiency of the motor 8 A DC reactor DCR is optionally provided Note that inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW or above in all modes require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters Note A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 8 5 g deu SNOILVOIJIO3dS 8 2 2 Three phase 400 V class series HD High Duty mode inverters for heavy load 0 4 to 75 kW Item EENEH Nominal applied S 3 7 kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 4 0 5 5 7 5 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Output rating ca EO Rated voltage V Three phase 380 to
46. 7 7 4 Use the J and C keys to display the desired monitoring item then press the amp key The running status information for the selected item appears 5 Press the G9 key to return to the list of monitoring items Press the amp key again to return to the menu 3 8 Table 3 6 Drive Monitoring Display Items LED monitor Description TG Output frequency Hz Output frequency before slip compensation AG Output frequency Hz Output frequency after slip compensation 3 0c Output current A Output current 3 03 Output voltage V Output voltage o AF Calculated torque Calculated output torque of the motor in a o TUS Reference frequency Hz Frequency specified by a frequency command ie 3 05 Rotational direction N A Rowiional DECR On being outputted forward reverse stop O 5 Running status in 4 digit hexadecimal format m m Ul Running status N A Referto B Displaying running status 7 7 and running status 2 7 77 o on the next page d 120 9 Display value Output frequency Hz x e jn No of poles c S L Motor speed r min f f i7 If the value is 10000 or lager the x10 LED turns ON and the LED monitor z shows one tenth of the value Display value Output frequency Hz x Function code E50 Coefficient for Sj Speed indication 3 Ld A ais Load shaft speed rin If the value is 10000 or lager the x10 LED turns ON and the
47. 8 1008 Resetalarm RST YI Y vY Yv Y 9 1009 Enable external alarm trip THR Y 3p a Y 9 Active OFF 1009 Active ON N N mS N ae Y Y N Y 24 1024 Enable communications link via RS 485 or fieldbus option LE Y vY vYj Y Y Universal DI Y Y Enable auto search for idling motor Speed at starting STM Y Y Y N Y 30 1030 Force to stop STOP Y vY vYj Y Y 30 Active OFF 1030 Active ON 32 103 33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST Y Y PY o N 34 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD YY Y N 35 1035 Select local keypad operation LOC Y YY Y 36 1036 Select motor 3 M3 Y YJ Y Y Y 37 1037 Select motor 4 M4 Y vY vYi Y Y 39 Protect motor from dew condensation DWP Y vY vYi Y Y 40 Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 50 Hz ISW50 Y Y N N N 41 Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 60 Hz ISW60 Y Y N N N 47 1047 Servo lock command LOCK N N Nj Y N 48 Pulse train input available only on terminal X7 E07 PIN Y vY vYj Y Y 49 1049 Pulse train sign available on terminals except X7 E01 to E06 SIGN Y vY vYj Y Y 70 1070 Cancel constant peripheral speed control Hz LSC Y 3X 8 ee 0 N 71 1071 Hold the constant peripheral speed control frequency in the memory LSC HLD Y vY vYi Y N 72 1072 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 1 Y Y N N Y 73 1073 Count the run time
48. Check the input signal with Menu 74 I O Checking using the keypad 2 Check the power recovery sequence with an external circuit If necessary consider the use of a relay that can keep the run command ON In 3 wire operation the power to the control printed circuit board control PCB has been shut down once because of a long momentary power failure time or the Enable 3 wire operation signal HOLD has been turned OFF once gt Change the design or the setting so that a run command can be issued again within 2 seconds after the power has been restored 8 The motor abnormally heats up Possible Causes 1 Excessive torque boost specified What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether decreasing the torque boost F09 decreases the output current but does not stall the motor gt If no stall occurs decrease the torque boost F09 Q Continuous running in extremely slow speed Check the running speed of the inverter gt Change the speed setting or replace the motor with a motor exclusively designed for inverters 3 Overload Measure the inverter output current 2 Reduce the load For fans or pumps decrease the frequency limiter value F15 In winter the load tends to increase 9 The motor does not run as expected Possible Causes 1 Incorrect setting of function code data What to Check and Suggested Measures Check that function codes are correctly confi
49. Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU If installed according to the guidelines given below inverters marked with CE are considered as compliant with the Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC Compliance with European Standards Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems PDS Part 5 1 Safety requirements Electrical thermal and energy EN61800 5 1 2003 A WARNINGA Nominal applied motor Inverter type FRN0 4GI N2LI Fuse rating 10 IEC60269 1 FRN0 75G1 mL 15 IEC60269 1 FRNI 5GIB 2LI 20 IEC60269 1 FRN22GIB LI 30 IEC60269 1 FRN3 7GI N22 40 IEC60269 1 FRN5 5GIB2LI 125 IEC60269 4 FRN7 5GIB2LI 160 IEC60269 4 FRNIIGIB LI 160 IEC60269 4 FRNI5GIB 2LI 200 IEC60269 4 FRN18 5G1 20 250 IEC60269 4 Three phase 200 V FRN22G1 20 250 IEC60269 4 FRN30G1 20 350 IEC60269 4 FRN37G1 20 400 IEC60269 4 FRN45G1 20 450 IEC60269 4 FRN55G1 20 FRN75G1m 20 enclosure Disconnect Power supply RCD ELCB etc FRN90G1m 20 or MC Fuses 500 IEC60269 4 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter type is FRN4 0G1MI 4E Note A box W in these tables replaces S or E depending on the A box L1 in these tables replaces A or E depending on the shippi
50. DC reactor DCR Option Applicable safety UL508C C22 2No 14 EN61800 5 1 2003 EN954 1 Cat 3 standards IP20 UL open type 1P00 UL open type LD Low Duty mode inverters for light load Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 5 Frequency 5 to 5 i o z o o 3 ve R Item Specifications EweWmw eeu oa ors 35 z2 37 58 75 7 s 55 ml Wl Se 5 T5 L9 ee applied UN KW Output rating i CO es e s bee enn Rated voltage Three phase 200 to 240 V Three phase 200 to 230 V 9 with AVR function with AVR function 9 p 5 63 80 107 Overload capability Overload capability one i min Voltage frequency EE 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz EO 10 y M Allowable voltage frequency a Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 5 Frequency 5 to 5 Required S ua with DCR kVA 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 116 143 men E a E pcc pucr o Braking T Built in Built Bp 378 34s Braking time s Baty eye RED EE EMC filter Compliant with EMC Directives Emission and Immunity Category C3 2nd Env EN61800 3 2004 DO readior OCR e Option Applicable safety UL508C C22 2No 14 EN61800 5 1 2003 EN954 1 Cat 3 standards Enclosure IEC60529 mP20UL open type IP00 ULopentye Goaingmettod Fmwemg T Weight Mass g L z 79 s 4 ss ss so zs
51. E onbio Use oneusejw oneusey 5 27 A box W replaces S or E depending on the enclosure Note Table C Motor Parameters Continued Chap 5 FUNCTION CODES eol 09s I 6 I1 L60 ITO c9 vI ve 0 0 067 OOSIT OIL JeAoge 10 Q OIL OTOI 6c LTO LETI 9v 0 osse 0 0S0I OE9 6 60L010 0 9 6 I 1868 19 oTo veel LS 0 O OLT 0 06 09S 6679 91 0 09S 86 6108 08 810 SETI 1S0 0 0L7 OSES 00S 6 6S 010 00 Y69 0 LICL SEEI TOTI 601 6709 6cL 9 e68 Lt v8 ETO 0tI 870 0 0Lc 0 0LL Ost 6 66v 0 0SP SL 89 0 S TIv9 did 8e 6c0 LOSI c9 0 0700c 07019 00r 6 6rr 0 00 x 168 0 695 LL 70 Or 9l 8 0 OTEL 008S SSE 666E 91 0 SSE c98 0 Cse0 18 sv 0 89 91 v8 0 O OCT 0 0cc SIE 6 PSE OSTE Ss 68890 r tt LTI YSO 8U6I 9 I L t 6 0 cov 087 6 vI 0 087 os 190 6007 SLel CCCI 6601 09 LL 6 v8 CCO e vs0 88 81 6c 1 618 osit OST 6 6Lc 9 0 0ST p 19S 0 SSE 6 0 I 8 8II L801 98r 8709 OTL 1 98 6 SC 890 06 0c O9 I SIL OS9E Occ 66vc010 0cc yid vts 0 8 0c V9El LCI 8 601 OLY 0 09 ETL SSS 616 SET 99 0 c0O0Cc LS I SIL OSEE 00c 6617 0 007 Sv csvo 99ST 0 8r1 SOE 9 vII 69r 98S VIL 818 TCO os 99 0 L 6I 89 I S v9 O TLT 09I 6661 0 0 091 TY v6c0 LUE SvVI 9 LcT 6TIT 9 9r SLs 8 69 618 06 08 99 0 06 8I SL T OLS OVE CEL 66ST 03 O CET SE 8L 0 8 98I
52. Expression 3 Allowable average loss kWs 2 During constant speed operation ED Allowable average loss KWs a X Motor rated capacity kW Expression 4 W Resistance F52 F52 specifies the resistance of the braking resistor 5 65 F80 Switching between HD MD and LD drive modes F80 specifies whether to drive the inverter in the high duty HD medium duty MD or low duty LD mode To change the F80 data it is necessary to press the e keys or go F QO keys simultaneous keying Data for E Overload Maximum F80 Drive mode Application Continuous current rating level capability frequency HD High Duty Capable of driving a motor whose 0 mode Heavy load capacity is the same as the 300 He a 500 Hz default inverter s TUR Capable of driving a motor whose 1 d Ed Duty Light load capacity is one or two ranks higher 120 for 1 min 120 Hz oag than the inverter s Capable of driving a motor whose 2 ae a Medium load capacity is one rank higher than the 150 for 1 min 120 Hz ty inverter s In the MD LD mode the continuous current rating allows the inverter to drive a motor with one or two ranks higher capacity but the overload capability against the continuous current rating is lower than that of the HD mode For the rated current level see Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS The MD and LD mode inverters are subject to restrictions on the function code data setting r
53. For details see Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES and Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING Function Modification key points Speed control 1 If an excessive overshoot occurs for a speed command change increase the filter Speed command filter constant Speed control 1 If ripples are superimposed on the speed detection signal so that the speed control Speed detection filter gain cannot be increased increase the filter constant to obtain a larger gain Speed control 1 If hunting is caused in the motor speed control decrease the gain P Gain If the motor response is slow increase the gain Speed control 1 I Integral time If the motor response is slow decrease the integral time Z mn z zZ z 0 4 I m O 4 O A 4 1 13 Preparation for practical operation After verifying normal motor running with the inverter in a test run connect the motor with the machinery and perform wiring for practical operation 1 Configure the application related function codes that operate the machinery 2 Check interfacing with the peripheral circuits 1 Mock alarm Generate a mock alarm by pressing the 6c amp keys on the keypad for 5 seconds or more and check the alarm sequence The inverter should stop and issue an alarm output signal for any fault 2 Judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor When the multi function keypad is used it is necessary to set up the judgment reference level to be applie
54. If no STM is assigned the inverter interprets STM as being OFF by default W H09 d67 Starting mode auto search and terminal command STM Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting The combination of H09 d67 data and the STM status determines whether to perform the auto search as listed below Function code Drive control Factory default H09 V f control F42 0 to 2 0 Disable d67 Vector control with speed sensor F42 5 2 Enable Auto search for idling motor speed at starting Data for H09 d67 For restart after momentary power failure F14 3 to 5 0 Disable Disable Disable 1 Enable Enable Disable 2 Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable For normal startup When STM is ON auto search for idling motor speed at starting is enabled regardless of the H09 d67 setting Refer to E01 to E07 data 26 Auto search for idling motor speed Starting the inverter with a run command ON BX OFF auto reset etc with STM being ON searches for the idling motor speed for a maximum of 1 2 seconds to run the idling motor without stopping it After completion of the auto search the inverter accelerates the motor up to the reference frequency according to the frequency command and the preset acceleration time Reference frequency Motor speed Starting mode delay time 1 H49 In E coo ANNE SEEN NM RN presumed I I I I I i l Auto search 1 l I l I I
55. Ifthe sensor is a voltage output type use the voltage input terminal 12 of the inverter or switch over the terminal V2 to the voltage input terminal and use it LL For details refer to the descriptions of E61 through E63 5 122 G deyo S3dO9 NOILONNA Application example Process control for air conditioners fans and pumps The operating range for PID process control is internally controlled as 0 through 100 For the given feedback input determine the operating range to be controlled by means of gain adjustment Example When the output level of the external sensor is within the range of 1 to 5 V Use terminal 12 since the connection terminal is for voltage input Set the gain C32 for analog input adjustment at 200 in order to make the maximum value 5 V of the external sensor s output correspond to 100 Note that the input specification for terminal 12 is 0 to 10 V corresponding to 0 to 100 thus a gain factor of 200 10 V 5 V x 100 should be specified Note also that any bias setting does not apply to feedback control Feedback 100 Input at terminal 12 ov 5V 10 V Application examples Dancer control for winders Example 1 When the output level of the external sensor is 7 VDC Use terminal 12 since the voltage input is of bipolar When the external sensor s output is of bipolar the inverter controls the speed within the range of 100 To convert the outpu
56. Ks pxb Ks Coefficient for speed indication E50 p Number of motor poles a b Components of speed reduction ratio between motor shaft and take up roll shaft When the motor shaft rotates b times the take up roll shaft rotates a times r Radius of take up roll before winding initial value m G deyo Setting with analog inputs To specify a peripheral speed line speed using analog inputs set an analog input 0 to 100 based on the following equation pxbx 100 Analog input 540 7 xV T X r1 X aX fmax Where V Peripheral speed Line speed m min fmax Maximum frequency 1 F03 S3GdO9 NOILONNA W Adjustment Like usual speed controls it is necessary to adjust the speed command filter speed detection filter P gain and integral time in the speed control sequence that controls the peripheral speed at a constant level Function code Key points Speed control If an excessive overshoot occurs for a speed command change Speed command filter increase the filter constant If ripples are superimposed on the speed detection signal so that the speed control gain cannot be increased increase the filter constant to obtain a larger gain Speed control Speed detection filter Speed control P If hunting is caused in the motor speed control decrease the gain Gain If the motor response is slow increase the gain Speed control I Integral time If the motor response is s
57. Menu 1 Data Setting and Menu 7 Data Copying allowing no switching to any other menu Table 3 5 Keypad Display Mode Selection Function Code E52 Data for E52 Menus selectable Menu 0 Quick Setup Function code data editing mode factory default Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 7 Data Copying Menu 2 Data Checking Menu 7 Data Copying Function code data check mode Full menu mode Menus 0 through 7 Tip Press the key to enter Programming mode and display menus While cycling through the menus with the J key select the desired menu item with the key Once the entire menu has been cycled through the display returns to the first menu item 3 4 1 Setting up basic function codes quickly Menu 0 Quick Setup Menu 0 Quick Setup in Programming mode allows you to quickly display and set up a basic set of function codes specified in Chapter 5 Section 5 1 Function Code Tables To use Menu 0 Quick Setup you need to set function code E52 to 0 Function code data editing mode or 2 Full menu mode The predefined set of function codes that are subject to quick setup are held in the inverter Figure 3 2 shows the menu transition in Menu 0 Quick Setup and function code data changing procedure Programming mode M
58. Or auto tuning P04 is performed A Fuji VG motor requires no auto tuning just requires selecting a Fuji VG motor with function code P99 2 The capacity of the motor to be controlled should be two or more ranks lower than that of the inverter under the dynamic torque vector control it should be the same as the inverter under the vector control without with speed sensor Otherwise the inverter may not control the motor due to decrease of the current detection resolution Note The wiring distance between the inverter and motor should be 50 m or less If it is longer the inverter may not control the motor due to leakage current flowing through stray capacitance to the ground or between wires Especially small capacity inverters whose rated current is also small may be unable to control the motor correctly even when the wiring is less than 50 m In that case make the wiring length as short as possible or use a wire with small stray capacitance e g loosely bundled cable to minimize the stray capacitance 5 63 F43 F44 Current Limiter Mode selection Level H12 Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting Mode selection When the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by the current limiter F44 the inverter automatically manages its output frequency to prevent a stall and limit the output current The default setting is 160 145 and 130 for HD MD and LD mode inverters respectively Once the HD MD or LD
59. Overcurrent protection LiL LED monitor displays Protective function Motor overheat LED monitor displays TILI L NIT Overvoltage protection Lii LUE or CLIT Braking resistor overheat IL LILI LI 7 Heat sink overheat FE Motor overload ru LIL I U LI tou 7 Inverter internal overheat a 5 99 Inverter overload U II L IL LI W Number of reset times HO4 Data setting range 0 Disable 1 to 10 times H04 specifies the number of reset times for the inverter to automatically attempt to escape the tripped state ANWARNING If the auto reset function has been specified the inverter may automatically restart and run the motor stopped due to a trip fault depending on the cause of the tripping Design the machinery so that human body and peripheral equipment safety is ensured even when the auto resetting succeeds Otherwise an accident could occur W Reset interval H05 Data setting range 0 5 to 20 0 s H05 specifies the reset interval time between the time when the inverter enters the tripped state and the time when it issues the reset command to attempt to auto reset the state Refer to the timing scheme diagrams below Operation timing scheme In the figure below normal operation restarts in the 4 th retry Protective function Tripped state H05 H05 H05 H05 Reset command T smell l c Inverte
60. Switch to the 2nd 3rd or 4th motor the combination of M2 M3 and M4 switches the motor to any of the 2nd to 4th motors and also switches the function code group enabled to the one corresponding to the selected motor as listed in Table 5 5 Note that however the functions listed in Table 5 6 are unavailable when any of the 2nd to 4th motors are selected If A42 b42 or r42 is set to 1 Parameter Switch to particular A codes b codes or r codes the combination of M2 M3 and M4 switches the particular parameters marked with Y in the Object of parameter switching column in Table 5 5 For other parameters ones in the 1st motor column remain effective Table 5 5 Function Codes to be Switched Function code Object of Name Ist 2nd 3rd 4th Parameter motor motor motor motor switching Maximum frequency F03 A01 bOl 101 Base frequency F04 A02 b02 102 Rated voltage at base frequency F05 A03 b03 103 Maximum output voltage F06 A04 b04 r04 fe Torque boost F09 AOS b05 r05 B Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 2 Select motor characteristics FLO aO P BOR EROR Overload detection level F11 A07 b07 107 c Thermal time constant F12 A08 b08 r08 DC braking Braking starting frequency F20 A09 b09 r09 o Braking level F21 Alo b10 r10 x Braking time F22 All bll rll 2 Starting frequency
61. This section provides the procedure for jogging the motor 1 Making the inverter ready to jog with the steps below The LED monitor should display cad Switch the inverter to Running mode see page 3 2 Press the go 9 keys simultaneously The LED monitor displays the jogging frequency for approximately one second and then returns to xL again Tip Function code C20 specifies the jogging frequency H54 and H55 specify the acceleration and deceleration times respectively These three function codes are exclusive to jogging operation Using the input terminal command Ready for jogging JOG switches between the normal operation state and ready to jog state Switching between the normal operation state and ready to jog state with the 6 keys is possible only when the inverter is stopped 2 Jogging the motor Hold down the fuy key during which the motor continues jogging To decelerate to stop the motor release the key 3 Exiting the ready to jog state and returning to the normal operation state Press the 69 A keys simultaneously 4 2 2 Remote and local modes The inverter is available in either remote or local mode In the remote mode that applies to ordinary operation the inverter is driven under the control of the data settings stored in the inverter whereas in the local mode that applies to maintenance operation it is separated from the control system and is driven manually under the control of the keypad
62. Torque polarity detected B D Yos qox Y 5 1005 Inverter output limiting IOL YONI Y Y Y 6 1006 Auto restarting after momentary power failure IPF Y vY vYi v Y 7 1007 Motor overload early warning OL Y vY vi v Y 8 1008 Keypad operation enabled KP YX Y Y Y 10 1010 Inverter ready to run RDY Y vY vi v Y 11 Switch motor drive source between Peli Ies Ie Pa iem 9 commercial power and inverter output For MC on commercial line SW88 Y Y N N N ixi 12 Switch motor drive source between o o commercial power and inverter output For secondary side SW52 2 Y Y N N N T 13 Switch motor drive source between M a EE S commercia power and inverter output O For primary side SW52 1 Y Y N N N 4 15 1015 Select AX terminal function ln EA OA TNT Da o For MC on primary side AX YY Y Y Z 22 1022 Inverter output limiting with delay IOL2 Y vY vYi v Y O 25 1025 Cooling fan in operation FAN Y Y vi v Y O 26 1026 Auto resetting TRY Y Y Y Y 28 1028 Heat sink overheat early warning OH Y vY vi v Y o 30 1030 Lifetime alarm LIFE Y vY vi v Y 31 1031 Frequency speed detected 2 FDT2 Y vY vYi v Y 33 1033 Reference loss detected REF OFF Y vY vi v Y 35 1035 Inverter output on RUN2 Y vY vi v Y 36 1036 Overload prevention control OL J IY Y Y Y N 37 1037 Current detected D ly Ty yy y iv 38 1038 Current detected 2 ID
63. U codes y codes C codes Control Functions of Frequency Drive control S 2 amp Default Refer Code Name Data setting range g S 8 setting to ge g Vit PG w o w Torque page 5 a V f PG PG control C01 Jump Frequency 1 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Y Y 0 0 Y Y v v N 5 92 C02 2 Yv vioolviv v v N C03 3 Y viool viv v v N C04 Hysteresis width 0 0 to 30 0 Hz y ly 30 lylylyly fn C05 Multi frequency 1 0 00 to 500 00 Hz Y Y 000 YY Y Y N C06 2 v v oolviv v v N C07 3 vY v oolviv v v N C08 4 v vil oolviv v v N C09 5 y y oo lyly yfy on C10 6 v v oo v v v v N ES 7 v v oolv iv v v N C12 8 vYv v oolviv v v N C13 9 v vl oolvliv v v N C14 10 v v oolviv v v N C15 11 v v oo v v v v N C16 12 v v oolvliv v v N C17 13 v v oo v v v v N C18 14 v v oolviv v v N C19 15 v v oolviv v v N C20 Jogging Frequency 0 00 to 500 00 Hz Y Y 000 Y Y Y Y N 5 93 C30 Frequency Command 2 0 Enable 3 keys on the keypad N Y 2 YilY Y v N 5 29 1 Voltage input to terminal 12 10 to 10 VDC 5 94 2 Current input to terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC 3 Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 5 Voltage input to terminal V2 0 to 10 VDC 7 Terminal command UP DOWN control 8 Enable 3
64. Universal DO U DO Y i Y Y 28 1028 Heat sink overheat early warning OH Y Y Ys jie Y 30 1030 Lifetime alarm LIFE Ye oes px Y 31 1031 Frequency speed detected 2 FDT2 Y vY vY v Y 33 1033 Reference loss detected REF OFF Y 8S Y Y 35 1035 Inverter output on RUN2 Yo EYY Y 36 1036 Overload prevention control UP fy yyy py oN 37 1037 Currentdetected D v v v v v 38 1038 Current detected 2 ID2 Y vY vY v Y 39 1039 Current detected 3 ID3 Y ONE Y Y 41 1041 Low current detected IDL YYY Y 42 1042 PiDalam 000 PID ALM Y Y Y Y N 43 1043 Under PID control PID CTD Y Y Y Y N 44 1044 Motorstoppedduetosow FL flowrate under PID control PID STP Y vY vY v N be 1045 Low output torque detected U T vY v v v v 46 1046 Torque detected 1 TD1 Pali a d Y 47 1047 Torque detected 2 TD2 XC ONE oY Y 48 1048 Motor 1 selected SWM1 Y Y YIY Y 49 1049 Motor 2 selected SWM2 Y vY vY v Y 50 1050 Motor 3 selected SWM3 Ye 0X1 Y X Y 51 1051 Motor 4 selected SWM4 Y YS Y Vn i Y 52 1052 Running forward FRUN eel ONE YY Y 53 1053 Running reverse RRUN Youve PY X Y 54 1054 In remote operation RMT Y Y YIY Y 56 1056 Motor overheat detected by thermistor THM YE PY Nea Y Y 57 1057 Brake signal Y v 58 1058 Frequency speed detected3 7 FDT3 Y Y Y v Y
65. W Removing and mounting a keypad To remove the keypad pull it toward you while holding down the hook pointed by the arrow in Figure 2 22 When mounting it put the keypad back into place in the reverse order of removal Figure 2 22 Removing a Keypad 2 25 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD in the case of remote keypad 3 1 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad As shown at the right the keypad consists of a Jdegment four digit LED monitor six keys and five LED is LED monitor indicators NN The keypad allows you to run and stop the motor LED indicators UP key monitor the running status specify the function code e RUN LED data and monitor I O signal states maintenance gi z information and alarm information Program BUNTE o Reset key ey is Function STOP key Data key USB port DOWN key Note When using a multi function keypad instead of a remote keypad read the Multi function Keypad Instruction Manual Table 3 1 Overview of Keypad Functions LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators Functions Four digit 7 segment LED monitor which displays the followings according to the operation modes W In Running mode Running status information e g output frequency current LED and voltage Monitor When a light alarm occurs is displayed W In Programming mode Menus function codes and their data E In Alarm mode Alarm code which identifies the alarm fa
66. change with keypad is not entered though it has been assigned to a digital input terminal Check the data of function codes E01 through E07 E98 and E99 and the input signal status with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Input a WE KP command through a digital input terminal 4 The amp key was not pressed Check whether you have pressed the amp key after changing the function code data gt Press the amp key after changing the function code data gt Check that 5 27 is displayed on the LED monitor 5 The data of function codes F02 E01 through E07 E98 and E99 cannot be changed Either one of the FWD and REV terminal commands is turned ON gt Turn OFF both FWD and REV 6 The function code s to be changed does not appear If Menu 0 Quick Setup 4 7 is selected only the particular function codes appear gt With Menu 0 Quick Setup ZF ric being selected press the Q key to call up the desired menu from __ to 4 __ Then select the desired function code and change its data For details refer to Chapter 3 Table 3 4 Menus Available in Programming Mode 6 4 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor 1 na Instantaneous overcurrent Problem The inverter momentary output current exceeded the overcurrent level Li Overcurrent occurred during acceleration iii Overcurrent occurred during deceleration Li 3 Overcurrent occurred during running at a co
67. deviation Table 5 3 Display of Light Alarm Factor Example Light alarm factors RS 485 communications error COM port 2 RS 485 communications error COM port 1 Option communications error Overload of motor 1 and Heat sink overheat are selected by H81 LED No Bit Code Ecrit E G 5 5 J oon Litt Binary 0 Hexa decimal See Table 5 4 Hexa LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 decimal on the LED monitor B Hexadecimal expression A 4 bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal format 1 hexadecimal digit The table below shows the correspondence between the two notations The hexadecimals are shown as they appear on the LED monitor Table 5 4 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion When the H26 data is set to 1 PTC The inverter immediately trips with 4 4 displayed if the PTC Note thermistor is activated the inverter stops without displaying 4 blinking the KEYPAD CONTROL LED or outputting L ALM signal regardless of the assignment of bit 11 PTC thermistor activated by H82 Light Alarm Selection 2 W Light alarm L ALM E20 to E24 and E27 data 98 This output signal comes ON when a light alarm occurs 5 113 H84 H85 Pre excitation Initial level Time A motor generates torque with magnetic flux and torque current Lag elements of the rising edge of magnetic flux cause
68. initialize motor 1 with the function code H03 2 It automatically updates the data of the function codes F04 F05 PO1 P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 Note When accessing the function code P02 take into account that changing the P02 data automatically updates the data of the function codes F04 F05 P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 Z ec z z 0 4 X m O 4 O A 4 1 10 Function code basic settings lt 5 gt Driving a Fuji general purpose motor under V f control with speed sensor F42 3 or dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor F42 4 requires configuring the following basic function codes Refer to Figure 4 1 on page 4 1 Select Fuji standard 8 or 6 series motors with the function code P99 Configure the function codes listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design values For the motor ratings check the ratings printed on the motor s nameplate For your machinery design values ask system designers about them For details on how to modify the function code data see Chapter 3 Section 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting Function code Base frequency 1 Rated voltage at base frequency 1 Function code data Motor ratings printed on the nameplate of the motor Factory default FRN GIB2A 4A 200 V class series 60 0 Hz 400 V class series 50 0 Hz FRN GIM 4E 200 V class se
69. input signal X3 4004 5004 Terminal X4 input signal X4 4005 5005 Terminal X5 input signal X5 4006 5006 Terminal X6 input signal X6 4007 5007 Terminal X7 input signal X7 4010 5010 Terminal FWD input signal FWD 4011 5011 Terminal REV input signal REV 6000 7000 Final run command FL_RUN ON when frequency command 0 and a run command is given 6001 7001 Final FWD run command FL_FWD ON when frequency command 0 and a run forward command is given 6002 7002 Final REV run command FL_REV ON when frequency command 0 and a run reverse command is given 6003 7003 During acceleration DACC ON during acceleration 6004 7004 During deceleration DDEC ON during deceleration 6005 7005 Under anti regenerative control REGA ON under anti regenerative control 6006 7006 Within dancer reference position DR_REF ON when the dancer roll position is within the reference range 6007 7007 Alarm factor presence ALM_ACT ON when there is no alarm factor 5 141 W Logic circuit U03 etc Any of the following functions is selectable as a logic circuit with general purpose timer Function Description 0 No function assigned Output is always OFF 1 Through output General purpose timer Only a general purpose timer No logic circuit exists 2
70. kg 220 LD 280 SB DCR4 280C 350410 310 16154 133 210 80 542 190 36 280 M16 MD 315 DCR4 315C 14644 18 7341 40 315 HD 280 LD 400410 345 200 225 355 315 MD DCR4 355C 15644 128 7841 47 355 HD Figure MIO 315 LD B 400 V 400 355 MD DCR4 400C 455 10 14544 17 213 72 541 52 400 HD 385 355 LD 245 015 450 ME DCR4 450C 440 10 15044 122 215 7522 60 400 iD 500 HD DCR4 500C 445 10 390 16544 137 220 82 542 70 500 iD 630 DCR4 630C Figure 285410 145 20344 170 195 10442 75 630 HD C 480 M12 710 LD DCR4 710C 340410 160 29544 255 225 10742 95 Note 1 A box B in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination Note 2 Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW or above in all modes require a DCR to be connected Figure A Figure B Unit mm e f 2 2x Fel Ys ax Tr E 4 Terminal A US et edo Mounting i E Mounting E hole hole 7 i D3 MAX D2 2x4x g le l UES LAL Terminal i i hole ay B mu ae iP od i j i Di Wi t i Vis D as _ Figure C 4x Mounting hole R gt pa Lo gig OF 3 9 D3 MAX D2 2 x 4 x Terminal hole 8 12 Chapter 9 CONFORMITY WITH STANDARDS 9 1 Compliance with UL Standards and Canadian Standards cUL certification 9 1 1 General Original
71. making it possible to apply the inverter to air conditioners The terminal command IVS can also switch operation between normal and inverse QJ For details about the switching of normal inverse operation refer to the description of Switch normal inverse operation IVS E01 to E07 data 21 5 120 G deyo S3GdO9 NOILONNA J02 PID Control Remote command SV J02 sets the source that specifies the command value SV under PID control Data for J02 Function Keypad Specify the PID command by using the keys on the keypad PID command 1 Analog input Terminals 12 C1 and V2 Voltage input to the terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC 100 PID command 10 VDC Current input to the terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC 100 PID command 20 mA DC Voltage input to the terminal V2 0 to 10 VDC 100 PID command 10 VDC Terminal command UP DOWN Using the UP or DOWN command in conjunction with PID display coefficients specified by E40 and E41 with which the command value is transformed to virtual physical value etc you can specify 0 to 100 of the PID command 100 for PID dancer control Command via communications link Use function code 13 that specifies the communications linked PID command The transmission data of 20000 decimal is equal to 100 maximum frequency of the PID command 1 PID command with the keys on the keypad J02 0 factory default Using the k
72. ted voltage A009 Boe es Torque Output Torque Output boost lo ae boost j frequency Base Hz Base HZ frequency 1 frequency 1 F04 F04 Variable torque V f pattern F37 0 Linear V f pattern F37 1 5 55 CT When the variable torque V f pattern is selected F37 0 or 3 the output voltage may be low at a low frequency zone resulting in insufficient output torque depending on the characteristics of the motor and load In such a case it is recommended to increase the output voltage at the low frequency zone using the non linear V f pattern Recommended value H50 1 10 of the base frequency H51 1 10 of the voltage at base frequency Output voltage V Variable torque output using non linear V f pattern Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 Variable torque output Non linear not using non linear V f pattern V f pattern 1 Voltage H51 d Output frequency 0 Non linear V f pattern 1 Base Hz Frequency frequency 1 H50 F04 W Torque boost Data setting range 0 0 to 20 0 100 Rated voltage at base frequency Manual torque boost F09 In torque boost using F09 constant voltage is added to the basic V f pattern regardless of the load To secure a sufficient starting torque manually adjust the output voltage to optimally match the motor and its load by using F09 Specify an appropriate level that guarantees smooth start up and yet does not cause over excitation at no or light load To
73. the conditions listed below change the jumper to U2 For the switching instructions see Figures 2 6 and 2 7 a FRN75GIBI 4LI to FRNIIOGIBI ALI CN UX red CN UX red Connector configuration 20 LI Liz 398 to 440 V 50 Hz 430 to 480 V 60 Hz 380 to 398 V 50 Hz Factory default 380 to 430 V 60 Hz Power source voltage b FRN132G1m 40 to FRN630G1 m 40 CN UX red CN UX red Connector configuration D D amp e RN 398 to 440 V 50 Hz 430 to 480 V 60 Hz 380 to 398 V 50 Hz ONCE Re eae Factory default 380 to 430 V 60 Hz Note A box W in the above figure replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box L1 in the above figure replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination Note The allowable power input voltage fluctuation is within 15 to 10 of the power source voltage W Fan power supply switching connectors CN R and CN W for 200 V class series with 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above The standard FRENIC MEGA series accepts DC linked power input in combination with a PWM converter The 200 V class series with 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above however contain AC driven components such as AC fans To supply AC power to those components exchange the CN R and CN W connectors as shown below and connect the AC power line to the auxiliary fan power input terminals R1 T1 For the switching instructions see Figures 2 6 a
74. to P56 and H46 Note E Tuning procedure 1 Selection of tuning type Check the situation of the machinery and select Tuning with the motor stopped P04 1 or Tuning with the motor running P04 2 For the latter tuning adjust the acceleration and deceleration times F07 and F08 and specify the rotation direction that matches the actual rotation direction of the machinery P04 Select under the diia Tuning type Motor parameters subjected to tuning Tuning following conditions T hil Primary resistance R1 P07 une while 1 the totor Leakage reactance X P08 Tuning with the motor Cumito Totale hamo OE stops Rated slip frequency P12 Stopped X correction factor 1 and 2 P53 and P54 Tuning the R1 and X No load current P06 with the motor stopped Can rotate the motor ____ Primary resistance R1 P07 Tuning the no load current Provided that it is safe Meum Leakage reactance X P08 and magnetic saturation Note that little load e motor 1S Rated slip frequency P12 factor with the motor hould be applied 2 rotating shou pp under V f Magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 running at 50 of the base during tuning Tuning control Magnetic saturation extension factors frequency with load applied a to c P16 to P23 Tuning the rated slip decreases the tuning X correction factor 1 and 2 P53 and P54 frequency with the motor accuracy stopped The
75. when the data is 2 so 2 appears instead of 2 Medium D However the function code data can be configured normally The MD LD mode inverter is subject to restrictions on the function code data setting range and internal processing as listed below Function HD mode MD mode LD mode Remarks codes DC braking Setting range FT Braking level 0 to 100 pene Tange O 10 804 Setting range Setting range 0 75 to 16 kHz In the MD LD mode a value out 0 75 to 16 kHz 5 5 to 18 5 kW ofthe range if specified Motor sound 0 4 to 55 kW Setting range 0 75 to 10 kHz automatically changes to the F26 Carrier 0 75 to 10 kHz 0 75 to 2 kHz 22 to 55 kW maximum value allowable in the frequency 75 to 400kW 90t0 400 KW 10 75 to 6 kHz LD mode 0 75 to 6 kHz 75 to 500 kW 500 and 630 kW 0 75 to 4 kHz 630 kW Switching the drive mode Current limiter between HD MD and LD with F44 Level Initial value 160 Initial value 145 Initial value 130 function code F80 automatically initializes the F44 data to the value specified at left In the MD LD mode if the Setting range A g rang maximum frequency exceeds Maximum 25 to 500 Hz Setting range 25 to 500 Hz pos frequency Upper limit Upper limit 120 Hz oe e peus LM pp pp frequency is internally limited to 500 Hz 120 Hz Current Based on the rated Based on the rated Based on the rated indication and current level for current level for
76. 0 000 to 5 000 s Y Y 0000 Y Y Y Y Y d62 Pulse count factor 1 1 to 9999 N Y 1 YY Y Y Y d63 Pulse count factor 2 1 to 9999 N Y 1 Y Y Ys Xe Y d67 Starting Mode Auto search 0 Disable N Y 2 N N Y N Y 5 101 1 Enable At restart after momentary power failure 2 Enable At restart after momentary power failure and at normal start d68 Reserved 9 0 0 to 10 0 Hz N Y 40 15 139 d69 Reserved 9 30 0 to 100 0 Hz Y Y 30 0 d70 Speed Control Limiter 0 00 to 100 0096 Y Y 100 00 N Y N N N d99 Reserved 9 0to3 Y Y 0 9 These function codes are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 12 The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity 5 for inverters with a capacity of 3 7 kW 4 0 kW for the EU or below 10 for those with 5 5 kW to 22 kW 20 for those with 30 KW or above U codes Application Functions 3 2 E Drive control 22 amp Default Refer Code Name Data setting range ge 8 setting to 2 g Vit PG w o w Torque page 5 a Vif PG PG control U00 Customizable Logic Mode selection 0 Disable N Y 0 Y vY vi v Y 5 139 1 Enable Customizable logic operation U01 Customizable Logic Input 1 Inverter running Y vY vi v Y U02 Step 1 Input 2 YIY Y Y N 2 Frequency speed detected lYivYlIviviv 3 Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped Y vY vi v Y 4 1004
77. 0 to 3 N Y 0 Y vY vi v N bit 0 PID output polarity 0 Plus add 1 Minus subtract bit 1 Select compensation factor for PID output 0 Ratio relative to the main setting 1 Speed command relative to maximum frequency 7 The motor parameters are automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping des ination See Table C 9 These function codes are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes G deyo S3QO02 NOILONNA F codes E codes C codes P codes H codes A codes b codes r codes J codes d codes U codes y codes 5 o i 2 petautt Drive control Refer Code Name Data setting range gE 8 setting to 5E S Vit PG w o w Torque page amp Aa Vit PG PG control O J68 Brake Signal Brake OFF current 0 to 300 Y Y 100 Y Y Y Y N 5 129 J69 Brake OFF frequency speed 0 0 to 25 0 Hz Y Y 1 0 Y Y N N N J70 Brake OFF timer 0 0 to 5 0 s Y Y 1 0 Y vY vi v N J71 Brake ON frequency speed 0 0 to 25 0 Hz Y Y 1 0 Y Y N N N J72 Brake ON timer 0 0 to 5 0 s Y Y 1 0 Y lvY vi v N J95 Brake OFF torque 0 to 300 Y Y 100 N N
78. 000 8cCO COLO 8 ISI TOEI LHII vsv V 6s 6 89 18 L 68 8cCt 060 veel ETT IOET L60L t 66 67 01 00 cc 0c OTTO TULS SLYI 6Lcl Vell LS8v 66S LOL 0 8 L 06 pee L8 0 ILEI cvc TIGL 96 09 S 8I 66 17 91 09 81 ISTO I 9r SLE CIT 0 60T Sor L 09 VL S ES 06 TEE ell pSEL 697 8I 0 0s SI 6r 81 091 00 ST el ECTO 96 6LvI TOEI YII OLY 0 8S 6 69 t8 l6 COE LOL 6v cl ele CO9l vCSt I 66 v1 0 00 IT TI 600 9TET C6VI v8cl Lt 9 sy Uoc TL9 0 08 L L8 0 v LST SVC L 9r T Iv9c SL 66 01 010 OT 780 0 86 91 9 SeT Teel evil SIP LU 6v9 T6L 9 88 SLY orl STI LEV 80 01 OS OT Ss 6r Lor0es 80 900 Cr vst TEEI 9 SII T6 S v I9 69L 0 98 vos 61 ce 6 08v 0L LIEI Lt 6v 010L 90 IS00 6L 9 90ST S Eel LUSIH 8 6t TOS L T9 OL ss 16S 08 I 606 LES Sv Y 6 8 TT 69 010cc T90 0 E9 orl 1971 YII cov 18s TIL 8 78 1 S s 00 C 676 ers 9L T 99 S I 617 0ST 00 TET v8vI C6cI Vcl Iv 8 Is 9 C9 L LL 88 Ov EET v6 8 OTL Irc 6ct SL 6v lo L0 J Lc0O ECI vVI S 9cI TZI ser TSS 079 I8 L 88 886 Orc veil LVS8 CST orc v0 vL 0 040 vu ETO O c90 v8vI 6cI OTIT tr Sys 6799 618 L 68 09 71 EET 9901 69 0T L60 STI TO 6 0 070 vc00O I 0 9 6cI LS8II 8 801 L0s 9 9 VL 198 t6 00 vI LLI OSOL vL OI 090 c9 0 ro 610 0T 0 Lc0O 6rO 8 8II SCI 901 00S STO OSL SL8 8 t6 00 vI LET IL6 Or TI LEO 0v 0 900 60 0 01 T0 0 9VH LSd SSd Eld CCd 6ld 8Id Lid 9Id Id Tid 80d L0d 90d 0d zs C0d oum kerap se
79. 1 Holding time 0 0 to 60 0 Hz 0 5 0 00 to 10 00 s 0 00 F25 Stop Frequency 0 0 to 60 0 Hz lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 0 2 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt z z z ziz 5 51 The shaded function codes 9 are applicable to the quick setup 1 The factory default differs depending upon the shipping destination See Table A 2 6 00 s for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below 20 00 s for those with 30 KW or above 3 The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity See Table B 4 The motor rated current is automatically set See Table C function code P03 5 5 0 min for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below 10 0 min for those with 30 kW or above E Lo o Drive control EX Refer n S amp Default Code Name Data setting range gclos setting to 5 gn 8 Vit PG w o w Torque page 5 Vif PG PG control Motor Sound Carrier frequency 0 75 to 16 kHz HD mode inverters with 55 kW or below Y Y 2 Y vY vYi v Y 5 53 and LD mode ones with 18 5 kW or below Asia 0 75 to 10 kHz HD mode inverters with 75 to 400 kW and 15 LD mode ones with 22 to 55 kW EU 0 75 to6 kHz HD mode inverters with 500 and 630 kW and LD mode ones with 75 to 500 kW 0 75 to4 kHz LD mode inverters with 630 kW 0 75 to2 kHz MD mode inverters with 90
80. 1 Protective Functions Light alarm factor Last Shows the factor of the last light alarm as an alarm code For details refer to Chapter 6 Section 6 1 Protective Functions Light alarm factor 2nd last Shows the factor of the 2nd last light alarm as an alarm code For details refer to Chapter 6 Section 6 1 Protective Functions Light alarm factor 3rd last Shows the factor of the 3rd last light alarm as an alarm code For details refer to Chapter 6 Section 6 1 Protective Functions Option error factor 1 Shows the factor of the error that has occurred in the option being connected to the A port Number of option errors 2 Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in the option being connected to the B port Once the count exceeds 9999 the counter will be reset to 0 Option error factor 2 Shows the factor of the error that has occurred in the option being connected to the B port Number of option errors 3 Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in the option being connected to the C port Once the count exceeds 9999 the counter will be reset to 0 Option error factor 3 Shows the factor of the error that has occurred in the option being connected to the C port 3 17 deyo QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOI LV H3dO 3 4 7 Reading alarm information Menu 6 Alarm Information Menu 6 Alarm Information shows the causes of the pa
81. 24 VDC Item Photocoupler EN Operating voltage ON level SOURCE OFF level Operating current at ON Input voltage is at 24 V Allowable leakage current at OFF CM PLC signal 1 Connects to PLC output signal power supply power Rated voltage 24 VDC Allowable range 22 to 27 VDC Maximum 100 mA DC 2 This terminal also supplies a power to the load connected to the transistor output terminals Refer to Transistor output described later in this table for more Digital input Two common terminals for digital input signals common These terminals are electrically isolated from the terminals 11 s and CMY W Using a relay contact to turn X1 to X7 FWD or REV ON or OFF Figure 2 14 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a relay contact to turn control signal input X1 to X7 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it has been turned to SOURCE Note To configure this kind of circuit use a highly reliable relay Recommended product Fuji control relay Model HH54PW Control circuit Control circuit 24 VDC 1 1 SOURCE t SOURCE X1 to X7 X1 to X7 FWD REV Photocoup FWD REV Photocoupler C
82. 25 0 Hz confrol Brake ON timer 0 0 to 5 0 s Available only under vector 0 Detected speed control Speed selection 1 Reference speed When vector control without Speed selection under vector control speed sensor is selected set to 1 Reference speed Chote The brake signal control is only applicable to the 1st motor If the motor switching function selects any of ote the 2nd to 4th motor the brake signal remains ON Ifthe inverter is shut down due to an occurrence of alarm state or by the terminal command BX Coast to a stop the brake signal is turned ON immediately Operation time chart under V f control gaat ia 5 J69 Brake OFF NC J71 Brake ON frequency speed F23 Starting frequency 1 xx r frequency speed i F25 Stop frequency Output frequency lt gt p gt i F24 Starting frequency1 F39 Stop frequency Holding time ii Holding time o 1 J68 Brake OFF current Output current orn 1 Run command H E 9N cise on a J70 Brake OFF timer J72 Brake ON timer 5 130 Operation time chart under vector control without speed sensor F23 Starting frequency 1 Speed command I i i L F25 Stop frequency F24 Starting frequency 1 Holding time F39 Stop frequency Holding time J68 Brake OFF current Output current J95 Brake OFF torque Torque command OFFi
83. 480 V with AVR function eser 35 26 0 5s o0 es es 25 T 5 T L7 T9 TE 9 Overload capability 150 1 min 200 3 0 s Voltage frequency 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz Allowable voltage frequency a Required C d with DCR kVA 1 2 2 1 3 2 5 2 74 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 Torque e 150 100 10 to 15 p Braking transistor Buln TT Built in braking resistor 5s Braking time s Duty cyce ED 5 3 5 3 f 2 3 Pep Output ratings Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 6 Frequency 5 to 5 ut power EMC filter Compliant with EMC Directives Emission and Immunity Category C3 2nd Env EN61800 3 2004 DC reactor DCR Applicable safety standards UL508C C22 2No 14 EN61800 5 1 2003 EN954 1 Cat 3 Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL open type IP00 UL open type Weight Masse 35 24 27 29 32 68 eo 62 o5 es v2 25 77 lola 90 to 630 kW Item Specifications Type ERN STEA 9o 110 152 160 200 220 756 ss sse 40 9 59 Nominal applied moar kw Output rating See elete Rated voltage V 4 Three phase 380 to 480 V with AVR function aereis s zo 25 5s 5 os 85 8s 59 79 99 55 1 Overload capability 150 1 min 200 3 05 O OS 1 150 1 min 200 3 05 O OS 200 3 0 s 380 to 440 V 50 Hz Voltage frequency 380 to 480 V 60 Hz Allowable voltage frequency Required Eu with
84. 59 1059 Terminal C1 wire break C1OFF Y Y vY v Y 70 1070 Speed valid DNZS N Y vYv v v 74 1071 Speed agreement DSAG N Y Y Y N 72 1072 Frequency speed amivalsigna 3 FARO v vY vY Y N 76 1076 PG error detected PG ERR N Y Y Y N 82 1082 Positioning completion signal PSED NIN N Y N 84 1084 Maintenancetimer WNT vYv v vivLlvY 98 1098 Light alarm L ALM Y NC UY p Y 99 1099 Alarm output for any alarm ALM ej Ye Ne A Y 101 1101 Enable circuit failure detected DECF Ye X YE POY Y 102 1102 Enable input OFF EN OFF Y vY vY v Y 105 1105 Braking transistor broken DBAL Y vY vY v Y 111 1111 Customizable logic output signal 1 CLO1 X Y OX X Y 112 1112 Customizable logic output signal 2 CLO2 Y Yo Y px Y 113 1113 Customizable logic output signal 3 CLO3 YS NE YE Dey Y 114 1114 Customizable logic output signal 4 CLO4 Y Y vY v Y 115 1115 Customizable logic output signal 5 CLO5 Y Y YIY Y Setting the value in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic output to a terminal G deyo S3dO9 NOILONNA F codes C codes P codes H codes A codes b codes r codes J codes d codes U codes y codes
85. 70 of the total heat total loss generated into air is situated outside the equipment or the panel The external cooling therefore significantly reduces heat radiating inside the equipment or panel To employ external cooling for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below use the external cooling attachment option for those with a capacity of 30 kW or above simply change the positions of the mounting bases ANCAUTION Prevent lint paper fibers sawdust dust metallic chips or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink Otherwise a fire or accident could occur 2 1 Note 2 Do not install the inverter in an environment where it may be exposed to lint cotton waste or moist dust or dirt which will clog the heat sink of the inverter If the inverter is to be used in such an environment install it in a dustproof panel of your system Note 3 If you use the inverter in an altitude above 1000 m you should apply an output current derating factor as listed in Table 2 2 Figure 2 1 Mounting Direction and Required Clearances External heat m d internal S radiation 70 heat T i pem Cooling radiation 30 Ss fans Internal temperature Poet of the panel Win Max 50 c Internal External airintake air intake Figure 2 2 External Cooling To utilize external cooling for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above change
86. 86 0 L I9 9 vL Ls8 16 s 08 I L6 01 8v9 eve 09 cc 69 o107cc 73 1900 SST 6t rvI V9cI YII cor 1s VIL 88 Uc6 S8 S 00 C ICI S99 IST Ore SI 61709 T lt c 00 LTT V8rl C6cI Vct TIt SIs 979 LLL 88 OrL EET 9L 0I L9 8 SUI 081 SL 6r 109160 E 6c00 890 vvT S 9cT TZI Str TSS 0 19 E IS L88 886 Orc 99 T OTOT 8 0 SUI vo rL 009107F0 A xU 9c00 PEO vr8VI 671 TH cer SVs 699 6 18 L 68 09 CI tt TO TI SETE ESO S9 0 co 6c 0010c0 S vc0O LTO 9 6cI LSI 8 801 LoS 9 69 vel 1 98 t6 00 VI LLI LYTI 96 TI LTO sco 10 610 91 010 E Lc0O Oro S 8IHI Sci 90I 070 STO OSL S8 8 t6 00 vT LLI SL TI 6L El 070 TTO 90 0 60 0 01 10 0 9vH LSd ocd Eld Cd Icd 0cd 6Id 8Id Lid 9Id Id cId 80d LOd 90d 0d a 70d hd v j j 2 cqountopp 22m PME 2 204 a 20a e 2000 CN MN NECNON CN e m b wy fuc Areas omy Je nonred 1opun MORUSO TOISTI S TOIU uonernyes voeinyes uoneunges uonemgyes uonemyes T08 dijs X le na EE pordde Aytoedeo Q epou ZUMIS 104 quaumo UODtimes unes uonemmjes onouseyy onoudeyy onsuSej onoudepy onouSej SSO UOJ parry peo oN PRA PUIIION IQON E onbzo AUZEN onouseyy Nue 5 28 A box W replaces S or E depending on the enclosure Note 5 2 Details of Function Codes This section provides the details of the function codes The descriptions are in principle arranged in the order of function code groups and in numerical order However highly relevant function codes are coll
87. ANDing General purpose timer AND circuit with 2 inputs and 1 output plus general purpose timer 3 ORing General purpose timer OR circuit with 2 inputs and 1 output plus general purpose timer 4 XORing General purpose timer XOR circuit with 2 inputs and 1 output plus general purpose timer 5 Set priority flip flop General purpose Set priority flip flop with 2 inputs and 1 output plus timer general purpose timer 6 Reset priority flip flop General purpose Reset priority flip flop with 2 inputs and 1 output plus timer general purpose timer 7 Rising edge detector General purpose Rising edge detector with 1 input and 1 output plus timer general purpose timer This detects the rising edge of an input signal and outputs the ON signal for 2 ms 8 Falling edge detector General purpose Falling edge detector with 1 input and 1 output plus timer general purpose timer This detects the falling edge of an input signal and outputs the ON signal for 2 ms 9 Rising and falling edge detector Rising and falling edge detector with 1 input and 1 output plus General purpose timer general purpose timer This detects the falling and rising edges both of an input signal and outputs the ON signal for 2 ms 10 Input hold General purpose timer Hold function of previous values of 2 inputs and 1 output plus general purpose timer If the hold control signal is OFF the logic circuit outputs input signals if it is ON the logic circuit retains t
88. Acc time If you choose S curve acceleration deceleration or curvilinear acceleration deceleration in Acceleration Note Deceleration Pattern H07 the actual acceleration deceleration times are longer than the specified times Specifying an improperly short acceleration deceleration time may activate the current limiter torque limiter or anti regenerative control resulting in a longer acceleration deceleration time than the specified one F09 Torque Boost 1 Refer to F37 5 40 F10 to F42 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Select motor characteristics Overload detection level and Thermal time constant F10 through F12 specify the thermal characteristics of the motor for its electronic thermal overload protection that is used to detect overload conditions of the motor Upon detection of overload conditions of the motor the inverter shuts down its output and issues a motor overload alarm 7 to protect motor 1 Thermal characteristics of the motor specified by F10 and F12 are also used for the overload early warning Even if you need only the overload early warning set these characteristics data to these function codes Refer to the description of E34 For Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector control you need not specify the electronic thermal overload protection with these function codes because they are equipped with motor overheat protective function by NTC thermistor Set F11 data to 0
89. Check the wiring between the PG and the inverter gt Correct the wiring Check that the relationships between the PG feedback signal and the run command are as follows e For the FWD command the B phase pulse is in the High level at rising edge of the A phase pulse For the REV command the B phase pulse is in the Low level at rising edge of the A phase pulse gt Ifthe relationship is wrong interchange the A and B phase wires 6 Wiring to the motor is incorrect Check the wiring to the motor gt Connect the inverter output terminals U V and W to the motor input terminals U V and W respectively Possible Causes 7 The motor speed does not rise due to the torque limiter operation 29 A NTC wire break error What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of F40 Torque limiter 1 1 2 Correct the F40 data Or set the F40 data to 999 Disable if the torque limiter operation is not needed Problem A wire break is found in the NTC thermistor detection circuit Possible Causes 1 The NTC thermistor cable is broken What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the motor cable is broken gt Replace the motor cable 2 The temperature around the motor is extremely low lower than 30 C Measure the temperature around the motor gt Reconsider the use environment of the motor 3 The NTC thermistor is broken 30 4 7 Mock alarm Measure the resi
90. D2 D3 H hole hole kg 75 m DCR2 75C 10622 86 145 531 11 4 75 Figure 25510 225 45 M6 200 V LD MI2 90 DCR2 90C A 11642 96 155 14 90 HD 5841 110 LD DCR2 110C 300 10 265 116 4 90 185 60 M8 17 75 DCR4 75C 106 2 86 25 5341 M10 12 4 75 I5 25510 225 45 M6 90 um DCR4 90C 96 140 14 7 90 LD MD 11622 5841 110 Hb DCR4 110C 90 75 55 18 4 110 30010 265 M8 LD MD 132 DCR4 132C Figure 12644 100 63 22 160 22 0 400 V HD 132 A 80 LD MD MI2 160 WB DCR4 160C 131454 03 65 522 25 5 m LD MD 200 DCR4 200C 141 4 13 85 70 512 29 5 200 HD 350410 310 190 M10 LD MD 220 ub DCR4 220C 146 4 18 200 7322 32 5 220 250 MD DCR4 250C 161 4 33 210 80 522 35 8 11 Power Nominal Inverter type LD Refer Dimensions mm TM supply applied FRN GIBM MD LD Reactor Mounting Terminal voltage motor 20 40 mode to W wi D DI D2 D3 H hole i hole
91. Dri trol T ul rive contro 22 amp Default Refer Code Name Data setting range 2c S8 setting to Se S VIf PG w o w Torque page 5 Aa Vit PG PG control y01 RS 485 Communication 1 1 to 255 N Y 1 Y Y NE ox Y 5 147 Station address y02 Communications error processing 0 Immediately trip with alarm Y 0 bau lees oul be Call i Y 1 Trip with alarm Z after running for the period specified by timer y03 2 Retry during the period specified by timer y03 If the retry fails trip with alarm 5 If it succeeds continue to run 3 Continue to run y03 Timer 0 0 to 60 0 s Y Y 2 0 YJ YAYI Y Y y04 Baud rate 0 2400 bps Y Y 3 YYYY Y 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps y05 Data length 0 8 bits 1 7 bits Y Y YIYJYJY Y y06 Parity check 0 None 2 stop bits Y Y Y Y vYi v Y 1 Even parity 1 stop bit 2 Odd parity 1 stop bit 3 None 1 stop bit y07 Stop bits 0 2 bits 1 1 bit Y Y 0 Xo e Yap A Y 5 23 5 o i l 2 perault Drive control Refer Code Name Data setting range gc 8 setting to 5E S Vit PG wo w Torque page amp Aa Vit PG PG control o y08 RS 485 Communication 1 0 No detection 1 to 60 s Y Y 0 Y Y vY v Y 5 147 No response error detection time y09 Response interval 0 00 to 1 00 s Y Y 001 Y YY Y Y y10 Protocol selection 0 Mod
92. E depending on the shipping destination 2 3 2 3 2 Screw specifications and recommended wire sizes 1 Arrangement of main circuit terminals The tables and figures given below show the screw specifications and wire sizes Note that the terminal arrangements differ depending on the inverter types In each of the figures two grounding terminals G are not exclusive to the power supply wiring primary circuit or motor wiring secondary circuit Use crimp terminals covered with an insulation sheath or with an insulation tube The recommended wire sizes for the main circuits are examples of using a single HIV wire JIS C3317 for 75 C at a surrounding temperature of 50 C Inverter type Three phase 200 V FRNO 4G1 20 Three phase 400 V FRNO 4G1 40 FRNO 75G1 20 FRNO 75G1 40 Refer to Table 2 5 Screw Specifications Screw specifications Main circuit terminals Grounding terminals Auxiliary control power input terminals RO TO Auxiliary fan power input terminals R1 T1 Screw size Tightening torque Nm Tightening torque Nm Screw size Tightening torque Nm Screw size FRN1 5G1 20 FRN1 5G1 40 FRN2 2G1 20 FRN2 2G1 40 FRN3 7G1 20 FRN3 7G1W 4A FRNA4 0G1WI 4E FRNS 5G1 20 FRNS 5G1 40 FRN7 5G1 20 FRN7 5G1 40 FRNIIGIB2LI FRNIIGIB 4LI Figure C FRNISGIB2LI FRNISGIB 4LI
93. E50 E48 5 8 a Output frequency Speed Suu O Hz O A O kW Se X00 E48 7 Maximum frequency Output current iH O Hz E A O kW A Current output from the inverter in RMS 3 Output voltage 2 c4 DHzHADkW V Voltage output from the inverter in RMS 4 es tes in 9 Calculated torque 5 DHzHADKkW Motor output torque iri 8 Calculated value Input power i 5 OHzOAMkW kW Input power to the inverter 9 PID command IVT PID command feedback amount 34 kikin es ED transformed to that of virtual physical value of the object to be controlled e g PID feedback amount eu temperature 3 5 Jin DHzBADKW Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for 12 details x3 4 NUTIT PID output in as the maximum PID output 3 iiL O Hz O A O kW frequency F03 being at 100 14 in 9 Poubdue 6 oo DHzHABKW 96 Load factor ofthe motor in as the rated 15 output being at 100 Motor output 7 465 DHzHAWKW Motor output in kW 16 An analog input to the inverter in a format Analog input monitor 5279 DnHzBABKW suitable for a desired scale 17 8 FA Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for details Torque current 9 49 OuzOAOkw Torque current command value or 23 calculated torque current eT 9 5l IHzHADKW Magnetic flux command value 24 S3 Input watt hour kWh Input watt hour Wid DIHzHADKkW kWh Dpto OU 25 A value exceeding 9999 cannot be displayed as is on the 4 digit LED monitor screen so the LED mo
94. For details refer to Chapter 2 SPECIFICATIONS Droop Control In a system in which two or more motors drive single machinery any speed gap between inverter driven motors results H30 in some load unbalance between motors The droop control allows each inverter to drive the motor with the speed droop characteristics for increasing its load eliminating such kind of load unbalance Data setting range 60 0 to 0 0 Hz 0 0 Disable Motor speed Output frequency Speed command Reference frequency Speed Output frequency gt Droop characteristics Load 10096 Motor load torque W Select droop control DROOP E01 to E07 data 76 This terminal command DROOP is to switch enabling or disabling the droop control DROOP Droop control ON Enable OFF Disable Nolo To use droop control be sure to auto tune the inverter for the motor beforehand The droop control under V f control applies the acceleration deceleration time to the frequency obtained as a result of the droop control to prevent the inverter from tripping even at an abrupt change in load As a result reflecting the frequency compensated by the droop control on the motor speed may be delayed due to the influence of the acceleration deceleration time specified which may look as if the droop control is disabled By contrast the vector control without with speed sensor contains the current control system and the inverter does not
95. Function selection Function selection Function selection Function selection Customizable logic output signal 1 Customizable logic output signal 2 Customizable logic output signal 3 Customizable logic output signal 4 Customizable logic output signal 5 Customizable logic output signal 1 Function selection Customizable logic output signal 2 Customizable logic output signal 3 Customizable logic output signal 4 Customizable logic output signal 5 Data setting range Disable Step 1 output Step 2 output Step 3 output Step 4 output Step 5 output Step 6 output Step 7 output Step 8 output S008 9 Step 9 output S009 10 Step 10 output S010 0 to 100 1000 to 1081 Same as data of E98 E99 except the following SO01 S002 S003 S004 S005 S006 S007 NYNAUNBRWNK c oo data can be modified 80 1080 Cancel customizable logic 5 145 19 1019 Enable data change with keypad Default setting W Notes for using a customizable logic A customizable logic performs processing every 2 ms in the following sequence 1 At the start of processing the customizable logic latches all of the external input signals entered to steps 1 to 10 to ensure simultaneity 2 Logical operations are performed in the order of steps 1 to 10 3 If an output of a particular step applies to an input at the next step the output of the step having processing priority can be used in the sam
96. H53 774 f Non linear V f pattern 1 Voltage H51 Output frequency Hz Non linear Non linear Non linear Base Maximum VA pattern 1 V f pattern 2 V f pattern 3 frequency 1 frequency 1 Frequency Frequency Frequency F04 F03 H50 H52 H65 W Base Frequency 1 F04 Data setting range 25 0 to 500 0 Hz Set the rated frequency printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor W Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 F05 Data setting range 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage The Automatic Voltage Regulator AVR is disabled 80 to 240 V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series Set 0 or the rated voltage printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor If F05 0 the rated voltage at base frequency is determined by the power source of the inverter The output voltage will fluctuate in line with the input voltage fluctuation If F05 an arbitrary value other than 0 the inverter automatically keeps the output voltage constant in line with the setting When any of the auto torque boost auto energy saving etc is enabled the F05 data should be equal to the rated voltage of the motor ete In vector control current feedback control is performed In the current feedback control the current is controlled with the difference between the motor induced voltage and the inverter output voltage For a proper control the inver
97. Heat sink overheat gt Single phase motors cannot be used Note that the FRENIC MEGA only drives three phase induction motors Problem Temperature around heat sink has risen abnormally Possible Causes 1 Temperature around the inverter exceeded the inverter s specification range What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the temperature around the inverter gt Lower the temperature around the inverter e g ventilate the panel where the inverter is mounted 2 Ventilation path is blocked Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter 2 Change the mounting place to ensure the clearance Check if the heat sink is not clogged gt Clean the heat sink 3 Cooling fan s airflow volume decreased due to the service life expired or failure 4 Overload Check the cumulative run time of the cooling fan Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information gt Replace the cooling fan Visually check whether the cooling fan rotates normally gt Replace the cooling fan Three phase 200 V class series inverters with 37 kW or above and three phase 400 V class series with 75 kW or above are equipped with not only a cooling fan for heat sink but also an internal air circulation fan Check the following gt Check the connection of the fan power switching connectors CN R and CN W gt Correct the connection Refer t
98. Input Input OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON Output Output Timer Timer d Timer period Timer period 3 Pulses 1 shot 4 Retriggerable timer OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF oF ON orF OFF Input Input OFF ON OFF ON OFF oFF ON OFF ON OFF Output Output Timer Timer e a Timer period Less than Timer period Timer period timer period 5 Pulse train output OFF ON OFF ON Input OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Output Timer Timer perio W Timer UO5 etc U05 and other related function codes specify the general purpose timer period or the increment decrement counter value Timer period The period is specified by seconds 0 00 to 600 00 Counter value The specified value is multiplied by 100 times If 0 01 is specified it is converted to 1 5 144 G deyo c z O O z Q O O m o W Output signals In a customizable logic outputs from steps 1 to 10 are issued to SO01 to SO10 respectively Those outputs SO01 to SO10 differ in configuration depending upon the connection destination as listed below To relay those outputs to any function other than the customizable logic route them via customizable logic outputs CLO1 to CLOS If the connection destination is Configuration Function codes Customizable logic input Select one of the internal ste
99. J17 to a frequency higher than the stop frequency for slow flowrate J15 If the specified starting frequency is lower than the stop frequency for slow flowrate the latter stop frequency is ignored the slow flowrate stopping function is triggered when the output of the PID processor drops below the specified starting frequency S3dO9 NOILONNA W Assignment of PID STP Motor stopped due to slow flowrate under PID control E20 to E24 and E27 data 44 Assigning the digital output signal PID STP to any of the programmable output terminals with any of E20 through E24 and E27 data 44 enables the signal to output when the inverter stops due to the slow flowrate stopping function under PID control For the slow flowrate stopping function see the chart below A Output frequency Preset deceleration time Preset acceleration time Restart Slow flowrate level MV increases stop latency J16 again as pressure i y 416 decreases PID output MV 4 Starting frequency J17 Stop frequency for slow flowrate J15 Feedback value Pressure inside pipe Pressure starts decreasing when the faucet is opened Pressure increases as the inverter resumes operation Run command 4 ON PID STP signal ON 1 x Pressurization before slow flowrate stopping J08 and J09 Specifying J08 Pressurization starting frequency and J09 Pressurizing time enables pressurization co
100. LED monitor m shows one tenth of the value Virtual physical value e g temperature or pressure of the object to be 6 controlled which is converted from the PID command value using function 3 U PID command value N A code E40 and E41 data PID display coefficients A and B Display value PID command value x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears Virtual physical value e g temperature or pressure of the object to be controlled which is converted from the PID feedback amount using function 3 d PID feedback N A code E40 and E41 data PID display coefficients A and B amount Display value PID feedback amount x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears SE Torque limit value Driving torque limit value A based on motor rated torque eod Torque limit value Braking torque limit value B based on motor rated torque 2 m When this setting is 100 the LED monitor shows 1 00 time of the value to e Ratio setting ur be displayed If no ratio setting is selected appears Display value Output frequency Hz x Function code E50 Coefficient for speed indication Jd n L m PUE ine peed n e the value is 10000 or lager the x10 LED turns ON and the LED monitor shows one tenth of the value i3 d Not used 3 7 Not used E 3 oH Not used 3 Not used LOI acu Not use
101. LED segment ON OFF I O status in binary format DGD5 Input status in hex format OGG Output status in hex format JOE a amp f Input voltage V on terminal 12 1 T l i i i i i i 4 k GOGO Timer count Figure 3 4 Menu Transition in Menu 4 I O Checking Basic key operation To check the status of the I O signals set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the amp key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the and keys to display I O Checking 4 2 3 Press the amp key to proceed to a list of I O check items e g LI ENI 1 LII 4 Use the S and keys to display the desired I O check item then press the amp key The corresponding I O check data appears For the item LI ry 7 7 LL or L using the and keys switches the display method between the segment display for external signal information in Table 3 12 and hexadecimal display for I O signal status in Table 3 13 5 Press the G9 key to return to the list of I O check items Press the amp key again to return to the menu LED monitor Table 3 11 I O Check Items I O signals on the control circuit term
102. Latch 4 Deviation alarm 5 Deviation alarm with Hold 6 Deviation alarm with Latch 7 Deviation alarm with Hold and Latch J12 Upper level alarm AH 100 to 100 Y Y 100 Y YY Y N J13 Lower level alarm AL 100 to 100 Y Y 0 Y Y YY N J15 Stop frequency for slow flowrate 0 0 Disable 1 0 to 500 0 Hz Y Y 0 0 bau ap d N 5 126 J16 Slow flowrate level stop latency 0 to 60 s Y Y 30 Y Y YY N 5 128 J17 Starting frequency 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Y Y 0 0 Y vY vi v N J18 Upper limit of PID process output 150 to 150 999 Depends on setting of F15 Y Y 999 Y Y Y Y N 5 128 J19 Lower limit of PID process output 150 to 150 999 Depends on setting of F16 Y Y 999 Y Y Y Y N J21 Dew Condensation Prevention 196 to 5096 Y Y 1 YYY Y Y Duty J22 Commercial Power Switching 0 Keep inverter operation Stop due to alarm N X 0 Y Y N N Y 5 67 Sequence 1 Automatically switch to commercial power operation 5 129 J56 PID Control Speed command filter 0 00 to 5 00 s 010 Y Y Y Y N 5 129 J57 Dancer reference position 100 to 0 to 100 Y Y 0 Y 231 Ys Y N J58 Detection width of dancer 0 Disable switching PID constant Y Y 0 YivY Y v N position deviation 4 to 100 Manually set value J59 P Gain 2 0 000 to 30 000 times Y Y 0100 Y Y Y Y N J60 Integral time 2 0 0 to 3600 0 s Y Y 0 0 Yeu ea Yeo Y N J61 D Differential time 3 0 00 to 600 00 s Y Y 000 Y Y Y Y N J62 PID control block selection
103. Link functions o codes Optional functions Note Displays only function codes that have been changed from their Section Data Checking factory defaults You can refer to or change those function code data 3 4 3 Drive Displays the running information required for maintenance or test Section Monitoring i running 3 4 4 Section I O Checking A Displays external interface information 345 Maintenance Displays maintenance information including cumulative run time Section Information i 3 4 6 Alarm Displays the recent four alarm codes You can refer to the running Section Information information at the time when the alarm occurred 3 4 7 Allows you to read or write function code data as well as verifying it WP Saving the function code data of the currently running inverter into the Section Data Copying ra SIR keypad and connecting it to a PC running FRENIC Loader enables 3 4 8 data checking on the PC Note The o codes are displayed only when the corresponding option is mounted For details refer to the Instruction Manual for the corresponding option 3 5 E Selecting menus to display The menu driven system allows you to cycle through menus To cycle through necessary menus only for simple operation use function code E52 that provides a choice of three display modes as listed below The factory default E52 0 is to display only three menus Menu 0 Quick Setup
104. Motor 1 X correction factors 1 and 2 P53 and P54 specify the factors to correct fluctuations of leakage reactance X Basically there is no need to modify the setting P55 Motor 1 Torque current under vector control P55 specifies the rated torque current under vector control without with speed sensor The combination of P99 Motor 1 selection and P02 Motor 1 rated capacity data determines the standard value Basically there is no need to modify the setting P56 Motor 1 Induced voltage factor under vector control P56 specifies the induced voltage factor under vector control without with speed sensor The combination of P99 Motor 1 Selection and P02 Motor 1 Rated capacity data determines the standard value Basically there is no need to modify the setting P99 Motor 1 Selection P99 specifies the motor type to be used Data for P99 Motor type 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series 1 Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors 2 Motor characteristics 2 Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector control 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series 4 Other motors To select the motor drive control or to run the inverter with the integrated automatic control functions such as auto torque boost and torque calculation monitoring it is necessary to specify the motor parameters correctly First select the motor type with P99 Motor 1 Selection from Fuji standard
105. Number of output phases rated output voltage output frequency range rated output capacity rated output current overload capability each for HD MD and LD modes SCCR Short circuit capacity MASS Mass of the inverter in kilogram 30 kW or above SER No Product number 81A123A0001Z Serial number of production lot Production month 1 to 9 January to September X Y or Z October November or December Production year Last digit of year If you suspect the product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product contact your Fuji Electric representative 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks 1 Outside and inside views Warning plate Warning plate Front cover Main nameplate 2 Warning plates and label Note FRENIC MEGA A WARNING A RISK OF INJURY OR ELECTRIC SHOCK Refer to the instruction manual before installation and operation Do not remove any cover while applying power and at least 5min after disconnecting power More than one live circuit See instruction manual Securely ground earth the equipment High touch current EZS en w FY AES E RRB TCHS LMR E THERE HAMAR ER 5 MAAS eo AEREE Er BISA BBOSENAV ede A ID EESSRSDBUIC USA cath C CO ENESTE oRETSLUBRL AINARE RATE oHRIGRWEBCBS TC Only type B of RCD is allowed See manual for details a FRN11G1 40 Main nameplate Top mounting base Fron
106. ON OFF of the terminals between Y 1 to Y4 and CMY If the logic value for ON between Y1 to Y4 and CMY is 1 in the normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa Transistor Transistor output circuit specification output 3 Control circuit Item Operation ON level voltage OFF level Photocoupler Current 311035 V Maximum current at ON Leakage current at OFF Figure 2 16 Transistor Output Circuit Figure 2 17 shows examples of connection between the control circuit and a PLC Transistor Note When a transistor output drives a control relay connect a surge absorbing diode output 4 across relay s coil terminals When any equipment or device connected to the transistor output needs to be supplied with DC power feed the power 24 VDC allowable range 22 to 27 VDC 100 mA max through the PLC terminal Short circuit between the terminals CMY and CM in this case Transistor output Transistor Common terminal for transistor output signals output This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals CM and 11 s common CTip W Connecting programmable logic controller PLC to terminal Y1 Y2 Y3 or Y4 Figure 2 17 shows two examples of circuit connection between the transistor output of the inverter s control circuit and a PLC In example
107. Oto dB 0 Disable Speed control 3 9 Notch filter 3 pp Notch filter resonance frequency 1 10 200 a 200 x Speed control 3 o b50 Notch filter attenuation level 010 20 dB 0 Disable m o Speed control 4 Notch filter 4 149 Notch filter resonance frequency 140200 Hz 200 Speed control 4 d Notch filter attenuation level Dion dB 0 Disable Setting the notch filter attenuation level to 0 dB disables the corresponding notch filter It is possible to apply all of the four notch filters to the 1st motor or apply each notch filter to each of the 1st to 4th motors Notch filter 1 Notch filter 2 Notch filter 3 Notch filter 4 d07 and d08 A49 and A50 b49 and b50 r49 and r50 Requisite for use of notch filters M2 M3 and M4 Select motor 2 3 and 4 are not in use E01 to E07 E98 E99 12 36 37 All of the four notch filters apply to the 1st motor All of the three Motor Parameter Switching items are set to Parameter A42 b42 r42 1 Other than the above To the 1st motor To the 2nd motor To the 3rd motor To the 4th motor d09 d10 Speed Control Jogging Speed command filter and Speed detection filter d11tod13 P Gain Integral time and Output filter Refer to d01 These function codes control the speed control sequence for jogging operations The block diagrams and function codes related to jogging operations are the same as for normal operations Since th
108. Protect from dew condensation or other similar terminal command has been received During tuning any of the operation limiters has been activated Error d eto limitation The maximum frequency or the frequency limiter high has limited tuning operation Other errors An undervoltage or any other alarm has occurred If any of these errors occurs remove the error cause and perform tuning again or consult your Fuji Electric representative 4 10 Ifa filter other than the Fuji optional output filter OFL LJA is connected to the inverter s output secondary circuit the tuning result cannot be assured When replacing the inverter connected with such a filter make a note of the old inverter s settings for the primary resistance oR1 leakage reactance X no load current and rated slip frequency and specify those values to the new inverter s function codes Vibration that may occur when the motor s coupling is elastic can be regarded as normal vibration due to the output voltage pattern applied in tuning The tuning does not always result in an error however run the motor and check its running state 4 1 9 Function code basic settings lt 4 gt Driving a Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control under the vector control with speed sensor F42 6 requires configuring the following basic function codes Refer to Figure 4 1 on page 4 1 For details on how to modify t
109. RCD ELCB etc Power supply FRENIC MEGA Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada continued ANCAUTION 7 Install UL certified fuses or circuit breaker between the power supply and the inverter referring to the table below Required torque Ib in Wire size AWG mm Nm Main terminal L1 R L2 S L3 T S x Inverter type Power supply voltage Nominal applied motor HD LD mode Class J fuse size A Circuit breaker trip size A Main terminal Aux Fan power supply Remarks Aux fan power supply 75 C Cu wire Remarks 60 C Cu wire 75 C Cu wire Aux control power supply 60 C Cu wire Aux control power supply FRNO 4G1m 20 FRNO 75G1 20 FRN1 5G1m 20 FRN2 2G1m 20 10 FRN3 7G1 20 5 3 FRN5 5GIB 2LI 8 8 4 FRN7 5G1 m 20 6 13 3 FRN11G1m 20 4 6 21 2 13 3 FRNI5GIB 2LI 3 4 26 7 21 2 2 3 33 6 26 7 FRN22GIB 2LI 2 2 0 33 6 67 4 1 42 4 1 0 53 5 FRN18 5G1m 20 Three phase 200 V FRN30G1 m 20 3 0 85 FRN37GIB2LI 4 0 107 2 4 0 FRN45GIB 2L 107 2 2 0x2 67 4x2 3 0x2 3 0x2 85x2 85x2 4 0x2 4 0x2 107 2x2 107 2x2 FRN90G1g 20 3002 300x2 152x2 152x2 FRN55GIB LI FR
110. SW60 5 69 Operation Schemes When the motor speed remains almost the same during coast to stop Switch to commercial power 50 Hz SW50 ton FWD 1 Coast to a stop i BX ON Commercial line s frequency r Restart mode after momentary power failure Restart time H13 S Motor speed NEC com vetere 1 output frequency i requencgy EO o mper met c cc Inverter starts at commercial line frequency G deyo When the motor speed decreases significantly during coast to stop with the current limiter activated Switch to commercial is i power 50 Hz Siu FWD i BX ON Motor speed e Restart mode after momentary power failure Restart time H13 Fl S3dO9 NOILONNA Commercial line s frequency Inverter TERRE Inverter s Su n reference A p frequency 1 frequency j Inverter starts at commercial line frequency Secure more than 0 1 second after turning ON the Switch to commercial power signal before turning ON a Note run command Secure more than 0 2 second of an overlapping period with both the Switch to commercial power signal and run command being ON If an alarm has been issued or BX has been ON when the motor drive source is switched from the commercial power to the inverter the inverter will not be started at the commercial power frequency and will remain OFF After the alarm has been reset or BX turned OFF ope
111. Tm 200 300 T 160 AD 350 FRN45G1 20 15 E FRN160G1m 40 c7 55 aA 250 350 200 ap FRN55GIB 2LI r5 E FRN200G1m 40 5 5 75 HD 350 220 HD E m INDEM SH LD 250 FRN220GIW 4D MD FRN90G1 20 HD 280 LD n H9 Eb 229 FRN280G1m 40 HP ws MD NM aree ED Raa aa e of as FRN315G1W 40 HD a 1e i sm T mere MB meom us ROBIE TaD we voltage exl T ew mode w DCR w o DCR FRN355G1m 40 HD 0 4 FRN0 4GI1B 4L 5 FRN315GIB 4L LD 0 75 FRN0 75GIW 4L1 5 400 FRN355GIB 4LI MD 1 5 FRNI 5GIB 4L1 HD 10 FRN400G1 8 40 HD gt 22 FRN22G1W 4L 15 pe FRN355GIB 4H LD 1200 e 37 FRN3 7G1WB 4A 10 m MD 49 FRN4 0G1ML 4E FRN400GIW 4L 5 55 HD 15 30 500 FRN5 5GIB 4L m FRN500G1m 40 HP g 75 HD 20 40 630 LD 1400 d FRN7 5GIB 4LI HD FRN630G1 40 Cornu LD 30 50 710 LD 1600 FRN11G1 40 iD 15 40 60 FRNISGIB 4LI HD 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter type is FRN4 0GIWI 4E Note A box MB in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box L1 in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 1 5 A WARNING If no zero phase current earth leakage current detective device such as a ground fault relay is installed in the upstream power supply line in order to avoid the entire power supply system s shutdown undesirable to factory operation install a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB individually to inverters to break the in
112. U50 In a customizable logic one step is composed of the components shown in the following block diagram Input 1 O 3 Logic circuit General purpose oC Output Input 2 O 34 timer Timer 5 140 Function codes for each step Input 1 Input 2 Logic circuit General purpose timer Timer Output Note Note These items shown in this column are output signals not function codes W Inputs 1 and 2 U01 U02 etc The following signals are available as input signals Data Selectable Signals 0000 1000 0105 1105 General purpose output signals Same as the ones specified by E20 RUN Inverter running FAR Frequency speed arrival signal FDT Frequency speed detected LU Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped B D Torque polarity detected and other signals Note 27 Universal DO is not available 2001 3001 Output of step 1 S001 2002 3002 2003 3003 Output of step 2 S002 Output of step 3 2004 3004 Output of step 4 2005 3005 Output of step 5 2006 3006 Output of step 6 2007 3007 Output of step 7 2008 3008 Output of step 8 2009 3009 Output of step 9 2010 3010 Output of step 10 4001 5001 Terminal X1 input signal XI 4002 5002 Terminal X2 input signal X2 4003 5003 Terminal X3
113. VI loci TT SLY L 8s LOL 9 C8 5 06 tL 99 0 98 0C 661 09 S 0 881 OIL 6 T HO Q OII TE OTEO SCSI O SvI O 0 T O STI 044 Ors 0 9 0 6L 888 IET 08 0 0 9T L T 09 6r O SST 06 6601 00 06 8c c6c0 VL 9 vvT 8 6cI 6vII ocr TYS evo 0 84 T88 EET 08 0 68 91 861 09 Ir 0 0 I SL 66 68 0 00 SL 9c LITO 6 t6 S LSI T9EL CLI ler oes Lv9 6L T68 Sve v60 0c 91 SET 0 6c 00 S6 SS 66L 91 00 SS OT TLTO IV9L SIF 0971 cII vvv vss 899 L 6L 0768 SIC 080 9U9I EST 08 tc 00 8L Sy 66 PS 91 00 S ST OSTO 8 C9 9 rT V9cI TTI rtv cvs vs9 6 8L L88 OET 08 0 Ip9l 9rc 08 0c 00 S9 Lt 66 F 0O LE ET TOTO 76 0S 6 ESI CEL SII 8er TLS L 89 9 I8 706 Ore 08 0 96 vI vy9 c 0 61I 00 vS Ot 66 9 91 00 0E 8TTO 9ELE SISI TOEI TYI v8v 16s 6 89 I8 L 68 BTE 060 00 91 Orc 09 CI 00 6 CZ 6667 91 00 C 3 0c EPTO IvI SLYI 6LcI Vell Lv 66 LOL 0 8 L 06 rtt L8 0 8991 TET OL OI 00 v S 8I 66 Ic 010 81 E ISTO LYST S LE I CCl 07601 S t L 09 TTL S ES 06 TEE ell L 9I STE 00701 OSL SI 67 81 91 00 ST o el TETO 89 81 6LvYI TOEI VvII OLY 08s 6 69 t8 I6 COE LOT 60ST 8Zt S8 8 00 17 II 66 vI9100 lI TI 600 PLETI Corl V8cI LI 9 Sy roc TL9 0708 LL8 tor LST 89vI OST Sc9 OSHI SL 66 01 0130 z OT 8800 vt6 SSI TEEI evil 8r LTS 6v9 T6L 9 88 SLY orl lev BTS oss Os IT ES 6rLo0es 80 900 879 Tvst TEEI 9 STI T6E S 6r I9 69L 0 98 vos 6 I STII 6L S vse OSL Or 60 S 91 OLE zi 9 0 IS 00 ple 90ST S EEI Ltt
114. VL 1 under voltage limiting control written 14 Always 0 6 TL 1 under torque limiting control WR 1 when the DC link bus voltage is high on ge 1S higher i Always 0 3 NOX than the undervoltage level 1 when communication is enabled when 12 RL ready for run and frequency commands via 4 BRK 1 during braking communications link 11 ALM 1 when an alarm has occurred 3 INT 1 when the inverter output is shut down 10 DEC 1 during deceleration 2 EXT 1 during DC braking 9 ACC 1 during acceleration 1 REV 1 during running in the reverse direction 8 IL 1 under current limiting control 0 FWD 1 during running in the forward direction Notation LED No Table 3 8 Running Status 2 Content i Notation 3 73 Bit Assignment Content Speed limiting under torque control Not used Motor selection 00 Motor 1 01 Motor 2 10 Motor 3 11 Motor 4 Inverter drive control 0000 V f control with slip compensation Not used inactive 0001 Dynamic torque vector control Table 3 9 Running Status Display 0010 V f control with slip compensation active V f control with speed sensor Dynamic vector control with speed sensor Vector control without speed sensor Vector control with speed sensor Torque control Vector control without speed sensor Torque control Vector control with speed sensor 0011 0100 0101 0110 1010
115. When the frequency command level in voltage or current returns to a level higher than that specified by E65 the inverter presumes that the broken wire has been fixed and continues to run following the frequency command 5 90 Frequency Command by Analog Input Reference Loss Detected REF OFF Preset Frequency Command x Internal Frequency 100 Command In the diagram above fl is the level of the analog frequency command sampled at any given time The sampling is repeated at regular intervals to continually monitor the wiring connection of the analog frequency command Data setting range 0 Decelerate to stop 20 to 120 999 Disable Note E78 E79 E80 E81 Avoid an abrupt voltage or current change for the analog frequency command An abrupt change may be interpreted as a wire break Setting E65 data at 999 Disable allows the REF OFF signal Reference loss detected to be issued but does not allow the reference frequency to change the inverter runs at the analog frequency command as specified When E65 0 or 999 the reference frequency level at which the broken wire is recognized as fixed is f1 x 0 2 When E65 100 96 or higher the reference frequency level at which the wire is recognized as fixed is f1 x Lect The reference loss detection is not affected by the setting of analog input adjustment filter time constants C33 C38 and C43 Torque Detection 1 Level and Timer Torq
116. Y Y Y Y N b24 Slip compensation response time 0 01 to 10 00 s Y Y1Y2 0 12 Y Y N N N b25 Slip compensation gain for braking 0 0 to 200 0 Y Y 10000 Y Y Y Y N b26 Rated slip frequency 0 00 to 15 00 Hz N Y1Y2 7 Y vY vi v N b27 Iron loss factor 1 0 0096 to 20 00 Y v1Y2 7 Y Y vYi v Y b28 Iron loss factor 2 0 0096 to 20 00 Y Y1Y2 000 Y Y Y Y Y b29 Iron loss factor 3 0 0096 to 20 00 Y Yv1Y2 000 Y Y Y Y Y b30 Magnetic saturation factor 1 0 096 to 300 096 Y v1Y2 7 Y Y YY Y b31 Magnetic saturation factor 2 0 096 to 300 096 Y v1Y2 7 Rena n5 ani dI c Y b32 Magnetic saturation factor 3 0 096 to 300 096 Y v1Y2 7 Yos p Y b33 Magnetic saturation factor 4 0 0 to 300 0 Y v1Y2 7 Y IYI YY Y b34 Magnetic saturation factor 5 0 0 to 300 0 Y v1Y2 7 Ys Yep Y Refer page 1 The factory default differs depending upon the shipping destination See Table A 3 The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity See Table B 4 The motor rated current is automa ically set See Table C function code P03 5 5 0 min for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below 10 0 min for those with 30 kW or above 7 The motor parameters are automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping destination See Table C 5 15
117. Y 100 Y Y Y Y N Function selection Iy yTy TY TN U82 Customizable Logic Output Signal 2 Y Y Y vY IN U83 Customizable Logic Output Signal 3 YIY IYIvYIN U84 Customizable Logic Output Signal 4 YIY IYIvYIN U85 Customizable Logic Output Signal 5 Y Y Y v N Enable 3 wire operation IYivivivl v Coast to a stop BX YYYY Y Reset alarm RST YII Y Y Enable external alarm trip THR Y vY vi v Y F codes 9 Active OFF 1009 Active ON re nm mee n pot eat dee tot NS E codes Y Y Y Y N MEL Pee eae C codes TAYY Y N P WE EE R P codes ASAIN NN ok E ER T AEA H codes AE E Y N PAPEY aY pN A codes Y Y vY v N LER OI d RE b codes INS p NIE N Le UN eos r codes 24 1024 Enable communications link via RS 485 or fieldbus LE Y ie ll ox X Y 25 1025 Universal DI U DI Y vY vYi v Y J codes 26 1026 Enable auto search for idling motor We san SE EE speed at starting STM Y Y Y N Y d codes 30 1030 Forcetostop STOP ly Ty yy y iv 30 Active OFF 1030 Active ON Ucodes y codes 5 22 5 o i 2 peut Drive control Refer Code Name Data setting range oc 8 setting to c3 g PG wo w page 5 8 Vif va PG PG Torque 32 1032 Pre excitation EXITE NIN Y Y N 5 139 33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST Y es bate ots Ree N 34 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD Y Y
118. Y Y N J96 Speed selection 0 Detected speed 1 Reference speed Y Y 0 N IN I YY N J97 Servo lock Gain 0 00 to 10 00 times Yt X 010 N N Nj Y N 5 131 J98 Completion timer 0 000 to 1 000 s Y Y 010 N N N Y N J99 Completion range O to 9999 pulses Y Y 10 NI N N Y N d codes Application Functions 2 5 o i Sl E petautt Drive control Refer Code Name Data setting range oc 8 setting to Se S Vit PG w o w Torque page 5 Vit PG PG control d01 Speed Control 1 0 000 to 5 000 s Y Y 002 N Y Y Y N 5 133 Speed command filter d02 Speed detection filter 0 000 to 0 100 s Y Y 0000 N Y Y Y N d03 P Gain 0 1 to 200 0 times y gt Y 10 0 N Y Y Y N d04 Integral time 0 001 to 9 999 s yx Y 0100 N Y Y Y N d06 Output filter 0 000 to 0 100 s Y Y 000 N Y Y Y N d07 Notch filter resonance frequency 1 to 200 Hz X Y 200 N N NJ Y N 5 134 d08 Notch filter attenuation level 0 to 20 dB Y Y 0 NI N N Y N d09 Speed Control Jogging 0 000 to 5 000 s Y Y 0020 N Y Y Y N 5 133 Speed command filter 5 134 d10 Speed detection filter 0 000 to 0 100 s ye Y 000 N Y Y Y N d11 P Gain 0 1 to 200 0 times Y Y 10 0 N Y Y Y N d12 Integral time 0 001 to 9 999 s Y Y 0100 N Y Y Y N d13 Output filter 0 000 to 0 100 s Y Y 000 N Y Y Y N d14 Feedback Input 0 Pulse train sign Pulse train input N Y 2 NO Y N Y Y 5 135 Pulse input format 4 Forward rotation pulse Re
119. Yi 30A 30 Stop TT O O 5S 52 2 DC 52 1X 52 2X 88X Inverter operation Commercial power operation 2 Sequence with an emergency switching function Main power Commercial power Operation selection switch selection switch 43 INV Com ON when the inverter is selected Q Run AN di FID 3S 3 Inverter Normal Emergency SW52 1 SW52 2 swes Stop AN Y3 Y Yi 5S 44 Note This switch is provided for manually switching the run command source to a commercial power line when the automatic switching sequence fails due to a critical failure of the inverter 52 1X 52 2X 88X 44 i Emergency switch Note Run command Inverter operation Commercial power operation 5 76 43 stop ON when the INV Commercial a deyo zi c z O e Z Q J m o 3 Sequence with an emergency switching function Part 2 Automatic switching by the alarm output issued by the inverter Main power Commercial power selection Operation selection switch Switch 43X INV Com ON when the inverter is Run selected FWD 3S 43 Inverter Normal Emergency SW52 1 SW52 2 SW88 ALM Y2 Yi Q Stop 5S A A Note This switch is provided for manually Switching the run command source to a 52 1X 52 2X 88X 30 commercial power line when the automatic switching sequence fails due to a critical failure of the inverter Emer
120. a the input circuit of the PLC serves as a SINK for the control circuit output whereas in example b it serves as a SOURCE for the output um lt ircuit Programmable Control circuit K Progrannetie S Control circuit lt gi logic controller logic controller Photocoupler Current Photocoupler Current A SOURCE input a PLC serving as SINK b PLC serving as SOURCE Figure 2 17 Connecting PLC to Control Circuit General 1 A general purpose relay contact output usable as well as the function of the transistor purpose relay output terminal Y1 Y2 Y3 or Y4 output Contact rating 250 VAC 0 3 A cos 0 3 48 VDC 0 5 A 2 Switching of the normal negative logic output is applicable to the following two contact output modes Active ON Terminals YSA and Y5C are closed excited if the signal is active and Active OFF Terminals Y5A and Y5C are opened non excited if the signal is active while they are normally closed 30A B C Alarm relay 1 Outputs a contact signal SPDT when a protective function has been activated to output stop the motor for any Contact rating 250 VAC 0 3A cos 0 3 48 VDC 0 54 error 2 Any one of output signals assigned to terminals Y1 to Y4 can also be a
121. addition to the indication 7 the inverter blinks the KEYPAD CONTROL LED and outputs the light alarm signal L ALM to a digital output terminal to alert the peripheral equipment to the occurrence of a light alarm To use the L ALM it is necessary to assign the signal to any of the digital output terminals by setting any of function codes E20 through E24 and E27 to 98 Function codes H81 and H82 specify which alarms should be categorized as light alarm The available light alarm codes are check marked in the Light alarm object column in Table 6 1 To display the light alarm factor and escape from the light alarm state follow the instructions below E Displaying the light alarm factor 1 Press the amp key to enter Programming mode 2 Check the light alarm factor in 5_ 7 5 Light alarm factor latest under Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode The light alarm factor is displayed in alarm codes For details about the alarm codes see Table 6 1 Abnormal States Detectable Heavy alarm and Light alarm objects LL For details about the menu transition in Menu 5 Maintenance Information see Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information It is possible to display the factors of most recent 3 light alarms in 5_ 7 7 Light alarm factor last to 5 7 5 Light alarm factor 3rd last E Switching the LED monitor from the light alarm to normal display
122. after the MC is switched on For the braking transistor built in type of inverters assign a transistor error output signal DBAL on inverter s programmable output terminals to switch off the MC in the input circuit 7 Magnetic contactor MC in the inverter output secondary circuit If a magnetic contactor MC is inserted in the inverter s output secondary circuit for switching the motor to a commercial power or for any other purposes it should be switched on and off when both the inverter and motor are completely stopped This prevents the contact point from getting rough due to a switching arc of the MC The MC should not be equipped with any main circuit surge killer Applying a commercial power to the inverter s output circuit breaks the inverter To avoid it interlock the MC on the motor s commercial power line with the one in the inverter output circuit so that they are not switched ON at the same time 8 Surge absorber surge killer Do not install any surge absorber or surge killer in the inverter s output secondary lines B Noise reduction If noise generated from the inverter affects other devices or that generated from peripheral equipment causes the inverter to malfunction follow the basic measures outlined below 1 If noise generated from the inverter affects the other devices through power wires or grounding wires Isolate the grounding terminals of the inverter from those of the other devices Connect a nois
123. block A WARNING RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK b FRN220G1m 40 Figure 1 3 Warning Plates and Label A box W in the above figures replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box L1 in the above figures replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 1 2 deyo H2LH3ANI SHL ONISN 30H38 1 3 Precautions for Using Inverters 1 3 1 Precautions in introducing inverters This section provides precautions in introducing inverters e g precautions for installation environment power supply lines wiring and connection to peripheral equipment Be sure to observe those precautions B Installation environment Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 2 1 in Chapter 2 Fuji Electric strongly recommends installing inverters in a panel for safety reasons in particular when installing the ones whose enclosure rating is IPOO When installing the inverter in a place out of the specified environmental requirements it is necessary to derate the inverter or consider the panel engineering design suitable for the special environment or the panel installation location For details refer to the Fuji Electric technical information Engineering Design of Panels or consult your Fuji Electric representative The special environments listed below require using the specially designed panel or considering the panel installation location Environments Possible problems Sample measu
124. capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor and the load inside the inverter Therefore if the load inside the inverter fluctuates significantly the discharging time cannot be accurately measured and as a result it may be mistakenly determined that the life has been reached To avoid such an error you can disable the judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor Even if it is disabled the judgment based on the ON time counting while the voltage is applied to the DC link bus capacitor is continued For details refer to the description of H42 Since load may vary significantly in the following cases disable the judgment on the life during operation Either conduct the measurement with the judgment enabled under appropriate conditions during periodical maintenance or conduct the measurement under the operating conditions matching the actual ones Auxiliary input for control power is used An option card or multi function keypad is used Another inverter or equipment such as a PWM converter is connected to terminals of the DC link bus DC fan lock detection Bit 5 200 V class series 45 kW or above 400 V class series 75 kW or above An inverter of 45 kW or above 200 V class series or of 75 kW or above 400 V class series is equipped with the internal air circulation DC fan When the inverter detects that the DC fan is locked by a failure or other cause you can select either continuing the inverter operation or entering into a
125. class series with 75 kW or above Motor overload early warning Heat sink overheat early warning Lifetime alarm Reference command loss detected PID alarm Low torque output PTC thermistor activated Inverter life Motor cumulative run time Inverter life Number of startups 6 2 4 2 pBep p I 6 2 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting A WARNINGA If any of the protective functions has been activated first remove the cause Then after checking that the all run commands are set to OFF release the alarm If the alarm is released while any run commands are set to ON the inverter may supply the power to the motor running the motor Injury may occur Even if the inverter has interrupted power to the motor if the voltage is applied to the main circuit input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U V and W Turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below Electric shock may occur Follow the procedure below to solve problems 1 Fir
126. codes H86 Reserved 9 Oto2 Y Y1Y2 O 14 H87 Reserved 9 25 0 to 500 0 Hz Y Y 25 0 H codes H88 Reserved 9 0 to 3 999 Y N 0 H89 Reserved 9 0 1 Y Y 0 icl2 A codes H90 Reserved 9 0 1 Y Y 0 H91 PID Feedback Wire Break Detection 0 0 Disable alarm detection Y Y 0 0 YilY Y v N 5 115 b codes 0 1 to 60 0 s H92 Continuity of Running P 0 000 to 10 000 times 999 Y Ywv2 999 Y Y Y Y N 5 43 r codes H93 1 0 010 to 10 000 s 999 Y viv2 999 Y Y Y Y N 5 115 H94 Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 0 to 9999 The cumulative run time can be modified or reset N N YivY vY v Y 5 108 Jcod in units of 10 hours 5 115 codes H95 DC Braking 0 Slow Y Y 1 Y Y N N N 5 49 Braking response mode 1 Quick 5 115 d codes H96 STOP Key Priority Data STOP key priority Start check function Y Y 0 YoY YY Y 5 115 Start Check Function 0 Disable Disable U codes 1 Enable Disable 2 Disable Enable d 3 Enable Enable y codes Drive control o 32 2 Refer Code Name Data setting range oe 8 2 see to 52 g Vit PG w o w Torque page 5 Vif PG PG control H97 Clear Alarm Data 0 Disable Ve N 0 Ys fies oes PEN Y 5 115 1 Enable Setting 1 clears alarm data and then returns to 0 H98 Protection Maintenance Function 0 to 255 Display data in decimal format Y Y 83 YLY
127. commercial power supply In the low speed range the motor cooling effect will be weakened so decrease the output torque of the motor when running the inverter in the low speed range E Motor noise When a general purpose motor is driven by an inverter the noise level is higher than that when it is driven by a commercial power supply To reduce noise raise carrier frequency of the inverter Operation at 60 Hz or higher can also result in higher noise level W Machine vibration When an inverter driven motor is mounted to a machine resonance may be caused by the natural frequencies of the motor driven machinery Driving a 2 pole motor at 60 Hz or higher may cause abnormal vibration If it happens do any of the following Consider the use of a rubber coupling or vibration proof rubber Use the inverter s jump frequency control feature to skip the resonance frequency zone s Use the vibration suppression related function codes that may be effective For details refer to the description of H80 in Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 1 7 1 3 3 Precautions in using special motors When using special motors note the followings E Explosion proof motors When driving an explosion proof motor with an inverter use a combination of a motor and an inverter that has been approved in advance B Submersible motors and pumps These motors have a larger rated current than general purpose motors Select an inverter whose rated output current is great
128. control capability high Enabling the automatic deceleration anti regenerative control may automatically increase the deceleration Rete time When a braking unit is connected disable the anti regenerative control The automatic deceleration control may be activated at the same time when a braking unit starts operation which may make the deceleration time fluctuate f the set deceleration time is too short the DC link bus voltage of the inverter rises quickly and consequently the automatic deceleration may not follow the voltage rise In such a case specify a longer deceleration time S3dO9 NOILONNA H70 Overload Prevention Control H70 specifies the decelerating rate of the output frequency to prevent a trip from occurring due to an overload This control decreases the output frequency of the inverter before the inverter trips due to a heat sink overheat or inverter overload with an alarm indication of 7 or 4 respectively It is useful for equipment such as pumps where a decrease in the output frequency leads to a decrease in the load and it is necessary to keep the motor running even when the output frequency drops 0 00 Decelerate the motor by deceleration time 1 F08 or 2 E11 0 01 to 100 0 Decelerate the motor by deceleration rate from 0 01 to 100 0 Hz s 999 Disable overload prevention control m Overload prevention control OLP E20 to E24 and E27 data 36 This output signal comes O
129. data 3 This output signal comes ON when the DC link bus voltage of the inverter drops below the specified undervoltage level and it goes OFF when the voltage exceeds the level This signal is ON also when the undervoltage protective function is activated so that the motor is in an abnormal stop state e g tripped When this signal is ON a run command is disabled if given W Torque polarity detected B D Function code data 4 The inverter issues the driving or braking polarity signal to this digital output judging from the internally calculated torque or torque command This signal goes OFF when the detected torque is a driving one and it goes ON when it is a braking one 5 79 W Inverter output limiting IOL Function code data 5 Inverter output limiting with delay JOL2 Function code data 22 The output signal JOL comes ON when the inverter is limiting the output frequency by activating any of the following actions minimum width of the output signal 100 ms The output signal JOL2 comes ON when any of the following output limiting operation continues for 20 ms or more Torque limiting F40 F41 E16 and E17 Maximum internal value Current limiting by software F43 and F44 Instantaneous overcurrent limiting by hardware H12 1 Automatic deceleration Anti regenerative control H69 Cote When the JOL signal is ON it may mean that the output frequency may have deviated from the frequency PS specified by the
130. data see Chapter 3 Section 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting i Factory default Funetiori Name Function code data CEU at code FRN GIB2A 4A FRN GIB 4E 200 V class series 200 V class series 60 0 Hz E Tus ieee Base frequency 1 400 V class series 400 V class series 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz Mot ti 200 V class series 200 V class series otor ratings c rc x Rated voltage 220 V a ery at base frequency 1 Meu on the nameplate of the 400 V class series 400 V class series mS 415 V 400 V cg Motor 1 Nominal applied motor capaci USE Rated capacity PP pacity PDS3 Motor 1 Rated current of nominal applied motor Rated current 200 V class series 200 V class series 3 60 0 Hz CTs B TET Maximum frequency l Machinery design values 400 V class series 400 V class series 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz C 77 Acceleration time 1 Note For a test driving of the motor 27 kW or below 6 00 s T Li N increase values so that they are longer 30 kW bove 20 00 Note than your machinery design values If or above 20 00 s conma Deceleration time 1 the specified time is short the inverter 22 kW or below 6 00 s tpm Note may not run the motor properly 30 kW or above 20 00 s When accessing the function code P02 take into account that changing the P02 data automatically updates the data of the function codes P03 P06 to P23 P53
131. detected one is out of the specified range d21 for the period specified by d22 the inverter judges it as a PG error Data setting for d23 however defines the detection conditions and the error processing after the error detection Data for d23 Detection condition Processing after error detection When the inverter cannot follow the speed The inverter outputs the PG error command even after the soft starting due to a detected signal PG ERR and continues to heavy overload or the like and the detected speed run is slow against the reference speed the inverter SM Ub The inverter enters the coast to stop state does not interpret this situation as a PG error outputting the HF alarm and also The inverter interprets the situation above as a PG outputs the PG error detected signal error PG ERR Enabling an operation limiting function such as the torque limit and droop control will increase the deviation Note caused by a huge gap between the reference speed and actual one In this case the inverter may trip interpreting this situation as a PG error depending on the running status To avoid this incident set the d23 data to 0 Continue to run to prevent the inverter from tripping even if any of those limiting functions is activated Zero Speed Control Refer to F23 ASR Switching Time Refer to A42 5 136 G deyo S3GdO9 NOILONNA d32 d33 Torque Control Speed limit 1 and Speed limit 2 Refe
132. display mode is not selected appropriately Possible Causes 1 An attempt was made to change function code data that cannot be changed when the inverter is running Check whether the keypad is properly connected to the inverter 2 Remove the keypad put it back and see whether the problem recurs 2 Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the problem recurs When running the inverter remotely ensure that the extension cable is securely connected both to the keypad and to the inverter gt Disconnect the cable reconnect it and see whether the problem recurs 9 deyo gt Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the problem per recurs Check and Measures Check the data of function code E52 Keypad Menu display mode gt Change the E52 data so that the desired menu appears ONILOOHS3 I8n04 L What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if the inverter is running with Menu 3 Drive Monitoring using the keypad and then confirm whether the data of the function codes can be changed when the motor is running by referring to the function code tables gt Stop the motor then change the data of the function codes Q The data of the function codes is protected Check the data of function code F00 Data Protection 2 Change the F00 data from Enable data protection 1 or 3 to Disable data protection 0 or 2 3 The WE KP terminal command Enable data
133. e g Insulok with 3 8 mm or less in width and 1 5 mm or less in thickness Cable tie Control circuit terminal block Wiring support Wiring for control circuit terminals Details of Section A Wiring for control circuit terminals Figure 2 19 Wiring Route and Fixing Position for the Control Circuit Wires Note Route the wiring of the control circuit terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as possible Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions Fix the control circuit wires with a cable tie inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the main circuit such as the terminal block of the main circuit 2 3 6 Setting up the slide switches A WARNINGA Before changing the switches or touching the control circuit terminal symbol plate turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below An electric shock may result if this warning is not heeded as there may be some residual electric charge in the DC bus capacitor even after the power has been turned OFF Switching the slide switches located on the control PCB allow
134. error Problem A communications error occurred between the option card and the inverter Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 There was a problem with the Check whether the connector on the option card is properly engaged with that of the connection between the option inverter card and the inverter gt Reload the option card into the inverter 2 Strong electrical noise Check whether appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of signal wires communications cables and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures 9 deyo 22 4 5 Option error An error detected by the option card Refer to the instruction manual of the option card for details 4 a BN O 23 4 amp Operation protection Problem An incorrect operation was attempted m Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 5 1 The 6 amp 9 key was pressed when Check that the 69 key was pressed when a run command had been entered from the 9 H96 1 or 3 input terminal or through the communications port z gt Ifthis was not intended check the setting of H96 2 The start check function was Check that any of the following operations has been performed with a run command activated when H96 2 or 3 being entered Turning the power ON Releasing the alarm Switching the enable communications link LE operation gt Review the running sequence to avoi
135. etc Auxiliary fr Auxiliary frequency input to be added to all reference frequencies 2 DEO ed given by frequency command 1 frequency command 2 command 2 multi frequency commands etc e m 3 PID command 1 Command sources such as temperature and pressure under PID i control It is also necessary to configure function code J02 5 PID feedback amount Feedback amounts such as temperature and pressure under PID control This is used to multiply the final frequency command value by this 6 Ratio setting value for use in the constant line speed control by calculating the winder diameter or in ratio operation with multiple inverters reU This is used when analog inputs are used as torque limiters Analog torque limit value A GQ Refer to F40 Torque Limiter 1 1 This is used when analog inputs are used as torque limiters c z O O Z Q O O m o Analog torqueilimit value B Refer to F40 Torque Limiter 1 1 10 Torie command Analog inputs to be used as torque commands under torque control q E Refer to H18 Torque Limiter Analog inputs to be used as torque current commands under torque 11 Torque current command control E Refer to H18 Torque Limiter By inputting analog signals from various sensors such as the temperature sensors in air conditioners to the inverter you can monitor the state of external devices via the communications link By using an appropriate display
136. for LD mode one rank higher capacity so configure the P02 data to match the applied motor rating as required 5 66 G deyo s3dO9 NOILONNA 5 2 2 E codes Extension Terminal Functions E01 to E07 Terminal X1 to X7 Function E98 Terminal FWD Function E99 Terminal REV Function Function codes E01 to E07 E98 and E99 allow you to assign commands to terminals X1 to X7 FWD and REV which are general purpose programmable digital input terminals These function codes may also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define how the inverter logic interprets either ON or OFF status of each terminal The default setting is normal logic system Active ON So explanations that follow are given in normal logic system Active ON The descriptions are in principle arranged in the numerical order of assigned data However highly relevant signals are collectively described where one of them first appears Refer to the function codes in the Related function codes column if any The FRENIC MEGA runs under V f control dynamic torque vector control V f control with speed sensor dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor vector control without speed sensor or vector control with speed sensor Some function codes apply exclusively to the specific drive control which is indicated by letters Y Applicable and N Not applicable in the Drive control column in the table given below Refer to p
137. frequency 1 before slip compensation Reference frequency Output frequency 1 before slip compensation 1 Output frequency 2 after slip compensation Reference frequency Output frequency 2 after slip compensation 2 Reference frequency Reference frequency Reference frequency 3 Motor speed Reference motor speed Motor speed 4 Load shaft speed Reference load shaft speed Load shaft speed 5 Line speed Reference line speed Line speed 7 Display speed 90 Reference display speed Display Speed E45 LCD Monitor Item selection E45 specifies the LCD monitor display mode to be applied when the inverter using the multi function keypad is in Running mode Data for E45 Function 0 Running status rotational direction and operation guide 1 Bar charts for output frequency current and calculated torque Example of display for E45 0 during running Running status Operation guide Hz A V r min m min KW X10 minsec PID v v v v v v v v v v v A A A A A a A FWD REV STOP REM LOC COMM JOG HAND Example of display for E45 1 during running Bar charts Hz A V r min m min KW X10 minsec PID v Y v w v Y v v v v v a a a A A A A A FWD REV STOP REM LOC COMM JOG HAND LED monitor indicators Rotational direction Indicators for running status and source of operation Output frequency Output current Calculated torque Full scale
138. frequency 1 F04 the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 and other pertinent motor parameters PO1 through P03 and P06 through P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning P04 When a special motor is driven or the load does not have sufficient rigidity the maximum torque might decrease or the motor operation might become unstable In such cases do not use auto torque boost but choose manual torque boost per F09 F37 0 or 1 Note m Auto energy saving operation H67 If the auto energy saving operation is enabled the inverter automatically controls the supply voltage to the motor to minimize the total power loss of motor and inverter Note that this feature may not be effective depending upon the motor or load characteristics Check the advantage of energy saving before you actually apply this feature to your machinery You can select whether applying this feature to constant speed operation only or applying to constant speed operation and accelerating decelerating operation Data for H67 Auto energy saving operation 0 Enable only during running at constant speed 1 Enable during running at constant speed or accelerating decelerating Note For accelerating decelerating enable only when the load is light If auto energy saving operation is enabled the response to a motor speed change from constant speed operation may be slow Do not use this feature for such m
139. frequency command because of this limiting function W Keypad operation enabled KP Function code data 8 This output signal comes ON when the keys are specified as the run command source Bi Inverter ready to run RDY Function code data 10 This output signal comes ON when the inverter becomes ready to run by completing hardware preparation such as initial charging of DC link bus capacitors and initialization of the control circuit and no protective functions are activated W Select AX terminal function AX Function code data 15 In response to a run command FWD this output signal controls the magnetic contactor on the commercial power supply side It comes ON when the inverter receives a run command and it goes OFF after the motor decelerates to stop with a stop command received This signal immediately goes OFF upon receipt of a coast to stop command or when an alarm occurs Li RtoL3T U VW 9 Power source yu pD Run command FWD ON Preparation for running E g Charging of capacitor Inverter status Motor speed W Universal DO U DO Function code data 27 Assigning this output signal to an inverter s output terminal and connecting the terminal to a digital input terminal of peripheral equipment via the RS 485 communications link or the fieldbus allows the inverter to send commands to the peripheral equipment The universal DO can also be used a
140. hours A52 Startup Counter for Motor 2 Indication of cumulative startup count Y N YIY YI Y Y 0000 to FFFF hex A53 Motor 2 X correction factor 1 0 to 300 Y Y1Y2 100 Y Y Y Y Y A54 96X correction factor 2 096 to 30096 Y YiY2 100 Y Y Y Y Y A55 Torque current under vector control 0 00 to 2000 A N Y1Y2 7 N N Y Y Y A56 Induced voltage factor under 50 to 100 N Y1Y2 85 NI IN Y Y Y vector control A57 Reserved 9 0 000 to 20 000 s Y v1Y2 7 7 The motor parameters are automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping des ination See Table C 9 These function codes are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes G deyo S3QO02 NOILONNA F codes E codes C codes P codes H codes A codes b codes r codes J codes d codes U codes y codes b codes Motor 3 Parameters o 2 ol amp Drive control 3 ze a Default Code Name Data setting range gc 8 setting S2 S Vit PG w o w Torque 5 Vit PG PG control b01 Maximum Frequency 3 25 0 to 500 0 Hz N Y 1 YYY LY Y b02 Base Frequency 3 25 0 to 500 0 Hz N Y 500 Y Y Y Y Y b03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 3 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage N Y2 1 Y Y
141. i Auto search for idling motor speed to follow 5 101 H11 H12 H13 H15 W Starting Mode Auto search delay time 1 H49 Data setting range 0 0 to 10 0 s Auto search for the idling motor speed will become unsuccessful if it is done while the motor retains residual voltage It is therefore necessary to leave the motor for an enough time for residual voltage to disappear H49 specifies that time 0 0 to 10 0 sec At the startup triggered by a run command ON auto search starts with the delay specified by H49 Using H49 therefore eliminates the need of the run command timing control when two inverters share a single motor to drive it alternately allow the motor to coast to a stop and restart it under auto search control at each time of inverter switching W Starting Mode Auto search delay time 2 H46 Data setting range 0 1 to 10 0 s At the restart after a momentary power failure at the start by turning the terminal command BX Coast to a stop OFF and ON or at the restart by auto reset the inverter applies the delay time specified by H46 The inverter will not start unless the time specified by H46 has elapsed even if the starting conditions are satisfied Power failure Recovery Y Y DC link bus voltage Motor speed Output frequency Output frequency Under auto search control the inverter searches the motor speed with the voltage applied at the motor start and the current flowing in the motor b
142. i memory At the time of restart therefore the inverter runs at the frequency without compensation so that a large overshoot may occur d51 to d55 Reserved for particular manufacturers d68 d69 d99 These function codes d51 to d55 d68 d69 and d99 are displayed but they are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes d59 d61 Command Pulse Rate Input d62 d63 Pulse input format Filter time constant Pulse count factor 1 and Pulse count factor 2 Refer to F01 d70 Speed Control Limiter d70 specifies a limiter for the PI value output calculated in speed control sequence under V f control with speed sensor or dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor A PI value output is within the slip frequency x maximum torque in a normally controlled state If an abnormal state such as a temporary overload arises the PI value output greatly fluctuates and it may take a long time for the PI value output to return to the normal level To suppress such abnormal operation the PI value output can be limited with d70 Data setting range 0 to 100 96 assuming the maximum frequency as 100 5 2 9 U codes Application functions 3 u00 Customizable Logic Mode selection U01 to U50 Customizable Logic Step 1 to 10 Setting U71 to U75 Customizable Logic Output Signal 1 to 5 Output selection U81 to U85 Customizable Logic Output Signal 1 to 5 Function selection U91 C
143. inverter serves as a terminating device in the network gt Configure the terminating resistor switch es SW2 SW3 for RS 485 communication correctly That is turn the switch es to ON 26 Data saving error during undervoltage Problem The inverter failed to save data such as the frequency commands and PID commands which are specified through the keypad or the output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands when the power was turned OFF Possible Causes 1 During data saving performed when the power was turned OFF the voltage fed to the control PCB dropped in an abnormally short period due to the rapid discharge of the DC link bus What to Check and Suggested Measures Check how long it takes for the DC link bus voltage to drop to the preset voltage when the power is turned OFF 2 Remove whatever is causing the rapid discharge of the DC link bus voltage After pressing the key and releasing the alarm return the data of the relevant function codes such as the frequency commands and PID commands specified through the keypad or the output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands back to the original values and then restart the operation Possible Causes 2 Inverter operation affected by strong electrical noise when the power was turned OFF What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and
144. mode is selected by F80 the current limit for each mode is automatically specified If 160 145 or 130 or over of overcurrent instantaneously flows and the output frequency decreases by this current limit that is undesired consider increasing the current limit level If F43 1 the current limiter is enabled only during constant speed operation If F43 2 the current limiter is enabled during both of acceleration and constant speed operation Choose F43 1 if you need to run the inverter at full capability during acceleration and to limit the output current during constant speed operation W Mode selection F43 F43 selects the motor running state in which the current limiter will be active Running states that enable the current limiter Data for F43 r ie During acceleration During constant speed During deceleration a 0 Disable Disable Disable ps 1 Disable Enable Disable 2 Enable Enable Disable W Level F44 F44 specifies the operation level at which the output current limiter becomes activated in ratio to the inverter rating Data setting range 20 to 200 in ratio to the inverter rating Note The inverter s rated current differs depending upon the HD MD or LD mode selected c z O e Z Q J m o W Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting Mode selection H12 H12 specifies whether the inverter invokes the current limit processing or enters the overcurrent trip
145. motors 8 series 6 series and Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector control next specify the motor rated capacity with P02 and then initialize the motor parameters with H03 This process automatically configures the related motor parameters P01 P03 P06 through P23 P53 through P56 and H46 The data of F09 Torque Boost 1 H13 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart time and F11 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Overload detection level depends on the motor capacity but the process stated above does not change them Specify and adjust the data during a test run if needed 5 98 G deyo S3GdO9 NOILONNA 5 2 5 H codes High Performance Functions H03 Data Initialization H03 initializes the current function code data to the factory defaults or initializes the motor parameters To change the H03 data it is necessary to press the 3 keys or 69 keys simultaneous keying Data for H03 Function 0 Disable initialization Settings manually made by the user will be retained 1 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults 2 Initialize motor 1 parameters in accordance with P02 Rated capacity and P99 Motor 1 selection 3 Initialize motor 2 parameters in accordance with A16 Rated capacity and A39 Motor 2 selection 4 Initialize motor 3 parameters in accordance with b16 Rated capacity and b39 Motor 3 selection 5 Initialize motor 4 param
146. normal logic system is functionally equivalent to active OFF signal the function takes effect 1f the terminal is opened in the negative logic system Active ON signals can be switched to active OFF signals and vice versa with the function code data setting except some signals To set the negative logic system for an input or output terminal enter data of 1000s by adding 1000 to the data for the normal logic in the corresponding function code Example Coast to a stop command BX assigned to any of digital input terminals X1 to X7 using any of function codes E01 through E07 Function code data Description 7 Turning BX ON causes the motor to coast to a stop Active ON 1007 Turning BX OFF causes the motor to coast to a stop Active OFF W Drive control The FRENIC MEGA runs under any of the following drive controls Some function codes apply exclusively to the specific drive control which is indicated by letters Y Applicable and N Not applicable in the Drive control column in the function code tables given on the following pages Abbreviation in Drive control column in function code tables Vif PG V f w o PG w PG Control target H18 Speed Frequency for V f and PG V f Drive control F42 V f control Dynamic torque vector control V f control with speed sensor Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor Vector control without speed sensor Vector c
147. not perform these functions W Thermistor for motor Level H27 Data setting range 0 00 to 5 00 V H27 specifies the detection level expressed in voltage for the temperature sensed by the PTC thermistor The alarm temperature at which the overheat protection becomes activated depends on the characteristics of the PTC thermistor The internal resistance of the thermistor will significantly change at the alarm temperature The detection level voltage is specified based on the change of the internal resistance PTC thermistor ETTM internal resistance Rp2 Temperature Alarm temperature Suppose that the internal resistance of the PTC thermistor at the alarm temperature is Rp the detection level voltage Vv is calculated by the expression below Set the result V to function code H27 Rp VV 37000 Rp 10 5 V 5 104 H28 Connect the PTC thermistor as shown below The voltage obtained by dividing the input voltage on terminal V2 with a set of internal resistors is compared with the detection level voltage specified by H27 13 Control circuit C 10 VDC Resistor Operation level 27kQ Motor V2 acm Companion e O gt External BIB 4 alarm thermistor Hee Olt gt OV When using the terminal V2 for PTC NTC thermistor input also turn SW5 on the control printed circuit hele board to the PTC NTC side
148. of 1 Hz The following gives the conversion formula between the PID command value and the data to be specified Data to be specified PID command x Maximum frequency F03 100 Data to be specified C08 C12 C16 Maximum frequency F03 PID command 96 x 100 Manual speed command SS8 SS4 Selected frequency command Other than multi frequency C05 Multi frequency 1 C06 Multi frequency 2 C07 Multi frequency 3 Jogging Frequency H54 H55 Acceleration Deceleration Time Jogging d09 to d13 Speed Control Jogging To jog or inch the motor for positioning a workpiece specify the jogging conditions using the jogging related function codes C20 H54 H55 and d09 through d13 beforehand switch the inverter to the ready for jogging state and then enter a run command B Switching to the ready for jogging state Turning ON the Ready for jogging terminal command JOG Function code data 10 readies the inverter for jogging Chote The inverter s status transition between ready for jogging and normal operation is possible only when the inverter is stopped When the run command source is the keypad F02 0 2 or 3 simultaneous keying Go e keys on the keypad is functionally equivalent to this command Pressing these keys toggles between the normal operation and ready for jogging 5 93 B Starting jogging operation Pressing the key or turning the FWD or REV terminal com
149. or 75 kW or above for 400 V class series has locked 5 80 G deyo c z O e Z Q J m o W Under PID control PID CTL Function code data 43 his output signal comes ON when PID control is enabled Cancel PID control Hz PID OFF and a run command is ON Refer to the description of J01 When PID control is enabled the inverter may stop due to the slow flowrate stopping function or other reasons with the PID CTL signal being ON As long as the PID CTL signal is ON PID control is effective so the inverter may abruptly resume its operation depending on the feedback value in PID control Note A WARNING When PID control is enabled even if the inverter stops its output during operation because of sensor signals or other reasons operation will resume automatically Design your machinery so that safety is ensured even in such cases Otherwise an accident could occur W Running forward FRUN Function code data 52 Running reverse RRUN Function code data 53 Output signal Assigned data Running forward Inverter stopped 52 ON OFF OFF FRUN RRUN 53 OFF ON OFF W n remote operation RMT Function code data 54 This output signal comes ON when the inverter switches from local to remote mode QJ For details of switching between remote and local modes refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 2 2 Remote and local modes W Terminal C1 wire break C1OFF Function cod
150. or E depending on the shipping destination 8 1 g deu SNOILVOIJIO3dS 8 1 2 Three phase 400 V class series HD High Duty mode inverters for heavy load 0 4 to 75 kW Item EXEXEN wem ee e Ten s e per D eT T5 T8 T4 T Nominal applied ur 3 7 kW 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 4 0 5 5 7 5 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Output rating DMEJEICHCIEREREREERENCHCACIEEO S Rated voltage V 4 Rated Rated voltage V 4 Three phase 380 to 480 V with AVR function ZiR Q garena 15 zs eo se o os e e a eT 5 Te E T5 T2 T79 o Overload capability 150 1 min 200 3 0 s 5 Voltage frequency 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz z Allowable o 0 o z voltage frequency Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 6 Frequency 5 to 5 Q c crac EMCHENEREIEHEDIERESIER EIEHEI EHECH HER Torque 6 35x 1015 15 Braking transistor Buin Built in braking resistor Braking time s Duty cycle EM DC reactor DCR Applicable safety UL508C C22 2No 14 EN61800 5 1 2003 EN954 1 Cat 3 standards Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL open type IP00 UL open type Cooling method 90 to 630 kW Item Specifications Eye ERN ersa so ro 752 160 200 zm HO ss ss 4 amp 9 9 69 ms applied ae M Output rating c E O O ERRE Rated voltage V Three phase 380 to 480 V with AVR function e e I aes we z0 sw 57 s eo ee 59 75 T9 T9 Overload capability 15
151. other source the inverter inherits the current frequency that has applied before switching providing smooth switching and shockless running G deyo 2 Using analog input F01 1 to 3 or 5 S3dO9 NOILONNA When any analog input voltage input to terminals 12 and V2 or current input to terminal C1 is selected by F01 it is possible to arbitrarily specify the reference frequency by multiplying the gain and adding the bias The polarity can be selected and the filter time constant and offset can be adjusted Adjustable elements of frequency command 1 Filter Input terminal Input range Polarity time constant Data for F01 12 C1 12 C1 Sum of the two values V2 m Offset C31 C36 C41 C31 C36 or C41 specifies an offset for analog input voltage or current The offset also applies to signals sent from the external equipment W Filter time constant C33 C38 C43 C33 C38 or C43 specifies a filter time constant for analog input voltage or current Choose an appropriate value for the time constant taking into account the response speed of the mechanical system since a large time constant slows down the response When the input voltage fluctuates due to noise specify a larger time constant m Polarity C35 C45 C35 or C45 specifies the input range for analog input voltage Data for C35 C45 Terminal input specifications 0 10 to 10 VDC
152. output terminals secondary circuits of the inverter Minimize the wiring length between the inverter and motor 10 to 20 m or less 6 When an output circuit filter is inserted in the secondary circuit or the wiring between the inverter and the motor is long a voltage loss occurs due to reactance of the filter or wiring so that the insufficient voltage may cause output current oscillation or a lack of motor output torque To avoid it select the constant torque load by setting the function code F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 to 1 and keep the inverter output voltage at a higher level by configuring H50 H52 Non linear V f Pattern Frequency and H51 H53 Non linear V f Pattern Voltage E Precautions for connection of peripheral equipment 1 Phase advancing capacitors for power factor correction Do not mount a phase advancing capacitor for power factor correction in the inverter s input primary or output secondary circuit Mounting it in the input primary circuit takes no effect To correct the inverter power factor use an optional DC reactor DCR Mounting it in the output secondary circuit causes an overcurrent trip disabling operation An overvoltage trip that occurs when the inverter is stopped or running with a light load is assumed to be due to surge current generated by open close of phase advancing capacitors in the power system An optional DC AC reactor DCR ACR is recommended as
153. point on the V f pattern The following description includes setups required for the non linear V f pattern At high frequencies the motor impedance may increase resulting in an insufficient output voltage and a decrease in output torque To prevent this problem use F06 Maximum Output Voltage 1 to increase the voltage Note however that the inverter cannot output voltage exceeding its input power voltage V f point Furietign code Remarks Frequency Voltage The setting of the maximum output voltage is disabled when the auto torque boost torque vector control vector control without speed sensor or vector control with speed sensor is selected Maximum frequency Base frequency Non linear V f pattern 3 Disabled when the auto torque boost torque vector Non linear V f pattern 2 control vector control without speed sensor or vector control with speed sensor is selected Non linear V f pattern 1 5 36 Examples W Normal linear V f pattern Output voltage V Maximum output voltage 1 F06 Rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 Output frequency Hz Base Maximum frequency 1 frequency 1 F04 F03 m V f pattern with three non linear points Output voltage V Maximum output voltage 1 F06 EPA E R O O S E E E E DNE Rated voltage at base frequency 4 F05 PEENTE IETA AEA CPN EESAN EET OAU Non linear V f pattern 3 Voltage H66 mmm Non linear V f pattern 2 Voltage
154. port used for connecting a keypad RS 485 communications link port 2 Via the terminals DX DX and SD on the control PCB Fieldbus option Via fieldbus option using FA protocol such as DeviceNet or PROFIBUS DP Command sources specified by H30 Communications link function Mode selection Data for H30 Frequency command Run command 0 Inverter itself F01 C30 Inverter itself F02 1 RS 485 communications link port 1 Inverter itself F02 m 2 Inverter itself F01 C30 RS 485 communications link port 1 a 3 RS 485 communications link port 1 RS 485 communications link port 1 ix 4 RS 485 communications link port 2 Inverter itself F02 2 5 RS 485 communications link port 2 RS 485 communications link port 1 6 Inverter itself F01 C30 RS 485 communications link port 2 7 RS 485 communications link port 1 RS 485 communications link port 2 8 RS 485 communications link port 2 RS 485 communications link port 2 Command sources specified by y98 Bus link function Mode selection Data for y98 Frequency command Follow H30 data Run command Follow H30 data Via fieldbus option Follow H30 data Follow H30 data Via fieldbus option Via fieldbus option Via fieldbus option c z O O z Q O O m o Combination of command sources Frequency command Inverter itself Via RS 485 communications link port 1 Via
155. routing of control and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures After pressing the G5 key and releasing the alarm return the data of the relevant function codes such as the frequency commands and PID commands specified through the keypad or the output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands back to the original values and then restart the operation 3 The control circuit failed 27 4 H Hardware error Check if 4 occurs each time the power is turned ON gt The control PCB on which the CPU is mounted is defective Contact your Fuji Electric representative Problem The LSI on the power printed circuit board malfunctions Possible Causes 1 The inverter capacity setting on the control printed circuit board is wrong What to Check and Suggested Measures It is necessary to set the inverter capacity correctly gt Contact your Fuji Electric representative 2 Data stored in the power printed circuit board memory is corrupted It is necessary to replace the power printed circuit board 9 deyo gt Contact your Fuji Electric representative 3 The control printed circuit board is misconnected to the power printed circuit board 28 Speed mismatch or excessive speed deviation Problem An excessive deviation appears between the speed command and the detected speed Possible Causes 1 Incorrect setting of function code data It is nece
156. s product The breakdown was caused by the product other than Fuji s product such as the customer s equipment or software design etc Concerning the Fuji s programmable products the breakdown was caused by a program other than a program supplied by this company or the results from using such a program The breakdown was caused by modifications or repairs affected by a party other than Fuji Electric 9 The breakdown was caused by improper maintenance or replacement using consumables etc specified in the operation manual or catalog etc The breakdown was caused by a science or technical problem that was not foreseen when making practical application of the product at the time it was purchased or delivered The product was not used in the manner the product was originally intended to be used The breakdown was caused by a reason which is not this company s responsibility such as lightning or other disaster 2 Furthermore the warranty specified herein shall be limited to the purchased or delivered product alone 3 The upper limit for the warranty range shall be as specified in item 1 above and any damages damage to or loss of machinery or equipment or lost profits from the same etc consequent to or resulting from breakdown of the purchased or delivered product shall be excluded from coverage by this warranty 3 Trouble diagnosis As a rule the customer is requested to carry out a preliminary trouble diag
157. specifying a gain or bias alone without changing any base points is the same as that of Fuji conventional inverters of FRENIC5000G11S P11S series FVR E11S series etc 5 31 In the case of bipolar input terminal 12 with C35 0 terminal V2 with C45 0 Setting C35 and C45 data to 0 enables terminal 12 and V2 to be used for bipolar input 10 V to 10 V respectively When both F18 Bias and C50 Bias base point are set to 0 the negative and positive voltage inputs produce reference frequencies symmetric about the origin point as shown below Reference frequency Gain C32 OA REIS a Point Boe i3 ZO l Terminal 12 input i Gain 10 V Terminal V2 input base point C34 Note Configuring F18 Bias and C50 Bias base point to specify an arbitrary value Points Al A2 and A3 gives the bias as shown below Reference frequency Terminal 12 input 10V 10v Terminal V2 input Point As Note reference frequency can be specified not only with the frequency Hz but also with other menu items depending on the setting of function code E48 3 to 5 or 7 3 Using digital input signals UP DOWN F01 7 When the UP DOWN control is selected for frequency setting with a run command ON turning the terminal command UP or DOWN ON causes the output frequency to increase or decrease respectively within the range from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency as listed below To enable the UP DOWN con
158. speed sensor 6 Vector control with speed sensor r15 Motor 4 No of poles 2 to 22 poles N Y1Y2 4 YX YTY Y r16 Rated capacity 0 01 to 1000 kW when r39 0 2 3 or 4 N Y1Y2 7 Y vY vi v Y 0 01 to 1000 HP when r39 1 r17 Rated current 0 00 to 2000A N Y1Y2 7 Y vY vi v Y r18 Auto tuning 0 Disable N N 0 WN ETY Y 1 Tune while the motor stops R1 X and rated slip frequency 2 Tune while the motor is rotating under V f control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c 3 Tune while the motor is rotating under vector control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c Available when the vector control is enabled r20 No load current 0 00 to 2000 A N Y1Y2 7 Y vY vi v Y r21 96R1 0 00 to 50 00 Y Y1Y2 7 Y LY vY v Y r22 X 0 00 to 50 00 Y Y1Y2 7 Y Y vY v Y r23 Slip compensation gain for driving 0 0 to 200 0 Y Y 10000 Y Y Y Y N r24 Slip compensation response time 0 01 to 10 00 s Y Y1Y2 0 12 Y Y N N N r25 Slip compensation gain for braking 0 0 to 200 0 Y Y 10000 Y Y Y Y N r26 Rated slip frequency 0 00 to 15 00 Hz N Y1Y2 7 Y vY vi v N r27 Iron loss factor 1 0 0096 to 20 00 Y v1Y2 7 Y Y vYi v Y r28 Iron loss factor 2 0 0096 to 20 00 Y Y1Y2 000 Y Y Y Y Y r29 Ir
159. speed sensor A15 Motor 2 No of poles 2 to 22 poles N Y1Y2 4 Y Y YY Y A16 Rated capacity 0 01 to 1000 kW when A39 0 2 3 or 4 N Y1Y2 7 YII TY X Y 0 01 to 1000 HP when A39 1 A17 Rated current 0 00 to 2000 A N Y1Y2 7 Y vY vi v Y 1 The factory default differs depending upon the shipping destination See Table A 3 The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity See Table B 4 The motor rated current is automatically set See Table C function code P03 5 5 0 min for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below 10 0 min for those with 30 kW or above 7 The motor parameters are automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping destination See Table C 5 o i l 2 perauit Drive control Refer Code Name Data setting range gc 8 setting to Se S Vit PG w o w Torque page amp Aa Vit PG PG control o A18 Motor 2 Auto tuning 0 Disable N N 0 YTY Y Y 1 Tune while the motor stops R1 X and rated slip frequency 2 Tune while the motor is rotating under V f control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c 3 Tune while the motor is rotating under vector control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic s
160. stable operation with constant output frequency W V f control with slip compensation active Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics decreasing the motor rotation The inverter s slip compensation function first presumes the slip value of the motor based on the motor torque generated and raises the output frequency to compensate for the decrease in motor rotation This prevents the motor from decreasing the rotation due to the slip That is this function is effective for improving the motor speed control accuracy Function code Operation Rated slip frequency Specify the rated slip frequency Adjust the slip compensation amount for driving Slip compensation gain for driving Slip compensation amount for driving Rated slip x Slip compensation gain for driving Adjust the slip compensation amount for braking Slip compensation gain for braking Slip compensation amount for braking Rated slip x Slip compensation gain for braking Specify the slip compensation response time Slip cothpe sation response tite Basically there is no need to modify the default setting To improve the accuracy of slip compensation perform auto tuning H68 enables or disables the slip compensation function according to the motor driving conditions Motor driving conditions Motor driving frequency zone Data for H68 Accel Decel Constant speed Base frequency or below Abo
161. stopped 0 Specified value 1 Output value Y Y 0 Y Y vYi Y Y 5 87 E45 LCD Monitor Item selection 0 Running status rotational direction and operation guide Y Y 0 Y Y vY Y Y 1 Bar charts for output frequency current and calculated torque E46 Language selection Multi function keypad option X Y 1 Y x Yo px Y 5 88 Type TP G1 Type TP G1C 0 Japanese 0 Chinese 1 English 1 English 2 German 2 Japanese 3 French 3 Korean 4 Spanish 5 Italian E47 Contrast control O Low to 10 High Y Y 5 Y YtY v Y E48 LED Monitor Speed monitor item 0 Output frequency 1 Before slip compensation Y Y 0 Y xo qo Y 5 86 1 Output frequency 2 After slip compensation 5 88 2 Reference frequency 3 Motor speed in r min 4 Load shaft speed in r min 5 Line speed in m min 7 Display speed in 96 E50 Coefficient for Speed Indication 0 01 to 200 00 Y Y 3000 Y Y Y Y Y 5 88 E51 Display Coefficient for Input 0 000 Cancel reset 0 001 to 9999 Y Y 0010 Y Y Y Y Y Watt hour Data Keypad Menu display mode 0 Function code data editing mode Menus 0 1 and Y Y 0 Y xp Y Y 7 1 Function code data check mode Menu 2 and 7 2 Full menu mode E54 Frequency Detection 3 Level 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Y Y 1 Yo Ye Y Y 5 82 5 89 E55 Current Detection 3 Level 0 00 Disable Y Y1Y2 4 Y wp Y Y 5 83 Current value of 196 to 20096 of the inverter rated current 5 89 E56 Timer 0 01 to 600 00 s Y Y 1000 Y Y Y Y Y E61 Term
162. sure to stop the motor and remove the front cover with the inverter power OFF Check part Environment Table 7 1 List of Periodic Inspections Check item 1 Check the surrounding temperature humidity vibration and atmosphere dust gas oil mist or water drops 2 Check that tools or other foreign materials or dangerous objects are not left around the equipment How to inspect 1 Check visually or measure using apparatus 2 Visual inspection Evaluation criteria 1 The standard specifications must be satisfied 2 No foreign or dangerous objects are left Input voltage Check that the input voltages of the main and control circuit are correct Measure the input voltages using a multimeter or the like The standard specifications must be satisfied Keypad 1 Check that the display is clear 2 Check that there is no missing part in the displayed characters 1 2 Visual inspection 1 2 The display can be read and there is no fault Structure such as frame and cover Check for 1 Abnormal noise or excessive vibration 2 Loose bolts at clamp sections 3 Deformation and breakage 4 Discoloration caused by overheat 5 Contamination and accumulation of dust or dirt 1 Visual or auditory inspection 2 Retighten 3 4 5 Visual inspection 1 2 3 4 5 No abnormalities Main circuit 1 Check that bolts and screws are tight and not missing
163. switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 2 15 Circuit Configuration Using a PLC Digital input Q For details about the slide switch setting refer to Section 2 3 6 Setting up the slide switches Note W For inputting a pulse train through the digital input terminal X7 Inputting from a pulse generator with an open collector transistor output Stray capacity on the wiring between the pulse generator and the inverter may disable transmission of the pulse train As a countermeasure against this problem insert a pull up resistor between the open collector output signal terminal X7 and the power source terminal terminal PLC if the switch selects the SINK mode input insert a pull down resistor between the output signal and the digital common terminal terminal CM if the switch selects the SOURCE mode input A recommended pull up down resistor is 1kQ 2 W Check if the pulse train is correctly transmitted because stray capacity is significantly affected by the wire types and wiring conditions H23LH3ANI JHL SNIHIM ANY ONILNNOW Analog Both terminals output monitor signals for analog DC voltage 0 to 10 V or analog DC monitor current 4 to 20 mA The output form VO IO for each of FM1 and FM2 can be switched with the slide switches on the control PCB and the function codes as listed below Terminal function is Output form Content is specified by Analog DC voltage Analog DC current
164. take up roll r1 Speed v Y Speed v in winding direction Inverter Reduction ratio a b When the motor shaft rotates b times the take c up roll shaft rotates a Speed detector LU times radius r2 Encoder Reduction ratio c d I F d When the speed detector shaft ca rotates d times the encoder shaft rotates c times A Speed reduction ratio between motor shaft and take up roll shaft a b Speed reduction ratio between speed detector shaft and encoder shaft c d Radius of take up roll before winding r m Radius of speed detector r m A B phase or B phase Setting the Reduction Ratio Function code Settings Encoder pulse resolution Encoder pulse resolution P R to be set in hexadecimal Pulse count factor 1 Speed reduction ratio of the whole machinery load ue D E pee n a c Pul nt factor 2 PSSSON E d16 Denominator factor for the speed reduction ratio K1 rl x a x c d17 Numerator factor for the speed reduction ratio K2 r2 x b x d 5 137 W Peripheral speed line speed command Under constant peripheral speed control speed commands should be given as peripheral speed line speed ones Setting with digital inputs To digitally specify a peripheral speed line speed in m min make the following settings Function code Settings LED monitor 5 Line speed in m min Coefficient for speed indication _ 240m xa xr
165. target H74 Under vector control the inverter can limit motor generating torque or output power as well as a torque current default Data for H74 Control target 0 Motor generating torque limit 1 Torque current limit 2 Output power limit Torque A Torque pattern when the torque DUE PME QA 100 rating current limit is 100 rating Torque pattern when the torque limit is 50 rating Torque pattern when the power limit is 50 rating Pk Speed 100 rating 200 rating 5 59 W Torque Limiter Target quadrants H75 H75 selects the configuration of target quadrants Drive brake Forward reverse rotation in which the specified torque limiter s is activated from Drive brake torque limit Same torque limit for all four quadrants and Upper lower torque limits shown in the table below Data for H75 Target quadrants 0 Drive brake 1 Same for all four quadrants 2 Upper lower limits Torque limiter A applies to driving both of forward and reverse and torque limiter B to braking both of forward and reverse Torque limiter A applies to all four quadrants that is the same torque limit applies to both driving Second quadrant Reverse braking Torque limiter B First quadrant Forward driving Torque limiter A Torque limiter A Third quadrant Reverse driving and braking in the forward and reverse rotations Second quadrant Reverse braking Tor
166. that are faulty gt Connect the external circuit wires to terminals 13 12 correctly 11 C1 and V2 Possible Causes 9 A frequency command with higher priority than the one attempted was active What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the higher priority run command with Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad referring to the block diagram of the frequency command block refer to the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Chapter 6 gt Correct any incorrect function code data e g cancel the higher priority run command 10 The upper and lower frequencies for the frequency limiters were set incorrectly Check the data of function codes F15 Frequency limiter High and F16 Frequency limiter Low 2 Change the settings of F15 and F16 to the correct ones 11 The coast to stop command was effective Check the data of function codes E01 through E07 E98 and E99 and the input signal status using Menu 74 I O Checking on the keypad gt Release the coast to stop command setting 12 Broken wires incorrect connection or poor contact with the motor Check the wiring Measure the output current gt Repair the wires to the motor or replace them 13 Overload Measure the output current gt Reduce the load In winter the load tends to increase Check whether any mechanical brake is activated gt Release the mechanical brake if any
167. that the motor vibration stops 2 Make the output wires as short as possible 5 The machinery is hunting due to vibration caused by low rigidity of the load Or the current is irregularly oscillating due to special motor parameters Once disable all the automatic control systems such as auto torque boost auto energy saving operation overload prevention control current limiter torque limiter automatic deceleration anti regenerative control auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation dynamic torque vector control droop control overload stop function speed control online tuning notch filter observer and then check that the motor vibration comes to a stop gt Disable the functions causing the vibration gt Readjust the output current fluctuation damping gain H80 gt Readjust the speed control systems d01 through d06 gt Decrease the carrier frequency F26 or set the tone to 0 F27 0 5 Grating sound is heard from Check that the motor vibration is suppressed if you decrease the level of F26 Motor sound Carrier frequency or set F27 Motor sound Tone to 0 9 deyo the motor or the motor sound fluctuates Possible Causes 1 The specified carrier frequency is too low Check the data of function codes F26 Motor sound Carrier frequency and F27 What to Check and Suggested Measures Motor sound Tone gt Increase the carrier frequency F26 gt Ch
168. the overlapped bands as the bottom frequency and the highest as the upper limit Refer to the figure on the lower right Internal reference Internal reference frequency frequency 7 4 Jump frequency Band Ae C04 vet Jump Actual Jum n frequency Band Jump jump irequehcy C04 frequency 3 band Ban Jump C03 C04 frequency 2 Jump q y frequency Jump frequency 2 C02 Band Jump frequency 1 C04 Jump frequency 1 C01 C01 y gt Reference frequency W Jump frequencies 1 2 and 3 C01 C02 and C03 Data setting range 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Reference frequency Specify the center of the jump frequency band Setting to 0 0 results in no jump frequency band W Jump frequency hysteresis width C04 Data setting range 0 0 to 30 0 Hz Specify the jump frequency hysteresis width Setting to 0 0 results in no jump frequency band C05 to C19 Multi frequency 1 to 15 W These function codes specify 15 frequencies required for driving the motor at frequencies 1 to 15 Turning terminal commands SS7 SS2 SS4 and SS8 ON OFF selectively switches the reference frequency of the inverter in 15 steps To use these features you need to assign SS1 2 SS4 and SS8 Select multi frequency to the digital input terminals with C05 to C19 data 0 1 2 and 3 5 92 C20 W Multi frequency 1 to 15 C05 through C19 Data setting range 0 00 to 500 00 Hz The combination of S7 82 SS4 a
169. the FWD and REV to the FWD or REV with F02 being set to 1 be sure to turn the target terminal OFF beforehand otherwise the motor may unintentionally rotate W 3 wire operation with external input signals digital input terminal commands The default setting of the FWD and REV are 2 wire Assigning the terminal command HLD self holds the forward FWD or reverse REV run command to enable 3 wire inverter operation Short circuiting the HLD assigned terminal and CM 1 e when HLD is ON self holds the first FWD or REV at its rising edge Turning the HLD OFF releases the self holding When no HLD is assigned 2 wire operation involving only FWD and REV takes effect Q For details about HLD refer to E01 to E07 data 6 5 35 Output Eu FWD REV HLD ON ON In addition to the run command sources described above higher priority command sources including remote and local mode see Section 7 3 6 and communications link are provided For details refer to the block diagrams in Chapter 6 in FRENIC MEGA User s Manual F03 Maximum Frequency 1 G deyo F03 specifies the maximum frequency to limit the output frequency Specifying the maximum frequency exceeding the rating of the equipment driven by the inverter may cause damage or a dangerous situation Make sure that the maximum frequency setting matches the equipment rating Data setting range 25 0 to 500 0 Hz Cote For MD and LD mode inverters set the maximum f
170. the KEYPAD CONTROL LED continues blinking and the LALM signal remains ON 3 4 Programming Mode The Programming mode provides you with these functions setting and checking function code data monitoring maintenance information and checking input output I O signal status The functions can be easily selected with the menu driven system Table 3 4 lists menus available in Programming mode The leftmost digit numerals of each letter string on the LED monitor indicates the corresponding menu number and the remaining three digits indicate the menu contents When the inverter enters Programming mode from the second time on the menu selected last in Programming mode will be displayed Table 3 4 Menus Available in Programming Mode LED monitor Main functions Refer to deyo Section Quick Setup Fn Displays only basic function codes to customize the inverter operation 341 F codes Fundamental functions E codes Extension terminal functions C codes Control functions P codes Motor 1 parameters H codes High performance functions Selecting each of these function codes enables its data b codes Motor 3 parameters to be displayed changed Section 3 4 2 Data Setting A codes Motor 2 parameters QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOILV3H3dO r codes Motor 4 parameters J codes Application functions 1 d codes Application functions 2 U codes Application functions 3 y codes
171. the appropriate values from the test report of the motor or by calling the manufacturer of the motor Performing auto tuning automatically sets these parameters Rated slip frequency Convert the value obtained from the motor manufacturer to Hz using the following expression and enter the converted value Note The motor rating given on the nameplate sometimes shows a larger value i Synchronous speed Rated speed Rated slip frequency Hz x Base frequency Synchronous speed 4 For details about the slip compensation control refer to the description of F42 P13 to P15 Motor 1 Iron loss factors 1 to 3 P13 to P15 compensates the iron loss caused inside the motor under vector control with speed sensor in order to improve the torque control accuracy The combination of P99 Motor 1 selection and P02 Motor 1 rated capacity data determines the standard value Basically there is no need to modify the setting P16 to P20 Motor 1 Magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 P21 to P23 Motor 1 Magnetic saturation extension factors a to c These function codes specify the characteristics of the exciting current to generate magnetic flux inside the motor and the characteristics of the magnetic flux generated The combination of P99 Motor 1 selection and P02 Motor 1 rated capacity data determines the standard value Performing auto tuning while the motor is rotating P04 2 or 3 specifies these factors automatically P53 P54
172. the base ITeqnerieg P21 through P23 X correction factors 1 and 2 P53 and P54 No load current P06 Primary resistance R1 P07 Leakage reactance X P08 Rated slip frequency P12 performs ding win the Magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 P16 to P20 1 0 motor runtung at 20 S ORNS Magnetic saturation extension factors a to c base frequency twice P21 to P23 X correction factors 1 and 2 P53 and P54 Q For details of auto tuning refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 1 Running the Motor for a Test After tuning while the motor ees eat is stopped the inverter motor is rotating under vector control In any of the following cases perform auto tuning since the motor parameters are different from those of Fuji Note standard motors so that the best performance cannot be obtained under some controls The motor to be driven is a non Fuji motor or a non standard motor Cabling between the motor and the inverter is long Generally 20 m or longer A reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter W Functions that are affected by motor parameters in running capability Function Related function codes representative Auto torque boost F37 Output torque monitor F31 F35 Load factor monitor F31 F35 Auto energy saving operation F37 Torque limiter F40 F41 Anti regenerative control Automatic deceleration H69 Auto search H09 Slip compensation F42
173. the current lifetime state on the LED monitor and judge whether those parts are approaching the end of their service life H47 Initial Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor H98 Protection Maintenance Function The life prediction function can also issue early warning signals if the lifetime alarm command LIFE is assigned to any of the digital output terminals by any of E20 through E24 and E27 L For details refer to Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Function code Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor Description Displays the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor measured value Start of initial capacitance measuring mode under ordinary operating conditions 0000 Measurement failure 0001 Cumulative run time of cooling fan Displays the cumulative run time of cooling fan in units of ten hours Data setting range 0 to 9999 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor Displays the initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor measured value Start of initial capacitance measuring mode under ordinary operating conditions 0000 Measurement failure 0001 Cumulative run time of capacitors on printed circuit boards Displays the cumulative run time of capacitor on the printed circuit board in units of ten hours Data setting range 0 to 9999 When replacing the cooling fan or capacitors on printed circuit boards it is necessary to clear or modify the data of the function cod
174. the host equipment gt Correct any settings that differ Q Even though no response error detection time y08 y18 has been set communications is not performed within the specified cycle Check the host equipment gt Change the settings of host equipment software or disable the no response error detection y08 y18 0 3 The host equipment did not operate due to defective software settings or defective hardware Check the host equipment e g PLCs and personal computers 2 Remove the cause of the equipment error 4 The RS 485 converter did not operate due to incorrect connections and settings or defective hardware Check the RS 485 converter e g check for poor contact 2 Change the various RS 485 converter settings reconnect the wires or replace hardware with recommended devices as appropriate 5 Broken communications cable or poor contact Check the continuity of the cables contacts and connections 2 Replace the cable 6 Inverter affected by strong electrical noise Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of communications cables and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures gt Implement noise reduction measures on the host side gt Replace the RS 485 converter with a recommended insulated one 7 Terminating resistor not properly configured Check that the
175. the motor stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 40 to 80 s e If P04 2 after the tuning in above the motor is accelerated to approximately 50 of the base frequency and then tuning starts Upon completion of measurements the motor decelerates to a stop Estimated tuning time Acceleration time 20 to 75 s Deceleration time e If P04 2 after the motor decelerates to a stop in above tuning continues with the motor stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 40 to 80 s If the terminal signal FWD or REV is selected as a run command F02 1 Era appears upon completion of the measurements Turning the run command OFF completes the tuning If the run command has been given through the keypad or the communications link it automatically turns OFF upon completion of the measurements which completes the tuning Upon completion of the tuning the subsequent function code P06 appears on the keypad B Tuning errors Improper tuning would negatively affect the operation performance and in the worst case could even cause hunting or deteriorate precision Therefore if the inverter finds any abnormality in the tuning results or any error in the tuning process it displays and discards the tuning data Listed below are possible causes that trigger tuning errors Possible tuning error causes Details An interphase voltage unbalance or output phase loss has been detected Error in tuning results Tuning has r
176. the positions of the top and bottom mounting bases from the edge to the center of the inverter as shown in Figure 2 3 Screws differ in size and count for each inverter Refer to the table below Table 2 4 Screw Size Count and Tightening Torque i oO Inverter type Base fixing screw Case fixing screw DES B Screw size and q ty Screw size and q ty N m i FRN30GIM 20 FRN37GIM 20 316X20 ber side M6 x 20 E FRN30GIWI 4L to FRN55G1m 40 P PpS SICS 2 pcs for upper side fe 3 pcs for lower side c FRNA45GIB 2LI FRNS55GIB 2L M6 x20 M6 x 12 58 e FRN75G1I 4L 1 3 pcs each for upper and lower sides 3 pcs for upper side z FRN75GIW 2L M5 x12 M5 x 12 Y P FRN90GIB 4LI FRNI10GIWI AL 7 pcs each for upper and lower sides 7 pcs for upper side z U MS x 16 MS x 16 FRN132G1m 40 FRN160G1 M 40 7 pcs each for upper and lower sides 7 pcs for upper side 3 5 S FRN90G1 m 20 MS x 16 MS x 16 35 z FRN200G1I ALI FRN220G1W 4L 8 pcs each for upper and lower sides 8 pcs for upper side 0 M5 x 16 M5 x 16 i FRN280GIII ALI FRN315GI1II 4LI 2 pcs each for upper and lower sides 2 pcs each for upper and lower sides 3 5 m FRN355GIBI ALI FRNA400GI1 WBI 4L M6 x 20 M6 x 20 Z 6 pes each for upper and lower sides 6 pcs each for upper and lower sides 5 8 mM A M8 x 20 M8 x 20 4 FRN500G1 4LI FRN630G1 40 8 pcs each for upper and lower sides 8 pcs each for upper and lower sides 13 5 u Note A box W in the
177. time s Duty ole ca i er ee Se DCreactor DCR e o y o Applicable safety UL508C C22 2No 14 EN61800 5 1 2003 EN954 1 Cat 3 Enclosure IEC60529 Poe IP20 UL ODEN type IPOO ULopentype UL open IPOO ULopentype Goolingmetiod o Soois SS SS S SSS Weight Masstg Seseo o 9 T 8 T 2 T 8T amp 755 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the rated output voltage as 220 V for 200 V class series and 440 V for 400 V class series Output ratings a power 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 To use the inverter with the carrier frequency of 3 kHz or more at the surrounding temperature of 40 C or higher manage the load so that the current comes to be within the rated ones enclosed in parentheses in continuous running Max voltage V Min voltage V 5 Voltage unbalance Three phase average voltage V x 67 IEC 61800 3 If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 6 Required when a DC reactor DCR is used 7 Average braking torque for the motor running alone It varies with the efficiency of the motor 8 A DC reactor DCR is optionally provided Note that inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW or above in all modes require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters Note A box O in the above table replaces A
178. to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the rated capacity of the motor is three or more ranks lower or two or more ranks higher than that of the inverter gt Replace the inverter with one with an appropriate capacity 2 Manually specify the values for the motor parameters P06 PO7 and P08 gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set data of F37 to 1 5 The motor was a special type such as a high speed motor gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set data of F37 to 1 6 A tuning operation involving motor rotation P04 2 or 3 was attempted while the brake was applied to the motor gt Specify the tuning that does not involve the motor rotation P04 1 gt Release the brake before tuning that involves the motor rotation P04 2 or 3 For details of tuning errors refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 1 7 Function code basic settings and tuning lt 2 gt B Tuning errors Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data 25 a ii eri 4 RS 485 communications error COM port 1 RS 485 communications error COM port 2 Problem A communications error occurred during RS 485 communications Possible Causes 1 Communications conditions of the inverter do not match that of the host equipment What to Check and Suggested Measures Compare the settings of the y codes y01 to y10 y11 to y20 with those of
179. to H60 1st and 2nd S curve Acceleration Deceleration Range F07 specifies the acceleration time the length of time the frequency increases from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency F08 specifies the deceleration time the length of time the frequency decreases from the maximum frequency down to 0 Hz Data setting range 0 00 to 6000 s Under V f control Acc time 1 Dec time 1 F07 Maximum F08 i frequency F03 Starting Stop frequency frequency 1 F25 F23 Actual Actual acc time dec time Under vector control without speed sensor Acc time 1 i Dec time 1 F07 Maximum F08 frequency i F03 d Starting frequency 1 Stop frequency F23 F25 5 38 G deyo S3dO9 NOILONNA Under vector control with speed sensor Acc time 1 Maximum pe time 1 frequency F08 F03 Starting frequency 1 Stop frequency F23 F25 2 Depends on the run command W Acceleration deceleration time Acceleration Function code Switching factor of acceleration deceleration time deceleration time ACC time DEC time Refer to the descriptions of E01 to E07 The combinations of ON OFF states of the two terminal commands R72 and RTI offer four choices of acceleration deceleration time 1 to 4 Acceleration Data 4 5 deceleration time 2 Acceleration deceleration time 1 If no terminal command is assigned only the Acceleration acc
180. to be certified by UL and cUL 9 1 9 2 Compliance with European Standards 9 1 9 3 Compliance with EMC Standards 9 1 O31 General deeem 9 9 3 2 Recommended installation procedure 9 2 9 3 3 Leakage current of EMC filter built in type of INVETE D 9 3 9 4 Harmonic Component Regulation in the EU 9 4 9 4 1 General comments cece sese 9 4 9 4 2 Compliance with the harmonic component Te pUlatlOD teorie tare Dee E ERE Du 9 4 9 5 Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive in the BU eise crt okena in ree 9 4 9 5 1 Generaly irin a r RCRA ERARE 9 4 9 5 2 Points for consideration when using the FRENIC MEGA series in a system to be certified 9 4 by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU 9 6 Compliance with EN954 1 Category 3 X General epe terere 9 6 1 976 2 EN954 Li ite PIENO 96 3 5 NOLES Jones RUN EU eee En Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER 1 1 Acceptance Inspection Unpack the package and check the following 1 An inverter and instruction manual this book are contained in the package Note The inverter is not equipped with a keypad when it is shipped Mount a separately ordered keypad on the inverter This manual describes the inverter with a remote keypad For inverters with a multi function keypad read the Multi function Keypad Instruction Manual in conjunction with this manual Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75
181. to the grounding terminal GG Note When there is more than one combination of an inverter and motor do not use a multicore cable for the purpose of handling their wirings together Inverter 1 Motor 1 Multicore cable DC reactor terminals P1 and P Connect a DC reactor DCR to these terminals for power factor correction 1 Remove the jumper bar from terminals P1 and P 2 Connect an optional DCR to those terminals Note The wiring length should be 10 m or below Do not remove the jumper bar when a DCR is not used nverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW or above require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters Ifa PWM converter is connected to the inverter no DCR is required ANWARNING Be sure to connect an optional DC reactor DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity Otherwise a fire could occur DC braking resistor terminals P and DB for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below Built in DC braki Option mountin Capacity kW poto DBR Optional devices HW require d External DC braking resistor 1 2 3 with a larger capacity 11 to 22 Built in None External DC braking resistor 2 3 0 4 to 7 5 Built in Built in In inverters with a capacity of 7 5 kW or below if the capacity of the built in DC braking resistor DBR
182. trip even at an abrupt change in load so the acceleration deceleration time does not affect the droop control It is therefore possible to eliminate load unbalance using the droop control even during accelerating decelerating Communications Link Function Mode selection y98 Bus Link Function Mode selection Using the RS 485 communications link standard option or fieldbus option allows you to issue frequency commands and run commands from a computer or PLC at a remote location as well as monitor the inverter running information and the function code data H30 and y98 specify the sources of those commands inverter itself or computers or PLCs via the RS 485 communications link or fieldbus H30 is for the RS 485 communications link y98 for the fieldbus Selected command Frequency command Inverter itself i ON Run command RS 485 communications link Port 1 RJ 45 connector RS 485 communications link O Port 2 Terminals on control PCB i Fieldbus 777777 Option If no LE is assigned the command source selected by H30 y98 will apply 5 105 Command sources selectable Command sources Description Inverter itself Sources except RS 485 communications link and fieldbus Frequency command source Specified by F01 C30 or multi frequency command Run command source Via the keypad or digital input terminals selected by F02 RS 485 communications link port 1 Via the standard RJ 45
183. type 1 to 9000 kWs Y Y1Y2 6 Y Y vYi v Y d codes Protection for Braking Resistor OFF Disable Discharging capability U codes F51 Allowable average loss 0 001 to 99 99 kW Y Y 1Y2 0 001 Y Y Y Y Y F52 Resistance 0 01 to 999Q Y Y1Y2 0 01 Y Y Y Y Y y codes F80 Switching between HD MD and LD 0 HD High Duty mode 1 LD Low Duty mode N Y 0 Y vY vi v Y 5 66 drive modes 2 MD Medium Duty mode The shaded function codes 7 are applicable to the quick setup 6 0 for inverters with a capacity of 7 5 kW or below OFF for those with 11 kW or above 5 4 E codes Extension Terminal Functions 9 2 Dri trol t 2 2 Deut rive contro Refer Code Name Data setting range QE 8 setting to S 2 S Vit PG w o w Torque page 5 amp V f PG PG control Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding 5 67 function to terminals X1 to X7 as listed below E01 Terminal X1 Function 0 1000 Select multi frequency 0 to 1 steps SS1 N Y 0 Va AMI Dorf N E02 Terminal X2 Function N Y 1 Y Y ENE N E03 Terminal X3 Function N Y 2 Y Y Yt Y E04 Terminal X4 Function N Y 3 Yo Y X E05 Terminal X5 Function N Y 4 N N E06 Terminal X6 Function N Y 5 baal es Gama N E07 Terminal X7 Function 6 1006 Enable 3 wire operation HLD N Y 8 Y p xXx Y 7 1007 Coast to a stop BX Y Y vY Yv Y
184. upper and lower limit values depending upon a small difference between the upper and lower limits a slow response from the speed control sequence and other conditions Note 5 60 W Torque limiter 1 1 1 2 2 1 and 2 2 F40 F41 E16 and E17 Data setting range 300 to 300 999 Disable These function codes specify the operation level at which the torque limiters become activated as the percentage of the motor rated torque Function code Name F40 Torque limiter 1 1 F41 Torque limiter 1 2 E16 Torque limiter 2 1 E17 Torque limiter 2 2 Although the data setting range for F40 F41 E16 and E17 is from positive to negative values 300 to 300 specify positive values in practice except when the Upper lower torque limits H75 2 is selected If a negative value is specified the inverter interprets it as an absolute value Note The torque limiter determined depending on the overload current actually limits the torque current output Therefore the torque current output is automatically limited at a value lower than 300 the maximum setting value W Analog torque limit values E61 to E63 The torque limit values can be specified by analog inputs through terminals 12 C1 and V2 voltage or current Set E61 E62 and E63 Terminal 12 Extended Function Terminal C1 Extended Function and Terminal V2 Extended Function as listed below Data for E61 E62 or E63 Analog torq
185. vY v Y Mode selection Bit 0 Lower the carrier frequency automatically 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 1 Detect input phase loss 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 2 Detect output phase loss 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 3 Select life judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor 0 Factory default level 1 User setup level Bit 4 Judge the life of DC link bus capacitor 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 5 Detect DC fan lock 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Bit 6 Detect braking transistor error for 22 kW or below 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 7 Switch IP20 IP40 enclosure 0 IP20 1 IP40 A codes Motor 2 Parameters o o E 2 petautt Drive control Refer i T Q Code Name Data setting range amp g 8 setting to 52 g Vit PG w o w Torque page 5 a Vif PG PG control A01 Maximum Frequency 2 25 0 to 500 0 Hz N Y 1 WY Y v Y A02 Base Frequency 2 25 0 to 500 0 Hz N Y 500 Y Y Y Y Y A03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage N Y2 1 Y Y vi v Y 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series A04 Maximum Output Voltage 2 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage N Y2 4 Y Y N N Y for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series A05 Torque Boost 2 0 096 to 20 096 Y Y 3 Y Y N N N percentage with respect to A03 Rated Voltage at Base Freq
186. vjoolv v v v v U36 Customizable Logic Input 1 See U01 N Y 0 See U01 U37 Step 8 Input 2 See U02 N v o See U02 U38 Logic circuit See U03 N X 0 YY pY Y U39 Type of timer See U04 N Y 0 Y lvY vi v Y e U40 Timer See U05 nly oolylylylyly mR U41 Customizable Logic Input 1 See U01 N Y 0 See U01 o U42 Step 9 Input 2 See U02 NIY 0 See U02 on U43 Logic circuit See U03 N Y 0 YYY Y Y UA Type of timer See U04 N M 0 Y vY vi v Y c U45 Timer See U05 N Y 000 Y Y Y Y Y z _U46 Customizable Logic Input 1 See U01 N Y 0 See U01 9 _U47 Step 10 Input 2 See U02 N Y 0 See U02 O U48 Logic circuit See U03 N Y 0 Yep TOY Y z U49 Type of timer See U04 N Y 0 Y Yo pos e Y Q U50 Timer See U05 N vjoolv v v v v S U71 Customizable Logic Output Signal 1 0 Disable N y 0 Ye OYE TY Y m NN Output selection 4 Step 1 outpu SO01 o _U72 Customizable Logic Output Signal 2 2 Step 2 outpu 002 _N Y 0 YYYY Y U73 Customizable Logic Output Signal 3 3 Step 3 outpu 003 N Y 0 YlvYLlYvlv Y U74 Customizable Logic Output Signal 4 4 Step 4 outpu S004 N Y 0 YNY I Y Y U75 Customizable Logic Output Signal 5 5 Step 5 outpu SO05 N Y 0 Y vY vi v Y 6 Step 6 outpu S006 7 Step 7 outpu S007 8 Step 8 outpu S008 9 Step 1 outpu SO09 10 Step 10 output S010 U81 Customizable Logic Output Signal 1 0 Select multi frequency 0 to 1 steps SS1 N
187. 0 Y j 1Y2 100 Y Y Y Y Y r55 Torque current under vector control 0 00 to 2000 A N Y1Y2 7 NIN Y Y Y r56 Induced voltage factor under 50 to 100 N Y1Y2 85 N N Y Y Y vector control r57 Reserved 9 0 000 to 20 000 s Y v1vY2 7 J codes Application Functions 1 2 Drive control 22 Z Defaul Refer Code Name Data setting range ge 8 setting to So g Vit PG w o w Torque page 5 a Vif PG PG control J01 PID Control Mode selection 0 Disable N Y 0 Y vY vi v N 5 120 1 Enable Process control normal operation 2 Enable Process control inverse operation 3 Enable Dancer control J02 Remote command SV 0 keys on keypad N Y 0 Y Y Y Y N 5 121 1 PID command 1 Analog input terminals 12 C1 and V2 3 UP DOWN 4 Command via communications link J03 P Gain 0 000 to 30 000 times y y fosooly ly ly ly on 5124 J04 Integral time 0 0 to 3600 0 s vlv loo v viv v N J05 D Differential time 0 00 to 600 00 s vY v oo v v v v N J06 Feedback filter 0 0 to 900 0 s vlv los v vlv v N J08 Pressurization starting frequency 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Y Y 0 0 YYY Y N 5 126 J09 Pressurizing time 0 to 60 s Y Y 0 Y Y vi v N J10 Anti reset windup 0 to 200 vlv iaoo v viv v N 5127 JM Select alarm output 0 Absolute value alarm Y Y 0 Y vY vYi v N 1 Absolute value alarm with Hold 2 Absolute value alarm with Latch 3 Absolute value alarm with Hold and
188. 0 0 Depends on F16 Frequency limiter Low Y Y 1 6 Y Y N N N 5 109 0 1 to 60 0 Hz H65 Non linear V f Pattern 3 Frequency 0 0 Cancel 0 1 to 500 0 Hz N Y 0 0 Y Y N N N 5 36 H66 Voltage 0 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage N Y2 0 Y Y N N N 5 109 for 200 V class series 0 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series H67 Auto Energy Saving Operation 0 Enable during running at constant speed Y Y 0 tA N Y N 5 55 Mode selection 1 Enable in all modes 5 109 e H68 Slip Compensation 1 0 Enable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or N Y 0 YI Y NIN N 5 62 a Operating conditions above 5 109 Ke 1 Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency an or above 2 Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above T 3 Disable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or c above 5 H69 Automatic Deceleration 0 Disable Y Y 0 Y x Y x N 5 109 4 Mode selection 2 Torque limit control with Force to stop if actual o deceleration time exceeds three times the specified one z 3 DC link bus voltage control with Force to stop if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the specified one Q 4 Torque limit control with Force to stop disabled gt 5 DC link bus voltage control with Force to stop disabled m H70 Overload Prevention Control 0 00 Follow the deceleration time selected Y Y 999 Y Y Y Y N 5 110 o 0 01 to 100 0 Hz s 999 Cancel H71 Deceleration Characteristics 0 Disable 1 En
189. 0 Hz If the increasing frequency during braking reaches the limit value the torque limiters no longer function resulting in an overvoltage trip Such a problem may be avoided by increasing the setting of H76 The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other If both are activated concurrently Note HEUS D Rt they may conflict each other and cause hunting in the system Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters Under vector control without with speed sensor If the inverter s output torque exceeds the specified levels of the torque limiters F40 F41 E16 E17 and E61 to E63 the inverter controls the speed regulator s output torque command in speed control or a torque command in torque control in order to limit the motor generating torque To use the torque limiters it is necessary to configure the function codes listed in the table below Related function codes Function code V f control F40 Torque Limiter 1 1 Y F41 Torque Limiter 1 2 E16 Torque Limiter 2 1 E17 Torque Limiter 2 2 H73 Torque Limiter Operating conditions H74 Torque Limiter Control target H75 Torque Limiter Target quadrants H76 Torque Limiter Frequency increment limit for braking Terminal 12 Extended Function E61 to E63 Terminal C1 Extended Function Terminal V2 Extended Function 7 Analog torque limit value A 8 Analog torque limit value B W Torque Limiter Control
190. 00 Disable and connect the NTC thermistor of the motor to the inverter For motors with PTC thermistor connecting the PTC thermistor to the terminal V2 enables the motor overheat protective function For details refer to the description of H26 Note W Select motor characteristics F10 F10 selects the cooling mechanism of the motor shaft driven or separately powered cooling fan Data for FIO For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan The cooling effect will decrease in low frequency operation For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with separately powered cooling fan The cooling effect will be kept constant regardless of the output frequency The figure below shows operating characteristics of the electronic thermal overload protection when F10 1 The characteristic factors a1 through a3 as well as their corresponding switching frequencies fz and f vary with the characteristics of the motor The tables below list the factors of the motor selected by P99 Motor 1 Selection Actual Output Current Continuous Overload Detection Level F11 eu fo Base frequency Even if the specified i base frequency exceeds 60 Hz fo 60 Hz Output frequency fo Hz fa Cooling Characteristics of Motor with Shaft driven Cooling Fan 0 f2 Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 Motor 1 selection 0 or 4 Reference current for settin
191. 01 to FFFF Hexadecimal lt Maintenance every 1 000 times of startups gt Startup Count for Motor 1 H44 A H44 b e H79 07DO 2000 times H79 03E8 1000 times Startup Count Maintenance Timer MNT on To enable this function assign the maintenance timer signal MNT to one of the digital output terminals function code data 84 Note After the current setting has expired seta value for the next maintenance in H78 and press the key so that the output signal is reset and counting restarts After the current setting has expired set a value for the next maintenance in H79 and press the key so that the output signal is reset and counting restarts This function is exclusively applies to the 1st motor 5 108 H45 H46 H47 H50 H52 H49 H54 H56 H57 H61 H63 H64 H65 H67 H68 H69 Mock Alarm H97 Clear Alarm Data H45 causes the inverter to generate a mock alarm in order to check whether external sequences function correctly at the time of machine setup Setting the H45 data to 1 displays mock alarm on the LED monitor It also issues alarm output for any alarm ALM if assigned to a digital output terminal by any of E20 to E24 and E27 Accessing the H45 data requires simultaneous keying of Gron key e key After that the H45 data automatically reverts to 0 allowing you to reset the alarm Just as data alarm history and relevant information of those alarms t
192. 08 J09 PID Control Pressurization starting frequency pressurizing time J15 PID Control Stop frequency for slow flowrate J16 PID Control Slow flowrate level stop latency J17 PID Control Starting frequency Slow flowrate stopping function J15 to J17 J15 to J17 configure the slow flowrate stopping function in pump control a function that stops the inverter when the discharge pressure rises causing the volume of water to decrease When the discharge pressure has increased decreasing the reference frequency output of the PID processor below the stop frequency for slow flowrate level J15 for the period of slow flowrate level stop latency J16 the inverter decelerates to stop while PID control itself continues to operate When the discharge pressure decreases increasing the reference frequency output of the PID processor above the starting frequency J17 the inverter resumes operation G deyo W PID control Stop frequency for slow flowrate J15 Data setting range 0 0 Disable 1 0 to 500 0 Hz J15 specifies the frequency which triggers slow flowrate stop of inverter W PID control Slow flowrate level stop latency J16 Data setting range 0 to 60 s J16 specifies the period from when the PID output drops below the frequency specified by J15 until the inverter starts deceleration to stop W PID control Starting frequency J17 Data setting range 0 0 to 500 0 Hz J17 specifies the starting frequency Set
193. 09 1 min 2000 308 50 1 1509 1 min 2000 308 50 200 3 0 s 380 to 440 V 50 Hz Voltage frequency 380 to 480 V 60 Hz Allowable voltage frequency Required s with DOR kVA 114 140 165 199 248 271 347 388 436 489 611 773 10 1o 155 2 Braking transistor le Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 6 Frequency 5 to 5 o o c D S 2 a B o z s a a Built in braking resistor Braking time a assem Applicable iiy UL508C C22 2No 14 EN61800 5 1 2003 EN954 1 Cat 3 standards Enclosure IEC60529 IP00 UL open type Cooling method Fan cooling eon ors ee eo ee CERT CN CURE Weight Wass a 62 9 o 55 v9 55 25 25 59 89 50 59 1 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter type is FRN4 0GIS 4E 2 Fuji 4 pole standard motor 3 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the rated output voltage as 220 V for 200 V class series and 440 V for 400 V class series 4 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 5 380 to 440 V 50 Hz 380 to 480 V 60 Hz Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V 6 Voltage unbalance 96 x 67 IEC 61800 3 If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 7 Required when a DC reactor DCR is used 8 Average braking torque for the motor running alone It varies with the efficiency of the motor 9 A DC reactor DCR is optionally provided Note that i
194. 1 Y Y vi v Y E codes 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage C codes for 400 V class series r04 Maximum Output Voltage 4 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage N Y2 EE Y Y N N Y P codes for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series H codes r05 Torque Boost 4 0 0 to 20 0 Y Y 3 Y Y N N N percentage with respect to r03 Rated Voltage at Base A codes Frequency 4 r06 Electronic Thermal Overload 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling Y Y 1 HYNA Y Y Protection for Motor 4 m fan b codes Select motor characteristics 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilate d motor or motor with separately powered cooling fan r codes r07 Overload detection level 0 00 Disable Y Y1Y2 4 Y vY vYi v Y 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive J codes current of the motor r08 Thermal time constant 0 5 to 75 0 min Y Y 15 Y vY vi v Y d codes 1 The factory default differs depending upon the shipping destination See Table A 3 The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity See Table B U codes 4 The motor rated current is automatically set See Table C function code P03 5 5 0 min for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below 10 0 min for those with 30 kW or above 7 The motor parameters are automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipp
195. 2 Check the devices and insulators for deformation cracks breakage and discoloration caused by overheat or deterioration 3 Check for contamination or accumulation of dust or dirt 1 Retighten 2 3 Visual inspection 1 2 3 No abnormalities Conductors and wires 1 Check conductors for discoloration and distortion caused by overheat 2 Check the sheath of the wires for cracks and discoloration 1 2 Visual inspection 1 2 No abnormalities 2 z m z gt Z O m gt Z o Z 77 Z m O O Z Check part Terminal blocks Table 7 1 List of Periodic Inspections Continued Check item Check that the terminal blocks are not damaged How to inspect Visual inspection Evaluation criteria No abnormalities Braking resistor 1 Check for abnormal odor or cracks in insulators caused by overheat 2 Check for wire breakage 1 Olfactory and visual inspection 2 Check the wires visually or disconnect either wire and measure the conductivity with a multimeter 1 No abnormalities 2 Within 10 of the resistance of the braking resistor DC link bus capacitor Main circuit 1 Check for electrolyte leakage discoloration cracks and swelling of the casing 2 Check that the safety valve does not protrude remarkably 3 Measure the capacitance if necessary 1 2 Visual inspection 3 Measure the discharge time wi
196. 2 Enable DC braking Select torque limiter level 2 1 Switch to commercial power 50 Hz Switch to commercial power 60 Hz Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y RR l RR eR RR RR RR ziz lt lt KI K lt lt lt lt lt lt lt ziz ee k piil lll l l Z Z Z zz Frequency command F01 C30 PID command J02 UP Increase output frequency lt lt lt lt Z DOWN Decrease output frequency Enable data change with keypad F00 Cancel PID control J01 to J19 J56 to J62 Switch normal inverse operation C53 J01 Interlock F14 Cancel torque control H18 Enable communications link via RS 485 or fieldbus option H30 y98 Universal DI Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting H09 d67 Force to stop 5 67 M x ux ziel lt lt zie xe lt x qu xz ege z Iz Re lt k k k lt K Zz z IK F07 H56 Function code data Drive control Acti N Acti FE Terminal commands assigned PG w o w Torque M A des ctive O ctive O V f PG PG control 32 1032 Pre excitation EXITE NON Y Y N H84 H85 33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential PID RST ylylyly ln tyortons components 156 to J 62 34 1034 Hold PID integral compon
197. 2 YIX Y Y Y 39 1039 Current detected 3 ID3 YE Y Y 41 1041 Low current detected IDL YI Y Y 42 1042 PID alarm PbAM ly ty y y N IY IY Y Y N 44 1044 Motor stopped due to slow seca flowrate under PID control PID STP Y vY vi v N 45 1045 Low output torque detected uTD ly Ty yy y iv 46 1046 Torque detected 1 TD1 Y vY vYi v Y 47 1047 Torque detected 2 TD2 Y vY vi v Y 48 1048 Motor 1 selected SWM1 Y X qox px Y 49 1049 Motor 2 selected SWM2 YY YNY Y 50 1050 Motor 3 selected SWM3 Y vY vi v Y 51 1051 Motor 4 selected SWM4 viviv vi v F codes 52 1052 Running forward FRUN Y vY vi v Y 53 1053 Running reverse RRUN x NS Y IUSSIT ON E codes 54 1054 In remote operation RMT YVI Y Y Y 56 1056 Motor overheat detected by thermistor THM yily y y ey C codes 57 1057 Brake signal BRKS ly ty y y N 58 1058 Frequency speed detected 3 FDT3 ly Ty y y poy P codes Terminal C1 wire break YIY YIY Y INIY v vY fy H codes INIY Y Y N IY IY Y Y N A codes INIY Y Y N INININIY IN b codes Maintenance timer IlYivIviviv 1098 Light alarm Yi Y Y v Y r codes 99 1099 Alarm output for any alarm YYYY Y 101 1101 Enable circuit failure detected DECF Y vY vi v Y J codes 102 1102 Enable input OFF EN OFF YYYY Y 105 1105 Braking transistor broken DBAL Pub ande Y 2001 3001 Output of step 1 S001 YYY Y 2002 3002 Output of s
198. 2 Installing the Inverter 1 Mounting base Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non flammable material Do not mount the inverter upside down or horizontally ANWARNING Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non flammable material Otherwise a fire could occur 2 Clearances Ensure that the minimum clearances indicated in Figure 2 1 and Table 2 3 are maintained at all times When mounting the inverter in the panel of your system take extra care with ventilation inside the panel as the surrounding temperature easily rises Do not install the inverter in a small panel with poor ventilation m When mounting two or more inverters When mounting two or more inverters in the same unit or panel basically lay them out side by side When mounting them necessarily one above the other be sure to separate them with a partition plate or the like so that any heat radiating from an inverter will not affect the one s above As long as the surrounding temperature is 40 C or lower inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below can be mounted side by side without any clearance between them Table 2 3 Clearances mm Inverter capacity A B C 0 4 to 1 5 kW 50 0 2 2 to 22 kW 10 100 30 to 220 kW 50 100 280 to 630 kW 150 150 C Space required in front of the inverter unit m When employing external cooling In external cooling the heat sink which dissipates about
199. 2 with the keypad take into account that the P02 data automatically updates the data of function codes P03 P06 through P23 P53 through P56 and H46 P03 Motor 1 Rated current P03 specifies the rated current of the motor Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor Data setting range 0 00 to 2000 A P04 Motor 1 Auto tuning The inverter automatically detects the motor parameters and saves them in its internal memory Basically it is not necessary to perform tuning when using a Fuji standard motor with a standard connection with the inverter There are three types of auto tuning as listed below Select appropriate one considering the limitations in your G deyo equipment and control mode c Data for P04 Auto tuning Operation Motor parameters to be tuned 0 Disable N A N A d Primary resistance R1 P07 9 1 Tune while the The inverter performs tuning Leakage reactance X P08 Oo motor stops while the motor is stopped Rated slip frequency P12 O X correction factors 1 and 2 P53 and P54 o No load current P06 Primary resistance R1 P07 After tuning while the motor Leakage reactance X POR Tune while the is stopped the inverter Rated slip frequency P12 motor 1s rotating performs tuning again with M ion factors 1 to 5 P16 to P20 der V f control the motor running at 50 of aeneae cn MO ato un he base fi Magnetic saturation extension factors a to c
200. 22 to 55 kW A 0 75 to6kHz HD mode 500 and 630 kW LD mode 75 to 500 kW 0 75to4kHz LD mode 630 kW 0 75to2kHz MD mode 90 to 400 kW Note The carrier frequency may automatically drop depending upon the surrounding temperature or output current to protect the inverter The automatic drop function can be disabled Accuracy Stability Analog setting 0 2 of maximum frequency at 25 10 C Keypad setting 0 01 of maximum frequency at 10 to 50 C Setting resolution Analog setting 1 3000 of maximum frequency 1 1500 for V2 input Keypad setting 0 01 Hz 99 99 Hz or less 0 1 Hz 100 0 to 500 0 Hz Link operation setting Selectable from the following two types 1 20000 of maximum frequency 0 01 Hz fixed Under V f E e 1 100 Minimum speed Base speed 4P 15 to 1500 r min control with contro T Speed senso range 1 2 Constant torque range Constant output range Under dynamic Pad Analog setting 0 2 of maximum frequency at 25 10 C torque vector contro Tyoi im God 0 E 4509 pcs apes accuracy Digital setting 0 01 of maximum frequency at 10 to 50 C speed sensor Under Speed 1 200 Minimum speed Base speed 4P 7 5 to 1500 r min vector control contro dus without speed range 1 2 Constant torque range Constant output range een Ow Spero Analog setting 0 5 of base speed at 25 10 C es Digital setting 0 5 of base speed at 10 to 50 C Under Spee
201. 2L FRN45GIBI2LI 100 22 100 75 FRN75GIBI2L FRN55GIBZ2LI 150 4 150 4 150 90 FRN90G1W 20 FRN75GIB2LI 150 150 200 110 FRN90G1 W 2 0 200 38 200 250 0 4 FRN0 4G1m 40 0 75 FRNO 75GIB 4L1 1 5 FRN1 5G1m 40 2 2 FRN22GIB 4L1 20 2 0 20 3 7 FRN3 7G1W 4A 7 E 20 2 0 4 0 FRN4 0G1M 4E 5 5 FRN5 5GIB 4L1 a0 7 5 FRN7 5GIBI 4L FRNS 5GIBI ALI FRN7 5GIBI 4L 11 FRNIIGIE4O 3 5 3 5 xx 3 5 15 FRNISGIBI AL FRNIIGIBI ALI 3 5 5 5 55 18 5 FRN18 5GIBI 4L FRNISGIMI 4LI 8 0 5 55 l 5 5 5 5 22 FRN22G1 40 FRNI8 5GIBI 4LI 14 8 0 5 8 0 5 30 FRN22G1 W 40 14 gt FRN30GIB 4L1 14 2 80 14 2 37 FRN37G1M 40 FRN30G1 40 2 b 45 FRN45G1 40 FRN37G1 40 2 38 22 S 55 FRN55GIBI AL FRN45GIII 4LI 38 38 gt 75 FRN75GIBI AL FRN55GIBI 4LI 38 14 60 60 E 90 FRN90GINMI AL FRN75GIII 4L 60 100 10 FRNI110GIB 4L FRN90GINI AL FRN90G1M 40 100 100 132 FRN132GIB ALI FRNIIOGIBI 4L FRNI110GIBI 4LI 22 150 160 FRN160GIB 4L FRNI32GIBI AL FRNI32GIBI ADI 150 150 200 FRN200GIBI 4L FRNI60GIMI 4L FRN160GIBI 4C 200 250 220 FRN220GIBI 4L FRN200G1M 40 FRN200G1 40 200 250 FRN220GIB 4L1 38 250 325 280 FRN220GIB 4L1 250 150x2 FRN280GIB 4L1 325 200x2 315 FRN315GIB 4L1 FRN280GIB 4L1 150x2 60 355 FRN355GIBI ALI FRN280GIII 4L FRN315GIBI ADI 200x2 200x2 250x2 400 FRNA00GIBI 4L FRN315G1M 40 F
202. 30 200 ee Weel te F30 50 gt 0 33 50 100 Meter scale F31 specifies what is output to analog output terminals FM1 and FM2 Data for Function Meter scale F31 F35 FM1 FM2 output Monitor the following Full scale at 100 Output fi Output frequency of the inverter utput frequency 0 before slip compensation Equivalent to the motor synchronous Maximum frequency F03 speed Output frequency 1 after slip compensation Output frequency of the inverter Maximum frequency F03 2 Output current Output current RMS of the inverter Twice the inverter rated current r 250 V for 200 V class series 3 Output voltage Output voltage RMS of the inverter 500 V for 400 V class series 4 Output torque Motor shaft torque Twice the rated motor torque Load factor 5 Load factor Equivalent to the indication of the load Twice the rated motor load meter Twice the rated output of the 6 Input power Input power of the inverter T EET 7 PID feedback amount Feedback amount under PID control 10096 of the feedback amount 8 PG feedback value Speed detected through the PG interface Maximum speed as 100 speed or estimated speed 500 V for 200 V class series 9 DC link bus voltage DC link bus voltage of the inverter 1000 V for 400 V class series Command via communications link 10 Universal AO Refer to the RS 485 Communication 20000 as 100 User s Manual 13 Motor output Motor
203. 40 b40 r40 Y Output current fluctuation damping gain for motor H80 A41 b41 r4l Y 5 118 Table 5 5 Function Codes to be Switched Continued Function code Object of Name Ist 2nd 3rd 4th Parameter motor motor motor motor switching Speed control Speed command filter d01 A43 b43 r43 Y Speed detection filter d02 A44 b44 r44 Y P Gain d03 A45 b45 r45 Y I Integral time d04 A46 b46 r46 Y Output filter d06 A48 b48 r48 Y Notch filter resonance frequency d07 A49 b49 r49 Notch filter attenuation level d08 A50 b50 r50 Reserved d51 d52 d53 d54 Cumulative motor run time H94 A51 b51 r51 Startup counter for motor H44 A52 b52 r52 Motor X correction factor 1 P53 A53 b53 r53 X correction factor 2 P54 A54 b54 r54 Torque current under vector control P55 A55 b55 r55 Induced voltage factor under vector control P56 A56 b56 r56 Reserved d57 A57 b57 r57 Table 5 6 Function Codes Unavailable for the 2nd to 4th Motors Name Function codes Operation in 2nd to 4th motors Non linear V f pattern H50 to H53 H65 H66 Disabled Initial frequency setting Starting frequency 1 Holding time F24 Disabled Stop frequency Holding time F39 Disabled Overload early warning Current E34 E35 Disa
204. 5 4 x Gain J97 x Maximum frequency Example When Gain J97 0 01 and Maximum frequency F03 60 Hz specify F25 data 2 4 Hz 3 Enabling the servo lock control disables the following Operation controlled with a stop frequency Rotation direction limitation 5 132 G deyo S3dO9 NOILONNA 5 2 8 d codes Application Functions 2 d01 to d04 Speed Control 1 Speed command filter Speed detection filter P Gain and Integral time d06 Speed Control 1 Output filter These function codes control the speed control sequence for normal operations For application of each function code refer to the figure below and the subsequent descriptions Block diagram of the speed control sequence Speed command filter d01 Output filter d06 Reference speed aa Speed detection filter d02 Detected speed W Speed command filter dO1 Data setting range 0 000 to 5 000 s d01 specifies a time constant determining the first order delay of the speed command filter Speed regulator PI processor Torque command P Gain d03 Integral time d04 Modify this data when an excessive overshoot occurs against the speed command change Increasing the filter time constant stabilizes the speed command and reduces overshoot against the speed command change but it slows the response speed of the inverter W Speed detection filter d02 Data setting range 0 000 to 0 100 s Modify
205. 5 F03 gt F16 where F23 and F25 specify the starting and stop frequencies respectively If you specify any wrong data for these function codes the inverter may not run the motor at the desired speed or cannot start it normally Note F18 Bias Frequency command 1 Refer to F01 F20 to F22 DC Braking 1 Braking starting frequency Braking level and Braking time H95 DC Braking Braking response mode F20 through F22 specify the DC braking that prevents motor 1 from running by inertia during decelerate to stop operation If the motor enters a decelerate to stop operation by turning OFF the run command or by decreasing the reference frequency below the stop frequency the inverter activates the DC braking by flowing a current at the braking level F21 during the braking time F22 when the output frequency goes down to the DC braking starting frequency F20 Setting the braking time to 0 0 F22 0 disables the DC braking W Braking starting frequency F20 Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 Hz F20 specifies the frequency at which the DC braking starts its operation during motor decelerate to stop state W Braking level F21 Data setting range 0 to 100 96 0 to 80 96 for MD LD mode inverters F21 specifies the output current level to be applied when the DC braking is activated The function code data should be set assuming the rated output current of the inverter as 100 in increments of 1 Note The inverter rated out
206. 501 m bus capacitor while correcting it Time remaining T E the capacitance before the end of life measured above m Electrolytic Counts the time elapsed when the Exceeding 87 600 hours During ordinary 5 75 capacitors on voltage is applied to the 10 years operation Cumulative run time oO printed circuit capacitors while correcting it z boards according to the surrounding 2 temperature a Cooling fans Counts the run time of the cooling Exceeding 87 600 hours During ordinary 5 77 zi fans 10 years operation Cumulative run time 2 E Notes for the judgment on the service life of the DC link bus capacitor The service life of the DC link bus capacitor can be judged by the measurement of discharging time to or ON time counting The discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor depends largely on the inverter s internal load conditions e g options attached or ON OFF of digital I O signals If actual load conditions are so different from the ones at which the initial reference capacitance is measured that the measurement result falls out of the accuracy level required then the inverter does not perform measuring Q The capacitance measuring conditions at shipment are extremely restricted e g with the remote keypad mounted and all input terminals being OFF in order to stabilize the load and measure the capacitance accurately Those conditions are therefore different from the actual operating cond
207. 53 to P56 and H46 Specify the rated voltage at base frequency F05 at the normal value although the inverter controls the motor keeping the rated voltage rated voltage at base frequency low under vector control without speed sensor After the auto tuning the inverter automatically reduces the rated voltage at base frequency Vector control without speed sensor is not available for MD mode inverters To drive a Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control configure the following basic function codes initialize the motor 1 parameters with the function code H03 2 and then perform auto tuning Function Motor 1 selection Function code data 2 Motor characteristics 2 VG motors Factory default GIB2A 4A FRN FRN GIN 4E 0 Motor characteristics 0 Motor 1 Rated capacity Same as that of the applied motor capacity Nominal applied motor capacity Maximum frequency 1 Acceleration time 1 Note Deceleration time 1 Note Note Machinery design values Note For a test driving of the motor increase values so that they are longer than your machinery design values If the specified time is short the inverter may not run the motor properly 4 8 200 V class series 200 V class series 60 0 Hz 400 V class series 400 V class series 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz 22 kW or below 6 00 s 30 kW or above 20 00 s 22 kW or below 6 00 s 30 kW or ab
208. 6 Press the amp key to establish the function code data The SAE appears and the data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter The display will return to the function code list then move to the next function code In this example A i Pressing the amp 9 key instead of the amp key cancels the change made to the data The data reverts to the previous value the display returns to the function code list and the original function code reappears 7 Press the amp 9 key to return to the menu from the function code list Cursor movement Tip You can move the cursor when changing function code data by holding down the amp 9 key for 1 second or longer in the same way as with the frequency settings This action is called Cursor movement Tip It is possible to change or add function code items subject to quick setup For details consult your Fuji Electric representatives 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 1 Data Setting __ through 5 _ in Programming mode allows you to set up all function codes To set function codes in this menu it is necessary to set function code E52 to 0 Function code data editing mode or 2 Full menu mode The menu transition in Menu 1 Data Setting is just like that in Menu 0 Quick Setup Basic key operation The basic key operation in Menu 1 Data Setting is just like that in Menu 0 Quick Setup 1 Tum the inverter ON It automatically e
209. 7 blinking Err appears blinking also when the keypad does not contain any valid data Enable Data Enables the Data protection of data stored in the keypad s memory protection In this state you cannot read any data stored in the inverter s memory but can write data into the memory and verify data in the memory Upon pressing the G5 key the inverter immediately displays 7 777 Read inverter Reads out inverter s current running status information that can be checked by FRENIC running Loader such as information of I O system alarm and running status excluding function information code data Use this command when the function code data saved in the PC should not be overwritten and it is necessary to keep the previous data Pressing the amp 9 key during a read operation CHEL blinking immediately aborts the operation and displays 7 7 blinking C Tip To get out of the error state indicated by a blinking n or LFE press the amp key 3 21 deyo QVdA3 AHL NISN NOILYVH3dO m Data protection You can protect data saved in the keypad from unexpected modifications Enabling the data protection that was disabled changes the display r on the Data Copying function list to 7 and disables to read data from the inverter To enable or disable the data protection follow the next steps 1 Select the Data Copying 7 4 on the function selection menu in Programming mode
210. 85 communications error 7 7 for y02 and for y12 The inverter stops with alarm issue Run during the period specified by the error processing timer y03 y13 display an RS 485 communications error 7 7 for y02 and for y12 and then stop operation The inverter stops with alarm issue Retry communication during the period specified by the error processing timer y03 y13 If a communications link is recovered continue operation Otherwise display an RS 485 communications error 4 for y02 and r for y12 and stop operation The inverter stops with alarm issue Continue to run even when a communications error occurs 4 For details refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual 5 147 W Timer yO3 for port 1 and y13 for port 2 Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 s y03 or y13 specifies an error processing timer If the timer count has elapsed due to no response from the other end when a query has been issued the inverter interprets it as an error occurrence See the No response error detection time y08 y18 given on the next page W Baud rate y04 for port 1 and y14 for port 2 y04 or yl4 specifies the transmission speed for RS 485 Data for y04 and y14 Transmission speed bps communication 0 2400 For FRENIC Loader via the RS 485 communications link 1 4800 specify the transmission speed that matches the connected 2 9600 computer 3 19200 4 38400 W Data l
211. 99 Note Setting E51 data to 0 000 clears the input watt hour and its data to 0 After clearing be sure to restore E51 data to the previous value otherwise input watt hour data will not be accumulated E52 Keypad Menu display mode E52 provides a choice of three menu display modes for the standard keypad as listed below Data for E52 Menu display mode Menus to be displayed Function code data editing mode Menus 0 1 and 7 Function code data check mode Menus 2 and 7 Full menu mode Menus 0 through 7 5 88 ze c z O O Z Q J m Qo The menus available on the standard keypad are described below LED monitor Main functions shows Displays only basic function codes to customize the inverter 0 Quick Setup UI operation F codes Fundamental functions E codes Extension terminal functions C codes Control functions P codes Motor 1 parameters H codes High performance functions Selecting each of A codes Motor 2 parameters these function 1 Data Setting i b codes Motor 3 parameters codes enables its data to be displayed changed H r codes Motor 4 parameters hel J codes Application functions 1 L d codes Application functions 2 U codes Application functions 3 y codes Link functions LCI o codes Optional function _ Displays only function codes that have been changed from 2 Data Checking cree thei
212. Brake signal BRKS J70 Brake OFF timer J72 Brake ON timer Operation time chart under vector control with speed sensor Reference detected F25 Stop frequency 0 Hz speed T Zero Zero Speed i control J68 Brake OFF current Output current J95 Brake OFF torque 0 Torque command Run command OFF Brake signal BRKS lt gt J70 Brake OFF timer J72 Brake ON timer Note ot If the zero speed control is enabled under vector control set J95 Brake OFF torque at 0 After releasing the brake BRKS ON operating for a while and then activating the brake BRKS OFF to stop the motor if you want to release the brake BRKS ON turn the inverter s run command OFF and then ON J97 to J99 Servo lock Gain Completion timer Completion width Servo lock This function servo locks the inverter to hold the motor within the positioning completion range specified by J99 for the period specified by J98 even if an external force applies to the load When the inverter is servo locked it keeps the output frequency low therefore use the inverter under the following specified thermal restriction Output current within the range of 15096 of the rated current for 3 seconds and 80 for continuous operation Note that under the restriction the inverter automatically limits the carrier frequency under 5 kHz Note Servo lock starting conditions Servo lock control starts when the follow
213. DCJ 0V Common terminal PLC Y 12 JEN 01010 Enable input E gt Safety switch 1 VDC l4 i 41020 mA DC S Analog frequency SINK meter JPLC is 0 to 10 _ Swi VDC ja l 41020 Digital input 9 l SOURCE 4 mA DO swe 11 Analog frequency mS meter Run forward command ep ir5 1 DX Run reverse command 5 Dx E Data transmission Select multi frequency 0 to 1 step i 4 2H SD Select multi frequency 0 to 3 step x3 FS 4 RS 485 COM port 2 Select multi frequency 0 to 7 step TB x4 Select multi frequency 0 to 15 step x5 ii Select ACC DEC time 2 steps t T x6 5 Pm 4 Select ACC DEC time 4 steps j x7 Reset alarm T eM 0 0 jJ i RS 485 COM port 1 RJ 45 connector for keypad DBR Dynamic Braking Resistor DCR DC Reactor i RCD Residual current operated protective device i ELCB Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker pe MC Magnetic Contactor 1 MCCB Molded Case Circuit Breaker i 4 2 10 2 3 4 55 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection function in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring Ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity Install a magnetic contactor MC for each inver
214. DCR kVA 114 140 165 199 248 271 347 388 436 489 611 773 Torque 10 to 15 Braking transistor Built in braking resistor aper AS Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 6 Frequency 5 to 5 Input ee Braking Braking time s Duty cycle ED EMC filter Compliant with EMC Directives Emission and Immunity Category C3 2nd Env EN61800 3 2004 DC reactor DCR Applicable safety standards UL508C C22 2No 14 EN61800 5 1 2003 EN954 1 Cat 3 Enclosure IEC60529 IP00 UL open type Cooling method Fan cooling Pe SERNCOOIND Se Se 5 SS Sa ee NNNM NNNM NE EEE Weight Mas gg 9 9 9 vs we zs zs 5o 9 se se 1 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter type is FRNA 0GIS 4E 2 Fuji 4 pole standard motor 3 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the rated output voltage as 220 V for 200 V class series and 440 V for 400 V class series 4 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 5 380 to 440 V 50 Hz 380 to 480 V 60 Hz Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V 6 Voltage unbalance x 67 IEC 61800 3 If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 7 Required when a DC reactor DCR is used 8 Average braking torque for the motor running alone It varies with the efficiency of the motor 9 A DC reactor DCR is optionally provided Note that inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW o
215. F23 A12 b12 r12 mM Load selection Auto torque boost Auto energy saving operation F37 A13 b13 113 Y Drive control selection F42 A14 bl4 rl4 Motor No of poles POI A15 b15 r15 Rated capacity P02 A16 b16 r16 Rated current P03 A17 b17 r17 Auto tuning P04 A18 b18 r18 No load current P06 A20 b20 r20 R1 P07 A21 b21 r21 X PO8 A22 b22 r22 Slip compensation gain for driving P09 A23 b23 r23 Y Slip compensation response time P10 A24 b24 r24 Y Slip compensation gain for braking P11 A25 b25 r25 Y Rated slip frequency P12 A26 b26 r26 Iron loss factor 1 P13 A27 b27 r27 Iron loss factor 2 P14 A28 b28 r28 Iron loss factor 3 P15 A29 b29 r29 Magnetic saturation factor 1 P16 A30 b30 r30 Magnetic saturation factor 2 P17 A31 b31 131 Magnetic saturation factor 3 P18 A32 b32 r32 Magnetic saturation factor 4 P19 A33 b33 r33 Magnetic saturation factor 5 P20 A34 b34 r34 Magnetic saturation extension factor a P21 A35 b35 r35 b codes Magnetic saturation extension factor b P22 A36 b36 r36 A codes Magnetic saturation extension factor c P23 A37 b37 r37 r codes Motor selection P99 A39 b39 r39 Slip compensation Operating conditions H68 A
216. FO Instruction Manual High Performance Multifunction Inverter FRENIC MEGA ANCAUTION Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC MEGA series of inverters This product is designed to drive a three phase induction motor Read through this instruction manual and be familiar with the handling procedure for correct use Improper handling might result in incorrect operation a short life or even a failure of this product as well as the motor Deliver this manual to the end user of this product Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded For how to use an optional device refer to the instruction and installation manuals for that optional device Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd INR SI47 1335 E Copyright 2008 Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement Preface Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC MEGA series of inverters This product is designed to drive a three phase induction motor Read through this instruction manual and be familiar with proper handling and operation of this product Improper handling might result in incorrect operation a short
217. G FRN355G FRN315G FRN355G FRN400G FRN355G Three phase 400 V FRN400G FRN500G FRN630G Note A box Wi in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box L1 in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection will vary depending on the power transformer capacity Refer to the related technical documentation for details 2 The recommended wire size for main circuits is for the 70 C 600 V PVC wires used at a surrounding temperature of 40 C 10 The inverter has been tested with IEC61800 5 1 2007 5 2 3 6 3 Short circuit Current Test under the following conditions Short circuit current in the supply 10 kA Maximum 240 V for 200 V class series with 22 kW or below Maximum 230 V for 200 V class series with 30 kW or above Maximum 480 V for 400 V class series viii Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada UL cUL listed inverters are subject to the regulations set forth by the UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada by installation within precautions listed below ANCAUTION Solid state motor overload protection motor protection by electronic thermal overload relay is provided in each model Use function codes F10 to F12
218. HHz OA OkW transformed to that of virtual physical 10 value of the object to be controlled e g temperature Cy PID feedback amount Siti OAz OA Okw Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for 12 details PID output in as the maximum NUIT o PID output iilii OHz LIA Okw frequency F03 being at 100 14 jen dn in 9 Load factot Em DIHz HA DIKkW 94 Load factor of the motor in as the rated 15 output being at 100 Motor output 445 OHz OA MkW kW Motor output in kW 16 An analog input to the inverter in a format e suitable for a desired scale Analog input 5citi DHzBHADKkW i 17 Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for details Torque current ug DIHz HA DIKkW 94 Torque current command value or 23 calculated torque current i o Magnetic flux command value Magnetic flux 57 OHz OA OkW gn 24 command Available only under vector control Ly Input watt h kWh Input watt hour GO DBz OA Okw kwh 2P ahon ow 25 100 5 86 E44 LED Monitor Display when stopped E44 specifies whether the specified value data 0 or the output value data 1 to be displayed on the LED monitor of the keypad when the inverter is stopped The monitored item depends on the E48 LED monitor Speed monitor item setting as shown below Data for E48 Monitored item What to be displayed when the inverter stopped E44 0 Specified value E44 1 Output value 0 Output
219. M CM a With the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 2 14 Circuit Configuration Using a Relay Contact W Using a programmable logic controller PLC to turn X1 to X7 FWD or REV ON or OFF Figure 2 15 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a programmable logic controller PLC to turn control signal input X1 to X7 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it has been turned to SOURCE In circuit a below short circuiting or opening the transistor s open collector circuit in the PLC using an external power supply turns ON or OFF control signal X1 to X7 FWD or REV When using this type of circuit observe the following Connect the node of the external power supply which should be isolated from the PLC s power to terminal PLC of the inverter Do not connect terminal CM of the inverter to the common terminal of the PLC Table 2 7 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Functions Programmable me dieit EI cicli Control circuit logic controller Control circuit z deyo Ld PLC PLC 1 1 SOURCE SOURCE X1 to X7 RB ea Photocoupler KSN acy Photocoupler Ld CM CM a With the
220. Maximum frequency 1 F03 x Speed limit 2 d33 x 120 96 5 103 Note Running stopping the motor Under torque control the inverter does not control the speed so it does not perform acceleration or deceleration by soft start and stop acceleration deceleration time at the time of startup and stop Turning ON a run command starts the inverter to run and outputs the commanded torque Turning it OFF stops the inverter so that the motor coasts to a stop At the startup in torque control under the Vector control without speed sensor the starting operation differs depending upon whether auto search is enabled or disabled by d67 as shown below Data for d67 Operation 0 Disable At startup the inverter first starts at zero frequency Then it accelerates 1 Enable At restart after according to a torque command momentary power failure Select this operation for use in which the motor is surely stopped before startup 2 Enable At normal start and At startup the inverter searches for idling motor speed and starts at restart after momentary running the motor at the frequency base on the searched speed Then it power failure starts torque control G deyo H26 H27 Thermistor for motor Mode selection and Level These function codes specify the PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient NTC Negative Temperature Coefficient thermistor embedded in the motor The thermistor is used to protect the motor from overh
221. N when the overload prevention control is activated and the output frequency changed Minimum width of the output signal 100 ms In equipment where a decrease in the output frequency does not lead to a decrease in the load the overload Note prevention control is of no use and should not be enabled H71 Deceleration Characteristics Hodes Setting the H71 data to 1 enables forced brake control If regenerative energy produced during the deceleration of the motor and returned to the inverter exceeds the inverter s braking capability an overvoltage trip will occur The forced brake control increases the motor energy loss during deceleration increasing the deceleration torque 0 Disable 1 Enable Cote This function is aimed at controlling the torque during deceleration it has no effect if there is a braking load Enabling the automatic deceleration anti regenerative control H69 2 or 4 in the torque limit control mode disables the deceleration characteristics specified by H71 5 110 H72 Main Power Down Detection Mode selection H72 monitors the inverter alternate current input power source and disables the inverter operation if it is not established 0 Disable 1 Enable In cases where the power is supplied via a PWM converter or the inverter is connected via the DC link bus there is no alternate current input In such cases set H72 data to 0 otherwise the inverter cannot operate Note If you use a singl
222. N30GIBI 4L1 FRN37GIBI 4L Three phase 400 V FRNA5GIBI A4LI FRN55GIB 4LI FRN75GIBI 4LI FRN90GIB 4L FRN110G1 40 FRN132G1 8 40 FRN160G1 8 40 FRN200G1 8 40 FRN220G1 8 40 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter type is FRN4 0G1 4E Note A box Wi in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box L1 in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection will vary depending on the power transformer capacity Refer to the related technical documentation for details 2 The recommended wire size for main circuits is for the 70 C 600 V PVC wires used at a surrounding temperature of 40 C vii Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Continued ANWARNING A ES 2 Recommended wire size mm Main circuit MCCB or RCD ELCB 1 Main power input 2 Rated current LUR L2 S L3 T Inverter s grounding G W W o DCR DCR Inverter type HD MD LD mode Control circuit Aux fan power Power supply voltage Nominal applied motor Aux control power Inverter outputs DC reactor Braking resistor FRN220G FRN280G FRN315G FRN280G FRN315
223. N75GIB 2LI Note 1 Control circuit terminals Tightening torque 6 1 Ib in 0 7 N m Recommended wire size AWG 19 or 18 0 65 to 0 82 mm Note 2 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box L1 in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 1 No terminal end treatment is required for connection 2 Use 75 C Cu wire only 3 The wire size of UL Open Type and Enclosed Type are common Please contact us if UL Open Type exclusive wire is necessary Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada continued ANCAUTION Required torque Ib in Wire size AWG mm Nm Main terminal L1 R L2 S L3 T U V W Inverter type Power supply voltage Nominal applied motor HD MD LD mode Class J fuse size A Circuit breaker trip size A Main terminal Remarks Aux fan power supply Aux control power supply Aux Fan power supply 75 C Cu wire Aux control power supply 60 C Cu wire 75 C Cu wire Remarks 60 C Cu wire FRNO 4G1 40 FRNO 75G1 40 FRNI 5GIB 4L FRN2 2GIB 4L FRN3 7G1W 4A FRN4 0G1 4E FRN5 5GIB 4L FRN7 5G1 40 FRNIIGIB 4LI FRNISGIBI 4L1 FRN18 5GIB 4L FRN22GIB 4L1 j 21 2 FRN30G1 W 40 3 26 7 2 33 6
224. ON or OFF status of each terminal as active The factory default settings are Active ON Terminals Y1 Y2 Y3 and Y4 are transistor outputs and terminals YSA C and 30A B C are relay contact outputs In normal logic if an alarm occurs the relay will be energized so that 30A and 30C will be closed and 30B and 30C opened In negative logic the relay will be deenergized so that 30A and 30C will be opened and 30B and 30C closed This may be useful for the implementation of failsafe power systems When a negative logic is employed all output signals are active e g an alarm would be recognized while the inverter is powered OFF To avoid causing system malfunctions by this interlock these signals to keep them ON using an external power supply Furthermore the validity of these output signals is not guaranteed for approximately 1 5 seconds for 22 kW or below or 3 seconds for 30 kW or above after power ON so introduce such a mechanism that masks them during the transient period Note 5 77 Terminals Y5A C and 30A B C use mechanical contacts that cannot stand frequent ON OFF switching Where frequent ON OFF switching is anticipated for example limiting a current by using signals subjected to inverter output limit control such as switching to commercial power line or direct on line starting use transistor outputs Y1 Y2 Y3 and Y4 instead The service life of a relay is approximately 200 000 tim
225. P09 and P11 determine the slip compensation amount in for driving and braking individually and adjust the slip amount from internal calculation Specification of 100 fully compensates for the rated slip of the motor Excessive compensation P09 P11 gt 100 may cause hunting undesirable oscillation of the system so carefully check the operation on the actual machine For Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector control the rated slip of the motor for driving or braking is compensated by P09 or P11 respectively to improve output torque accuracy P10 determines the response time for slip compensation Basically there is no need to modify the default setting If you need to modify it consult your Fuji Electric representatives Function codes Operation Slip compensation Slip compensation gain for driving Adjust the slip compensation amount for driving Slip compensation amount for driving Rated slip x Slip compensation gain for driving Slip compensation gain for braking Adjust the slip compensation amount for braking Slip compensation amount for braking Rated slip x Slip compensation gain for braking Slip compensation response time Specify the slip compensation response time Basically there is no need to modify the default setting Q For details about the slip compensation control refer to the description of F42 5 97 P12 Motor 1 Rated slip frequency P12 specifies rated slip frequency Obtain
226. PCB Note To move a switch slider use a tool with a narrow tip e g a tip of tweezers Be careful not to touch other electronic parts etc If the slider is in an ambiguous position the circuit is unclear whether it is turned ON or OFF and the digital input remains in an undefined state Be sure to place the slider so that it contacts either side of the switch 2 24 z deyo S23LH3ANI JHL NIXIM ANY ONILNNOW 2 4 Mounting and Connecting a Keypad You can mount a keypad on the panel wall or install one at a remote site e g for operation on hand RJ 45 connectors Panel Keypad fixing screws Inverter Keypad rear Remote operation extension cable Figure 2 21 Mounting a Keypad on the Panel Wall To mount install a keypad on a place other than in an inverter the parts listed below are needed Extension cable Note 1 CB 5S CB 3S and CB 1S 3 types available in length of 5 m 3 m and 1 m Fixing screw M3 x O Note 2 Two screws needed Purchase off the shelf ones separately Note 1 When using an off the shelf LAN cable use a 1OBASE T 100BASE TX straight type cable compliant with US ANSI TIA EIA 568A Category 5 Less than 20m Recommended LAN cable Manufacturer Sanwa Supply Inc Model KB 10T5 01K 1 m KB STP 01K 1 m Shielded LAN cable Note 2 When mounting on a panel wall use the screws with a length suitable for the wall thickness Depth of the screw holes on the keypad is 11 mm
227. PID command SV 16 PID output MV F37 Load Selection 0 Variable torque load N Y 1 YIYI NIY N 5 55 Auto Torque Boost 1 Constant torque load Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 2 Auto torque boost 3 Auto energy saving EM Variable torque load during ACC DEC 4 Auto energy saving Constant torque load during ACC DEC E codes 5 Auto energy saving Auto torque boost during ACC DEC F38 Stop Frequency Detection mode 0 Detected speed 1 Reference speed N Y 0 N I N Nj Y N 5 51 C codes F39 Holding Time 0 00 to 10 00 s Y Y 000 Y Y Y Y N 5 57 F40 Torque Limiter 1 1 300 to 300 999 Disable y y 99 fylylyly y 557 P codes F41 1 2 300 to 300 999 Disable M Y 99 Y Y Y Y Y F42 Drive Control Selection 1 0 V f control with slip compensation inactive N Y 0 Y lvY vYi v Y 5 62 H codes 1 Dynamic torque vector control 2 V f control with slip compensation active A codes 3 V f control with speed sensor 4 Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor 5 Vector control without speed sensor b codes 6 Vector control with speed sensor F43 Current Limiter Mode selection 0 Disable No current limiter works Y Y 2 Y Y N N N 5 64 r codes 1 Enable at constant speed Disable during ACC DEC 2 Enable during ACC constant speed operation J codes F44 Level 20 to 200 The data is interpreted as the rated output Y Y 160 Y Y NIN N current of the inverter for 100 F50 Electronic Thermal Overload 0 Braking resistor built in
228. Power Source and Regulation 9 4 2 Compliance with the harmonic component regulation Table 9 2 Compliance with Harmonic Component Regulation Applicable Power supply voltage Inverter type w o DC reactor w DC reactor DC reactor type FRNO 4G1 20 DCR2 0 4 FRNO 75G1 20 DCR2 0 75 FRNO 4G1 8 40 DCR4 0 4 FRNO 75G1 40 DCR4 0 75 When supplying three phase 200 VAC power stepped down from a three phase 400 VAC power line using a transformer the level of harmonic flow from the 400 VAC line will be regulated Three phase 200 V Three phase 400 V Note 1 A box B in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination Note2 Inverter types marked with Y in the table above are compliant with the EN61000 3 2 A14 so they may be connected to public low voltage power supply unconditionally Conditions apply when connecting models marked with To connect them to public low voltage power supply you need to obtain permission from the local electric power supplier In general you will need to provide the supplier with the harmonics current data of the inverter To obtain the data contact your Fuji Electric representative 9 5 Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive in the EU 9 5 1 General General purpose inverters are regulated by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Fuji Electric states that all our inverters with CE mark
229. RN355GIBI ACI 250x2 52 450 FRN355GIBI AL FRNA00GIBI 4L 250 2 500 FRN500GIB 4L FRN400G1 8 40 325x2 100 325x2 53 630 FRN630GIB 4L FRN500G1 m 40 325x3 325x3 710 FRN630GIB 4L1 250x4 325x4 325x4 1 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter type is FRN4 0G1 W 4EF 2 Use the crimp terminal model No 38 6 manufactured by JST Mfg Co Ltd or equivalent 3 Use the crimp terminal model No 60 6 manufactured by JST Mfg Co Ltd or equivalent 4 When using 150 mm wires for main circuit terminals of FRN55GIWI 2L LD mode use CB150 10 crimp terminals designed for low voltage appliances in JEM1399 5 Use the crimp terminal model No 8 L6 manufactured by JST Mfg Co Ltd or equivalent Note A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box L1 in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination Terminals common to all inverters Recommended wire size mm Remarks 1 5 kW or above Auxiliary control power input terminals RO and TO Auxiliary fan power input terminals R1 and T1 2 6 200 V class series with 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above z deyo S2LH3ANI JHL ONIMIM ANY ONILNNOW 2 Arrangement of control circuit terminals common to all inverter types 11 12 15 c1 41 om Fwo neviPce Pc pe px se ia RISTPIONDISSIGINIICI A Reinforce insulation Max 250 VAC Overvoltage category II Pollution d
230. RS 485 communications link port 2 Via fieldbus option H30 0 y98 0 H30 2 y98 0 H30 6 y98 0 H30 1 H30 4 H30 0 1 or 4 y98 0 y98 0 y98 1 H30 3 H30 5 H30 2 3 or 5 y98 0 y98 0 y98 1 H30 7 H30 8 H30 6 7 or 8 y98 0 y98 0 y98 1 H30 0 20r6 H30 1 3or7 H30 4 5or8 H30 0 1 to 8 y98 2 y98 2 y98 2 y98 3 4 For details refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual or the Field Bus Option Instruction Manual Inverter itself Via RS 485 communications link port 1 Via RS 485 communications link port 2 m o 3 o un t S E E S o S c Via fieldbus option When the terminal command LE Enable communications link via RS 485 or fieldbus is assigned to a digital input terminal turning LE ON makes the settings of H30 and y98 enabled When LE is OFF those settings are disabled so that both frequency commands and run commands specified from the inverter itself take control Refer to the descriptions of E01 through E07 data 24 No LE assignment is functionally equivalent to the LE being ON 5 106 H42 H48 H43 Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor Cumulative Run Time of Cooling Fan Cumulative Run Time of Capacitors on Printed Circuit Boards W Life prediction function The inverter has the life prediction function for some parts which measures the discharging time or counts the voltage applied time etc The function allows you to monitor
231. RUN N Y 0 YI Y YIY Y E21 Terminal Y2 Function 1 1004 Frequency speed arrival signal FAR N Ty 1 f y y yly on E22 Terminal Y3 Function E 1002 Frequency speed detected Fon n vy 2 v Y v v v E23 Terminal Y4 Function 3 1003 Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped LU N Y 7 Y Y vY Yv Y E24 Terminal Y5A C Function 4 1004 Torque polarity detected B D N Y 15 Y Y YIY Y E27 Terminal 30A B C Function 5 1005 Inverter output limiting IOL N Y 99 Y Y vYj Yv Y Relay output 6 1006 Auto restarting after momentary power failure IPF YA e Y Y 7 1007 Motor overload early warning OL Xo 2X4 Y Y Y 8 1008 Keypad operation enabled KP Y BYE XTY Y 10 1010 Inverter ready to run RDY Y Y vY vYv Y 11 Switch motor drive source between O Ll commercial power and inverter output For MC on commercial line SW88 Y Y NIN N 127 Switch motor drive source between FL commercial power and inverter output For secondary side SW52 2 Y Y N N N 13 Switch motor drive source between O FL commercial power and inverter output For primary side SW52 1 Y Y N N N 15 1015 Select AX terminal function L For MC on primary side AX Y p YS xXx Y 22 1022 Inverter output limiting with delay IOL2 IEIET Y Y 25 1025 Cooling fan in operation FAN A EE Y Y 26 1026 Auto resetting TRY Y Y YIY Y 27 1027
232. Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST Function code data 33 Turning this terminal command ON resets the integral and differential components of the PID processor L Refer to the descriptions of JO1 through J19 and J56 through J62 B Hold PID integral component PID HLD Function code data 34 Turning this terminal command ON holds the integral components of the PID processor L Refer to the descriptions of JO1 through J19 and J56 through J62 5 73 E Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 50 Hz and 60 Hz ISW50 and ISW60 Function code data 40 and 41 With the terminal command SW50 or ISW60 assigned the inverter controls the magnetic contactor that switches the motor drive source between the commercial power and the inverter output according to the integrated sequence This control is effective when not only SW50 or ISW60 has been assigned to the input terminal but also the SW88 and SW52 2 signals have been assigned to the output terminals It is not essential to assign the SW52 J signal The ISW50 or ISW60 should be selected depending upon the frequency of the commercial power the former for 50 Hz and the latter for 60 Hz For details of these commands refer to the circuit diagrams and timing schemes given below Terminal command assigned MATS Op ranon Switching from commercial power to inverter ISW50 Start at 50 Hz Enable integrated sequence to switch to commer
233. S 485 Communication 1 and 2 Up to two ports of RS 485 communications link are available as listed below Applicable equipment Standard keypad Port 1 y01 through y10 FRENIC Loader RS 485 communications link via the RJ 45 connector prepared for keypad connection Host equipment Port 2 RS 485 communications link ll th hv20 Host i or rou ost equipmen via terminals DX DX and SD on the control PCB ii En TRR To connect any of the applicable devices follow the procedures shown below 1 Standard keypad The standard keypad allows you to run and monitor the inverter There is no need to set the y codes 2 FRENIC Loader Connecting your computer running FRENIC Loader to the inverter via RS 485 communication port 1 you can monitor the inverter s running status information edit function codes and test run the inverters L For the setting of y codes refer to the descriptions of y01 to y10 FRENIC MEGA series of inverters has a USB port on the keypad To use the FRENIC Loader via the USB port simply set the station address y01 to 1 factory default Note 3 Host equipment The inverter can be managed and monitored by connecting host equipment such as a PC and PLC to the inverter Modbus RTU and Fuji general purpose inverter protocol are available for communications protocols Modbus RTU is a protocol established by Modicon Inc L For details refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual
234. ST OFF ON OFF W Enable external alarm trip THR Function code data 9 Turning this terminal command OFF immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the motor coasts to a stop displays the alarm 74 and outputs the alarm relay for any fault ALM The THR command is self held and is reset when an alarm reset takes place Tip Use this alarm trip command from external equipment when you have to immediately shut down the inverter output in the event of an abnormal situation in peripheral equipment W Switch to commercial power for 50 Hz or 60 Hz SW50 and SW60 Function code data 15 and 16 When an external sequence switches the motor drive power from the commercial line to the inverter inputting the terminal command SW50 or SW60 at the specified timing enables the inverter to start running the motor with the current commercial power frequency regardless of settings of the reference output frequency in the inverter A running motor driven by commercial power is carried on into inverter operation This command helps you smoothly switch the motor drive power source when the motor is being driven by commercial power from the commercial power to the inverter power For details refer to the following table the operation schemes and an example of external circuit and its operation time scheme on the following pages SWSs0 Starts at 50 Hz SW60 Starts at 60 Hz Do not concurrently assign both SW50 and
235. Speed command filter Z b44 Speed detection filter 0 000 to 0 100 s Y Y 00065 N Y Y Y N O b45 P Gain 0 1 to 200 0 times x Y 100 N Y Y Y N gt b46 Integral time 0 001 to 9 999 s ys Y 0100 N Y Y Y N m b48 Output filter 0 000 to 0 100 s Y Y 0002 N Y Y Y N o b49 Notch filter resonance frequency 1 to 200 Hz Y Y 200 N N Nj Y N b50 Notch filter attenuation level 0 to 20 dB Y Y 0 N N Nj Y N b51 Cumulative Motor Run Time 3 0 to 9999 The cumulative run time can be modified or reset N N Y Y vYi Yv Y in units of 10 hours b52 Startup Counter for Motor 3 Indication of cumulative startup count Y N Y Y vYi v Y 0000 to FFFF hex b53 Motor 3 X correction factor 1 0 to 300 Y YiY2 100 Y Y Y Y Y b54 X correction factor 2 096 to 300 Y YiY2 100 Y Y Y Y Y b55 Torque current under vector control 0 00 to 2000 A N Y1Y2 7 NIN Y Y Y b56 Induced voltage factor under 50 to 100 N Y1Y2 85 N N Y Y Y vector control b57 Reserved 9 0 000 to 20 000 s Y v1Y2 7 r codes Motor 4 Parameters 5 o i l P perault Drive control Refer Code Name Data setting range oc 8 setting to 52 S Vit PG w o w Torque page Ss amp vif PG PG control o r01 Maximum Frequency 4 25 0 to 500 0 Hz N 1 YiY Y v Y F codes r02 Base Frequency 4 25 0 to 500 0 Hz N Y 500 Y Y Y Y Y r03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 4 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage N Y2
236. THII OLr 08 669 EES 16 COE LOT Icy 99 8l 6 cs 0c Il 6671 00TL i TI 600 8TTI Corl v8c CTI 9st ros TL9 0708 L L8 tov Lgl vStl ver 879 8VvI SL 66 01 01087 5 0I 8800 006 9 Sel Vee evil sir LTS 69 T6L 9 88 SLv Or ESE 66v TLS 8c Il ese 6r L 1 08 S 80 900 909 IPSI Ctt 9 si V 6 6v I9 69L 098 ves 61 99 01 8r s 86 LEL Le 6b S OL OLE E 9 0 IS0 0 09 t 9 0 1 Stt sit 86E EOS L 19 ODL T S8 les 08 T THO ST 9 cec ESY TT 69 1077 P 1900 9vc 6 trl roc VII cor rss TIL 88 16 8 s 00 09 0 619 Ll yore SI 617 0ST BA c 00 ECI v8tl c c Vell Ule STs 9 c9 L LL 88 OvL ttc TEO 1 8 eri 6L I SLO erro sro E en 6c00 90 err 9 Vell ser TSS 0 19 I8 L 88 886 Orc LTE 86 980 STI v0 bL 0 0r 0 e 9c00 ECO v8tl 671 ONT EEr SYS 6 99 618 L 68 09 71 EET v9 c LITI S0 990 TO 6 0 91070 S vc0O 910 9 6cl sit 8801 L OS 9 t9 vvL T98 EEG 00 vl LET Icc 6vcl 8C0 seo TO 610 010 S LC0 O O10 8 8HI Sci 901 070 S T9 OSL S L8 8 6 00 tT LL T v8 I 06 T Ico ETO 90 0 60 0 01 10 0 s 9vH Led Ssd Eld Cid Icd 0cd 6ld 8Id Lid 9Id Id cid 80d L0d 90d 0d x c0d M GO o E c oum Aerop dried pem mo 08 mo S d v a a c m I A ee v a ADD gu Hotes OD repnopred spun UOFSMSINS TOSTO MOIST ronemnyes uoneImes uorernges uonemies uoneznjes OP dis X Ta meumo pomno pordde Medes 3 opour Surveys 104 INS ae a paleo onouseyy ouen onoudepy onule onouteyy SAT poeg PEOLON PRA nuno 1030 A
237. To clear alarm data simultaneous keying of 6 key key is required Data for H97 Function 0 Disable 1 Enable Setting 1 clears alarm data and then returns to 0 Protection Maintenance Function Mode selection H98 specifies whether to enable or disable automatic lowering of carrier frequency input phase loss protection output phase loss protection judgment threshold on the life of DC link bus capacitor judgment on the life of DC link bus capacitor DC fan lock detection braking transistor error detection and IP20 IP40 switching in combination Bit 0 to Bit 7 Automatic lowering of carrier frequency Bit 0 Under V f control only This function should be used for important machinery that requires keeping the inverter running Even if a heat sink overheat or overload occurs due to excessive load abnormal surrounding temperature or cooling system failure enabling this function lowers the carrier frequency to avoid tripping 444 LiF or LIL Note that enabling this function results in increased motor noise Input phase loss protection 7 Bit 1 Upon detection of an excessive stress inflicted on the apparatus connected to the main circuit due to phase loss or line to line voltage unbalance in the three phase power supplied to the inverter this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm 7 5 115 Note I configurations where only a light load is driven or a DC reac
238. Torque boost 1 to 4 Auto restart after capacity T9 AO5 B6S 0S momentary power failure capacity FUB A05 D0u05 momentary power failure kW 3 H13 kW H13 0 4 7A 55 0 75 75 e 1 5 1 5 6 8 90 2 2 0 5 110 3 7 4 0 5 5 132 2 0 5 5 4 9 160 7 5 44 200 0 0 11 3 5 220 2 5 15 2 8 280 18 5 315 aT 2 2 1 0 4 0 22 355 30 400 37 0 0 500 5 0 45 1 5 630 4 0 kW for the EU 5 25 Table C Motor Parameters The tables given below list the function codes dedicated to motor 1 For motors 2 to 4 replace the function codes with the ones dedicated to the respective motor GIW 2A Three phase 200 V class series for Asia FRN Chap 5 FUNCTION CODES ve 8L 0 9 6 VC T OTI TTI SLY L 8 LOL 9 c8 06 L I 99 0 SCLI S9 T 09 8 OTHE OTI eAo0ge Jo Q OTT TE OLEO 6LLC O SrI 0 0 l OS Ory OS 0 s9 0 6L 8 88 IEZ 08 0 9T EL Er I 606 OTST 06 6 601 92 00 06 8T TOT O 9 Itc Ea 8 6cl 6v 6cy TYS v9 0 8L 188 EET 08 0 LEEI v9 I LC9L SIET SL 66 68 01 00 SL 9T L970 8 69I SLST T9ET CLIT ler 9ES L v9 6L 768 SY T t60 6 T VOT CLES SCLI ss 66 vL 91 00 SS TLT O 6 8 l Srl 0971 Cll vvv Ves 899 L 6L 0768 SUC 080 9 l 60 C vs EY 6 TvI Sv 66 v 91 00 S n OSTO CHIL oer Y OTI TTI ver TYS vs9 68L L 88 0 c 08 0 9e I BTT v0 8 C8II LE 66 ty 0 00 LE ET TOTO Z976 6ESI CEL STI Sev TLS L 89 9 I8 706 Ore 08 0 8 cI 8Ic 99 SE 8 16 0 6679 01
239. UP increase output frequency DOWN decrease output frequency enable data change with keypad cancel PID control switch normal inverse operation interlock cancel torque control enable communications link via RS 485 or fieldbus option universal DI enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting force to stop pre excitation reset PID integral and differential components hold PID integral component select local keypad operation protect the motor from dew condensation enable internal sequence to commercial lines pulse train input pulse train sign cancel constant peripheral speed control hold the constant peripheral speed control frequency in the memory switch to commercial power operation select droop control servo lock command cancel PG alarm cancel customizable logic clear all customizable logic timers Transistor output Inverter running frequency arrival signal 1 3 frequency detected 3 points undervoltage detected inverter stopped torque polarity detected inverter output limiting auto restarting after momentary power failure motor overload early warning keypad operation inverter ready to run switch motor power between commercial line and inverter output inverter input output commercial power select the AX terminal function primary side MC inverter output limiting with delay cooling fan in operation auto resetting universal DO heat sink overheat early warning service lifetime alarm reference l
240. Use insulated tools Never modify the inverter Electric shock or injuries could occur Before proceeding to the maintenance inspection jobs turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below Electric shock may occur Maintenance inspection and parts replacement should be made only by authorized persons Take off the watch rings and other metallic objects before starting work 7 1 Daily Inspection Visually inspect the inverter for operation errors from the outside without removing the covers when the inverter is ON or operating Check that the expected performance satisfying the standard specification is obtained Check that the surrounding environment satisfies the requirements given in Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment Check that the LED monitor on the keypad displays normally Check for abnormal noise odor or excessive vibration Check for traces of overheat discoloration and other defects 7 2 Periodic Inspection Perform periodic inspections according to the items listed in Table 7 1 Before performing periodic inspections be
241. W sode Power supply voltage Three phase 200 V re oe KW 4 Three phase 400 V 500 500 kW Code Enclosure 630 630 kW S Basic type IP20 IP00 E EMC filter built in type IP20 IPOO Code Development code 1 1 Code Applicable area G High performance mutifunction Note 1n tables given in this manual inverter types are denoted as FRN _ GIBI2LI ALI The boxes m and O replace alphabetic letters depending on the enclosure and shipping destination respectively The FRENIC MEGA is available in two or three drive modes depending upon the inverter capacity High Duty HD and Low Duty LD modes or High Duty HD Medium Duty MD and Low Duty LD modes One of these modes should be selected to match the load property of your system Specifications in each mode are printed on the main nameplate For details see Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS High Duty HD mode designed for heavy duty load applications Overload capability 150 for 1 min 200 for 3 s Continuous ratings Inverter ratings Medium Duty MD mode designed for medium duty load applications Overload capability 150 for 1 min Continuous ratings One rank higher capacity of inverters Low Duty LD mode designed for light duty load applications Overload capability 12096 for 1 min Continuous ratings One rank or two ranks higher capacity of inverters SOURCE Number of input phases three phase 3PH input voltage input frequency input current each for HD MD and LD modes OUTPUT
242. YJYJYJ Y REV terminals by E98 and E99 F02 Run reverse MES 99 Exclusively assigned to FWD and REV Y Y Y Y Y REV terminals by E98 and E99 100 No function assigned NONE Y Y Y Y Y U81 to U85 Note Some negative logic Active OFF commands cannot be assigned to the functions marked with in the Active OFF column The Enable external alarm trip data 1009 and Force to stop data 1030 are fail safe terminal commands In the case of Enable external alarm trip when data 1009 Active ON alarm is triggered when ON when data 9 Active OFF alarm is triggered when OFF 5 68 G deyo S3Q02 NOILONNA Terminal function assignment and data setting m Coast to a stop BX Function code data 7 Turning this terminal command ON immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the motor coasts to a stop without issuing any alarms W Reset alarm RST Function code data 8 Turning this terminal command ON clears the AZM state alarm output for any fault Turning it OFF erases the alarm display and clears the alarm hold state When you turn the RST command ON keep it ON for 10 ms or more This command should be kept OFF for the normal inverter operation An alarm occurrence Inverter Turning alarm display on and running status holding alarm status Stop No alarm displayed and ready to run am ew an Mr i Min 10 ms Reset alarm R
243. a measure to be taken at the inverter side Input current to an inverter contains a harmonic component that may affect other motors and phase advancing capacitors on the same power supply line If the harmonic component causes any problems connect an optional DCR ACR to the inverter In some cases it is necessary to insert a reactor in series with the phase advancing capacitors 2 Power supply lines Application of a DC AC reactor Use an optional DC reactor DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer is 500 kVA or more and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity or when there are thyristor driven loads If no DCR is used the percentage reactance of the power supply decreases and harmonic components and their peak levels increase These factors may break rectifiers or capacitors in the converter section of the inverter or decrease the capacitance of the capacitors If the input voltage unbalance rate is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR Max voltage V Min voltage V x Voltage unbalance s Three phase average voltage V 67 IEC 61800 3 3 DC reactor DCR for correcting the inverter input power factor for suppressing harmonics To correct the inverter input power factor to suppress harmonics use an optional DCR Using a DCR increases the reactance of inverter s power source so as to decrease harmonic components on the power source lines and correct the power factor of the inverter
244. a run command change the data of function code F02 amp The moment a run command is entered the display of lights up and tuning starts with the motor stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 40 s If the terminal signal FWD or REV is selected as a run command F02 1 r appears upon completion of the measurements Turning the run command OFF completes the tuning If the run command has been given through the keypad or the communications link it automatically turns OFF upon completion of the measurements which completes the tuning Upon completion of the tuning the subsequent function code P06 appears on the keypad W Tuning errors Improper tuning would negatively affect the operation performance and in the worst case could even cause hunting or deteriorate precision Therefore if the inverter finds any abnormality in the tuning results or any error in the tuning process it displays and discards the tuning data Listed below are possible causes that trigger tuning errors Possible tuning error causes Details An interphase voltage unbalance or output phase loss has been detected Error in tuning results Tuning has resulted in an abnormally high or low value of a parameter due to the output circuit opened Output current error An abnormally high current has flown during tuning During tuning a run command has been turned OFF or STOP Force to stop BX Coast to Sequence error a stop DWP
245. able Torque current command 3 Enable Torque command H26 Thermistor for motor 0 Disable Y Y 0 Y Y vi v Y 5 104 Mode selection 4 PTC The inverter immediately trips with 4 displayed 2 PTC The inverter issues output signal THM and continues to run 3 NTC When connected H27 Level 0 00 to 5 00 V Y Y 035 Y Y Y Y Y H28 Droop Control 60 0 to 0 0 Hz Y Y 0 0 Y vY vi v N 5 105 H30 Communications Link Function Frequency command Run command Y Y 0 YITY YI Y Y Mode selection 0 F01 C30 F02 1 RS 485 Port 1 F02 2 F01 C30 RS 485 Port 1 3 RS 485 Port 1 RS 485 Port 1 4 RS 485 Port 2 F02 5 RS 485 Port 2 RS 485 Port 1 6 F01 C30 RS 485 Port 2 7 RS 485 Port 1 RS 485 Port 2 8 RS 485 Port 2 RS 485 Port 2 H42 Capacitance of DC Link Bus Indication for replacement of DC link bus capacitor Y N gt an XY px Y 5 107 Capacitor 0000 to FFFF hex H43 Cumulative Run Time of Cooling Fan Indication for replacement of cooling fan Y N X Veo Y X Y in units of 10 hours H44 Startup Counter for Motor 1 Indication of cumulative startup count Y N YlvY Y v Y 5 108 0000 to FFFF hex H45 Mock Alarm 0 Disable X N 0 Yet en eel se ee Y 5 109 1 Enable Once a mock alarm occurs the data automatically returns to 0 H46 Starting Mode 0 1 to 10 0 s Y Y1Y2 7 Y Y Y N Y 5 101 Auto search delay time 2 5 109 H47 Initial Capacitance of DC Link Bus Indication for replacement of DC link bus capacit
246. able y Y 0 Y Y NIN N H72 Main Power Down Detection 0 Disable 1 Enable Y Y 1 Yap NS MY Y 5 111 Mode selection H73 Torque Limiter 0 Enable during ACC DEC and running at constant speed N Y 0 ein d Y 5 57 Operating conditions 1 Disable during ACC DEC and enable during running at 5 111 constant speed 2 Enable during ACC DEC and disable during running at constant speed H74 Control target 0 Motor generating torque limit N Y 1 NIN Y Y Y 1 Torque current limit 2 Output power limit H75 Target quadrants 0 Drive brake N Y 0 NI IN Y Y Y 1 Same for all four quadrants 2 Upper lower limits H76 Frequency increment limit 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Y Y 5 0 Y Y NIN N 5 109 for braking 5 111 H77 Service Life of DC Link Bus 0 to 8760 in units of 10 hours y N YTY ETY Y 5 111 Capacitor Remaining time H78 Maintenance Interval M1 0 Disable 1 to 9999 in units of 10 hours Y N 8760 Y Y YJ Y Y 5 108 H79 Preset Startup Count for 0000 Disable 0001 to FFFF hex Y N 0 Y vY vY vY v 5111 F codes Maintenance M1 H80 Output Current Fluctuation Damping 0 00 to 0 40 Y Y 020 Y Y N N Y 5 111 Gain for Motor 1 10 E codes H81 Light Alarm Selection 1 0000 to FFFF hex Y Y 0 Yoon l Y Y 5 112 H82 Light Alarm Selection 2 0000 to FFFF hex y Yy o vlivivivi v C codes H84 Pre excitation Initial level 10096 to 40096 Y Y 100 N N Y Y Y 5 114 H85 Time 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 30 00 s Y Y oo ININ Y Y Y P
247. above points again If any problem is found modify the function code data again as described below Depending on the settings of function codes the motor speed may rise to an unexpectedly high and dangerous level particularly under vector control with without speed sensor To avoid such an event the speed limiting function is provided Tip If the user is unfamiliar with the function code settings e g when the user starts up the inverter for the first time it is recommended that the frequency limiter high F15 and the torque control speed limit 1 2 d32 d33 be used At the startup of the inverter to ensure safer operation specify small values to those function codes at first and gradually increase them while checking the actual operation The speed limiting function serves as an overspeed level barrier or as a speed limiter under torque control For details of the speed limiting function refer to the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual lt Modification of motor control function code data gt Modifying the current function code data sometimes can solve an insufficient torque or overcurrent incident The table below lists the major function codes to be accessed For details see Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES and Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING Drive control Modification key points PG w o w V f PG PG Function If the current limiter is activated due to a short acceleration time Acceleration time 1 SES CERERI I and l
248. above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 1 Remove all of the base fixing screws and the case fixing screws from the top of the inverter 2 Move the top mounting base to the center of the inverter and secure it to the case fixing screw holes with the base fixing screws After changing the position of the top mounting base some screws may be left unused 3 Remove the base fixing screws from the bottom of the inverter move the bottom mounting base to the center of the inverter and secure it with the base fixing screws just as in step 2 Inverters with a capacity of 220 kW or below have no case fixing screws on the bottom Base fixing screws Case fixing screws 2s D N Base fixing screws Figure 2 3 Changing the Positions of the Top and Bottom Mounting Bases ANCAUTION When changing the positions of the top and bottom mounting bases use only the specified screws Otherwise a fire or accident could occur 2 3 Wiring Follow the procedure below In the following description the inverter has already been installed 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the front cover and the wiring guide 1 For inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below D First loosen the front cover fixing screw slide the cover downward holding its both sides tilt it toward you and then pull it upward as shown below While pressin
249. achinery that requires quick acceleration deceleration 5 56 G deyo c z O e Z Q J m o Use auto energy saving only where the base frequency is 60 Hz or lower If the base frequency is set at 60 Note Hz or higher you may get a little or no energy saving advantage The auto energy saving operation is designed for use with the frequency lower than the base frequency If the frequency becomes higher than the base frequency the auto energy saving operation will be invalid Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base frequency 1 F04 the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 and other pertinent motor parameters PO1 through P03 and P06 through P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning P04 Under the vector control without speed sensor the auto energy saving operation is disabled F38 F39 Stop frequency Detection mode Holding time Refer to F23 F40 F41 Torque Limiter 1 1 E16 E17 Torque Limiter 2 1 Torque Limiter 2 2 Torque Limiter 1 2 H73 Torque Limiter Operating conditions H76 Torque Limiter Frequency increment limit for braking Under V f control If the inverter s output torque exceeds the specified levels of the torque limiters F40 F41 E16 E17 and E61 to E63 the inverter controls the output frequency and limits the output torque for preventing a stall To use the torque limiters it is neces
250. age 5 2 ANCAUTION Ensure safety before modifying the function code settings Run commands e g Run forward FWD stop commands e g Coast to a stop BX and frequency change commands can be assigned to digital input terminals Depending upon the assignment states of those terminals modifying the function code setting may cause a sudden motor start or an abrupt change in speed When the inverter is controlled with the digital input signals switching run or frequency command sources with the related terminal commands e g SS7 S2 SS4 SS8 Hz2 Hz1 HzPID IVS and LE may cause a sudden motor start or an abrupt change in speed An accident or physical injury may result Drive control PG w o w V f PG PG Function code data Active ON Active OFF Related Torque Terminal commands assigned function codes control SSI SS2 SS4 SS8 RTI RT2 HLD BX RST THR C05 to C19 Select multi frequency 0 to 15 steps Select ACC DEC time 2 steps Select ACC DEC time 4 steps Enable 3 wire operation Coast to a stop Reset alarm Enable external alarm trip F07 F08 E10 to E15 COP D MN A BW N Re C20 H54 H55 d09 to d13 F01 C30 A42 F20 to F22 F40 F41 E16 E17 Z K KIKIKI Z ZZZ 2 2 Ready for jogging JOG Hz2 Hz1 M2 DCBRK TL2 TL1 SW50 SW60 UP Select frequency command 2 1 Select motor
251. ails Terminal X7 pulse input monitor Shows the pulse rate of the pulse train signal on terminal X7 PG pulse rate A B phase signal from the reference PG Shows the pulse rate p s of the A B phase signal fed back from the reference PG PG pulse rate Z phase signal from the reference PG Shows the pulse rate p s of the Z phase signal fed back from the reference PG PG pulse rate A B phase signal from the slave PG Shows the pulse rate p s of the A B phase signal fed back from the slave PG PG pulse rate Z phase signal from the slave PG Shows the pulse rate p s of the Z phase signal fed back from the slave PG Not used Input voltage on terminal 32 Shows the input voltage on terminal 32 on the analog interface card option in volts V Input current on terminal C2 Shows the input current on terminal C2 on the analog interface card option in milliamperes mA Output voltage on terminal AO Shows the output voltage on terminal AO on the analog interface card option in volts V Output current on terminal CS Shows the output current on terminal CS on the analog interface card option in milliamperes mA Customizable logic timer monitor Monitors the timer or counter value in the customizable logic specified by U91 B Displaying control I O signal terminals The status of control I O signal terminals may be dis
252. ails on how to modify the function code data see Chapter 3 Section 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting i Factory default Puticuon Function code data y FRN GIB2A 4A FRN GIB 4E 200 V class series 200 V class series 60 0 Hz I Og E Base frequency 1 400 V class series 400 V class series 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz Motor ratings 200 V class series 200 V class series n Rated voltage 220 V Z W x Aa at base frequency 1 p s on the nameplate of the 400 V class series 400 V class series motor 415 V 400 V m na Motor 1 xisbanli T j LIT Rated capacity Nominal applied motor capacity P GF ee E t Rated current of nominal applied motor 200 V class series 200 V class series EG 60 0 Hz F LIJ Maximum frequency 1 l e Machinery design values 400 V class series 400 V class series 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz Dona Acceleration time 1 Note For a test driving of the motor 55 kW or below 6 00 s OLLI Note increase values so that they are longer 30 kW or above 20 00 s than your machinery design values If rng Deceleration time 1 the specified time is short the inverter 22 kW or below 6 00 s MRE Note may not run the motor properly 30 kW or above 20 00 s When accessing the function code P02 take into account that changing the P02 data automatically updates the data of the function codes P03 P06 to P23 P
253. al braking load gt Review the selection of the braking resistor and increase the braking capability Modification of related function code data F50 F51 and F52 is also required 2 Specified deceleration time is Recalculate the deceleration torque and time needed for the load currently applied too short based on a moment of inertia for the load and the deceleration time gt Increase the deceleration time F08 E11 E13 E15 and H56 gt Review the selection of the braking resistor and increase the braking capability Modification of related function code data F50 F51 and F52 is also required 3 Incorrect setting of function Recheck the specifications of the braking resistor code data F50 F51 and F52 gt Review data of function codes F50 F51 and F52 then modify them Note The inverter issues an overheat alarm of the braking resistor by monitoring the magnitude of the braking load not by measuring its surface temperature When the braking resistor is frequently used so as to exceed the settings made by function codes F50 F51 and F52 therefore the inverter issues an overheat alarm even if the surface temperature of the braking resistor does not rise To squeeze out full performance of the braking resistor configure function codes F50 F51 and F52 while actually measuring the surface temperature of the braking resistor 12 2 5 Fuse blown Problem The fuse inside the inverter blew Possible Cau
254. and C1 Voltage input to terminal V2 0 to 10 VDC Terminal command UP DOWN control 8 3 keys on keypad balanceless bumpless switching available 11 Digital input interface card option 12 Pulse train input Qum I Sg Refer page 5 29 Operation Method 0 RUN STOP keys on keypad Motor rotational direction specified by terminal command FWD REV 1 Terminal command FWD or REV 2 RUN STOP keys on keypad forward 3 RUN STOP keys on keypad reverse 5 35 Maximum Frequency 1 25 0 to 500 0 Hz Base Frequency 1 25 0 to 500 0 Hz z 50 0 E Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series 80 to 240 V 160 to 500 V Y2 gil Maximum Output Voltage 1 80 to 240 V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series 160 to 500 V Y2 1 5 36 Acceleration Time 1 Deceleration Time 1 0 00 to 6000 s Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring external soft start lt lt 2 lt lt lt lt 12 5 38 Torque Boost 1 0 0 to 20 0 percentage with respect to Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 3 5 40 5 55 F12 Electronic Thermal Overload Protecti
255. and 440 V for 400 V class series i z fe a J a o 5 ars S a 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V 4 Voltage unbalance x 67 IEC 61800 3 If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 5 Required when a DC reactor DCR is used 6 Average braking torque for the motor running alone It varies with the efficiency of the motor 7 A DC reactor DCR is optionally provided Note that inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW or above in all modes require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters Note A box O in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination g deu SNOILVOIJIO3dS LD Low Duty mode inverters for light load 5 5 to 75 kW Item Specifications Type FRN___GIE 4T ws 2 3 5 AT applied motor 15 18 5 22 37 45 55 75 m rating EE pneum COCE Rated voltage V Three phase 380 to 480 V with AVR function Overload capability 120 1 min Output ratings Voltage frequency 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz Allowable Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 5 voltage frequency Frequency 5 to 5 2 Required capacity c with DCR KVA 6 10 15 20 25 30 48 58 71 114 IL UMBRELLAS ENT NL ERAT o Braking transistor e Built in Built in resistor Braki
256. and control circuit wires Be careful about the wiring order Control circuit wires Upper main circuit wires Control circuit p wires SEEN Wiring guide Lower main circuit wires Main circuit wires FRN3 7G1 40 FRN11G1 40 Note A box W in the above figure replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box L1 in the above figure replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination B Preparing for the wiring guide Inverters with a capacity of 11 to 22 kW three phase 200 V class series are sometimes lacking in wiring space for main circuit wires depending upon the wire materials used To assure a sufficient wiring space remove the clip off sections see below as required with a nipper Note that the enclosure rating of IP20 may not be ensured when the wiring guide itself is removed to secure a space for thick main circuit wiring Clip off sections Clip off sections Before removal of clip off sections After removal of clip off sections Wiring Guide FRN15G1 40D Note A box W in the above figure replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box L1 in the above figure replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 2 7 8 9 In some types of inverters the wires from the main circuit terminal block cannot be straight routed Route such wires as shown below so that the front cover is set into place
257. ange and internal processing as listed below Function codes DC braking 1 Braking level HD mode Setting range 0 to 100 LD mode Setting range 0 to 80 Motor sound Carrier frequency Setting range 0 75 to 16 kHz 0 4 to 55 kW 0 75 to 10 kHz 75 to 400 kW 0 75 to 6 kHz 500 and 630 kW Setting range 0 75 to 2 kHz 90 to 400 kW Setting range 0 75 to 16 kHz 5 5 to 18 5 kW 0 75 to 10 kHz 22 to 55 kW 0 75 to 6 kHz 75 to 500 kW 0 75 to 4 kHz 630 kW Remarks In the MD LD mode a value out of the range if specified automatically changes to the maximum value allowable in the MD LD mode Current limiter Level Initial value 160 Initial value 145 Initial value 130 Switching the drive mode between HD MD and LD with function code F80 automatically initializes the F44 data to the value specified at left Maximum frequency 1 Setting range 25 to 500 Hz Upper limit 500 Hz Upper limit 120 Hz Setting range 25 to 500 Hz In the MD LD mode if the maximum frequency exceeds 120 Hz the actual output frequency is internally limited to 120 Hz Switching to the LD mode does not automatically change the motor rated capacity P02 to the one for the motor with Current indication and output Based on the rated current level for HD mode Based on the rated current level for MD mode Based on the rated current level
258. ange the setting of F27 to appropriate value 2 The surrounding temperature of the inverter was too high when automatic lowering of the carrier frequency was enabled by H98 Measure the temperature inside the panel where the inverter is mounted ONILOOHS3 I8n04 L gt Ifit is over 40 C lower it by improving the ventilation gt Lower the temperature of the inverter by reducing the load For fans or pumps decrease the frequency limiter value F15 Note If you disable H98 an SHS Lil i Li or LiLLi alarm may occur 3 Resonance with the load Check the machinery mounting accuracy or check whether there is resonance with the mounting base gt Disconnect the motor from the machinery and run it alone then find where the resonance comes from Upon locating the cause improve the characteristics of the source of the resonance gt Adjust the settings of C01 Jump frequency 1 to C04 Jump frequency Hysteresis width so as to avoid continuous running in the frequency range causing resonance gt Enable the speed control notch filter d07 d08 and the observer d18 to d20 to suppress vibration Depending on the characteristics of the load this may take no effect 6 The motor does not accelerate or decelerate within the specified time Possible Causes 1 The inverter runs the motor What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function code H07 Acceleration decele
259. ansistor broken DBAL YIYJYJ Y Y H98 111 1111 Customizable logic output signal 1 CLOI Y Y Y Y Y 112 1112 Customizable logic output signal 2 CLO2 Y Y Y Y Y 113 1113 Customizable logic output signal 3 CLO3 Yeu XS XY Y Bel Uu 114 1114 Customizable logic output signal 4 CLO4 Y Y Y Y Y 115 1115 Customizable logic output signal 5 CLOS YYY Y Y Note Any negative logic Active OFF command cannot be assigned to the functions marked with in the Active OFF column Wi Inverter running RUN Function code data 0 Inverter output on RUN2 Function code data 35 These output signals tell the external equipment that the inverter is running at a starting frequency or higher If assigned in negative logic Active OFF these signals can be used to tell the Inverter being stopped state Output signal Basic function Remarks These signals come ON when the inverter is running Goes OFF even during DC braking or Under V control dew condensation prevention These signals come ON if the inverter output frequency exceeds the starting frequency and go OFF if it drops Comes Oh even during De braking below the stop frequency The RUN signal can also be used as a Speed valid signal DNZS pre exciting zero speed control or dew condensation prevention Under vector control both RUN and RUN2 come ON when zero speed control or servo lock function is enabled W Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped LU Function code
260. are set to ON the inverter may supply the power to the motor running the motor Otherwise an accident could occur If you enable the Restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 3 to 5 then the inverter automatically restarts running the motor when the power is recovered Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting If the user configures the function codes wrongly without completely understanding this Instruction Manual and the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine An accident or injuries could occur Even if the inverter has interrupted power to the motor if the voltage is applied to the main circuit input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U V and W Even if the run command is set to OFF voltage is output to inverter output terminals U V and W if the servo lock command is ON Even ifthe motor is stopped due to DC braking or preliminary excitation voltage is output to inverter output terminals U V and W An electric shock may occur The inverter can easily accept high speed operation When changing the speed setting carefully check the specifications of motors or equipment beforehand Otherwise injuries could occur ANCAUTION Do not touch the heat sink and braking resistor because they become very hot Doing so could cause burns
261. arge drive current prolong the acceleration time If an overvoltage trip occurs due to a short deceleration time Deceleration time 1 Es UM i prolong the deceleration time If the starting motor torque is deficient increase the torque boost If the motor with no load is overexcited decrease the torque boost Torque boost 1 Current limiter If the stall prevention function is activated by the current limiter Mode selection during acceleration or deceleration increase the operation level Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for driving Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for braking For excessive slip compensation during driving decrease the gain for insufficient one increase the gain For excessive slip compensation during braking decrease the gain for insufficient one increase the gain Output current fluctuation damping gain 1 For motor 1 If the motor vibrates due to current fluctuation increase the suppression gain Y Modification effective N Modification ineffective If any problem persists under V f control with speed sensor dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor or vector control with without speed sensor modify the following function code data The drive controls mentioned above use a PI controller for speed control The PI constants are sometimes required to be modified because of the load inertia The table below lists the main modification items
262. arm within the time H93 Continuity of Running P and I Refer to F14 Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 Refer to H44 DC Braking Braking response mode Refer to F20 through F22 STOP Key Priority Start Check Function H96 specifies a functional combination of STOP key priority and Start check function as listed below Data for H96 STOP key priority Start check function Disable Disable Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable W STOP key priority Even when run commands are entered from the digital input terminals or via the RS 485 communications link link operation pressing the key forces the inverter to decelerate and stop the motor After that 5 appears on the LED monitor W Start check function For safety this function checks whether any run command has been turned ON or not in each of the following situations If one has been turned ON the inverter does not start up but displays alarm code 4 4 on the LED monitor When the power to the inverter is turned ON When the key is pressed to release an alarm status or when the digital input terminal command RST Reset alarm is turned ON When the run command source is switched by a digital input terminal command such as LE Enable communications link via RS 485 or fieldbus or LOC Select local keypad operation Clear Alarm Data H45 Mock Alarm H97 clears alarm data alarm history and relevant information stored in the inverter
263. ary frequency command setting ratio setting torque limiter level setting or analog input monitor can be assigned to this terminal 3 Hardware specifications Input impedance 22kQ The maximum input is 15 VDC however the voltage higher than 10 VDC is handled as 10 VDC Inputting a bipolar analog voltage 0 to 10 VDC to terminal 12 requires setting function code C35 to 0 Analog setting current input 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external current input 4to 20 mA DC 0 to 100 Normal operation 20 to 4 mA DC 0 to 100 Inverse operation 2 In addition to frequency setting PID command PID feedback signal auxiliary frequency command setting ratio setting torque limiter level setting or analog input monitor can be assigned to this terminal 3 Hardware specifications Input impedance 250 The maximum input is 30 mA DC however the current larger than 20 mA DC is handled as 20 mA DC PTC NTC thermistor input 1 Connects PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient NTC Negative Temperature Coefficient thermistor for motor 113 protection Ensure that the slide switch Resistor por HION SW5 on the control PCB is turned to the 27kQ Operation level PTC NTC position see Section 2 3 6 ci H27L 4j Baer Setting up the slide switches External M PTCINTC f alarm The figure shown at the right illustrates pe H26 the internal circuit diagram where SW5 Lc switching t
264. ased on the model built with the motor parameters Therefore the search is greatly influenced by the residual voltage in the motor At factory shipment H46 data is preset to a correct value according to the motor capacity for the general purpose motor and basically there is no need to modify the data Depending on the motor characteristics however it may take time for residual voltage to disappear due to the secondary thermal time constant of the motor In such a case the inverter starts the motor with the residual voltage remaining which will cause an error in the speed search and may result in occurrence of an inrush current or an overvoltage alarm If it happens increase the value of H46 data and remove the influence of residual voltage If possible it is recommended to set the value around two times as large as the factory default value allowing a margin Cote Be sure to auto tune the inverter preceding the start of auto search for the idling motor speed When the estimated speed exceeds the maximum frequency or the upper limit frequency the inverter disables auto search and starts running the motor with the maximum frequency or the upper limit frequency whichever is lower During auto search if an overcurrent or overvoltage trip occurs the inverter restarts the suspended auto search Perform auto search at 60 Hz or below Note that auto search may not fully provide the expected designed performance depending on con
265. ate the signal wires from the main power wires as far as possible Problem Error occurred in writing the data to the memory in the inverter Possible Causes 1 When writing data especially initializing or copying data the inverter was shut down so that the voltage to the control PCB has dropped What to Check and Suggested Measures Initialize the function code data with H03 1 After initialization check if pressing the amp key releases the alarm gt Revert the initialized function code data to their previous settings then restart the operation 2 Inverter affected by strong electrical noise when writing data especially initializing or copying data Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires Also perform the same check as described in 1 above gt Implement noise control measures Revert the initialized function code data to their previous settings then restart the operation 3 The control PCB failed Initialize the function code data by setting H03 to 1 then reset the alarm by pressing the amp key and check that the alarm goes on gt The control PCB on which the CPU is mounted is defective Contact your Fuji Electric representative 19 4c Keypad communications error Problem A communications error occurred between the remote keypad or the multi function keypad and the inverter P
266. ation 2 Calculated based on these measuring conditions 240 V 60 Hz grounding of a single wire in delta connection interphase voltage unbalance ratio 2 3 Calculated based on these measuring conditions 480 V 60 Hz neutral grounding in Y connection interphase voltage unbalance ratio 2 Q o Z T O D 4 lt 4 I m gt Z O gt S O a 9 4 Harmonic Component Regulation in the EU 9 4 1 General comments When you use general purpose industrial inverters in the EU the harmonics emitted from the inverter to power lines are strictly regulated as stated below If an inverter whose rated input is 1 kW or less is connected to public low voltage power supply it is regulated by the harmonics emission regulations from inverters to power lines with the exception of industrial low voltage power lines Refer to Figure 9 4 below for details Medium Voltage Medium to Sero low voltage transformer power supply Medium to low voltage transformer Public low voltage 4 User A A Industrial low voltage Inverter Inverter power supply 1 kW or 1 kW or below below i The inverter connected here is E The inverter connected subject to the harmonics here is not subject to the regulation If the harmonics harmonics regulation flowing into the power source exceeds the regulated level permission by the local power supplier will be needed Figure 9 4
267. ation Case 1 7 No Power i o z z fe z o e o z _ gt a Resta Run Command Operation Case 2 Start of Normal Running If H16 Allowable momentary power failure time is set to 999 restart will take place until the DC link bus voltage drops down to the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary power failure 50 V for 200 V class series and 100 V for 400 V class series If the DC link bus voltage drops below the allowable voltage the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut down so that it does not restart but starts normal starting Power supply voltage Allowable voltage for restart after momentary power failure 200 V class series 50V 400 V class series 100 V Cote The time required from when the DC link bus voltage drops from the threshold of undervoltage until it ote reaches the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary power failure greatly varies depending on the inverter capacity the presence of options and other factors W Restart mode after momentary power failure Restart time H13 H13 specifies the time period from momentary power failure occurrence until the inverter reacts for restarting process If the inverter starts the motor while motor s residual voltage is still in a high level a large inrush current may flow or an overvoltage alarm may occur due to an occurrence of temporary regeneration For safety therefore it is advisab
268. ations error This applies to a mechanical system that always accesses its station within a predetermined interval during communications using the RS 485 communications link For the processing of communications errors refer to y02 and y12 W Response interval yO9 for port 1 and y19 for port 2 Data setting range 0 00 to 1 00 s y09 or y19 specifies the latency time after the end of receiving a query sent from the host equipment such as a computer or PLC until the start of sending the response This function allows using equipment whose response time is slow while a network requires quick response enabling the inverter to send a response timely by the latency time setting Host equipment Query Response Inverter T1 l T1 Response interval a where a is the processing time inside the inverter This time may vary depending on the processing status and the command processed in the inverter 4 For details refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual When setting the inverter with FRENIC Loader via the RS 485 communications link pay sufficient attention to the performance and or configuration of the PC and protocol converter such as RS 485 RS 232C converter Note that some protocol converters monitor the communications status and switch the sending receiving of transmission data by a timer Note 5 148 W Protocol selection y10 for port 1 y10 specifies the communications protoco
269. aturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c Available when the vector control is enabled A20 No load current 0 00 to 2000 A N Y1Y2 7 Y vY vi v Y A21 R1 0 00 to 50 00 Y Y1Y2 7 Y Y vY v Y A22 X 0 00 to 50 00 Y Y1Y2 7 Y Y vY v Y A23 Slip compensation gain for driving 0 0 to 200 0 Y Y 10000 Y Y Y Y N A24 Slip compensation response time 0 01 to 10 00s Y Y1Y2 0 12 Y Y N N N A25 Slip compensation gain for braking 0 0 to 200 0 Y Y 10000 Y Y Y Y N A26 Rated slip frequency 0 00 to 15 00 Hz N Y1Y2 7 Y vY vi v N A27 Iron loss factor 1 0 00 to 20 00 Y v1Y2 7 Y Y vYi v Y A28 Iron loss factor 2 0 0096 to 20 00 Y Y1Y2 000 Y Y Y Y Y A29 Iron loss factor 3 0 0096 to 20 00 Y Y1Y2 000 Y Y Y Y Y A30 Magnetic saturation factor 1 0 096 to 300 096 Y v1Y2 7 YY YY Y A31 Magnetic saturation factor 2 0 0 to 300 0 Y v1Y2 7 YEN Ys qox Y A32 Magnetic saturation factor 3 0 096 to 300 096 Y v1Y2 7 Y Y YY Y A33 Magnetic saturation factor 4 0 096 to 300 096 Y v1Y2 7 Y Y vYi v Y A34 Magnetic saturation factor 5 0 0 to 300 0 Y v1Y2 7 Y px Y X Y A35 Magnetic saturation extension 0 096 to 300 096 Y v1Y2 7 Y Y vYi v Y factor a A36 Magnetic saturation extension 0 096 to 300 096 Y v1Y2 7 YTY Y Y factor b A37 Magnetic saturation extension 0 0 to 300 0 Y v1Y2 7 Y NS Ne exe Y factor c A39 Motor 2 S
270. ble for the power source impedance Molded Case Circuit Breaker MCCB and Residual Current Operated Protective Device RCD Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker ELCB Nominal HD Rated current of Nominal HD Rated current of FONT applied MD MCCB and Power applied MD MCCB and Supply motor Inverter type LD RCD ELCB A Dd miotor Inverter type Lp RCD ELCB A eel kW mode w DCR w o DCR BUS kW mode w DCR w o DCR eser 5 ES s pmmuem m1 os FRN18 5G1m 40 1 5 FRNI SGIB 2L HD m 15 m LD Em A 22 FRN22GIB2LD 20 FRN22G1m 40 HD 3 7 FRN3 7GIB 2LI 20 30 E LD n 22 FRN5 5GIB 2LI M 39 58 FRN30G1B 4D a 125 7 5 B 40 75 37 His FRN7 5GIB 2L1 Lb FRN37G1II 4L Us 100 11 HB 50 100 45 HD 150 FRNIIGIM 20 Eb FRN45G1BI 4D TB 15 HD 75 125 55 Hb 125 200 2 FRN15G1m 20 D FRN55GIB 4L iD S 185 Bb 150 75 BD 175 2 FRN18 5G1m 20 5 100 FRN75G1 m 40 D S 22 UB 175 90 aD 200 FRN22G1 20 FRN9OG1 40 E LD MD LD 30 AT 150 200 110 4D 250 FRN30G1 20 ri FRNIIOGIW AL DAD 37 ub 175 250 gt 132 IE 300 FRN37G1 20 ib E FRN132G1m 40 DAD 45
271. bled detection Droop control H28 Disabled PEDO EN control H61 Fixed at the initial setting 0 Hz J01 to J06 JO8 to J13 J15 to J19 PID control 156 to J62 E40 E41 H91 Disabled Dew condensation prevention J21 F21 F22 Disabled Brake signal J68 to J72 J95 J96 Disabled Current limiter F43 F44 Disabled Rotational direction limitation H08 Disabled Pre excitation H84 H85 Disabled ee aaa Disabled NTC thermistor H26 H27 Disabled W ASR Switching Time d25 Data setting range 0 000 to 1 000 s Parameter switching is possible even during operation For example speed control P Gain and I Integral time listed in Table 5 5 can be switched Switching these parameters during operation may cause an abrupt change of torque and result in a mechanical shock depending on the driving condition of the load To reduce such a mechanical shock the inverter decreases the abrupt torque change using the ramp function of ASR Switching Time d25 5 119 5 2 7 J codes Application Functions 1 J01 PID Control Mode selection Under PID control the inverter detects the state of a control target object with a sensor or the similar device and compares it with the commanded value e g temperature control command If there is any deviation between them the PID control operates so as to minimize it That is it is a closed loop feedback system that matches controlled variable feedback amo
272. bus RTU protocol Y Y 1 Y Y vYi v Y 1 FRENIC Loader protocol SX protocol 2 Fuji general purpose inverter protocol y11 RS 485 Communication 2 1 to 255 N Y 1 Y Y vY v Y Station address y12 Communications error processing 0 Immediately trip with alarm Y Y 0 Y vY Y v Y 1 Trip with alarm after running for the period specified by timer y13 2 Retry during the period specified by timer y13 If the retry fails trip with alarm If it succeeds continue to run 3 Continue to run y13 Timer 0 0 to 60 0 s Y Y 2 0 Y Y vYi v Y y14 Baud rate 0 2400 bps Y Y 3 YI TY IY Y 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps y15 Data length 0 8 bits Y Y 0 Y Y vYi v Y 1 7 bits y16 Parity check 0 None 2 stop bits Y Y 0 Y Y vYj v Y 1 Even parity 1 stop bit 2 Odd parity 1 stop bit 3 None 1 stop bit y17 Stop bits 0 2 bits 1 1 bit Y Y 0 Y Y vYi v Y y18 No response error detection time 0 No detection 1 to 60 s Y Y 0 Y Y Doe Y y19 Response interval 0 00 to 1 00 s Y Y 001 Y YY Y Y y20 Protocol selection 0 Modbus RTU protocol Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y 2 Fuji general purpose inverter protocol y97 Communication Data Storage 0 Save into nonvolatile storage Rewritable times limited Y Y 0 Y Y vYj v Y 5 149 Selection 1 Write into temporary storage Rewritable times unlimited 2 Save all data from temporary storage to nonvolatile one After saving data the y97 data automatically returns to 4 y98 Bus Lin
273. by an external analog frequency command sources terminals 12 C1 and V2 Switching normal inverse operation can apply only to the analog frequency command sources terminals 12 C1 and V2 in frequency command 1 F01 and does not affect frequency command 2 C30 or UP DOWN control As listed below the combination of the Selection of normal inverse operation for frequency command 1 C53 and the IVS terminal command determines the final operation Combination of C53 and IVS Data for C53 IVS Final operation OFF Normal 0 N l ti ormal operation ON Gaye 1 Inverse operation Or Inyene Inv p ON Normal When the process control is performed by the PID processor integrated in the inverter The terminal command Hz PID Cancel PID control can switch the PID control between enabled process is to be controlled by the PID processor and disabled process is to be controlled by the manual frequency setting In either case the combination of the PID control J01 or Selection of normal inverse operation for frequency command 1 C53 and the terminal command IVS determines the final operation as listed below When the PID control is enabled The normal inverse operation selection for the PID processor output reference frequency is as follows PID control Mode selection J01 Final operation Normal Inverse Inverse 1 Enable normal operation 2 Enable inverse operation N
274. ccordance with the installation procedure given below To ensure the compliance it is recommended that inverters be mounted in a metal panel Tip Our EMC compliance test is performed under the following conditions Wiring length of the shielded cable between the inverter EMC filter built in type and motor 5m Note To use Fuji inverters in combination with a PWM converter the basic type of inverters having no built in EMC filter should be used Use of an EMC filter built in type may increase heat of capacitors in the inverter resulting in a break In addition the effect of the EMC filter can no longer be expected Q o Z TI O D 4 lt I a gt Z O gt S O a 9 3 2 Recommended installation procedure To make the machinery or equipment fully compliant with the EMC Directive have certified technicians wire the motor and inverter in strict accordance with the procedure described below E In the case of EMC filter built in type of inverter 1 Mount the inverter on a grounded panel or metal plate Use shielded wires for the motor cable and route the cable as short as possible Firmly clamp the shield to the metal plate to ground it Further connect the shielding layer electrically to the grounding terminal of the motor Separate the input and output wires as far as possible using wiring guides For inverters with a capacity of 5 5 to 11 kW connect the input grounding wire to the grounding terminal at the front
275. celerating During running at constant speed 0 Enable Enable 1 Disable Enable 2 Enable Disable The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other If both are activated concurrently Note they may conflict each other and cause hunting in the system Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters Drive Control Selection 1 H68 Slip Compensation 1 Operating conditions F42 specifies the motor drive control DET Drive control Basic control Speed feedback Speed control 0 V f control with slip compensation inactive Frequency control Dynamic torque vector control l with slip compensation and auto torque boost Diets Frequency control f with slip compensation 2 V f control with slip compensation active V f control 3 V f control with speed sensor Frequency control f Enable with automatic speed 4 Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor regulator ASR 5 Vector control without speed sensor Estimated speed Speed control Vector control with automatic speed 6 Vector control with speed sensor Enable regulator ASR E V f control with slip compensation inactive Under this control the inverter controls a motor with the voltage and frequency according to the V f pattern specified by function codes This control disables all automatically controlled features such as the slip compensation so no unpredictable output fluctuation enabling
276. cial power 50 Hz ISW60 Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 60 Hz Start at 60 Hz Note Do not assign both ISW50 and ISW60 at the same time Doing so cannot guarantee the result G deyo Circuit Diagram and Configuration ET c Commercial power Thermal relay z 88 49 9 R l 5 Main power S i Motor Z T Q O O m o o Inverter primary Inverter secondary Main Circuit Motor operation control by inverter Inverter Inverter primary Run command FWD Y1 52 1 d FWD SW52 1 LI Need not be assigned rm Y2 1 Inverter secondary SW52 2 522 Commercial Inverter Ecodes Commercial Inverter Switch sequence Y3 m Commercial power line command SW88 F 88 X2 ISW50 S ON means the inverter Commercial side thermal relay 49 During commercial power operation an overcurrent flow opens this relay Configuration of Control Circuit Summary of Operation Output Status signal and magnetic contactor Inverter SW52 1 SWS52 2 SW88 operation 52 1 52 2 88 Input ISW50 or ISW60 Run command OFF Commercial power ON Inverter 5 74 Timing Scheme Switching from inverter operation to commercial power operation ZS W50 ISW60 ON OFF 1 The inverter output is shut OFF immediately Power gate IGBT OFF 2 The inverter primary circuit SW52 1 and the inverter secondary side SW52 2 are t
277. coder 20 to 60000 P R in decimal For Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector control set d15 at 0400 1024 P R W Feedback Input Pulse count factor 1 d16 and Pulse count factor 2 d17 Data setting range 1 to 9999 d16 and d17 specify the factors to convert the speed feedback input pulse rate into the motor shaft speed r min Specify the data according to the transmission ratios of the pulley and gear train as shown below C Gear train onveyor Transmission ratio a b EOM No of PESE Zea BS No of oun teeth a Transmission ON is ratio c d F Radius d Radius c YA YB Inverter Motor FRENIC MEGA L1 R L2 S L3 T Power A supply 7 An Example of a Closed Loop Speed Control System Conveyor Listed below are expressions for conversion between a speed feedback input pulse rate and motor shaft speed Pulse count factor 2 d17 Pulse count factor 1 d16 Pulse count factor2 d17 _ b Pulse count factor 1 d16 a c Pulse count factor 1 d16 Motor shaft speed x Encoder shaft speed a x C Pulse count factor 2 d17 ll o x a 5 135 d21 d23 d24 d25 When enabling the vector control with speed sensor mount the sensor encoder on the motor output shaft directly or on a shaft with the rigidity equivalent to the motor output shaft A backlash or deflection being on the mounting shaft could interfere with no
278. coefficient you can also have various values to be converted into physical values such as temperature and pressure before they are displayed 20 Analog signal input monitor Note lf these terminals have been set up to have the same data the operation priority is given in the following order E61 gt E62 gt E63 E64 Saving of Digital Reference Frequency E64 specifies how to save the reference frequency specified in digital formats by the keys on the keypad as shown below Data for E64 Function Auto saving when the main power is turned OFF The reference frequency will be automatically saved when the main power is turned OFF At the next power on the reference frequency at the time of the previous power off applies Saving by pressing key Pressing the key saves the reference frequency If the control power is turned OFF without pressing the key the data will be lost At the next power ON the inverter uses the reference frequency saved when the key was pressed last E65 Reference Loss Detection Continuous running frequency When the analog frequency command setting through terminal 12 C1 or V2 has dropped below 10 of the reference frequency within 400 ms the inverter presumes that the analog frequency command wire has been broken and continues its operation at the frequency determined by the ratio specified by E65 to the reference frequency HI Refer to E20 through E24 and E27 data 33
279. communications network as a terminating device turn SW3 to ON SWA SW6 Switches the output form of analog output terminals FM1 and FM2 between voltage and current When changing the setting of SW4 and SW6 also change the data of function codes F29 and F32 respectively FM1 FM2 Output form SW4 F29 data SW6 F32 data Voltage output Factory default vol 0 VO2 0 IO 1 102 1 Current output Switches the property of the analog input terminal C1 between analog setting current input PTC thermistor input and NTC thermistor input When changing this switch setting also change the data of function code H26 Function SW5 H26 data Analog setting current input Factory default Cl 0 PTC NTC PTC NTC 3 PTC thermistor input 1 alarm or 2 warning NTC thermistor input Figure 2 20 shows the location of slide switches on the control PCB for the input output terminal configuration Switch Configuration and Factory Defaults SW4 SW6 VOI1 VO2 pum i Ae H t SINK SOURCE BI Lr LI IO1 IO2 PTC NTC The factory default for FRN GIBI 2A 4A is SINK for FRN_ GIBI 4E SOURCE Figure 2 20 Location of the Slide Switches on the Control
280. ctor when the protective function is activated QVdA3 JHL ONISN NOLLVeH3dO Program Reset key which switches the operation modes of the inverter W In Running mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Programming mode W In Programming mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Running mode E In Alarm mode Pressing this key after removing the alarm factor will switch the inverter to Running mode Function Data key which switches the operations you want to do in each mode as follows W In Running mode Pressing this key switches the information to be displayed concerning the status of the inverter output frequency Hz output current A output voltage V etc When a light alarm is displayed holding down this key resets the light alarm and switches back to Running mode W In Programming mode Pressing this key displays the function code or establishes the data entered with W and keys W In Alarm mode Pressing this key displays the details of the problem indicated by the alarm code that has come up on the LED monitor Operation Keys RUN key Press this key to run the motor STOP key Press this key to stop the motor A VO UP and DOWN keys Press these keys to select the setting items and change the function code data displayed on the LED monitor Lights when running with a run command entered by the amp w key by terminal command FWD or REV or through the communications link Lig
281. cur Qualified electricians should carry out wiring Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power OFF Otherwise electric shock could occur Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter unit Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected Otherwise a fire or an accident could occur Do not connect the power source wires to inverter output terminals U V and W Doing so could cause fire or an accident 2 8 z deyo H2LH3ANI JHL ONIMIM ANY ONILNNOW 2 3 4 Wiring of main circuit terminals and grounding terminals This section shows connection diagrams with the Enable input function used 1 FRN GIB2A2AA with SINK mode input by factory default Main circuit MCCB or 4 Power supply RCD ELCB 200 V class series 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz 400 V class series 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz Auxiliary control power input 8 Power switching connector CN UX 10 4 O Auxiliary fan power input 4 i E ON Arene connector G
282. current level for output HD mode MD mode LD mode Switching to the MD LD mode does not automatically change the motor rated capacity P02 to the one for the motor with one rank higher capacity so configure the P02 data to match the applied motor rating as required 4 1 5 Selecting a desired motor drive control The FRENIC MEGA supports the following motor drive control Other restrictions Basic Speed Drive control Drive control control feedback class Speed control V f control TE Fr n ntrol with slip compensation inactive POMONA d Dynamic torque vector control Disable Frequency control V f control v f with slip compensation with slip compensation active V f control with speed sensor control Frequency control Maximum with automatic speed frequency regulator ASR 200 Hz Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor Maximum frequency Estimated 120 Hz speed Speed control Not available with automatic speed for MD mode regulator ASR inverters Vector control without speed sensor p Vector control Maximum frequency 200 Hz Vector control with speed sensor m V f control with slip compensation inactive Under this control the inverter controls a motor with the voltage and frequency according to the V f pattern specified by function codes This control disables all automatically controlled features such as the slip co
283. d PID output value in 100 at the maximum frequency Jj J 0 Tum PID o tp t valus a If PID control is disabled appears ace Flux command value Flux command value in Running status 2 in 4 digit hexadecimal format ea Running status 2 N A Refer to B Displaying running status 7 7 7 and running status 2 7 77 on the next page Temperature detected by the NTC thermistor built in the motor Fuji VG ae Motor temperature C motor exclusively designed for vector control If the NTC thermistor connectivity is disabled appears Les Not used 3 ct Not used 233 Current position a y yy mcd pulse 4 multiplied pulse Current position pulse for positioning control servo lock Supp elon deviation pulse Position deviation pulse for positioning control servo lock pulse 4 multiplied E Displaying running status To display the running status and running status 2 in 4 digit hexadecimal format each state has been assigned to bits 0 to 15 as listed in Tables 3 7 and 3 8 Table 3 9 shows the relationship between each of the status assignments and the LED monitor display Table 3 10 gives the conversion table from 4 bit binary to hexadecimal Notation Table 3 7 Running Status 7 7 Content Notation Bit Assignment Content when function code data is being 15 BUSY 7
284. d 1 1500 Minimum speed Base speed 4P 1 to 1500 r min 1024 p r vector control contro EE f with speed sensor range 1 4 Constant torque range Constant output range Speed Analog setting 0 2 of maximum frequency at 25 10 C a Digital setting 0 01 of maximum frequency at 10 to 50 C Control Control method V f control Dynamic torque vector control V f control with speed sensor or dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor Vector control without speed sensor Not available for MD mode inverters Vector control with speed sensor with an optional PG interface card mounted V f characteristics Possible to set output voltage at base frequency and at maximum frequency AVR control ON OFF selectable Non linear V f pattern with three arbitrary points Torque boost Auto torque boost for constant torque load Manual torque boost Desired torque boost 0 0 to 20 0 can be set Select application load with function code F37 Variable torque load or constant torque load Starting torque 22 kW or below 20096 or over 30 kW or above 18096 or over Reference frequency 0 3 Hz with slip compensation and auto torque boost Start stop operation Keypad O and 6 keys external signals run forward run reverse command etc Communications link RS 485 fieldbus option Remote local operation Enable input Safety stop function Opening the circuit betwe
285. d an optional PG interface card to be mounted on a motor shaft and an inverter respectively The inverter detects the motor s rotational position and speed from PG feedback signals and uses them for speed control In addition it decomposes the motor drive current into the exciting and torque current components and controls each of components in vector The desired response can be obtained by adjusting the control constants PI constants and using the speed regulator PI controller This control enables the speed control with higher accuracy and quicker response than the vector control without speed sensor A recommended motor for this control is a Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control Note Since slip compensation dynamic torque vector control and vector control with without speed sensor use motor parameters the following conditions should be satisfied otherwise full control performance may not be obtained A single motor should be controlled per inverter Motor parameters P02 PO3 P06 to P23 P55 and P56 should be properly configured or auto tuning P04 should be performed A Fuji VG motor requires no auto tuning just requires selecting a Fuji VG motor with function code P99 2 The capacity of the motor to be controlled should be two or more ranks lower than that of the inverter under the dynamic torque vector control it should be the same as that of the inverter under the vector control with without speed s
286. d as the first alarm information 3 4 8 Copying data Menu 7 Data Copying Menu 7 Data Copying is used to read function code data out of an inverter for storing it in the keypad or writing it into another inverter It is also used to verify the function code data stored in the keypad with the one configured in the inverter The keypad serves as a temporary storage media In addition using Menu 7 allows you to store the running status information in the keypad detach the keypad from the inverter connect it to a PC running FRENIC Loader at an office or off site place and check the inverter running status without removing the inverter itself To store the inverter running status information into the keypad use Read data 7E or Read inverter running information CHEZ function For details on how to connect the keypad to a PC and check the inverter running status information stored in the keypad refer to the FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual Figure 3 6 shows the menu transition in Menu 7 Data Copying The keypad can hold function code data for a single inverter n i l I P i i Ofn i A r tO List of copying functions Data copying status 1 1 J LEN gt rERd S gt ERd iat aan End i Tha cat End of read i ab ja CoPH gt cory End End of w
287. d for the judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor When the remote keypad is used the same setting up is also necessary in order to judge the life of the DC link bus capacitor under the practical operating conditions For details refer to Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 3 I O checking Check interfacing with peripherals using Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad in Programming mode For details refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 4 Analog input adjustment Adjust the analog inputs on terminals 12 C1 and V2 using the function codes related to the offset filter and gain that minimize analog input errors For details refer to Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 5 Calibrating the FM output Calibrate the full scale of the analog meter connected to the terminals FM1 and FM2 using the reference voltage equivalent to 10 VDC To output the reference voltage it is necessary to select the analog output test with the function code F31 F35 14 6 Clearing the alarm history Clear the alarm history saved during the system setup with the function code H97 1 Depending upon the situation of the practical operation it may become necessary to modify the settings of the torque boost F09 acceleration deceleration times F07 F08 and the PI controller for speed control under the vector control Confirm the function code data and modify them properly Note 4 2 Special Operations 4 2 1 Jogging operation
288. d in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 Environmental Requirements Table 2 2 Output Current Derating Item Specifications Factor in Relation to Altitude Site location Indoors Altitude Output current S dine gain derating factor urrounding ambient _ 50 temperature 10 to 50 C Note 1 1000 m or lower 1 00 Relative humidity 5 to 95 No condensation 1000 to 1500 m 0 97 Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive 1500 to 2000 m 0 95 gases flammable gases oil mist vapor or water drops 2000 to 2500 m 0 91 Pollution degree 2 IEC60664 1 Note 2 2500 to 3000 m 0 88 The atmosphere can contain a small amount of salt 0 01 mg cm2 or less per year Note 1 When inverters are mounted The inverter must not be subjected to sudden changes in side by side without any clearance between temperature that will cause condensation to form them 22 kW or below the surrounding temperature should be within the range from Altitude 1 000 m max Note 3 10 to 40 C Atmospheric pressure 86 to 106 kPa Vibration 55 kW or below 200 V class series 75 kW or above 200 V class series 75 kW or below 400 V class series 90 kW or above 400 V class series 3 mm Max amplitude 3 mm Max amplitude 2 to less than 9 Hz 2 to less than 9 Hz 9 8 m s 9 to less than 20 Hz 2 m s2 9toless than 55 Hz 2m s2 20toless than 55 Hz 1 m s2 55 to less than 200 Hz 1 m s 55toless than 200 Hz 2
289. d input of a Run command when this error occurs If this was not intended check the setting of H96 Turn the run command OFF before releasing the alarm 3 The forced stop digital input Check that turning the STOP OFF decelerated the inverter to stop STOP was turned OFF gt If this was not intended check the settings of E01 through E07 for terminals X1 through X7 24 7 Tuning error Problem Auto tuning failed Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 A phase was missing There gt Properly connect the motor to the inverter was a phase loss in the connection between the inverter and the motor 2 V f or the rated current of the Check whether the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 through H53 H65 motor was not properly set H66 P02 and P03 matches the motor specifications 3 The wiring length between the Check whether the wiring length between the inverter and the motor exceeds 50 m inverter and the motor was too Small capacity inverters are greatly affected by the wiring length long gt Review and if necessary change the layout of the inverter and the motor to shorten the connection wire Alternatively minimize the wiring length without changing the layout gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set data of F37 to 1 Possible Causes 4 The rated capacity of the motor was significantly different from that of the inverter What
290. d the detected one is out of the specified range d21 for the period specified by d22 DC fan locked Failure of the air circulation DC fan inside the inverter 200 V class 45 kW or above 400 V class 75 kW or above Motor overload early warning Early warning before a motor overload Heat sink overheat early warning Early warning before a heat sink overheat trip Lifetime alarm It is judged that the service life of any one of the capacitors DC link bus capacitors and electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards and cooling fan has expired Or failure of the air circulation DC fan inside the inverter 200 V class 45 kW or above 400 V class 75 kW or above Reference command loss detected Analog frequency command was lost PID alarm Warning related to PID control absolute value alarm or deviation alarm Low torque output Output torque drops below the low torque detection level for the specified period PTC thermistor activated The PTC thermistor on the motor detected a temperature Inverter life Cumulative run time The motor cumulative run time reached the specified level Set data for selecting light alarms in hexadecimal For details on how to select the codes refer to the next page Inverter life Number of startups Data setting range 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal W Selecting light alarm factors To set and display the light alarm factors in
291. dering the response speed of the mechanical system as large time constants slow down the response If the input voltage fluctuates because of noise specify large time constants m Polarity C35 C45 C35 and C45 specify the input range for analog input voltage Data for C35 and C45 Terminal input specifications 0 10 to 10 V 1 0 to 10 V negative value of voltage is regarded as 0 V 5 121 W Gain and bias PID command oh Gain C32 C37 or C42 Bias wA e C51 Point A i Analog input 0 Bias Gain 100 TP base base point point C52 C34 C39 or C44 Example Mapping the range of 1 through 5 V at terminal 12 to 0 through 100 Process command Gain C32 100 Gain base point C34 50 Bias value C51 0 Bias base point C52 10 0 Input at terminal 12 0V1V 5V 10V 3 PID command with UP DOWN control J02 3 When the UP DOWN control is selected as a PID speed command turning the terminal command UP or DOWN ON causes the PID speed command to change within the range from 0 to 100 The PID speed command can be specified in mnemonic physical quantities such as temperature or pressure with the PID display coefficients E40 E41 To select the UP DOWN control as a PID speed command the UP and DOWN should be assigned to the digital input terminals X1 to X7 E01 to E07 data 17 18 UP DOWN Data 17 Data 18 Function Retain PID speed command valu
292. ditions including the load motor parameters power cable length and other externally determined events Deceleration Mode H11 specifies the deceleration mode to be applied when a run command is turned OFF Data for H11 Normal deceleration Coast to stop The inverter immediately shuts down its output so the motor stops according to the inertia of the motor and machinery load and their kinetic energy losses Note When reducing the reference frequency the inverter decelerates the motor according to the deceleration commands even if H11 1 Coast to stop Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting Mode selection Refer to F43 H14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart time Frequency fall rate H16 Continuous running level and Allowable momentary power failure time Refer to F14 5 102 G deyo S3dO9 NOILONNA H18 Torque Limiter Mode selection d32 d33 Torque Control Speed limits 1 and 2 When Vector control without speed sensor or Vector control with speed sensor is selected the inverter can limit the motor generating torque according to a torque command sent from external sources m Torque Limiter Mode selection H18 H18 specifies whether to enable or disable the torque limiter When the torque limiter is enabled a torque current command or torque command can be selected Data for H18 Available control 0 Disable Speed control 2 Enable Torque control with tor
293. dividual inverter power supply lines only deyo Otherwise a fire could occur 6 Magnetic contactor MC in the inverter input primary circuit Avoid frequent ON OFF operation of the magnetic contactor MC in the input circuit otherwise the inverter failure may result If frequent start stop of the motor is required use FWD REV terminal signals or the keys on the inverter s keypad The frequency of the MC s ON OFF should not be more than once per 30 minutes To assure 10 year or longer service life of the inverter it should not be more than once per hour Tip From the system s safety point of view it is recommended to employ such a sequence that shuts down the magnetic contactor MC in the inverter input circuit with an alarm output signal AZM issued on inverter s programmable output terminals The sequence minimizes the secondary damage even if the inverter breaks YA LYSANI SHL ONISN 30H38 When the sequence is employed connecting the MC s primary power line to the inverter s auxiliary control power input makes it possible to monitor the inverter s alarm status on the keypad The breakdown of a braking unit or misconnection of an external braking resistor may trigger that of the inverter s internal parts e g charging resistor To avoid such a breakdown linkage introduce an MC and configure a sequence that shuts down the MC if a DC link voltage establishment signal is not issued within three seconds
294. ds the frequency detection level specified by E31 the FDT signal comes ON when it drops below the Frequency detection level minus Hysteresis width specified by E32 it goes OFF Three levels of setting are available with Frequency Detections 2 and 3 Operation level Hysteresis width Output signal Assigned dat eee eem Range 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Range 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Frequency Detection Frequency Detection 2 Frequency Detection 3 Output frequency Reference frequency Detection level E31 E36 E54 Hysteresis width E32 Release level Time Frequency 4 detected FDT ON Time 5 82 G deyo s dO09 NOILONNA E34 E35 Overload Early Warning Current Detection Level and Timer E36 E37 E37 F38 Current Detection 2 Low Current Detection Level and Timer E55 E56 Current Detection 3 Level and Timer These function codes define the detection level and time for the Motor overload early warning OL Current detected ID Current detected 2 ID2 Current detected 3 JD3 and Low current detected JDL output signals Output Assigned Operation level Timer Motor characteristics Thermal time constant signal data Range See below Range 0 01 to 600 00s Range See below Range 0 5 to 75 0 min OL 7 E34 3 F10 F12 ID 37 E34 E35 ID2 38 E37 E38 ID3 39 E55 E56 l IDL 4l E37 E38 Data setting range Ope
295. e Increase PID speed command value at a rate between 0 1 0 1 s and 1 0 1 s Decrease PID speed command value at a rate between 0 1 0 1 s and 1 0 1 s Retain PID speed command value The inverter internally holds the PID command value set by the UP DOWN control and applies the held value Note at the next restart including powering ON 4 PID command via communications link J02 4 Use function code S13 that specifies the communications linked PID command The transmission data of 20000 decimal is equal to 100 maximum frequency of the PID command For details of the communications format refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual Other than the remote command selection by J02 the multi frequency 4 8 or 12 specified by C08 C12 or Note C16 respectively specified by terminal commands SS4 and SS8 can also be selected as a preset value for the PID command Calculate the setting data of the PID command using the expression below Preset multi frequency x 100 PID command data 96 Maximum frequency In dancer control J01 3 the setting from the keypad interlocks with data of J57 PID control Dancer reference position and is saved as function code data Selecting Feedback Terminals For feedback control determine the connection terminal according to the type of the sensor output Ifthe sensor is a current output type use the current input terminal C1 of the inverter
296. e 0 01 to 10 00 s Y Y1Y2 0 12 Y Y N N N c P11 Slip compensation gain for braking 0 0 to 200 0 Mt Y 10000 Y Y Y Y N Z P12 Rated slip frequency 0 00 to 15 00 Hz N Y1Y2 7 Y vY vYi v N 5 98 a P13 Iron loss factor 1 0 0096 to 20 00 Y v1Y2 7 Y Y YY Y ro P14 Iron loss factor 2 0 00 to 20 00 Y Y1Y2 000 Y Y Y Y Y z P15 Iron loss factor 3 0 0096 to 20 00 Y 1Y2 0 00 Y Y Y Y Y O P16 Magnetic saturation factor 1 0 096 to 300 0 Y Y1Y2 7 Y Y vYj v Y o P17 Magnetic saturation factor 2 0 0 to 300 0 Y v1Y2 7 Y Y YY Y E P18 Magnetic saturation factor 3 0 0 to 300 0 Y v1Y2 7 Y Y YY Y o P19 Magnetic saturation factor 4 0 096 to 300 096 Y Yv1v2 7 YYYY Y P20 Magnetic saturation factor 5 0 0 to 300 0 Y Y1Y2 7 Y Y YY Y P21 Magnetic saturation extension 0 0 to 300 0 Y Yv1Y2 7 Y Y YY M factor a P22 Magnetic saturation extension 0 0 to 300 0 Y Yv1Y2 7 YYYY Y factor b P23 Magnetic saturation extension 0 0 to 300 0 Y v1Y2 7 Y Y YY Y factor c P53 X correction factor 1 096 to 300 Y Yv1v2 100 Y Y Y Y Y P54 X correction factor 2 0 to 300 Y Y1iY2 100 Y Y Y Y Y P55 Torque current under vector control 0 00 to 2000 A N Y1Y2 T N N Yj Y Y P56 Induced voltage factor under 50 to 100 N Y1Y2 85 NIN Y Y Y vector control P57 Reserved 9 0 000 to 20 000 s Y v1Y2 7 Y Motor 1 Selection 0 Motor characteristic
297. e disturbance control accuracy V f control with slip compensation inactive Dynamic torque vector control V f control with slip compensation active V f control with speed sensor Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor Vector control without speed sensor Vector control with speed sensor Z e z zZ z 0 4 T m O 4 O A Relative performance symbols Excellent O Good A Effective A Less effective Not effective 4 1 6 Function code basic settings lt 1 gt Driving a Fuji general purpose motor under the V f control F42 0 or 2 or dynamic torque vector control F42 1 requires configuring the following basic function codes Refer to Figure 4 1 on page 4 1 Select Fuji standard 8 or 6 series motors with the function code P99 Configure the function codes listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design values For the motor ratings check the ratings printed on the motor s nameplate For your machinery design values ask system designers about them For details on how to modify the function code data see Chapter 3 Section 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting Factory default FRN GIB2A A4A FRN GIBM 4E 200 V class series 200 V class series 60 0 Hz 400 V class series 400 V class series Motor ratings printed on the nameplate of the 200 z WY HS motor 200 V cla
298. e data 59 This output signal comes ON when the inverter detects that the input current to terminal C1 drops below 2 mA interpreting it as the terminal C1 wire broken W Speed valid DNZS Function code data 70 This output signal comes ON when the reference speed or detected one exceeds the stop frequency specified by function code F25 It goes OFF when the speed is below the stop frequency for 100 ms or longer Under vector control with speed sensor F38 switches the decision criteria between the reference speed and detected one Under vector control without speed sensor the reference speed is used as a decision criteria H Refer to the descriptions of F25 and F38 Reference Detected speed specified by F38 Stop frequency eee F25 i i Speed vaild eee a DNZS 100 ms W Alarm output for any alarm ALM Function code data 99 This output signal comes ON if any of the protective functions is activated and the inverter enters Alarm mode W Braking transistor broken DBAL Function code data 105 If the inverter detects a breakdown of the braking transistor it issues the braking transistor alarm 5 7 and also the output signal DBAL Detection of braking transistor broken can be cancelled by H98 200 V class series 400 V class series 22 kW or below Refer to the description of H98 Breakdown of the braking transistor could lead to the secondary breakdown of the braking resi
299. e filter to the inverter power wires Isolate the power system of the other devices from that of the inverter with an insulated transformer Decrease the inverter s carrier frequency F26 2 If induction or radio noise generated from the inverter affects other devices Isolate the main circuit wires from the control circuit wires and other device wires Put the main circuit wires through a metal conduit pipe and connect the pipe to the ground near the inverter nstall the inverter into the metal panel and connect the whole panel to the ground Connect a noise filter to the inverter s power wires Decrease the inverter s carrier frequency F26 3 When implementing measures against noise generated from peripheral equipment For inverter s control signal wires use twisted or shielded twisted wires When using shielded twisted wires connect the shield of the shielded wires to the common terminals of the control circuit Connect a surge absorber in parallel with magnetic contactor s coils or other solenoids if any 1 6 W Leakage current A high frequency current component generated by insulated gate bipolar transistors IGBTs switching on off inside the inverter becomes leakage current through stray capacitance of inverter input and output wires or a motor If any of the problems listed below occurs take an appropriate measure against them Problem Measures An earth leakage circuit 1 Decrease the carri
300. e full scale 10 VDC or 20 mA DC of analog input as 100 The analog input less than the bias base point C50 is limited by the bias value F18 Specifying that the data of the bias base point C50 is equal to or greater than that of each gain base point C34 C39 or C44 will be interpreted as invalid so the inverter will reset the reference frequency to 0 Hz Note Example Setting the bias gain and their base points when the reference frequency 0 to 60 Hz follows the analog input of 1 to 5 VDC to terminal 12 in frequency command 1 Reference frequency Hz Assuming the maximum frequency A F03 60 Hz as 100 Gain C32 60 Hz 100 i Point B Point A Bias F18 0 Hz 0 Analog input voltage 1V 5V 10V 1 i Il 10 50 100 Analog input 96 Assuming the full scale 10 VDC pas an of analog input as 100 point point C50 C34 Point A To set the reference frequency to 0 Hz for an analog input being at 1 V set the bias to 0 F18 0 Since 1 V is the bias base point and it is equal to 10 of 10 V full scale of terminal 12 set the bias base point to 10 C50 10 Point B To make the maximum frequency equal to the reference frequency for an analog input being at 5 V set the gain to 100 C32 100 Since 5 V is the gain base point and it is equal to 50 of 10 V full scale of terminal 12 set the gain base point to 50 C34 50 Note The setting procedure for
301. e inverter Q No run forward reverse command was inputted or both the commands were inputted simultaneously external signal operation Check the input status of the forward reverse command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad Input a run command Set either the forward or reverse operation command to off if both commands are being inputted Correct the run command source Set F02 data to 1 Correct the assignment of commands FWD and REV with function codes E98 and E99 Connect the external circuit wires to control circuit terminals FWD and REV correctly Y y vv vy Make sure that the sink source slide switch SW1 on the control printed circuit board control PCB is properly configured 3 No Enable input Check the input status of terminal EN with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Correct the external circuit wiring to control circuit terminal EN 4 No rotation direction command Check the input status of the forward reverse rotation direction command with keypad operation Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Input the rotation direction F02 0 or select the keypad operation with which the rotation direction is fixed F02 2 or 3 5 The inverter could not accept any run commands from the keypad since it was in Programming mode Check which operation mode the inverter is in using the keypad gt Shift the operation mode to Running mode a
302. e inverter To enable the switching you need to assign LOC as a digital input signal to any of terminals X1 to X7 by setting 35 to any of E01 to E07 E98 and E99 Switching from remote to local mode automatically inherits the frequency settings used in remote mode If the motor is running at the time of the switching from remote to local the run command will be automatically turned ON so that all the necessary data settings will be carried over If however there is a discrepancy between the settings used in remote mode and ones made on the keypad e g switching from the reverse rotation in remote mode to the forward rotation only in local mode the inverter automatically stops The transition paths between remote and local modes depend on the current mode and the value ON OFF of LOC as shown in the status transition diagram given below Also refer to above table for details LOC OFF Local Mode LOC ON Remote Mode LOC OFF LOC ON Transition between Remote and Local Modes by LOC 4 2 3 External run frequency command By factory default run and frequency commands are sourced from the keypad This section provides other external command source samples an external frequency command potentiometer variable resistor as a frequency command source and external run switches as run forward reverse command sources Set up those external sources using the following procedure 1 Configure the function cod
303. e inverter shuts down the output so that the motor enters a the power failure coast to stop state occurred for general loads If a run command has been input If a run command has been input restoring restoring power restarts the inverter at the power performs auto search for idling motor output frequency saved when speed and restarts running the motor at the undervoltage was detected frequency calculated based on the searched speed This setting is ideal for applications with a moment of inertia large enough not to slow down the motor quickly such as fans even after the motor enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure Restart at the As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a starting frequency momentary power failure the inverter shuts down the output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state If a run command has been input If a run command has been input restoring restoring power restarts the inverter at the power performs auto search for idling motor starting frequency specified by function speed and restarts running the motor at the code F23 frequency calculated based on the searched speed This setting is ideal for heavy load applications such as pumps having a small moment of inertia in which the motor speed quickly goes down to zero as soon as it enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failu
304. e motor using the flowchart given below This chapter describes the test run procedure with motor 1 dedicated function codes that are marked with an asterisk For motors 2 to 4 replace those asterisked function codes with respective motor dedicated ones Refer to Chapter 5 Table 5 5 I For the function codes dedicated to motors 2 to 4 see Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES Mount the inverter perform wiring and set up slide switches See Chapter 2 Check prior to powering on See Section 4 1 2 Power ON and check See Section 4 1 3 Switch between HD MD and LD modes F80 See Section 4 1 4 Which motor drive control See Section 4 1 5 F42 5 F42 6 Vector control without Vector control with speed sensor speed sensor Fuji VG motor F42 0 1 2 V f control Dynamic torque vector control F42 3 4 V f control with speed sensor Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor Non Fuji motor Which motor type Fuji general purpose motor Longer output lines Reactor connected What output wiring condition Shorter output lines non standard motor Non Fuji motor non standard motor Which motor type Fuji general purpose motor Longer output lines What output Reactor connected wiring condition Shorter output lines Function code basic settings 1 Function code bas
305. e phase power supply contact your Fuji Electric representative H73 to H75 Torque Limiter Operating conditions Control target and Target quadrants Refer to F40 H76 Torque Limiter Frequency increment limit for braking Refer to H69 H77 Service Life of DC Link Bus Capacitor Remaining time H77 displays the remaining time before the service life of DC link bus capacitor expires in units of ten hours At the time of a printed circuit board replacement transfer the service life data of the DC link bus capacitor to the new board Data setting range 0 to 8760 in units of ten hours 0 to 87 600 hours H78 H79 Maintenance Interval M1 Preset Startup Count for Maintenance M1 Refer to H44 H80 Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor 1 The inverter output current driving the motor may fluctuate due to the motor characteristics and or backlash in the machinery load Modifying the H80 data adjusts the controls in order to suppress such fluctuation However as incorrect setting of this gain may cause larger current fluctuation do not modify the default setting unless it is necessary Data setting range 0 00 to 0 40 5 111 H81 H82 Light Alarm Selection 1 and 2 If the inverter detects a minor abnormal state light alarm it can continue the current operation without tripping while displaying the light alarm indication TIL on the LED monitor In addition to the indication the inverter b
306. e processing 4 The customizable logic updates all of the five output signals at the same time 2 ms cycle Update output signals simultaneously Latch input signals Latch input signals Logical operations Step 1523 10 When configuring a logic circuit take into account the processing order of the customizable logic Otherwise a delay in processing of logical operation leads to a signal delay problem resulting in no expected output slow processing or a hazard signal issued ANCAUTION Ensure safety before modifying customizable logic related function code settings U codes and related function codes or turning ON the Cancel customizable logic terminal command CLC Depending upon the settings such modification or cancellation of the customizable logic may change the operation sequence to cause a sudden motor start or an unexpected motor operation An accident or injuries could occur W Customizable logic timer monitor Step selection U91 The contents of the timer in a customizable logic can be monitored using the monitor related function code or the keypad Selecting a timer to be monitored Function code Function Remarks U91 1 to 10 Specifies the step number whose timer or counter is to be monitored Monitoring Monitored by Related function code and LED monitor display Monitored item Communications link X90 Customizable lo
307. e ratio 6 against the primary speed command or compensating the primary speed command by the absolute value Hz Data for J62 Control function Decimal Bit 1 Control value type Operation for the primary speed command 0 0 Absolute value Hz Addition 1 0 Absolute value Hz Subtraction 2 1 Ratio Addition 3 1 Ratio Subtraction J68 to J70 Brake Signal Brake OFF current Brake OFF frequency speed and Brake OFF timer J71 J72 Brake Signal Brake ON frequency speed and Brake ON timer J95 J96 Brake Signal Brake OFF torque and Speed selection These function codes are for the brake releasing turning on signals of vertical carrier machines It is possible to set the conditions of the brake releasing turning on signals current frequency or torque so that a hoisted load does not fall down at the start or stop of the operation or so that the load applied to the brake is reduced 5 129 W Brake signal BRKS E20 to E24 and E27 data 57 This signal outputs a brake control command that releases or activates the brake Releasing the Brake When any of the inverter output current output frequency or torque command value exceeds the specified level of the brake signal J68 J69 J95 for the period specified by J70 Brake signal Brake OFF timer the inverter judges that required motor torque is generated and turns the signal BRKS ON for releasing the brake This prevents a hoisted load from falli
308. e the contactor is directly powered from the main power Under such conditions the control circuit can issue a turn on command to the magnetic contactor but the contactor not powered can produce nothing This state is regarded as abnormal causing an alarm 14 7 Overload of motor 1 through 4 Problem Electronic thermal protection for motor 1 2 3 or 4 activated H Motor 1 overload Motor 2 overload Motor 3 overload Motor 4 overload ISa fta RS ests dm MSNS TUN MM MEM Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The electronic thermal characteristics do not match the motor overload characteristics Check the motor characteristics gt Reconsider the data of function codes P99 F10 and F12 gt Use an external thermal relay Possible Causes 2 Activation level for the electronic thermal protection was inadequate What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the continuous allowable current of the motor gt Reconsider and change the data of function code F11 3 The specified acceleration deceleration time was too short Recalculate the acceleration deceleration torque and time needed for the load based on the moment of inertia for the load and the acceleration deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 through E15 and H56 4 Overload Measure the output current 2 Reduce the load e g Use the overload early wa
309. e the motor T T Primary resistance R1 P07 Tuning the no load current provided that it is safe deno i Leakage reactance X P08 and magnetic saturation Note that little load 2 estan Rated slip frequency P12 factor with the motor should be applied nder a If Magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 running at 50 of the base during tuning Tuning control Magnetic saturation extension factors frequency with load applied a to c P16 to P23 Tuning the rated slip decreases the tuning frequency with the motor stopped accuracy The tuning results of motor parameters will be automatically saved into their respective function codes If P04 tuning is performed for instance the tuning results will be saved into P codes Motor 1 parameters 2 Preparation of machinery Perform appropriate preparations on the motor and its load such as disengaging the coupling from the motor and deactivating the safety devices Z e z z 0 T m O 4 O A 3 Tuning QD Set function code P04 to 1 or 2 and press the amp key The blinking of or on the LED monitor will slow down Enter a run command The factory default is GY key on the keypad for forward rotation To switch to reverse rotation or to select the terminal signal FWD or REV as a run command change the data of function code F02 The moment a run command is entered the display of or lights up and tuning starts with
310. e x 10 When the count exceeds 99 990 the counter will be reset to 0 and start over again Temperature inside the inverter real time value Shows the current temperature inside the inverter Unit C Temperature of heat sink real time value Shows the current temperature of the heat sink inside the inverter Unit C Lifetime of DC link bus capacitor elapsed hours Shows the cumulative time during which a voltage is applied to the DC link bus capacitor When the main power is shut down the inverter automatically measures the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor and corrects the elapsed time The display method is the same as for 5 5 above Lifetime of DC link bus capacitor remaining hours Shows the remaining lifetime of the DC link bus capacitor which is estimated by subtracting the elapsed time from the lifetime 10 years The display method is the same as for 5_ 4 5 above Cumulative run time of motor 2 Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of motor 2 The display method is the same as for 5 77 above Cumulative run time of motor 3 Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of motor 3 The display method is the same as for 5 77 above 3 16 LED Monitor Table 3 15 Display Items in Maintenance Information Continued Cumulative run time of motor 4 Description Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time cou
311. eating or output an alarm signal W Thermistor for motor Mode selection H26 H26 selects the function operation mode protection or alarm for the PTC NTC thermistor as shown below Data for H26 S3GdO9 NOILONNA Disable Enable When the voltage sensed by PTC thermistor exceeds the detection level motor protective function alarm Oh4 is triggered causing the inverter to enter an alarm stop state Enable When the voltage sensed by the PTC thermistor exceeds the detection level a motor alarm signal is output but the inverter continues running You need to assign the Motor overheat detected by thermistor signal THM to one of the digital output terminals beforehand by which a temperature alarm condition can be detected by the thermistor PTC E20 to E24 and E27 data 56 Enable When the inverter is connected with the NTC thermistor built into the Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control the inverter senses the motor temperature and uses the information for control If the motor overheats and the temperature exceeds the protection level the inverter issues the Motor protection alarm Oh4 and stops the motor If H26 data is set to 1 or 2 PTC thermistor the inverter monitors the voltage sensed by PTC thermistor and protect the motor even when any of the 2nd to 4th motors is selected If H26 data is set to 3 NTC thermistor and any of the 2nd to 4th motors is selected the inverter does
312. ectively described where one of them first appears 5 2 1 Fundamental Functions F00 Data Protection F00 specifies whether to protect function code data except F00 and digital reference data such as frequency command and PID command from accidentally getting changed by pressing the keys on the keypad Changing function code data Changing digital reference data Data for F00 From the keypad Via communications link with the Q keys 0 Allowed Allowed Allowed 1 Not allowed Allowed Allowed 2 Allowed Allowed Not allowed 3 Not allowed Allowed Not allowed Only F00 data can be modified with the keypad while all other function codes cannot To change F00 data simultaneous keying of 69 from 0 to 1 or 69 2 from 1 to 0 keys is required For similar purposes WE KP a signal enabling editing of function code data from the keypad is provided as a terminal command for digital input terminals Refer to the descriptions of E01 through E07 data 19 The relationship between the terminal command WE KP and F00 data are as shown below Changing function code data WE KP f From the keypad Via communications link OFF Not allowed Ten Allowed ON Follow the F00 setting K ote 7 If you mistakenly assign the terminal command WE KP you no longer edit or modify function code data In such a case temporarily turn this WE KP assigned termi
313. ectly select the motor type with P99 Motor 1 Selection specify the motor rated capacity with P02 and then initialize the motor parameters with H03 This procedure also applies when the inverter is switched to the MD LD mode and a motor with one rank higher capacity is used When switching the motor between the 1st to 4th motors specify the corresponding function codes Refer to the description of A42 The motor parameters to be specified in P13 through P56 such as iron loss factors and magnetic saturation factors are usually not shown on the motor nameplate or in the test report If auto tuning P04 2 or 3 is not performed it is not necessary to change the motor parameters from the ones for a standard motor P01 Motor 1 No of poles POI specifies the number of poles of the motor Enter the value given on the nameplate of the motor This setting is used to display the motor speed on the LED monitor and to control the speed refer to E43 The following expression is used for the conversion 120 Motor speed r min x Frequency Hz No of poles Data setting range 2 to 22 poles 5 95 P02 Motor 1 Rated capacity P02 specifies the rated capacity of the motor Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor Data for P02 Unit Function 0 01 to 1000 kW When P99 Motor 1 Selection 0 2 3 or4 HP When P99 Motor 1 Selection 1 When accessing function code P0
314. ector control V f control with speed sensor dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor vector control without speed sensor or vector control with speed sensor which can be selected with function codes To use the integrated automatic control functions such as auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring auto energy saving operation torque limiter automatic deceleration anti regenerative control auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation torque vector control droop control and overload stop it is necessary to build a motor model in the inverter by specifying proper motor parameters including the motor capacity and rated current The FRENIC MEGA provides built in motor parameters for Fuji standard motors 8 series 6 series and Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector control To use these Fuji motors it is enough to specify motor parameters for P99 Motor 1 Selection If the cabling between the inverter and the motor is long generally 20 m or longer or a reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter however the apparent motor parameters are different from the actual ones so auto tuning or other adjustments are necessary For the auto tuning procedure refer to Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR When using a motor made by other manufacturers or a Fuji non standard motor obtain the datasheet of the motor and specify the motor parameters manually or perform auto tuning To specify the motor parameters corr
315. ed by E38 Timer When the output current exceeds the Low current detection level plus 5 of the inverter rated current it goes OFF The minimum ON duration is 100 ms Output current Level 5 Level Timer i IDL ON Frequency Detection 2 Refer to E31 E38 Current Detection 2 Low Current Detection Level and Timer Refer to E34 5 83 E40 E41 PID Display Coefficient A B These function codes specify PID display coefficients A and B to convert a PID command process command or dancer position command and its feedback into mnemonic physical quantities to display Data setting range 999 to 0 00 to 9990 for PID display coefficients A and B W Display coefficients for PID process command and its feedback J01 1 or 2 E40 specifies coefficient A that determines the display value at 100 of the PID process command or its feedback and E41 specifies coefficient B that determines the display value at 0 The display value is determined as follows Display value PID process command or its feedback 100 x Display coefficient A B B Value displayed A PID display coefficient A E40 Q D D PID display i coefficient B E41 PID process command PID feedback 0 100 Example Maintaining the pressure around 16 kPa sensor voltage 3 13 V while the pressure sensor can detect 0 to 30 kPa over the output voltage range of 1 to 5 V Select terminal 12 as a feedback term
316. ed products and delivered products we request that you take adequate consideration of the necessity of rapid receiving inspections and of product management and maintenance even before receiving your products 1 Freeof charge warranty period and warranty range 1 Free of charge warranty period 1 The product warranty period is 1 year from the date of purchase or 24 months from the manufacturing date imprinted on the name place whichever date is earlier 2 However in cases where the use environment conditions of use use frequency and times used etc have an effect on product life this warranty period may not apply 3 Furthermore the warranty period for parts restored by Fuji Electric s Service Department is 6 months from the date that repairs are completed 2 Warranty range 1 Inthe event that breakdown occurs during the product s warranty period which is the responsibility of Fuji Electric Fuji Electric will replace or repair the part of the product that has broken down free of charge at the place where the product was purchased or where it was delivered However if the following cases are applicable the terms ofthis warranty may not apply The breakdown was caused by inappropriate conditions environment handling or use methods etc which are not specified in the catalog operation manual specifications or other relevant documents The breakdown was caused by the product other than the purchased or delivered Fuji
317. efer to Section 2 3 6 Setting up the slide switches GND Terminating 1 RJ 45 connector resistor face SW3 RJ 45 connector pin assignment Figure 2 18 RJ 45 Connector and its Pin Assignment Pins 1 2 7 and 8 are exclusively assigned to power lines for the remote keypad and multi function keypad so do not use those pins for any other equipment USB connector USB port On the keypad A USB port connector mini B that connects an inverter to a personal computer FRENIC Loader software running on the computer supports editing the function codes transferring them to the inverter verifying them test running an inverter and monitoring the inverter running status FRENIC Loader is available as a free download from our website at http web1 fujielectric co jp Kiki Info EN User guestlogin asp Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd Technical Information site On the Fuji website shown above select Technical Information Drive Control Equipment Inverters Software libraries Before downloading you are requested to register as a member free of charge 2 22 z deyo H23LH3ANI JHL ONIMIM ANY ONILNNOW Wiring for control circuit terminals For FRN75G1 20 FRN90G1M 20 and FRN132G1 BI AL to FRN630G1 1 40 1 As shown in Figure 2 19 route the control circuit wires along the left side panel to the outside of the inverter 2 Secure those wires to the wiring support using a cable tie
318. egree 2 Recommended wire size 0 65 to 0 82 mm2 AWG 19 or 18 Using wires exceeding the recommended sizes may lift the front cover depending upon the number of wires used impeding keypad s normal operation 2 3 3 Wiring precautions Follow the rules below when performing wiring for the inverter 1 Make sure that the source voltage is within the rated voltage range specified on the nameplate 2 Be sure to connect the three phase power wires to the main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T of the inverter If the power wires are connected to other terminals the inverter will be damaged when the power is turned ON 3 Always connect the grounding terminal to prevent electric shock fire or other disasters and to reduce electric noise 4 Use crimp terminals covered with insulated sleeves for the main circuit terminal wiring to ensure a reliable connection 5 Keep the power supply wiring primary circuit and motor wiring secondary circuit of the main circuit and control circuit wiring as far away as possible from each other 6 After removing a screw from the main circuit terminal block be sure to restore the screw even if no wire is connected 7 Use the wiring guide to separate wiring For inverters with a capacity of 3 7 kW or below the wiring guide separates the main circuit wires and the control circuit wires For inverters with a capacity of 5 5 to 22 kW it separates the upper and lower main circuit wires
319. election 0 Motor characteristics O Fuji standard motors 8 series N Y1Y2 0 Nee ever Y Y 1 Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors 2 Motor characteristics 2 Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector control 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series 4 Other motors A40 Slip Compensation 2 0 Enable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or N Y 0 Y Y N N N Operating conditions above 1 Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above 2 Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above 3 Disable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or above A41 Output Current Fluctuation Damping 0 00 to 0 40 Y Y 020 Y Y N N N Gain for Motor 2 A42 Motor Parameter Switching 2 0 Motor Switch to the 2nd motor N Y 0 Y lvY vi v Y 5 117 Mode selection 1 Parameter Switch to particular A codes A43 Speed Control 2 0 000 to 5 000 s Y Y 002 N Y Y Y N Speed command filter A44 Speed detection filter 0 000 to 0 100 s Ys Y 0000 NY Y Y N A45 P Gain 0 1 to 200 0 times Ns Y 100 N Y Y Y N A46 Integral time 0 001 to 9 999 s Y Y 0100 N Y Y Y N A48 Output filter 0 000 to 0 100 s Y Y 0002 N Y Y Y N A49 Notch filter resonance frequency 1 to 200 Hz Y Y 200 N N N Y N A50 Notch filter attenuation level 0 to 20 dB Y Y 0 NIN IN IY N A51 Cumulative Motor Run Time 2 0 to 9999 The cumulative run time can be modified or reset N N Y ee al YS ee i Y in units of 10
320. eleration deceleration time 1 F07 F08 is Laat ON deceleration time 3 effective Acceleration deceleration time 4 ON ON ME When the terminal command JOG is ON jogging operation is m xum possible Data 10 n Q Refer to the description of C20 When the terminal command STOP is OFF the motor decelerates to a stop in accordance with the deceleration time for forced stop H56 After the motor stops the inverter enters the alarm state with the alarm 4 displayed Data 30 At forced stop m Acceleration Deceleration pattern H07 H07 specifies the acceleration and deceleration patterns patterns to control output frequency Acceleration Data for Function deceleration Motion H07 code pattern Linear The inverter runs the motor with the constant acceleration and deceleration S curve To reduce an impact that Weak Weak acceleration deceleration would The acceleration deceleration rate make on the machine the to be applied to all of the four inverter gradually accelerates or inflection zones is fixed at 596 of decelerates the motor in both the the maximum frequency starting and ending zones of P DUE acceleration or deceleration Arbitrary f Arbitrary The acceleration deceleration rate can be arbitrarily specified for each of the four inflection zones Curvilinear Acceleration deceleration is linear below the base frequency constant torque but it slo
321. en terminals EN and PLC stops the inverter s output transistor coast to stop Compliant with EN954 1 Cat 3 Frequency command Keypad J and keys Analog input Analog input can be set with external voltage current input 0 to 10 VDC O to 100 terminals 12 V2 4 to 20 mA DC O to 100 terminal C1 UP DOWN operation Multi frequency 16 steps 16 bit parallel Pulse train input standard Pulse input X7 terminal Rotational direction One of the digital input terminals except X7 Link operation Various buses option Reference frequency switching Remote local mode switching Auxiliary frequency setting Proportional operation setting and Inverse operation Acceleration deceleration time 0 00 to 6000 s Linear S curve curvilinear Acceleration deceleration time settings 1 to 4 switchable 8 9 g deu SNOILVOIJIO3dS Item Explanation Control Stop control Running continued at the stop frequency coast to stop or force to stop DC braking Braking starting frequency up to 60 Hz time up to 30 0 s and operation level up to 100 Zero speed control under vector control with speed sensor Auto restart after momentary power failure Trip immediately trip after recovery from power failure trip after deceleration to stop Continue to run restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred restart at the starting frequency
322. ency command fluctuates What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the signals for the frequency command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Increase the filter constants C33 C38 and C43 for the frequency command Q An external potentiometer is used for frequency setting Check that there is no noise in the control signal wires from external sources 2 Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as possible gt Use shielded or twisted wires for control signals Check whether the external frequency command potentiometer is malfunctioning due to noise from the inverter gt Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the potentiometer or set a ferrite core on the signal wire Refer to Chapter 2 3 Frequency switching or multi frequency command was enabled Check whether the relay signal for switching the frequency command is chattering gt Ifthe relay contact is defective replace the relay Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 4 The wiring length between the Check whether auto torque boost auto energy saving operation or dynamic torque inverter and the motor is too long vector control is enabled gt Perform auto tuning of the inverter for every motor to be used gt Disable the automatic control systems by setting F37 to 1 Constant torque load and F42 to 0 V f control with slip compensation active then check
323. ength y05 for port 1 and y15 for port 2 y05 or yl5 specifies the character length for RS 485 Data for y05 and y15 Data length communication 0 8 bits Q For FRENIC Loader via the RS 485 communications link 1 7 bits i no setting is required since Loader automatically sets 8 bits O The same applies to the Modbus RTU protocol Even parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU Odd parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU None 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU T m Parity check yO6 for port 1 and y16 for port 2 lt y06 or y16 specifies the property of the parity bit Data for y06 and y16 Parity S For FRENIC Loader no setting is required since Loader None O automatically sets the even parity 2 stop bits for Modbus RTU z Q O J m o E Stop bits yO7 for port 1 and y17 for port 2 y07 or y17 specifies the number of stop bits Data for y07 and y17 Stop bit s For FRENIC Loader no setting is required since Loader 0 2 bits automatically sets 1 bit 1 1 bit For the Modbus RTU protocol no setting is required since the stop bits are automatically determined associated with the property of parity bits m No response error detection time y08 for port 1 and y18 for port 2 y08 or y18 specifies the time interval from when the inverter Data for y08 and y18 detects no access until it enters communications error alarm 0 No detection mode due to network failure and processes the 1 to 60 I to 60 5 communic
324. ens the inverter automatically reduces the output frequency to match the idling motor speed according to the reduction rate Frequency fall rate Hz s specified by H14 Data for H14 Inverter s action for the output frequency fall 0 00 Follow the deceleration time specified 0 01 to 100 00 Hz s Follow data specified by H14 Follow the setting of the PI controller in the current limiter The PI constant is prefixed inside the inverter 999 If the frequency fall rate is too high regeneration may take place at the moment the motor rotation matches the inverter output frequency causing an overvoltage trip On the contrary if the frequency fall rate is too low the time required for the output frequency to match the motor speed duration of current limiting action may be prolonged triggering the inverter overload prevention control Note W Restart after momentary power failure Continuous running level H15 Continuity of running P and I H92 H93 Trip after decelerate to stop If a momentary power failure occurs when F14 is set to 2 Trip after decelerate to stop the inverter enters the control sequence of the decelerate to stop when the DC link bus voltage drops below the continuous running level specified by H15 Under the decelerate to stop control the inverter decelerates its output frequency keeping the DC link bus voltage constant using the PI processor P proportional and I integral compon
325. ensation on the motor can be prevented by feeding DC power to the motor at regular intervals to keep the temperature of the motor above a certain level W Enabling Dew Condensation Prevention To utilize this feature you need to assign the terminal command DWP Protect motor from dew condensation to one of the general purpose digital input terminals EE E01 to E07 data 39 5 128 W Dew Condensation Prevention Duty J21 The magnitude of the DC power applied to the motor is the same as the setting of F21 DC braking 1 Braking level and its duration of each interval is the same as the setting of F22 DC braking 1 Braking time Interval T is determined so that the ratio of the duration of the DC power to T is the value Duty set for J21 2 Duty for condensation prevention J21 x 100 T gt DC Braking 1 Braking Time F22 i DC Applied DC Applied my 1 Braking Level Condensation Prevention Cycle J22 Commercial Power Switching Sequence Refer to E01 through E07 J56 PID Control Speed command filter J57 PID Control Dancer reference position J57 specifies the dancer reference position in the range of 100 to 100 for dancer control If J02 0 keypad this function code is enabled as the dancer reference position It is also possible to modify the PID command with the e K keys If it is modified the new command value is saved as J57 data For the setting procedure of the PID comma
326. ensor Otherwise the inverter may not control the motor due to decrease of the current detection resolution The wiring distance between the inverter and motor should be 50 m or less If it is longer the inverter may not control the motor due to leakage current flowing through stray capacitance to the ground or between wires Especially small capacity inverters whose rated current is also small may be unable to control the motor correctly even when the wiring is less than 50 m In that case make the wiring length as short as possible or use a wire with small stray capacitance e g loosely bundled cable to minimize the stray capacitance 4 4 E Performance comparison for drive controls summary Each drive control has advantages and disadvantages The table below compares the drive controls showing their relative performance in each characteristic Select the one that shows high performance in the characteristics that are important in your machinery In rare cases the performance shown below may not be obtained due to various conditions including motor characteristics or mechanical rigidity The final performance should be determined by adjusting the speed control system or other elements with the inverter being connected to the machinery load If you have any questions contact your Fuji Electric representative Output Speed Speed Drive control frequency control control stability accuracy response Maximum Load Current Torque torqu
327. ent 2 Reduce the load Check whether any mechanical brake is activated 2 Release the mechanical brake 7 Function code settings do not If auto torque boost or auto energy saving operation is specified check whether the agree with the motor characteristics data of P02 P03 P06 PO7 and P08 agree with the parameters of the motor 2 Perform auto tuning of the inverter for the motor to be used 8 The output frequency does not increase due to the current limiter operation Make sure that F43 Current limiter Mode selection is set to 2 and check the data of F44 Current limiter Level gt Correct the F44 data Or if the current limiter operation is not needed set F43 to 0 disabled Decrease the value of torque boost F09 then run the motor again and check if the speed increases 2 Adjust the value of the torque boost F09 Check the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 H51 H52 H53 H65 and H66 to ensure that the V f pattern setting is right 2 Match the V f pattern setting with the motor ratings 9 The output frequency does not increase due to the torque limiter operation Check whether data of torque limiter related function codes F40 F41 E16 and E17 is correctly configured and the Select torque limiter level terminal command TL2 TL1 is correct gt Correct data of F40 F41 E16 and E17 or reset them to the factory defaults disable gt Set the TL2 TLI cor
328. ent PID HLD Y Y Y Y N 35 1035 Select local keypad operation LOC Xe OYE xNuEY SUY d bas 36 1036 Select motor 3 M3 Y Y Y Y Y A42 b42 37 1037 Select motor 4 M4 Y Y Y Y Y A42 r42 39 Protect motor from dew condensation DWP Y Y Y Y Y Dl 40 a Enable integrated sequence to switch to ISW50 YIYININ N commercial power 50 Hz pa Al m Enable integrated sequence to switch to ISW60 YI Y ININ N commercial power 60 Hz 47 1047 Servo lock command LOCK N ININ Y N J97toJ99 Pulse train input 38 available only on terminal X7 BY HQEZESEAXN F01 C30 Pulse train sign d62 d63 ud 1043 available on terminals except X7 MN Alpe Wel es Nek 70 1070 Cancel constant peripheral speed control Hz LSC Y IY Y Y N 71 1071 Hold the constant peripheral speed LSC HLD Ylv vlv N d4l control frequency in the memory 72 1072 Count the run time of commercial CRUN MI YIYININ Y power driven motor 1 73 1073 Count the run time of commercial CRUNM2 Y Y IN IN Y power driven motor 2 H44 H94 74 1074 Count the run time of commercial CRUN M3 Y Y IN IN Y E power driven motor 3 75 1075 Count the run time of commercial CRUNMA Y Y IN IN Y power driven motor 4 76 1076 Select droop control DROOP Y Y Y Y N H28 77 1077 Cancel PG alarm PG CCL N Y N Y Y i E01 to E07 80 1080 Cancel customizable logic CLC YIYIYIYJ Y U81 to U85 81 1081 Clear all customizable logic timers CLTC Y Y Y Y Y Run forward 98 Exclusively assigned to FWD and FWD YI
329. ent the system from going down and reduce system downtime The protective functions marked with an asterisk in the table are disabled by default Enable them according to your needs The protective functions include for example the heavy alarm detection function which upon detection of an abnormal state displays the alarm code on the LED monitor and causes the inverter to trip the light alarm detection function which displays the alarm code but lets the inverter continue the current operation and other warning signal output functions If any problem arises understand the protective functions listed below and follow the procedures given in Sections 6 2 and onwards for troubleshooting Protective function Heavy alarm detection Description This function detects an abnormal state displays the corresponding alarm code and causes the inverter to trip The heavy alarm codes are check marked in the Heavy alarm object column in Table 6 1 For details of each alarm code see the corresponding item in the troubleshooting The inverter retains the last four alarm codes and their factors together with their running information applied when the alarm occurred so it can display them Related function code Light alarm detection This function detects an abnormal state categorized as a light alarm displays L AL and lets the inverter continue the current operation without tripping It is possible to define which abnor
330. ents of the PI processor are specified by H92 and H93 respectively For normal inverter operation it is not necessary to modify data of H15 H92 or H93 Continue to run If a momentary power failure occurs when F14 is set to 3 Continue to run the inverter enters the control sequence of the continuous running when the DC link bus voltage drops below the continuous running level specified by H15 Under the continuous running control the inverter continues to run keeping the DC link bus voltage constant using the PI processor P proportional and I integral components of the PI processor are specified by H92 and H93 respectively For normal inverter operation it is not necessary to modify data of H15 H92 or H93 Power failure Recovery DC link Ya bus 1 Release level of continuous iae EN E mes ay Ceti running control H15 o voltage 8 If i Continuous running level H15 Tye Undervoltage level Inverter s output frequency P 1 It gb ae 22 kW or below 30 kW or above 200 V class series 5V 10V 400 V class series 10 V 20V Even if you select Trip after decelerate to stop or Continue to run the inverter may not be able to do so when the load s inertia is small or the load is heavy due to undervoltage caused by a control delay In such a case when Trip after decelerate to stop is selected the inverter allows the motor to coast to a stop when Continue to run
331. enu List of function codes Function code data Meno Quick Setup e 1 tnc e gt EU RE eto Ste IF O t 1 S dat d Fe SAUE the es tangto iE code Fo e 2 Be GUI F 3 carer i E Sc e gt E Figure 3 2 Menu Transition in Menu 0 Quick Setup and Function Code Data Changing Procedure Basic key operation This section gives a description of the basic key operation in Quick Setup following the example of the function code data changing procedure shown in Figure 3 2 This example shows you how to change function code F01 data Frequency command source from the factory default Q keys on keypad F01 0 to Current input to terminal C1 C1 function 4 to 20 mA DC F01 2 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the G5 key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears In this example r is displayed 2 If anything other than 7 u is displayed use the J and keys to display Frc 3 Press the amp key to proceed to the list of function codes 4 Use the S and keys to display the desired function code in this example then press the amp key The data of this function code appears In this example data of appears 5 Change the function code data using the and keys In this example press the key two times to change data to c
332. er than that of the motor These motors differ from general purpose motors in thermal characteristics Decrease the thermal time constant of the electronic thermal overload protection to match the motor rating W Brake motors For motors equipped with parallel connected brakes their power supply for braking must be supplied from the inverter input primary circuit If the power supply for braking is mistakenly connected to the inverter s output secondary circuit the brake may not work when the inverter output is shut down Do not use inverters for driving motors equipped with series connected brakes E Geared motors If the power transmission mechanism uses an oil lubricated gearbox or speed changer reducer then continuous operation at low speed may cause poor lubrication Avoid such operation E Synchronous motors Itis necessary to take special measures suitable for this motor type Contact your Fuji Electric representative for details E Single phase motors Single phase motors are not suitable for inverter driven variable speed operation m High speed motors If the reference frequency is set to 120 Hz or higher to drive a high speed motor test run the combination of the inverter and motor beforehand to check it for the safe operation 1 8 deyo H2LH3ANI SHL ONISN 30H38 Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING THE INVERTER 2 1 Operating Environment Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements liste
333. er frequency breaker that is connected 2 Make the wires between the inverter and motor shorter ae primary side 3 Use an earth leakage circuit breaker with lower sensitivity than the one currently used as tripped an PP 4 Use an earth leakage circuit breaker that features measures against the high frequency With overcurrent protection current component Fuji SG and EG series An external thermal relay 1 Decrease the carrier frequency was activated 2 Increase the current setting of the thermal relay 3 Use the electronic thermal overload protection built in the inverter instead of the external thermal relay W Selecting inverter capacity 1 To drive a general purpose motor select an inverter according to the nominal applied motor rating listed in the standard specifications table When high starting torque is required or quick acceleration or deceleration is required select an inverter with one rank higher capacity than the standard 2 Special motors may have larger rated current than general purpose ones In such a case select an inverter that meets the following condition Inverter rated current gt Motor rated current 1 3 2 Precautions in running inverters Precautions for running inverters to drive motors or motor driven machinery are described below W Motor temperature When an inverter is used to run a general purpose motor the motor temperature becomes higher than when it is operated with a
334. eration as a substantial error in torque calculation occurs no low torque can be detected within the operation range at less than 20 of the base frequency F04 In this case the result of recognition before entering this operation range is retained The U TL signal goes off when the inverter is stopped Since the motor parameters are used in the calculation of torque it is recommended that auto tuning be applied by function code P04 to achieve higher accuracy G deyo E99 Terminal FWD Function Terminal REV Function 5 2 3 C codes Control functions C01 to C03 Jump Frequency 1 2 and 3 C04 Jump Frequency Hysteresis width Refer to E01 to E07 ze c z O O Z Q J m o These function codes enable the inverter to jump over three different points on the output frequency in order to skip resonance caused by the motor speed and natural frequency of the driven machinery load While you are increasing the reference frequency the moment the reference frequency reaches the bottom of the jump frequency band the inverter keeps the output at that bottom frequency When the reference frequency exceeds the upper limit of the jump frequency band the internal reference frequency takes on the value of the reference frequency When you are decreasing the reference frequency the situation will be reversed When more than two jump frequency bands overlap the inverter actually takes the lowest frequency within
335. eries Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 5 Frequency 5 to 5 Input Po ll Ge 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 380 to 440 V 50 Hz 380 to 480 V 60 Hz Max voltage V Min voltage V 5 Voltage unbalance Three phase average voltage V x 67 IEC 61800 3 If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 6 Required when a DC reactor DCR is used 7 Average braking torque for the motor running alone It varies with the efficiency of the motor 8 A DC reactor DCR is optionally provided Note that inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW or above in all modes require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters Note A box LI in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 8 3 Common Specifications Output frequency Item Explanation Maximum frequency 25 to 500 Hz 120 Hz for inverters in MD LD mode 120 Hz under vector control without speed sensor 200 Hz under V f control with speed sensor or vector control with speed sensor 5 Base frequency 25 to 500 Hz in conjunction with the maximum frequency El Starting frequency 0 1 to 60 0 Hz 0 0 Hz under vector control with without speed sensor ep Carrier frequency 0 75 to 16 kHz HD mode 0 4 to 55 kW LD mode 5 5 to 18 5 kW E 0 75 to 10 kHz HD mode 75 to 400 kW LD mode
336. ermines the system response level against the deviation in P action An increase in gain speeds up response but an excessive gain may oscillate the inverter output A decrease in gain delays response but it stabilizes the inverter output A Deviation i Time 9 E 2 Ee oO MV Time E integral time J04 Data setting range 0 0 to 3600 0 s 0 0 means that the integral component is ineffective J04 specifies the integral time for the PID processor S3dO9 NOILONNA Integral action An operation in which the change rate of the MV manipulated value output frequency is proportional to the integral value of deviation is called I action which outputs the MV that integrates the deviation Therefore I action is effective in bringing the feedback amount close to the commanded value For the system whose deviation rapidly changes however this action cannot make it react quickly The effectiveness of I action is expressed by integral time as parameter that is J04 data The longer the integral time the slower the response The reaction to the external disturbance also becomes slow The shorter the integral time the faster the response Setting too short integral time however makes the inverter output tend to oscillate against the external disturbance Deviation f Time d c Time W D differential time J05 Data setting range 0 00 to 600 00 s 0 00 means that the differential c
337. ernal cooling when mounting the inverter in a panel for easy maintenance and perform periodical maintenance Textile manufacturing and paper manufacturing High humidity or dew condensation In an environment where a humidifier is used or where the air conditioner is not equipped with a dehumidifier high humidity or dew condensation results which causes a short circuiting or malfunction of electronic circuitry inside the inverter Puta heating module such as a space heater in the panel Outdoor installation Film manufacturing line pumps and food processing Vibration or shock exceeding the specified level If a large vibration or shock exceeding the specified level is applied to the inverter for example due to a carrier running on seam joints of rails or blasting at a construction site the inverter structure gets damaged Insert shock absorbing materials between the mounting base of the inverter and the panel for safe mounting Installation of an inverter panel on a carrier or self propelled machine Ventilating fan at a construction site or a press machine Fumigation for export packaging Halogen compounds such as methyl bromide used in fumigation corrodes some parts inside the inverter When exporting an inverter built in a panel or equipment pack them in a previously fumigated wooden crate When packing an inverter alone for export use a laminated veneer l
338. es as listed below Function code Factory default Frequency command 1 1 Analog voltage input to terminal 12 Operation method 1 External digital input signal Terminal FWD function 98 Run forward command FWD Terminal REV function 99 Run reverse command REV If terminal FWD and REV are ON the F02 data cannot be changed First turn those terminals OFF and then Note change the F02 data 2 Wire the external frequency command potentiometer to terminals across 13 12 and 11 3 Connect the run forward switch between terminals FWD and CM and the run reverse switch between REV and CM 4 To start running the inverter rotate the potentiometer to give a voltage to terminal 12 and then turn the run forward or reverse switch ON short circuit LL For precautions in wiring refer to Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING THE INVERTER Z z zZ z 0 4 I m O 4 O A Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 5 1 Function Code Tables Function codes enable the FRENIC MEGA series of inverters to be set up to match your system requirements Each function code consists of a 3 letter alphanumeric string The first letter is an alphabet that identifies its group and the following two letters are numerals that identify each individual code in the group The function codes are classified into 13 groups Fundamental Functions F codes Extension Terminal Functions E codes Control Functions C codes Moto
339. es if it is switched ON and OFF at one second intervals The table below lists functions that can be assigned to terminals Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 YSA C and 30A B C The descriptions are in principle arranged in the numerical order of assigned data However highly relevant signals are collectively described where one of them first appears Refer to the function codes or signals in the Related function codes signals data column if any Note The FRENIC MEGA runs under V f control dynamic torque vector control V f control with speed sensor dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor vector control without speed sensor or vector control with speed sensor Some function codes apply exclusively to the specific drive control which is indicated by letters Y Applicable and N Not applicable in the Drive control column in the tables Refer to page 5 2 Explanations of each function are given in normal logic system Active ON 9 Function code data Drive control Related D function c Functions assigned Symbol i22 Active ON Active OFF 4 vit PG w o w Torque codes signals V f PG PG control data Inverter running E30 E31 E32 Frequency speed arrival signal Frequency speed detected Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped Torque polarity detected Inverter output limiting lt k lt I K K KI K S3Qd09 NOILONNA Auto restarting after momentary powe
340. es listed above For details refer to the documentation for maintenance 5 107 H44 H78 Startup Counter for Motor 1 Maintenance Interval M1 H79 H94 Preset Startup Count for Maintenance M1 Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 W Cumulative motor run time 1 H94 Operating the keypad can display the cumulative run time of motor 1 This feature is useful for management and maintenance of the mechanical system H94 allows you to set the cumulative run time of the motor to the desired value which enables setting an arbitrary initial data to determine a parts or inverter replacement timing Specifying 0 clears the cumulative run time of the motor Even when a motor is driven by commercial power not by the inverter it is possible to count the cumulative run time of the motor by detecting the ON OFF state of the auxiliary contact of the magnetic contactor for switching to the commercial power line To enable this function assign CRUN MI Commercial power driving status of motor 1 function code data 72 to one of the digital input terminals Note H94 data is in hexadecimal notation It appears however in decimal notation on the keypad Cumulative motor run time 2 through 4 can also be counted by assigning CRUN M2 through CRUN M4 Commercial power driving status of motor 2 through 4 function code data 73 through 75 W Startup counter for motor 1 H44 H44 counts the number of inverter startups and displays it in hexadecimal format C
341. ess command PV PID feedback amount Hold During the power on sequence the alarm output is kept OFF disabled even when the monitored quantity is within the alarm range Once it goes out of the alarm range and comes into the alarm range again the alarm is enabled Latch Once the monitored quantity comes into the alarm range and the alarm is turned ON the alarm will remain ON even if it goes out of the alarm range To release the latch perform a reset by using the key or turning the terminal command RST ON Resetting can be done by the same way as resetting an alarm W Upper level alarm AH J12 J12 specifies the upper limit of the alarm AH in percentage of the feedback amount W Lower level alarm AL J13 J13 specifies the lower limit of the alarm AL in percentage 96 of the feedback amount The value displayed 96 is the ratio of the upper lower limit to the full scale 10 V or 20 mA of the feedback Note amount in the case ofa gain of 100 Upper level alarm AH and lower level alarm AL also apply to the following alarms How to handle the alarm Alarm Description od an eat Select alarm output J11 Parameter setting Upper limit absolute when AH lt PV Absolute value alarm J13 AL 0 Lower limit absolute when PV lt AL J12 AH 100 Upper limit deviation when SV AH lt PV Deviation alarm J13 AL 100 Lower limit deviation when PV lt SV AL J12 AH 100 Upper lower limit when SV
342. esulted in an abnormally high or low value of a parameter due to the output circuit opened Output current error An abnormally high current has flown during tuning During tuning a run command has been turned OFF or STOP Force to stop BX Coast to Sequence error a stop DWP Protect from dew condensation or other similar terminal command has been received roe During tuning any of the operation limiters has been activated Error due to limitation Xn A M The maximum frequency or the frequency limiter high has limited tuning operation Other errors An undervoltage or any other alarm has occurred If any of these errors occurs remove the error cause and perform tuning again or consult your Fuji Electric representative Ifa filter other than the Fuji optional output filter OFL LIA is connected to the inverter s output secondary circuit the tuning result cannot be assured When replacing the inverter connected with such a filter make a note of the old inverter s settings for the primary resistance R1 leakage reactance X no load current and rated slip frequency and specify those values to the new inverter s function codes Vibration that may occur when the motor s coupling is elastic can be regarded as normal vibration due to the output voltage pattern applied in tuning The tuning does not always result in an error however run the motor and check its running state
343. eters in accordance with r16 Rated capacity and r39 Motor 4 selection To initialize the motor parameters set the related function codes as follows St It re Function code e em ction i Ist motor 2nd motor 3rd motor 4th motor 1 Motor selection Selects the motor type P99 A39 b39 139 Motor Sets the motor capacity 2 rated capacity kW P02 A16 b16 r16 Gy DRE cx Initralize motor H03 2 H03 3 H03 4 H03 5 initialization parameters If Data 0 1 3 or 4 P01 P03 A15 A17 b15 b17 r15 r17 in Step 1 P06 to P23 A20 to A37 b20 to b37 r20 to r37 P53 to P56 A53 to A56 b53 to b56 r53 to r56 Function code datato HO T E I A EEEE ESE EELEE DE AERE E RN be initialized If Data 2 in Step 1 function codes listed at the right are F04 F05 A02 A03 b02 b03 r02 r03 also initialized Upon completion of the initialization the H03 data reverts to 0 factory default If P02 A16 b16 or r16 data is set to a value other than the nominal applied motor rating data initialization with H03 internally converts the specified value forcibly to the standard nominal applied motor rating Refer to Table C in Section 5 1 Function Code Tables e Motor parameters to be initialized are for motors listed below under V f control When the base frequency rated voltage and the number of poles are different from those of the listed motors or when non Fuji motors or non standard motor
344. eys on the keypad in conjunction with PID display coefficients specified by E40 and E41 you can specify 0 to 100 of the PID command 100 for PID dancer control in an easy to understand converted command format For details of operation refer to FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Chapter 7 Section 7 3 3 Setting up frequency and PID commands 2 PID command by analog inputs J02 1 When any analog input voltage input to terminals 12 and V2 or current input to terminal C1 for PID command 1 J02 1 is used it is possible to arbitrary specify the PID command by multiplying the gain and adding the bias The polarity can be selected and the filter time constant and offset can be adjusted In addition to J02 setting it is necessary to select PID command 1 for analog input specified by any of E61 to E63 function code data 3 For details refer to the descriptions of E61 to E63 Adjustable elements of PID command Input Filter time terminal Input range Polarity constant 0 to 10 V 10 to 4 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V 10 to m Offset C31 C36 C41 C31 C36 or C41 configures an offset for an analog voltage current input The offset also applies to signals sent from the external equipment W Filter time constant C33 C38 C43 C33 C38 and C43 provide the filter time constants for the voltage and current of the analog input Choose appropriate values for the time constants consi
345. feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm iS Set data of this bit to 0 when the inverter does not use a braking transistor and there is no need of entering an alarm state Switch IP20 IP40 enclosure Bit 7 for basic type of inverters only Mounting an IP40 option to inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below enables them to conform to IP40 In such a case switch Bit 7 to 1 for the protection coordination For details refer to the instruction manual of the IP40 option To set data of function code H98 assign the setting of each function to each bit and then convert the 8 bit binary to the decimal number 5 116 G deyo S3dO9 NOILONNA Refer to the assignment of each function to each bit and a conversion example below Bit Function Bit data 0 Bit data 1 Factory default 0 Low r the carrier frequency Disable Enable 1 Enable automatically 1 Detect input phase loss Continue to run Enter alarm processing iene alarm processing 2 Detect output phase loss Continue to run Enter alarm processing Continue to run Select life judgment threshold 3 of DC link bus capacitor Factory default User defined setting Factory default 4 Judge the life of DC link bus Disable Enable Enable capacitor 5 Detect DC fan lock Enter alarm Continue to run Enter alarm processing processing 6 Detect braking transistor error Continue to run Enter alarm processing Enter alarm processing
346. feel free to send your comments regarding any errors or omissions you may have found or any suggestions you may have for generally improving the manual In no event will Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd be liable for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the application ofthe information in this manual pEEEEEEEMLILLLLLLILLLOLLLLOLLLLL11L LLLLLLLLLLL EEE Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd Mitsui Sumitomo Bank Ningyo cho Bldg 5 7 Nihonbashi Odemma cho Chuo ku Tokyo 103 0011 Japan Phone 81 3 5847 8011 Fax 81 3 5847 8172 URL http www fesys co jp 2008 09 108 108
347. ference from the V f control with speed sensor stated above is to calculate the motor torque for the load applied and use it to optimize the voltage and current vector output for getting the maximal torque out of a motor This control is effective for improving the system response to external disturbances such as load fluctuations and the motor speed control accuracy W Vector control without speed sensor This control estimates the motor speed based on the inverter s output voltage and current to use the estimated speed for speed control In addition it decomposes the motor drive current into the exciting and torque current components and controls each of those components in vector No PG pulse generator interface card is required It is possible to obtain the desired response by adjusting the control constants PI constants using the speed regulator PI controller Since this control controls the motor current it is necessary to secure some voltage margin between the voltage that the inverter can output and the induced voltage of the motor by keeping the former lower than the latter Although the voltage of the general purpose motor has usually been adjusted to match the commercial power keeping the motor terminal voltage low is necessary in order to secure the voltage margin If the motor is driven under this control with the motor terminal voltage being kept low however the rated torque cannot be obtained even when the rated current or
348. g operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC 5 Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during ACC DEC b14 Drive Control Selection 3 0 V f control with slip compensation inactive N Y 0 YIN Y v Y 1 Dynamic torque vector control 2 V f control with slip compensation active 3 V f control with speed sensor 4 Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor 5 Vector control without speed sensor 6 Vector control with speed sensor b15 Motor 3 No of poles 2 to 22 poles N Y1Y2 4 Y vY vi v Y b16 Rated capacity 0 01 to 1000 kW when b39 0 2 3 or 4 N Y1Y2 7 Y vY vi v Y 0 01 to 1000 HP when b39 1 b17 Rated current 0 00 to 2000A N Y1Y2 7 Y lvY vi v Y b18 Auto tuning 0 Disable N N 0 YD Yr Yor Y 1 Tune while the motor stops R1 X and rated slip frequency 2 Tune while the motor is rotating under V f control 96R1 96X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c 3 Tune while the motor is rotating under vector control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c Available when the vector control is enabled b20 No load current 0 00 to 2000 A N Y1Y2 7 YYYY Y b21 R1 0 00 to 50 00 Y Y1Y2 7 Y Y vY v Y b22 X 0 00 to 50 00 Y Y1Y2 7 Y LY vY v Y b23 Slip compensation gain for driving 0 0 to 200 0 Y Y 10000
349. g the thermal time constant Imax Characteristic factor 96 a2 Output frequency for motor characteristic factor fo f Thermal time constant t Factory default Nominal applied motor kW a3 0 4 0 75 1 5 to 3 7 4 0 5 5 to 11 15 18 5 22 30 to 45 55 to 90 110 or above 4 0 kW for the EU 7 Hz 6 Hz 7 Hz 5 Hz Allowable continuous current x 150 Base frequency x 33 Base frequency x 83 Nominal Applied Motor and Thermal time constant t Factory default Nominal applied motor kW 0 2 to 22 30 to 45 55 to 90 110 or above Characteristic Factor Reference current for setting the Output frequency for motor characteristic factor s when P99 Motor 1 Selection 1 or 3 Characteristic factor 96 thermal time constant Imax Allowable continuous current x 150 fo f3 Base frequency x 33 al a2 Base frequency x 33 Base frequency x 83 If F10 is set to 2 changes of the output frequency do not affect the cooling effect Therefore the overload detection level F11 remains constant 5 41 m Overload detection level F11 Data setting range 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the inverter In general set the F11 data to the allowable continuous current of motor when driven at the base frequency 1 e 1 0 t
350. g the wiring guide upward pull it out toward you After carrying out wiring see Sections 2 3 2 through 2 3 6 put the wiring guide and the front cover back into place in the reverse order of removal While pressing the wiring guide upward pull it out toward you Figure 2 4 Removing the Front Cover and the Wiring Guide FRN11G1NBI 4L1 Front cover fixing screw Front cover Wiring guide Note A box MB in the above figure replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box L1 in the above figure replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 2 For inverters with a capacity of 30 to 630 KW Loosen the four front cover fixing screws hold the cover with both hands slide it upward slightly and pull it toward you as shown below Q After carrying out wiring see Sections 2 3 2 through 2 3 6 align the screw holes provided in the front cover with the screws on the inverter case then put the front cover back into place in the reverse order of removal C Tip To expose the control printed circuit board control PCB open the keypad enclosure Front cover fixing screws 2 aD Front cover Front cover fixing screws Tightening torque 1 8 Nem M4 3 5 Nem M5 Figure 2 5 Removing the Front Cover FRN30G1 4100 Note Abox B in the above figure replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box L1 in the above figure replaces A or
351. gency Fg 7 58 switch i stop 43 Note Emer Inverter Normet 30 Control power supply Run command Inverter operation Commercial power operation B Cancel PG alarm PG CCL Function code data 77 When this terminal command is ON the PG wire break alarm is ignored Use this terminal command when switching PG wires for switching motors for example to prevent it from being detected as PG wire break B Run forward FWD Function code data 98 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the forward direction turning it OFF decelerates it to stop Cie This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99 W Run reverse REV Function code data 99 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the reverse direction turning it OFF decelerates it to stop Crip This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99 E10 to E15 Acceleration Time 2 to 4 Deceleration Time 2 to 4 Refer to F07 E16 E17 Torque Limiter 2 1 2 2 Refer to F40 E20 to E23 Terminal Y1 to Y4 Function E24 E27 Terminal Y5A C and 30A B C Function Relay output E20 through E24 and E27 assign output signals listed on the next page to general purpose programmable output terminals Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5A C and 30A B C These function codes can also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define the property of those output terminals so that the inverter logic can interpret either the
352. gic Timer monitor Timer or counter value specified by Keypad VO checking 424 U91 dedicated to monitoring W Cancel customizable logic CLC E01 to E07 data 80 This terminal command can disable the customizable logic temporarily This terminal command is used to run the inverter without using the customizable logic circuit or timers for maintenance or other purposes CLC Function OFF Enable customizable logic Depends on the U00 setting ON Disable customizable logic Note Before changing the setting of CLC ensure safety Turning CLC ON disables the sequence of the customizable logic causing a sudden motor start depending upon the settings W Clear all customizable logic timers CLTC E01 to E07 data 81 Assigning CLTC to any of the general purpose digital input terminals and turning it ON resets all of the general purpose timers and counters in the customizable logic This terminal command is used when the timings between the external sequence and the internal customizable logic do not match due to a momentary power failure or other reasons so that resetting and restarting the system is required CLTC Function OFF Ordinary operation ON Reset all of the general purpose timers and counters in the customizable logic To operate the timers and counters again revert CLTC to OFF 5 146 G deyo S3GdO9 NOILONNA 5 2 10 y codes Link Functions y01 to y20 R
353. gital input terminal commands M2 M3 and M4 Select motor 2 3 and 4 switches between the Ist 2nd 3rd and 4th motors as listed below Function codes E01 through E07 data 12 36 or 37 When the motor is switched the function code group with which the inverter drives the motor is also switched to the corresponding one At the same time the inverter outputs the corresponding signal from the Motor 1 selected signal SWMI through the Motor 4 selected signal SWM4 Function codes E20 through E27 data 48 49 50 or 51 in order to switch the external switch to that selected motor Output signals SWM2 SWM3 Terminal command M2 M3 Inverter driven motor selected Function code group enabled 1st motor Default codes 2nd motor A codes 3rd motor b codes 4th motor r codes A42 b42 or r42 selects whether the combination of terminal commands M2 M3 and M4 switches the actual motors to the 2nd 3rd and 4th motors or the particular parameters A codes b codes or r codes Only when the inverter is stopped Motor Switch to the 2nd 3rd or 4th motor all run commands are OFF Even when the inverter is running Parameter Switch to particular A codes b codes or r codes Note From the point of view of signal timing a combination of M2 M3 and M4 must be determined at least 2 ms before the signal of a run command is established 5 117 If A42 b42 or r42 is set to 0 Motor
354. gration does not take place Time J11 to J13 PID Control Select alarm output Upper level alarm AH and Lower level alarm AL The inverter can output two types of alarm signals absolute value and deviation alarms associated with PID control if the digital output signal PID ALM is assigned to any of the programmable output terminals with any of E20 through E24 and E27 data 42 J11 specifies the alarm output types J12 and J13 specify the upper and lower limits for alarms W Select alarm output J11 J11 specifies one of the following alarms available Data for J11 Absolute value alarm Description While PV AL or AH PV PID ALM is ON l PID feedback PV PID control PID control Lower level Upper level alarm AL alarm AH J13 J12 Absolute value alarm with Hold Same as above with Hold Absolute value alarm with Latch Same as above with Latch Absolute value alarm with Hold and Latch Same as above with Hold and Latch Deviation alarm While PV lt SV AL or SV AH lt PV PID ALM is ON PID control PID control Lower level Upper level alarm AL alarm AH J13 J12 PID feedback PV PID command value SV Deviation alarm with Hold Same as above with Hold Deviation alarm with Latch Same as above with Latch Deviation alarm with Hold and Latch 5 127 Same as above with Hold and Latch SV PID proc
355. gt Enable overload prevention control H70 ONILOOHS3 I8n04 L 5 Ventilation paths are blocked Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter 2 Change the mounting place to ensure the clearance Check if the heat sink is not clogged gt Clean the heat sink 6 Cooling fan s airflow volume decreased due to the service life expired or failure Check the cumulative run time of the cooling fan Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 n Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information gt Replace the cooling fan Visually check that the cooling fan rotates normally gt Replace the cooling fan 7 The wires to the motor are too long causing a large leakage current from them 16 7 5 Overspeed Measure the leakage current gt Insert an output circuit filter OFL Problem The motor rotates in an excessive speed Motor speed F03 data x d32 data d33 data x 1 2 Possible Causes 1 Incorrect setting of function code data What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the motor parameter Number of poles P01 gt Specify the PO1 data in accordance with the motor to be used Check the maximum frequency setting F03 gt Specify the F03 data in accordance with the output frequency Check the setting of speed limit function d32 and d33 2 Disable the speed limit function d32 and d33 2 Insufficient gain of the speed controlle
356. gured and no unnecessary configuration has been done gt Configure all the function codes correctly Make a note of function code data currently configured and then initialize all function code data using H03 gt After the above process reconfigure function codes one by one checking the running status of the motor 6 3 2 Problems with inverter settings 1 Nothing appears on the LED monitor Possible Causes 1 No power neither main power nor auxiliary control power supplied to the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the input voltage and interphase voltage unbalance gt Turn ON a molded case circuit breaker MCCB a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor MC gt Check for voltage drop phase loss poor connections or poor contacts and fix them if necessary Q The power for the control PCB did not reach a sufficiently high level Check if the jumper bar has been removed between terminals P1 and P or if there is a poor contact between the jumper bar and those terminals gt Mount a jumper bar or a DC reactor between terminals P1 and P For poor contact tighten up the screws 3 2 The desired menu is not displayed The keypad was not properly connected to the inverter Possible Causes 1 3 Data of function codes cannot be changed The menu
357. h currently specified was too low Check the data of function code F15 Frequency limiter High gt Correct the F15 data 3 The reference frequency currently specified was too low Check that the reference frequency has been entered correctly using Menu 74 I O Checking on the keypad gt Increase the reference frequency gt Inspect the external frequency command potentiometers signal converters switches and relay contacts Replace any ones that are faulty gt Connect the external circuit wires to terminals 13 12 11 C1 and V2 correctly 4 A frequency command e g multi frequency or via communications with higher priority than the one attempted was active and its reference frequency was too low Check the data of the relevant function codes and what frequency commands are being received through Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad by referring to the block diagram of the frequency command refer to the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Chapter 6 gt Correct any incorrect data of function codes e g cancel the higher priority frequency command 5 The acceleration time was too long or too short Check the data of function codes F07 E10 E12 and E14 Acceleration time gt Change the acceleration time to match the load Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 6 Overload Measure the output curr
358. has occurred If any of these errors occurs remove the error cause and perform tuning again or consult your Fuji Electric representative 4 7 Z e z zZ z 0 T m O 4 O A Ifa filter other than the Fuji optional output filter OFL LIA is connected to the inverter s output secondary circuit the tuning result cannot be assured When replacing the inverter connected with such a filter make a note of the old inverter s settings for the primary resistance R1 leakage reactance X no load current and rated slip frequency and specify those values to the new inverter s function codes Vibration that may occur when the motor s coupling is elastic can be regarded as normal vibration due to the output voltage pattern applied in tuning The tuning does not always result in an error however run the motor and check its running state 4 1 8 Function code basic settings and tuning 3 Driving a motor under vector control without speed sensor F42 5 requires auto tuning regardless of the motor type Refer to Figure 4 1 on page 4 1 Even driving a Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control requires auto tuning Configure the function codes listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design values For the motor ratings check the ratings printed on the motor s nameplate For your machinery design values ask system designers about them LL For det
359. has risen abnormally The surrounding temperature exceeded the inverter s specification limit Possible Causes 1 The temperature around the motor exceeded the motor s specification range Check whether the Enable external alarm trip terminal command THR has been assigned to an unavailable terminal with E01 through E07 E98 or E99 gt Correct the assignment Check whether the normal negative logic of the external signal matches that of the THR command specified by any of E01 through E07 E98 and E99 gt Ensure the matching of the normal negative logic 9 deyo What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the surrounding temperature gt Lower the temperature around the inverter e g ventilate the panel where the inverter is mounted What to Check and Suggested Measures ONILOOHS3 I8n04 L Measure the temperature around the motor gt Lower the temperature Q Cooling system for the motor defective Check if the cooling system of the motor is operating normally gt Repair or replace the cooling system of the motor 3 Overload Measure the output current 2 Reduce the load e g Use the heat sink overheat early warning E01 through E07 or the overload early warning E34 and reduce the load before the overload protection is activated In winter the load tends to increase gt Lower the temperature around the motor gt Increase the motor sound Carrie
360. hat could occur in running the inverter the inverter saves mock alarm data enabling you to confirm the mock alarm status To clear the mock alarm data use H97 Accessing the H97 data requires simultaneous keying of go key e key H97 data automatically returns to 0 after clearing the alarm data LL A mock alarm can be issued also by simultaneous keying of 69 key key on the keypad for 5 seconds or more Starting Mode Auto search delay time 2 Refer to HO9 H48 Initial Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor Cumulative Run Time of Capacitors on Printed Circuit Boards Refer to H42 H51 Non linear V f Pattern 1 Frequency and Voltage H53 Non linear V f Pattern 2 Frequency and Voltage Refer to F04 Starting Mode Auto search delay time 1 Refer to HO9 H55 Acceleration Time Deceleration Time Jogging Deceleration Time for Forced Stop to H60 1st 2nd S curve Acceleration Deceleration Range Refer to F07 UP DOWN Control Initial frequency setting Refer to F01 Low Limiter Mode selection Refer to F15 Low Limiter Lower limiting frequency H64 specifies the lower limit of frequency to be applied when the current limiter torque limiter automatic deceleration anti regenerative control or overload prevention control is activated Normally it is not necessary to change this data Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 Hz H66 Non linear V f Pattern 3 Frequency and Voltage Refer to F04 Auto Energy Saving Ope
361. he DC link bus capacitor if the above conditions are met Periodically check the relative capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor o with Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode C Note The condition given above produces a rather large measurement error If this mode gives you a lifetime alarm set H98 Maintenance operation back to the default setting Bit 3 Select life judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor 0 and conduct the measurement under the condition at the time of factory shipment 3 Early warning of lifetime alarm For the components listed in Table 7 3 the inverter can issue an early warning of lifetime alarm LIFE at one of the transistor output terminals Y 1 to Y4 and the relay contact terminals Y5A Y5C and 30A B C as soon as any of the levels specified in Table 7 3 has been exceeded The early warning signal is also turned ON when a lock condition on the internal air circulation DC fan provided on 200 V class series inverters with a capacity of 45 kW or above on 400 V class series inverters with a capacity of 75 kW or above has been detected 7 4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main Circuit Because the voltage and current of the power supply input primary circuit of the main circuit of the inverter and those of the motor output secondary circuit contain harmonic components the readings may vary with the type of the meter Use meters indicated in Table 7 4 when measuring with
362. he continuous running level due to a decelerate to stop momentary power failure decelerate to shop control is invoked Decelerate to stop control regenerates kinetic energy from the load s moment of inertia slowing down the motor and continuing the deceleration operation After decelerate to stop operation an undervoltage alarm is issued Continue to run As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the continuous running level due to a for heavy inertia or momentary power failure continuous running control is invoked Continuous running general loads control regenerates kinetic energy from the load s moment of inertia continues running and waits the recovery of power When an undervoltage condition is detected due to a lack of energy to be regenerated the output frequency at that time is saved the output of the inverter is shut down and the motor enters a coast to stop state If a run command has been input If a run command has been input restoring restoring power restarts the inverter at the power performs auto search for idling motor output frequency saved when speed and restarts running the motor at the undervoltage was detected frequency calculated based on the searched speed This setting is ideal for fan applications with a large moment of inertia Restart at the As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a frequency at which momentary power failure th
363. he data of the corresponding maintenance item appears 5 Press the amp key to return to the list of maintenance items Press the amp key again to return to the menu LED Monitor shows Table 3 15 Display Items in Maintenance Information Cumulative run time Description Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the inverter Counter range 0 to 65 535 hours Display Upper 2 digits and lower 3 digits are displayed alternately 535H 535 hours 55 lt SSH 65 535 hours Example The lower 3 digits are displayed with hour When the count exceeds 65 535 the counter will be reset to 0 and start over again DC link bus voltage Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit Unit V volts Max temperature inside the inverter Shows the maximum temperature inside the inverter for every hour nit C Temperatures below 20 C are displayed as 20 C Max temperature of heat sink hows the maximum temperature of the heat sink for every hour Max effective output current hows the maximum current in RMS for every hour U S Unit C Temperatures below 20 C are displayed as 20 C S U nit A amperes Capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor Shows the current capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor reservoir capacitor in based on the capacitance when shipping as 100 Refer to Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION for details
364. he function code data see Chapter 3 Section 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting Function Function code data Factory default FRN GIB2A A4A FRN GIBM AE Motor 1 selection 2 Motor characteristics 2 VG motors 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series Motor 1 ree Rated capacity Same as that of the applied motor capacity Nominal applied motor capacity 3 Enable when NTC thermistor HAS Thermistor for motor Also turn SWS on the control 9 Disable Mode selection printed circuit board to the PTC NTC side b Feedback input 2 A B phase with 90 degree phase 2 A B phase Pulse input format shift d ia ee resolution 0400 1024 OOO 200 V class series 200 V class series ae 60 0 Hz IL Or x D LIZ Maximum frequency 1 Mig def ees 400 V EYES 400 V s ENDS Acceleration time 1 m Note nnm Deceleration time 1 C Note Note For a test driving of the motor increase values so that they are longer than your machinery design values If the specified time is short the inverter may not run the motor properly 22 kW or below 6 00 s 30 kW or above 20 00 s 22 kW or below 6 00 s 30 kW or above 20 00 s Electric thermal overload F protection for motor 1 Overload detection level 0 00 Disable Depending upon the inverter capacity After the above configuration
365. he grounding terminal of the motor 2 For connection to inverter s control terminals and for connection of the RS 485 communication signal cable use shielded wires As with the motor clamp the shields firmly to a grounded panel 3 If noise from the inverter exceeds the permissible level enclose the inverter and its peripherals within a metal panel as shown in Figure 9 3 Note Connect the shielding layer of shielded cable to the motor and panel electrically and ground the motor and panel MCCB or RCD ELCB Metal panel Beis FRENIC MEGA L1 R EMC O compliant d filter optional Three phase Shielded cable with overcurrent protection Figure 9 3 Mounting the Inverter with EMC compliant Filter in a Metal Panel 9 2 9 3 3 Leakage current of EMC filter built in type of inverters An EMC filter uses grounding capacitors for noise suppression which increase leakage current When using an EMC filter built in type of inverters therefore check whether there is no problem with electrical systems ANCAUTION An electric shock could occur Three Phase PDS Power Drive System with touch currents 2 3 5 mA AC or 2 10 mA DC As the touch current leakage current of inverters with EMC filter is relatively high it is of essential importance to always assure a reliable connection to Protective Earth PE In Table 9 1 for the inverter types whose leakage currents are equal to or exceed
366. he input of terminal C1 between C1 and PTC NTC is turned to the PTC NTC position For details on SWS refer to Section 2 3 6 Setting up the slide switches In this case you must change data of the function code H26 lt Control circuit gt Figure 2 10 Internal Circuit Diagram SW5 Selecting PTC NTC Analog setting voltage input 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external voltage input 0to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Normal operation 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Inverse operation 2 In addition to frequency setting PID command PID feedback signal auxiliary frequency command setting ratio setting torque limiter level setting or analog input monitor can be assigned to this terminal 3 Hardware specifications Input impedance 22k The maximum input is 15 VDC however the voltage higher than 10 VDC is handled as 10 VDC Inputting a bipolar analog voltage 0 to 10 VDC to terminal V2 requires setting function code C45 to 0 Analog common Common for analog input output signals 13 12 C1 V2 FM1 and FM2 Isolated from terminals CM and CMY Table 2 7 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Functions Since low level analog signals are handled these signals are especially susceptible to the external noise effects Route the wiring as short as possible within 20 m a
367. he life time alarm command LIFE is assigned to any of the digital output terminals Refer to 3 Early warning of lifetime alarm later in this section Table 7 3 lists the parts whose service life can be predicted and details the life prediction function The predicted values should be used only as a guide since the actual service life is influenced by the surrounding temperature and other usage environments Table 7 3 Life Prediction Object of Tie Prediction function End of life criteria Prediction timing On the LED monitor prediction DC link bus Measurement of discharging time 85 or lower of the initial At periodic S capacitor Measures the discharging time of Capacitance at shipment inspection Capacitance the DC link bus capacitor when See 1 Measuring the H98 Bit 3 0 the main power is shut down and capacitance of DC link bus calculates the capacitance capacitor in comparison with initial one at shipment on page 7 4 85 or lower of the reference During ordinary 5_ 75 capacitance under ordinary operation Capacitance operating conditions at the user H98 Bit 3 1 site i See 2 Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions on page 7 5 z ON time counting Exceeding 87 600 hours During ordinary 5_ 25 2 Counts the time elapsed when the 10 years operation Elapsed time zZ voltage is applied to the DC link
368. he previous values of input signals 11 Increment counter Increment counter with reset input By the rising edge of an input signal the logic circuit increments the counter value by one When the counter value reaches the target one the output signal turns ON Turning the reset signal ON resets the counter to zero 12 Decrement counter Decrement counter with reset input By the rising edge of an input signal the logic circuit decrements the counter value by one When the counter value reaches zero the output signal turns ON Turning the reset signal ON resets the counter to the initial value 13 Timer with reset input Timer output with reset input If an input signal turns ON the output signal turns ON and the timer starts When the period specified by the timer has elapsed the output signal turns OFF regardless of the input signal state Turning the reset signal ON resets the current timer value to zero and turns the output OFF The block diagrams for individual functions are given below 1 Through output 2 AND 3 OR General purpose timer Input 1 LE Output Input 1 Input 1 General purpose timer General purpose timer N LE Output 7 LE Output Input 2 Input 2 Input 2 5 142 G deyo 4d09 NOILONNA 4 XOR 5 Set priority flip flop Input 1 General purpose timer lE Output
369. he rotational direction is fixed F02 2 or 3 it is retained inside the inverter so that the restart will begin as soon as the inverter enters the ready to run state Power failure Recovery DC link bus voltage f Undervoltage level UE 0d No power i Time reserved for restart about 0 3 to 0 6 s Gate ON command Gate OFF Ready to run wt 2s 1 1 Waiting for run command State of the inverter Run command ON ON 4 Restart When the power is restored the inverter will wait 2 seconds for input of a run command However if the Cote allowable momentary power failure time H16 elapses after the power failure was recognized even within the 2 seconds the restart time for a run command is canceled The inverter will start operation in the normal starting sequence If the Coast to a stop terminal command BX is entered during the power failure the inverter gets out of the restart mode and enters the normal running mode If a run command is entered with power supply applied the inverter will start from the normal starting frequency The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure by detecting an undervoltage condition whereby the voltage of the DC link bus goes below the lower limit In a configuration where a magnetic contactor is installed on the output side of the inverter the inverter may fail to recognize a momentary power failure because the m
370. he thermal marginal characteristics of the braking resistor the electronic thermal overload protection feature may act so that the inverter issues the overheat protection alarm 7 7 even if the actual temperature rise is not large enough If it happens review the relationship between the performance index of the braking resistor and settings of related function codes Note The standard models of braking resistor can output temperature detection signal for overheat Assign an Enable external alarm trip terminal command THR to any of digital input terminals X1 to X7 FWD and REV and connect that terminal and its common terminal to braking resistor s terminals 2 and 1 Tip Calculating the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking resistor and configuring the function code data When using any non Fuji braking resistor inquire of the resistor manufacturer about the resistor rating and then configure the related function codes The calculation procedures for the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking resistor differ depending on the application of the braking load as shown below Applying braking load during deceleration In usual deceleration the braking load decreases as the speed slows down In the deceleration with constant torque the braking load decreases in proportion to the speed Use Expressions 1 and 3 given below Applying braking load during running at a consta
371. heck the displayed number on the maintenance screen of the keypad and use it as a guide for maintenance timing for parts such as belts To start the counting over again e g after a belt replacement set the H44 data to 0000 G deyo B Maintenance timer MNT 1 H78 Maintenance interval M1 specifies the maintenance interval in units of ten hours When the cumulative motor run time 1 H94 reaches the time specified by H78 Maintenance interval M1 the inverter outputs the maintenance timer signal MNT to remind the user of the need of system maintenance The setting is in units of 10 hours The maximum setting is 9999 x 10 hours Data setting range 0 Disable 1 to 9999 in units of ten hours Biannual maintenance gt Cumulative motor run time 1 H94 A S3dO9 NOILONNA H94 H78 H78 876 8760 hours 1 year H78 438 4380 hours Half year P Time Maintenance Timer MNT on on 2 H79 Preset startup count for maintenance M1 specifies the number of inverter startup times to determine the next maintenance timing When the count of the startup counter for motor 1 H44 reaches the number specified by H79 Preset startup count for maintenance M1 the inverter outputs the maintenance timer signal MNT to remind the user of the need of system maintenance Set the H79 data in hexadecimal The maximum setting count is 65 535 FFFF in hexadecimal Data setting range 0000 Disable 00
372. heck various running status information output frequency and output current etc by pressing the amp 9 key The item number and data for each running information will be displayed alternately Further you can view various pieces of information on the running status of the inverter using the key The information displayed is the same as for Menu 6 Alarm Information in Programming mode Refer to Table 3 16 in Section 3 4 7 Reading alarm information Pressing the amp key while the running status information is displayed returns to the alarm code display Note When the running status information is displayed after removal of the alarm cause pressing the amp key twice returns to the alarm code display and releases the inverter from the alarm state This means that the motor starts running if a run command has been received by this time B Switching to Programming mode You can also switch to Programming mode by pressing 69 amp 9 keys simultaneously with the alarm displayed and modify the function code data Figure 3 7 summarizes the possible transitions between different menu items Running mode Alarm occurs Running status info at the time an alarm occurred Y List of alarm codes L L Item Switching at approx Output fre
373. hexadecimal format each light alarm factor has been assigned to bits 0 to 15 as listed in Tables 5 1 and 5 2 Set the bit that corresponds to the desired light alarm factor to 1 Table 5 3 shows the relationship between each of the light alarm factor assignments and the LED monitor display Number of startups reached the specified level Table 5 4 gives the conversion table from 4 bit binary to hexadecimal 5 112 Table 5 1 Light Alarm Selection 1 H81 Bit Assignment of Selectable Factors Bit Code Content Bit Code Content 7 LiL 5 Overload of motor 3 6 Overload of motor 2 RS 485 communications error COM port 2 RS 485 communications error COM port 1 Option error Overload of motor 1 Braking resistor overheated Option communications error Inverter internal overheat External alarm Overload of motor 4 Heat sink overheat Table 5 2 Light Alarm Selection 2 H82 Bit Assignment of Selectable Factors Content i Content 15 7 L Lifetime alarm 14 6 Li Heat sink overheat early warning 13 Lr Inverter life Number of startups 5 a Motor overload early warning r Inverter life re com B Tour Cumulative motor run time 4 Gig DC fan locked 11 F L PTC thermistor activated 3 10 Z 7 Low torque output 2 9 F if PID alarm 1 8 EF Reference command loss detected 0 Ert Speed mismatch or excessive speed
374. hours Display Upper 2 digits and lower 3 digits are displayed alternately 5 Ui Cumulative run time Example fi lt gt 55H 535 hours 55 53 H 65 535 hours The lower 3 digits are displayed with 7 hour When the count exceeds 65 535 the counter will be reset to 0 and start over again QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOI LV H3dO Shows the content of the motor startup counter i e the number of run commands issued Counter range 0 to 65 530 times D to 9009 5 09 No of startups Display range to 5555 If the count exceeds 10 000 the x10 LED turns ON and the LED monitor shows one tenth of the value When the count exceeds 65 530 the counter will be reset to 0 and start over again 503 DC link bus voltage Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit Unit V volts E dum E Shows the temperature inside the inverter 5 d Temperature inside the inverter Unit C a Sh the t ture of the heat sink b Max temperature of heat sink P Hr M E Unit C Terminal I O signal status 5 c displayed with the ON OFF of LED segments Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals Refer to co Terminal input signal status B Displaying control I O signal terminals in Section 3 4 5 Checking nu Ti in hexadecimal I O signal status for details C m Terminal output signal status in hexadecimal 5 05 No of consecutive occurrences Shows the number of times the same alarm
375. hts when the inverter is ready to run with a run command entered by the amp w key F02 KEYPAD CONTROL LED 0 2 or 3 In Programming and Alarm modes however pressing the amp key cannot run the inverter even if this indicator lights RUN LED These three LED indicators identify the unit of numeral displayed on the LED monitor in Running mode by combination of lit and unlit states of them LED Unit LEDs Unit Hz A kW r min and m min Indicators 3 LEDs Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status for details While the inverter is in Programming mode the LEDs of Hz and kW light B Hz OA M kW Lights when the data to display exceeds 9999 When this LED lights the displayed value x 10 is the actual value Example If the LED monitor displays 777 and the x10 LED lights it means that the actual value is 1 234 x 10 12 340 Table 3 1 Overview of Keypad Functions Continued LED Monitor Keys The USB port with a mini B connector enables the inverter to connect with a PC with a USB port USB cable 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes FRENIC MEGA features the following three operation modes Table 3 2 Operation Modes Operation mode Description After powered ON the inverter automatically enters this mode This mode allows you to specify the reference frequency PID command value and etc and run stop the Running mode motor with the un G0 keys It is also pos
376. iately trips if the latter occurs the inverter shows the 4 on the LED monitor and blinks the KEYPAD CONTROL LED but it continues to run without tripping Which abnormal states are categorized as a light alarm Light alarm object should be defined with function codes H81 and H82 beforehand Assigning the LALM signal to any one of the digital output terminals with any of function codes E20 to E24 and E27 98 enables the inverter to output the LALM signal on that terminal upon occurrence of a light alarm For details of the light alarm objects refer to Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING Table 6 1 E How to check a light alarm factor When a light alarm occurs 5 appears on the LED monitor To check the current light alarm factor enter Programmin g pp g g g mode by pressing the key and select 5_ 5 5 on Menu 5 Maintenance Information It is also possible to check the factors of the last three light alarms 5 7 last to 5 7 3rd last For details of the menu transition of the maintenance information refer to Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information E How to remove the current light alarm After checking the current light alarm factor to switch the LED monitor back to the running status display e g output frequency from the indication press the key in Running mode If the light alarm factor has been removed the KEYPAD CONTROL LED stops blinking and the LALM signal turns OFF If not e g DC fan lock
377. ic settings 2 Function code Function code basic settings 5 basic settings 6 Function code basic settings 3 Function code basic settings 4 See Section 4 1 6 See Section 4 1 10 See Section 4 1 11 Tuning See Section 4 1 7 v See Section 4 1 7 See Section 4 1 8 See Section 4 1 9 ing See Section 4 1 11 See Section 4 1 8 Run the inverter for operation check Gradually accelerating from low to high speed See Section 4 1 12 Adjust motor control function code data i Set up application related function codes Eur c nj 4 nE Check interfacing operations with peripherals End Proceed to practical operation Figure 4 1 Test Run Procedure 4 1 2 Checking prior to powering on Check the following before powering on the inverter 1 Check that the wiring is correct Especially check the wiring to the inverter input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T and output terminals U V and W Also check that the grounding wires are connected to the grounding terminals G correctly See Figure 4 2 ANWARNING Never connect power supply wires to the inverter output terminals U V and W Doing so and turning the power ON breaks the inverter Be sure to connect the grounding wires of the inverter and the motor to the ground electrodes
378. ickly Menu 0 Quick Setup ssssss 3 6 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting 0 sss 3 7 3 4 3 Checking changed function codes Menu 2 Data Checking 3 7 3 4 A Monitoring the running status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring 3 8 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status Menu 4 I O Checking 3 11 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information 3 14 3 4 7 Reading alarm information Menu 6 Alarm Information 3 18 3 4 8 Copying data Menu 7 Data Copying sssssss 3 20 3 5 Alarm Mode errorae erm aree 3 23 3 6 USB Connectivity sessen eais Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR ee 4 1 Running the Motor for a Testo eee 4 1 1 Test run procedure sss 4 1 2 Checking prior to powering on 4 1 3 Powering ON and checking 4 1 4 Switching between HD MD and LD drive nn I c 4 2 4 1 5 Selecting a desired motor drive control 4 3 4 1 6 Function code basic settings lt 1 4 5 4 1 7 Function code basic settings and tuning lt 2 gt 4 6 4 1 8 4 1 9 4 1 10 4 1 11 4 1 12 Function code basic settings and tuning 3 gt 4 8 Function code basic settings lt 4 gt 4 11 Function code basic settings lt 5 gt Function code basic settings and tuning lt 6 gt 4 12 Running the inve
379. ics and moment of inertia of the load The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other If both are activated concurrently they may conflict each other and cause hunting in the system Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters The vector control itself contains the current control system so it disables the current limiter specified by F43 and F44 as well as automatically disabling the instantaneous overcurrent limiting specified by H12 Accordingly the inverter causes an overcurrent trip when its output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level F50 to F52 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Braking Resistor Discharging capability Allowable average loss and Resistance These function codes specify the electronic thermal overload protection feature for the braking resistor Set the discharging capability allowable average loss and resistance to F50 F51 and F52 respectively These values are determined by the inverter and braking resistor models For the discharging capability allowable average loss and resistance refer to FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Chapter 4 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT The values listed in the manual are for standard models and 10 ED models of the braking resistors which Fuji Electric provides If you use a braking resistor of other maker confirm the corresponding values with the maker and set the function codes accordingly 5 64 Depending on t
380. icult to provide repairs or supply spare parts even within this 7 year period For details please confirm at our company s business office or our service office 4 Transfer rights In the case of standard products which do not include settings or adjustments in an application program the products shall be transported to and transferred to the customer and this company shall not be responsible for local adjustments or trial operation 5 Service contents The cost of purchased and delivered products does not include the cost of dispatching engineers or service costs Depending on the request these can be discussed separately 6 Applicable scope of service Above contents shall be assumed to apply to transactions and use of the country where you purchased the products Consult the local supplier or Fuji for the detail separately Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS 8 1 Standard Model 1 Basic Type 8 1 4 Three phase 200 V class series HD High Duty mode inverters for heavy load Type FRN G1S 22H 0 4 0 75 1 5 2 2 3 7 5 5 To 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Nominal applied motor kW 4 0 4 0 75 1 5 22 3 7 5 5 7 5 11 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Output rating ie i Med ud E ES ed voltage V Three phase 200 to 240 V with AVR function Three ph se 209 to 290 v 90 with AVR function aon u 3 5 e T 9 35 Tz 8 49 6 75 9o 9 6 t8 zs 265 346 HIIUL EDIIIIMMMEMT EE Zz amp Zz amp E ratings O
381. ight and the duration of the momentary power failure is extremely short the voltage drop may not be great enough for a momentary power failure to be recognized and the motor may continue to run uninterrupted Upon recognizing a momentary power failure the inverter enters the restart mode after a recovery from momentary power failure and prepares for restart When power is restored the inverter goes through an initial charging stage and enters the ready to run state When a momentary power failure occurs the power supply voltage for external circuits such as relay sequence circuits may also drop so as to turn the run command OFF In consideration of such a situation the inverter waits 2 seconds for a run command input after the inverter enters a ready to run state If a run command is received within 2 seconds the inverter begins the restart processing in accordance with the F14 data Mode selection If no run command has been received within 2 second wait period the inverter cancels the restart mode after a recovery from momentary power failure and needs to be started again from the ordinary starting frequency Therefore ensure that a run command is entered within 2 seconds after a recovery of power or install a mechanical latch relay When run commands are entered via the keypad the above operation is also necessary for the mode F02 0 in which the rotational direction is determined by the terminal command FWD or REV In the modes where t
382. iginally specified for the motor is applied To secure the rated torque therefore it is necessary to use a motor with higher rated current This also applies to the vector control with speed sensor This control is not available in MD mode inverters so do not set F42 data to 5 for those inverters W Vector control with speed sensor This control requires an optional PG pulse generator and an optional PG interface card to be mounted on a motor shaft and an inverter respectively The inverter detects the motor s rotational position and speed from PG feedback signals and uses them for speed control In addition it decomposes the motor drive current into the exciting and torque current components and controls each of components in vector The desired response can be obtained by adjusting the control constants PI constants and using the speed regulator PI controller This control enables the speed control with higher accuracy and quicker response than the vector control without speed sensor A recommended motor for this control is a Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control Since slip compensation dynamic torque vector control and vector control without with speed sensor use motor parameters the following conditions should be satisfied otherwise full control performance may not be obtained A single motor should be controlled per inverter e Motor parameters P02 P03 P06 to P23 P55 and P56 are properly configured
383. ignal wire comes into direct contact with a live conductor of the main circuit the insulation of the sheath might break down which would expose the signal wire to a high voltage of the main circuit Make sure that the control signal wires will not come into contact with live conductors of the main circuit Doing so could cause an accident or an electric shock A WARNING A Before changing the switches or touching the control circuit terminal symbol plate turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below or at least ten minutes for inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 425 VDC or below Otherwise an electric shock could occur ANCAUTION The inverter motor and wiring generate electric noise Be careful about malfunction of the nearby sensors and devices To prevent them from malfunctioning implement noise control measures Otherwise an accident could occur The leakage current of the EMC filter built in type of inverters is comparatively large Be sure to perform protective grounding Otherwise an electric shock could occur Operation ANWARNING Besure to mount the front cover before turning the power ON Do not
384. igned to one of the digital input terminals switches between frequency command 1 F01 and frequency command 2 C30 Q For details about Hz2 Hz1 refer to E01 to E07 data 11 Terminal command HzZ Hz1 Frequency command source OFF Follow F01 Frequency command 1 ON Follow C30 Frequency command 2 Operation Method F02 selects the source that specifies a run command Data for F02 Run Command Description Keypad Enables the keys to run and stop the motor 0 Rotational direction specified by The rotational direction of the motor is specified by terminal terminal command command FWD or REV 1 External signals Enables terminal command FWD or REV to run the motor Digital input terminal commands Keypad Enables keys to run and stop the motor Note that 2 Forward rotation this run command enables only the forward rotation There is no need to specify the rotational direction Keypad Enables keys to run and stop the motor Note that 3 Reverse rotation this run command enables only the reverse rotation There is no need to specify the rotational direction Cote When function code F02 0 or 1 the Run forward FWD and Run reverse REV terminal commands must MM be assigned to terminals FWD and REV respectively When the FWD or REV is ON the F02 data cannot be changed When changing terminal command assignments to terminals FWD and REV from commands other than
385. igure the input range for analog input voltage Data for C35 and C45 Specifications for terminal inputs 0 10 to 10 V 1 0 to 10 V A minus component of the input will be regarded as 0 VDC 5 94 G deyo S3QdO02 NOILONNA W Gain Reference frequency C32 C37 C42 i Analog input 0 Gain base point 100 C34 C39 C44 To input bipolar analog voltage 0 to 10 VDC to terminals 12 and V2 set C35 and C45 data to 0 Setting C35 and C45 data to 1 enables the voltage range from 0 to 10 VDC and interprets the negative polarity input from 0 to 10 VDC as 0 V Note C50 Bias Frequency command 1 Bias base point Refer to F01 C51 C52 Bias PID command 1 Bias value and Bias base point These function codes and the gain related function codes specify the gain and bias of the analog PID command 1 enabling it to define arbitrary relationship between the analog input and PID commands The actual setting is the same as that of F18 For details refer to F18 given in the description of F01 Note Gain related function codes C32 C34 C37 C39 C42 and C44 are shared by frequency commands W Bias value C51 Data setting range 100 00 to 100 00 96 W Bias base point C52 Data setting range 0 00 to 100 00 96 C53 Selection of Normal Inverse Operation Frequency command 1 Refer to E01 to E07 5 2 4 P codes Motor 1 Parameters The FRENIC MEGA drives the motor under V f control dynamic torque v
386. inal 12 Extended Function 0 None N Y 0 Y Y pM qux Y 5 90 E62 Terminal C1 Extended Function 1 Auxiliary frequency command 1 N Y o jv lvliviv v E63 Terminal V2 Extended Function 2 Auxiliary frequency command 2 N Y 0 Yo A E Y Y 3 PID command 1 5 PID feedback amount 6 Ratio setting 7 Analog torque limit value A 8 Analog torque limit value B 10 Torque command 11 Torque current command 20 Analog input monitor E64 Saving of Digital Reference 0 Automatic saving when main power is turned OFF Y Y 1 Y Y Yj Y Y Frequency 1 Saving by pressing key E65 Reference Loss Detection 0 Decelerate to stop 20 to 120 999 Disable Y Y 99 Y Y Y Y Y E78 Torque Detection 1 Level 096 to 300 Y Y 100 Y Y Y Y Y 5 91 E79 Timer 0 01 to 600 00 s Y Y 1000 Y Y Y Y Y E80 Torque Detection 2 0 to 300 Y Y 20 Y Y vY Y Y Low Torque Detection Level E81 Timer 0 01 to 600 00 s Y Y 2000 Y Y Y Y Y The shaded function codes 9 are applicable to the quick setup 1 The factory default differs depending upon the shipping destination See Table A 4 The motor rated current is automatically set See Table C function code P03 5 7 Code E98 E99 Name Terminal FWD Function Terminal REV Function Default setting c o o r 3 Data setting range 2e 8 e ST g a a Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to terminals FWD and REV as listed below
387. inal and set the gain to 200 so that 5 V corresponds to 100 Ad09 NOILONNA The following E40 and E41 settings allow you to monitor or specify the values of the PID process command and its feedback on the keypad as pressure PID display coefficient A E40 30 0 that determines the display value at 100 of PID process command or its feedback PID display coefficient B E41 7 5 that determines the display value at 0 of PID process command or its feedback To control the pressure at 16 kPa on the keypad set the value to 16 0 Value displayed A PID display coefficient A 4 E40 30 0 16 0 prae r kPa i i PID process command 20 100 PID feedback 1V 313V 5V PID display coefficient B E41 7 5 5 84 W Display coefficients for PID dancer position command and its feedback J01 3 Under the PID dancer control the PID command and its feedback operate within the range 100 so specify the value at 100 of the PID command or its feedback as coefficient A with E40 and the value at 100 as coefficient B with E41 Value displayed PID display coefficient A za b a Ga oe a aR PID display coefficient B i i PID dancer position 100 0 100 command PID feedback If the sensor output is unipolar the PID dancer control operates within the range from 0 to 100 so virtually specify the value at 100 as coefficient B Tha
388. inals Description Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals Refer to Bi Displaying control I O signal terminals on the next page for details I O signals on the control circuit terminals under communications control Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals that received a command via RS 485 and optional communications Refer to Bi Displaying control T O signal terminals and Bi Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control on the following pages for details Input voltage on terminal 12 Shows the input voltage on terminal 12 in volts V Input current on terminal C1 Shows the input current on terminal C1 in milliamperes mA Output voltage on terminal FM1 Shows the output voltage on terminal FM1 in volts V Output voltage on terminal FM2 Shows the output voltage on terminal FM2 in volts V Input voltage on terminal V2 Shows the input voltage on terminal V2 in volts V Output current on terminal FM1 Shows the output current on terminal FM1 in milliamperes mA Output current on terminal FM2 Shows the output current on terminal FM2 in milliamperes mA Option control circuit terminal I O Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals on the digital input and output interface cards options Refer to BE Displaying control I O signal terminals on options on page 3 14 for det
389. information for the last 4 alarms is saved as an alarm history 4 Each time the J or key is pressed the last 4 alarms are displayed beginning with the most recent one in the order of 2 3 LI Z I and 7 5 Press the amp key with an alarm code being displayed The item number e g 5 7 and the inverter status information e g Output frequency at the time of the alarm occurrence alternately appear at approx 1 second intervals Pressing the and keys displays other item numbers e g 5_ and the status information e g Output current for that alarm code 6 Press the key to return to the list of alarm codes Press the G9 key again to return to the menu 3 18 Table 3 16 Display Items in Alarm Information LED monitor shows Description 5 UU Output frequency Output frequency before slip compensation 5L 1 Output current Output current 5 Uc Output voltage Output voltage E o 5 3 Calculated torque Calculated motor output torque z 5 UH Reference frequency Frequency specified by frequency command Ed w ES Rotational direction Shows the rotational direction currently specified forward m reverse 7 7 7 7 stop Running status as four hexadecimal digits 5 Lih Running status Refer to B Displaying running status 7 7 7 and running status 2 3 23 in Section 3 4 4 Shows the content of the cumulative power ON time counter of the inverter Counter range 0 to 65 535
390. ing are compliant with the Low Voltage Directive 9 5 2 Points for consideration when using the FRENIC MEGA series in a system to be certified by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU If you want to use the FRENIC MEGA series of inverters in systems equipment in the EU refer to the guidelines on pages v to viii 9 4 9 6 Compliance with EN954 1 Category 3 9 6 1 General In FRENIC MEGA series of inverters opening the hardware circuit between terminals EN and PLC stops the output transistor coasting the motor to a stop EN Enable input This is the safety stop function prescribed in EN60204 1 Category 0 Uncontrolled stop and compliant with EN954 1 Category 3 Note Depending on applications additional measures may be necessary for end user to apply such as brake function to prevent movement and motor terminal protection against possible electrical hazard s Use of terminals EN and PLC eliminates the need of external safety circuit breakers while conventional inverters need those breakers to configure the EN954 1 Category 3 compliant safety system Conventional Inverter Safety circuit breakers complying FRENIC MEGA with EN954 1 Category 3 Power supply Safety switch complying with EN954 1 Category 3 Enable input Safety switch complying S Enable input with EN954 1 Category 3 9 6 2 EN954 1 European Standard EN954 1 Safety of machinery Safety related parts of control sy
391. ing conditions are met F38 0 Use detected speed as a decision criteria F38 1 Use reference speed as a decision criteria Run command OFF or Reference frequency Stop frequency F25 LOCK Servo lock command ON Assignment of LOCK Function code data 47 The detected speed is less than stop frequency F25 The reference speed is less than stop frequency F25 5 131 Operation examples Detected speed F38 0 Reference speed F38 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Je FWD REV Lock OFF f v eI vc be BONG oe te oS aca mae OFF Control status Not defined Servo lock Speed control Not defined Gate OFF OFF Typical Control Sequence of Servo lock 4 AWARNING When the servo lock command is ON the inverter keeps on outputting voltage on output terminals U V and W even if a run command is OFF and the motor seems to stop An electric shock may occur Specifying servo lock control E Positioning completion signal PSET Function code data 82 Servo lock Completion timer J98 and Servo lock Completion range J99 This output signal comes ON when the inverter has been servo locked so that the motor is held within the positioning completion range specified by J99 for the period specified by J98 B Servo lock Gain J97 J97 specifies the gain of the servo lock positioning device to adjust the stop behavior and shaft holding torque J97 Sma
392. ing destination See Table C y codes 9 These function codes are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 5 D i l 2 E Deru Drive control Refer Code Name Data setting range ec 8 setting to Su S Vit PG w o w Torque page amp A Vit PG PG control o r09 DC Braking 4 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Y Y 0 0 YiY Y v N Braking starting frequency r10 Braking level 0 to 100 HD mode 0 to 80 MD LD mode Y Y 0 FEY Y N r11 Braking time 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 30 00 s Y Y 000 Y Y Y Y N r12 Starting Frequency 4 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Y Y 0 5 YiY Y v N r13 Load Selection 0 Variable torque load N Y 1 YIYI NIY N AU rqe ao 5 qnd 1 Constant torque load Mio Energy saving S paragon 2 Auto torque boost 3 Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC 4 Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC 5 Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during ACC DEC r14 Drive Control Selection 4 0 V f control with slip compensation inactive N Y 0 YTN Y v Y 1 Dynamic torque vector control 2 V f control with slip compensation active 3 V f control with speed sensor 4 Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor 5 Vector control without
393. ing time F24 Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 s F24 specifies the holding time for the starting frequency 1 W Stop frequency F25 Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 Hz F25 specifies the stop frequency at the stop of the inverter Under V f control even if the stop frequency is set at 0 0 Hz the inverter stops at 0 1 Hz W Stop frequency Holding time F39 Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 s F39 specifies the holding time for the stop frequency If the starting frequency is lower than the stop frequency the inverter will not output any power as long as the Note reference frequency does not exceed the stop frequency Under vector control without with speed sensor At the startup the inverter first starts at the 0 speed and accelerates to the starting frequency according to the specified acceleration time After holding the starting frequency for the specified period the inverter again accelerates to the reference speed according to the specified acceleration time The inverter stops its output when the detected speed or reference one specified by F38 reaches the stop frequency specified by F25 In addition F24 specifies the holding time for the starting frequency 1 in order to compensate for the delay time for the establishment of a magnetic flux in the motor F39 specifies the holding time for the stop frequency in order to stabilize the motor speed at the stop of the inverter Based on acceleration time
394. inverter is in a stopped state activates the DC braking This feature allows the motor to be excited before starting resulting in smoother acceleration quicker build up of acceleration torque under V f control When vector control without with speed sensor is selected use the pre exciting feature for establishing the magnetic flux LQ For details refer to H84 In general DC braking is used to prevent the motor from running by inertia during the stopping process Under vector control with speed sensor however zero speed control will be more effective for applications where load is applied to the motor even in a stopped state If the zero speed control continues for a long time the motor may slightly rotate due to a control error To fix the motor shaft use the servo lock function H For details refer to J97 ete In general specify data of function code F20 at a value close to the rated slip frequency of motor If you set it at an extremely high value control may become unstable and an overvoltage alarm may result in some cases ANWARNING Even if the motor is stopped by DC braking voltage is output to inverter output terminals U V and W An electric shock may occur ANCAUTION The DC brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism Injuries could occur 5 50 G deyo S3dO9 NOILONNA F23 to F25 Starting Frequency 1 Starting Frequency 1 Holding time Stop F
395. ion time 20 to 160 s Deceleration time After the motor decelerates to a stop in above tuning continues with the motor stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 20 to 30 s If the terminal signal FWD or REV is selected as a run command F02 1 appears upon completion of the measurements Turning the run command OFF completes the tuning If the run command has been given through the keypad or the communications link it automatically turns OFF upon completion of the measurements which completes the tuning Z e z zZ z 0 T m O 4 O A Upon completion of the tuning the subsequent function code P06 appears on the keypad Approx 5096 of the base frequency o 9 Acc e pec CO acc 19 AD 9 4 DEC Tuning operation hunting may occur during tuning due to machinery related conditions causing a tuning error or a speed Note The default value of the speed regulator is set low to prevent your system from oscillation hunting However mismatch error If a tuning error 7 occurs reduce the gain for the speed regulator if a speed mismatch error occurs cancel the speed mismatch detection function d23 0 After that perform tuning again E If tuning while the motor is rotating cannot be selected Ifthe tuning while the motor is rotating under vector control P04 3 cannot be selected due to restrictions on the machinery perform the tuning with the moto
396. irable oscillation of the system Moreover mechanical resonance or vibration sound on the machine or motor could occur due to excessively amplified noises If it happens decreasing P gain will reduce the amplitude of the resonance vibration A too small P gain results in a slow inverter response and a speed fluctuation in low frequency which may prolong the time required for stabilizing the motor speed Integral time Specifying a shorter integral time shortens the time needed to compensate the speed deviation resulting in quick response in speed Specify a short integral time if quick arrival to the target speed is necessary and a slight overshooting in the control is allowed specify a long time if any overshooting is not allowed and taking longer time is allowed If a mechanical resonance occurs and the motor or gears sound abnormally setting a longer integral time can transfer the resonance point to the low frequency zone and suppress the resonance in the high frequency zone W Output Filter d06 Data setting range 0 000 to 0 100 s d06 specifies the time constant for the first order delay of the speed controller output filter Use this function code when setting of the P gain and or integral time cannot control mechanical resonance such as hunting or vibration Generally setting a larger value to this time constant decreases the amplitude of resonance however a too long time constant may make the system unstable 5 133 d07 Speed Co
397. is inputted the pre excitation ends and acceleration starts Use an external sequence to control the time for establishing magnetic flux A Motor speed Magnetic flux Pre excitation gt EXITE FWD ON gt Note I V f control including auto torque boost and torque vector pre excitation is disabled Use the DC braking or the starting frequency instead Hodes Note A transient phenomenon which may occur when the amount of mechanical loss is small may rotate the motor during pre excitation If a motor rotation during pre excitation is not allowed in your system install a mechanical brake or other mechanism to stop the motor ANWARNING Even if the motor is stopped by pre excitation voltage is output to inverter s output terminals U V and W An electric shock may occur H86 to H90 Reserved for particular manufacturers H86 to H90 are reserved for particular manufacturers Do not modify the settings 5 114 H91 H92 H94 H95 H96 H97 H98 PID Feedback Wire Break Detection Using the terminal C1 current input for PID feedback signal enables wire break detection and alarm 9 issuance H91 specifies whether the wire break detection is enabled or the duration of detection The inverter judges an input current to the terminal C1 below 2 mA as a wire break Data setting range 0 0 Disable alarm detection Eh 0 1 to 60 0 s Detect wire break and issue al
398. is insufficient since the inverter undergoes frequent start stop or heavy inertial load mount an optional external DC braking resistor DBR with a larger capacity to increase the braking capability using the following steps Before mounting the external DBR remove the built in DBR 1 For inverters with a capacity of 0 4 to 3 7 kW disconnect the wiring of the built in DBR from terminals P and DB for inverters with a capacity of 5 5 and 7 5 kW disconnect the wiring from terminal DB and the internal relay terminal see the figure below Insulate the terminals of the disconnected wires with insulating tape or other materials Terminal DB Relay terminal Wires from the built in DC braking resistor DBR z deyo S23LH3ANI JHL NIXIM ANY ONILNNOW 2 Connect an optional DBR to terminals P and DB The internal relay terminal on inverters with a capacity of 5 5 and 7 5 kW is left unused 3 Arrange the DBR and inverter so that the wiring length comes to 5 m or less and twist the two DBR wires or route them together in parallel ANWARNING When connecting a DC braking resistor DBR never connect it to terminals other than terminals P and DB Otherwise a fire could occur DC link bus terminals P and N Capacity Braking Built in DC braking kW resistor DBR Optional devices Devices and terminals Braking unit Inverter Braking unit P and N 30 to 630 N
399. is invoked Decelerate to stop control regenerates kinetic energy from the load s moment of inertia slowing down the motor and continuing the deceleration operation After decelerate to stop operation an undervoltage alarm is issued Continue to run for heavy inertia or general loads Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general loads Restart at the starting frequency As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter shuts down the output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state Even if the F14 data is set to 3 the Continue to run function is disabled If a run command has been input restoring power restarts the inverter at the motor speed detected by the speed sensor 5 44 A WARNING If you enable the Restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 3 4 or 5 the inverter automatically restarts the motor running when the power is recovered Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting Otherwise an accident could occur W Restart mode after momentary power failure Basic operation with auto search disabled The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure upon detecting the condition that DC link bus voltage goes below the undervoltage detection level while the inverter is running If the load of the motor is l
400. is selected the inverter saves the output frequency being applied when the undervoltage alarm occurred and restarts at the saved frequency after a recovery from the momentary power failure Note When the input power voltage for the inverter is high setting the continuous running level high makes the control more stable even if the load s inertia is relatively small Raising the continuous running level too high however might cause the continuous running control activated even during normal operation When the input power voltage for the inverter is extremely low continuous running control might be activated even during normal operation at the beginning of acceleration or at an abrupt change in load To avoid this lower the continuous running level Lowering it too low however might cause undervoltage that results from voltage drop due to a control delay Before you change the continuous running level make sure that the continuous running control will be performed properly by considering the fluctuations of the load and the input voltage 5 48 G deyo S3dO9 NOILONNA F15 F16 Frequency Limiter High Frequency Limiter Low H63 Low Limiter Mode selection W Frequency Limiter High and Low F15 F16 Data setting range 0 0 to 500 0 Hz F15 and F16 specify the upper and lower limits of the output frequency or reference frequency respectively The object to which the limit is applied differs depending on the control sy
401. is speed control sequence is exclusive to jogging operations specify these function codes to obtain higher speed response than that of normal operations for smooth jogging operations For details refer to the corresponding descriptions d01 to d04 and d06 about the speed control sequence for normal operations 5 134 d14 to d17 Feedback Input Pulse input format Encoder pulse resolution Pulse count factor 1 and Pulse count factor 2 These function codes specify the speed feedback input under vector control with speed sensor W Feedback Input Pulse input format d14 d14 specifies the speed feedback input format Data for d14 Pulse input mode Remarks Positive Negative polarity polarity Pulse train sign OFF ON Pulse train ipu _ oe Positive gt Negative i polarity polarity Forward rotation pulse Reverse rotation pulse m cede 1 Reverse rotation pulse Forward rotation pulse i Pulse train sign Pulse train input Set the d14 data to 2 for Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector control Run d Run forward gt _ reverse ignal i ignal A and B phases with 90 degree Saa i RUE phase difference A phasenput Is ope p B phase input l l 90 degree B phase advanced B phase delayed W Feedback Input Encoder pulse resolution d15 Data setting range 0014 to EA60 in hex d15 specifies the pulse resolution P R of the speed feedback en
402. it Xii Table of Contents lucc E i B Safety precautions cernes eee e eee eet i Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER 1 1 1 1 Acceptance Inspection 1 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks 2 1 3 Precautions for Using Inverters 3 1 3 1 Precautions in introducing inverters 3 1 3 2 Precautions in running inverters 7 1 3 3 Precautions in using special motors 1 8 Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING THE INVERTER dpud 2 1 Operating Environment 2 2 Installing the Inverter 2 3 WE atit tecti ttr haee ite 2 3 Removing and mounting the front cover and the wiring guide sese tree rtt eren 2 3 2 3 2 Screw specifications and recommended wire SIZES S decere te dre re e ide es 2 4 2 3 3 Wiring precautions 2 7 2 3 4 Wiring of main circuit terminals and grounding termmals cte esame 2 9 2 3 5 Wiring for control circuit terminals 2 3 6 Setting up the slide switches RA LM 2 4 Mounting and Connecting a Keypad Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD in the case of remote keypad 3 1 3 1 LED Monitor Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypdd eiie eee peer reete ene RN 3 1 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes 3 3 33 Running Mode 3 3 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status 3 3 2 Monitoring light alarms 3 4 Programming Mode 3 4 1 Setting up basic function codes qu
403. it off with a chemically neutral cloth 7 3 List of Periodic Replacement Parts Each part of the inverter has its own service life that will vary according to the environmental and operating conditions It is recommended that the following parts be replaced at the specified intervals When the replacement is necessary consult your Fuji Electric representative Table 7 2 Replacement Parts Part name Standard replacement intervals See Note below DC link bus capacitor 10 years Electrolytic capacitors on printed circuit boards 10 years Cooling fans 10 years Fuse 10 years 90 kW or above Note These replacement intervals are based on the inverter s service life estimated at a surrounding temperature of 40 C at 100 HD mode inverters or 80 MD LD mode inverters of full load In environments with a surrounding temperature above 40 C or a large amount of dust or dirt the replacement intervals may be shorter Standard replacement intervals mentioned above are only a guide for replacement not a guaranteed service life 7 2 7 3 1 Judgment on service life The inverter has the life prediction function for some parts which measures the discharging time or counts the voltage applied time etc The function allows you to monitor the current lifetime state on the LED monitor and judge whether those parts are approaching the end of their service life The life prediction function can also issue early warning signals if t
404. itions in almost all cases If the actual operating conditions are the same as those at shipment shutting down the inverter power automatically measures the discharging time however if they are different no automatic measurement is performed To perform it put those conditions back to the factory default ones and shut down the inverter For the measuring procedure see 1 given on the next page To measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions when the power is turned OFF it is necessary to set up the load conditions for ordinary operation and measure the reference capacitance initial setting when the inverter is introduced For the reference capacitance setup procedure see 2 given on page 7 5 Performing the setup procedure automatically detects and saves the measuring conditions of the DC link bus capacitor Setting bit 3 of H98 data to 0 restores the inverter to the measurement in comparison with the initial capacitance measured at shipment Q If the multi function keypad is mounted the inverter does not measure the discharging time automatically since the inverter s conditions are different from the ones applied at shipment It is therefore necessary to perform the setup procedure mentioned in G above to enable the measurement under ordinary operating conditions To make an accurate judgment on the service life of the DC ink bus capacitor accurate measurement of the capacitance select
405. itor Specifying the speed monitor with E43 provides a choice of speed monitoring formats selectable with E48 LED Monitor ee LED indicator PUBCHOR Monitor item the LED E on DI off Unit Meaning of displayed value code data for E43 monitor Speed monitor Function code E48 specifies what to be displayed on the LED monitor and LED 0 p indicators Output frequency 1 before slip SALLI WHzDALDKW Hz Frequency actually being output E48 0 compensation Output frequency 2 Pears Q after slip DL MHz OA OkW Hz Frequency actually being output E48 1 E compensation 2 Reference frequency 5 7 77 Hz OA OkW Hz Reference frequency being set E48 2 Eaa 120 Motor speed ILL MHz A OkwW r min Output frequency Hz x Bal E48 3 S O TND Seit DL MHz MA Okw r min Output frequency Hz x E50 E48 4 o Z Line speed JILI OHz WA MkW m min Output frequency Hz x E50 E48 5 2 Output frequency oO i o HF o x100 m Display speed mitt OHzOAOkW 96 Maximum frequency E48 7 M Output current ivy DHzMAALIKW A Current output from the inverter in RMS 3 g Output voltage CLL O08z OA OkW V Voltage output from the inverter in RMS 4 in 9 Calculated torque D OHz OA Okw Motor output torque in 8 Calculated value Input power i 5 OHz OA MkW kW Input power to the inverter 9 a PID command feedback amount NIW m PID command LLL
406. juries Prevent lint paper fibers sawdust dust metallic chips or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink When changing the positions ofthe top and bottom mounting bases use only the specified screws Otherwise a fire or an accident might result Do not install or operate an inverter that is damaged or lacking parts Doing so could cause fire an accident or injuries Wiring A WARNING Ifno zero phase current earth leakage current detective device such as a ground fault relay is installed in the upstream power supply line in order to avoid the entire power supply system s shutdown undesirable to factory operation install a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB individually to inverters to break the individual inverter power supply lines only Otherwise a fire could occur When wiring the inverter to the power source insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the path of each pair of power lines to inverters Use the recommended devices within the recommended current capacity Use wires in the specified size Tighten terminals with specified torque Otherwise a fire could occur When there is more than one combination of an inverter and motor do not use a mul
407. k Function Mode selection Frequency command Run command Y Y 0 Y vY Y v Y 5 105 0 Follow H30 data Follow H30 data 5 149 1 Via fieldbus option Follow H30 data 2 Follow H30 data Via fieldbus option 3 Via fieldbus option Via fieldbus option y99 Loader Link Function Frequency command Run command Y N 0 Y p XY Y Y 5 149 Mode selection o Follow H30 and y98 data Follow H30 and y98 data 1 Via RS 485 link Follow H30 and y98 data FRENIC Loader 2 Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS 485 link FRENIC Loader 3 Via RS 485 link Via RS 485 link FRENIC Loader FRENIC Loader 5 24 G deyo S3QO02 NOILONNA F codes E codes C codes P codes H codes A codes b codes r codes J codes d codes U codes y codes Table A Factory Default According to Shipping Destination Shipping destination Asia EU Function code Name FRN GIB2A FRN GIB 4A FRN GIB 4E 200 V class series 400 V class series 400 V class series F03 A01 b01 r01 Maximum frequency E31 E36 E54 Frequency detection Level o9 HE 30 0 Hz 30 0 Hz F05 A03 b03 r03 Rated voltage at base frequency F06 A04 b04 r04 Maximum output voltage ZEN 415V 400 V Note A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure Table B Factory Defaults Depending upon Inverter Capacity Inverter Torque boost 1 to 4 Auto restart after Inverter
408. k may occur 2 4 Figure A Figure B Figure C dt Charging lamp cH i iX Charging lamp 13 5 13 5 13 5 12 12 12 i Charging lamp e 5 ee ojo JHA RO TO Pt Pe nol u v w ee 16 16 16 66 12 12 e eee ACA e os 9 Terminal block width 6 6 ec Ris pe PA JPEN U E V JW J 6 eec 05m5mee9 es DB eG LR Las Lat Terminal block width to 0 2 RO TO 6 6 ss fle Others 9 5 ec 12 e Grounding terminal for input line provided es only on the EMC filter built in type Figure D Figure E Figure F Figure G iW Charging lam
409. kW or above require a DC reactor DCR to be connected Be sure to connect a separately ordered DCR to those inverters 2 The inverter has not been damaged during transportation there should be no dents or parts missing 3 The inverter is the type you ordered You can check the type and specifications on the main nameplate Main and sub nameplates are attached to the inverter and are located as shown on the next page For inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above the mass is printed on the main nameplate TYPE FRN110G1S 4A High Duty T Medium Duty I Low Duty Fo TYPE FRNS EGIS ZA fe SOURCE 3PH 380 440V 50Hz 380 480V 60Hz LL T Hi Duty Tow Dut 201 238A 238A SOURCE 3PH 200 240V 50 60Hz OUTPUT 3PH 380 480V TYPE FRN110G1S 4A 31 5A 42 7A 0 1 500Hz 0 1 120Hz 0 1 120Hz SERNo 81A123A0001Z OUTPUT 3PH 200 240V 0 1 500Hz 0 1 120Hz 160kVA 210A 192kVA 253A 192kVA 253A OKVA 27A 150 Imin KVA 31 84 120 Imin 150 1min 150 1min 120 1min SERNo 6X1234S0006Z SCCR 100A 639 SERNo 81A123A0001Z 801 SCCR 100kA Fuji Electric Systems Made in Japan C l MASS 64kg e D us LISTED E a 130002 7B98 IND CONT EQ Fuji Electric Systems Made in Japan a Main Nameplate b Sub Nameplate Figure 1 1 Nameplates TYPE Type of inverter FRN 5 5 G1S 2A Code Series name ne Code Shipping destination Instruction manual language FRN FRENIC series A Asia English Code Nominal applied motor E EU English 0 4 0 4 k
410. l for port 1 For FRENIC Loader via the RS 485 communications link only y10 can be used for protocol selection Set the y10 data at 1 Data for y10 Protocol Modbus RTU protocol FRENIC Loader protocol Fuji general purpose inverter protocol W Protocol selection y20 for port 2 y20 specifies the communications protocol for port 2 Data for y20 Protocol 0 Modbus RTU protocol 2 Fuji general purpose inverter protocol y97 Communication Data Storage Selection A nonvolatile storage in the inverter has a limited number of rewritable times 100 000 to 1 000 000 times Saving data into the storage so many times unnecessarily will no longer allow the storage to save data causing memory errors For frequent data writing via the communications link therefore a temporary storage is provided instead of the nonvolatile storage To use the temporary storage set the y97 data at 1 Using the temporary storage reduces the number of data writing times into the nonvolatile storage preventing memory errors Setting the y97 data at 2 saves all data written in the temporary storage into the nonvolatile one Changing the y97 data requires simultaneous keying of and WN QO keys Data for y97 Function Save into nonvolatile storage Rewritable times limited Write into temporary storage Rewritable times unlimited Save all data from temporary storage to nonvolatile one After saving data the data automatically ret
411. large amount of ripples tends to cause a current limiting alarm When the carrier frequency is set to 1 kHz or below therefore reduce the load so that the inverter output current comes to be 80 or less of the rated current Note When a high carrier frequency is specified the temperature of the inverter may rise due to a surrounding temperature rise or an increase of the load If it happens the inverter automatically decreases the carrier frequency to prevent the inverter overload alarm With consideration for motor noise the automatic reduction of carrier frequency can be disabled Refer to the description of H98 It is recommended to set the carrier frequency at 5 kHz or above under vector control without with speed sensor DO NOT set it at 1 KHz or below W Motor Sound Tone F27 F27 changes the motor running sound tone only for motors under V f control This setting is effective when the carrier frequency specified by function code F26 is 7 kHz or lower Changing the tone level may reduce the high and harsh running noise from the motor If the tone level is set too high the output current may become unstable or mechanical vibration and noise Note may increase Also this function code may not be very effective for certain types of motor Data for F27 Function 0 Disable Tone level 0 1 Enable Tone level 1 2 Enable Tone level 2 3 Enable Tone level 3 5 53 F29 F32 F35
412. larm state Entering alarm state The inverter issues the alarm 7 and coasts to stop the motor Continuing operation The inverter does not enter the alarm mode and continues operation of the motor Note that however the inverter turns ON the OH and LIFE signals on the transistor output terminals whenever the DC fan lock is detected regardless of your selection Cote If the ON OFF control of the cooling fan is enabled H06 1 the cooling fan may stop depending on operating condition of the inverter In this case the DC fan lock detection feature is considered normal e g the cooling fan is normally stopped by the stop fan command so that the inverter may turn OFF the LIFE or OH signal output or enable to cancel the alarm 7 even if the internal air circulation DC fan is locked due to a failure etc When you start the inverter in this state it automatically issues the run fan command then the inverter detects the DC fan lock state and turn ON the LIFE or OH output or enters the alarm 77 state Note that operating the inverter under the condition that the DC fan is locked for long time may shorten the life of electrolytic capacitors on the PCBs due to local high temperature inside the inverter Be sure to check with the LIFE signal etc and replace the broken fan as soon as possible I I Braking transistor error detection Bit 6 9 7 22 kW or below Upon detection of a built in braking transistor error this
413. le to set H13 to a certain level so that the restart will take place only after the residual voltage has dropped to a low level Note that even when power is restored restart will not take place until the restart time H13 has elapsed Power Failure Recovery DC Link Bus Voltage ea acres Undervoltage Level Ready to Run State of the Inverter Runni Operation 1 unning Run Command ON ON ct H13 State of the Inverter Start Runnin Operation 2 Gate Signal ON Gate turned OFF Gata tamed ON Restart Factory default By factory default H13 is set to the value suitable for the standard motor see Table B in Section 5 1 Function Code Tables Basically it is not necessary to change H13 data However if the long restart time causes the flow rate of the pump to overly decrease or causes any other problem you might as well reduce the setting to about a half of the default value In such a case make sure that no alarm occurs Function code H13 Restart mode after momentary power failure Restart time also applies to the switching Nog operation between line and inverter refer to the descriptions of E01 through E07 5 47 W Restart mode after momentary power failure Frequency fall rate H14 During restart after a momentary power failure if the inverter output frequency and the idling motor speed cannot be harmonized with each other an overcurrent will flow activating the overcurrent limiter If it happ
414. left hand side and the output grounding wire to that on the main circuit terminal block Refer to Figure 9 1 Pem ai Output grounding g o T Input grounding Input wires gt i Output wires Figure 9 1 Wiring for EMC Filter Built in Type Inverters with a Capacity of 5 5 to 11 kW 2 For connection to inverter s control terminals and for connection of the RS 485 communication signal cable use shielded wires As with the motor clamp the shields firmly to a grounded panel 3 If noise from the inverter exceeds the permissible level enclose the inverter and its peripherals within a metal panel as shown in Figure 9 2 Note Connect the shielding layer of shielded cable to the motor and panel electrically and ground the Metal panel MCCB or motor and panel Power RCD ELCB FRENIC MEGA supply Three phase Shielded cable with overcurrent protection Figure 9 2 Mounting the Inverter in a Metal Panel B In case an EMC compliant filter optional is externally used 1 Mount the inverter and the filter on a grounded panel or metal plate Use shielded wires for the motor cable and route the cable as short as possible Firmly clamp the shields to the metal plate to ground them Further connect the shielding layers electrically to t
415. life or even a failure of this product as well as the motor This instruction manual has been prepared for the inverter versions to be destined for Asia FRN __ _ G1 M 2A 4A and EU FRN GINB 4E The major differences from other inverter versions are factory defaults Have this manual delivered to the end user of this product Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded Listed below are the other materials related to the use of the FRENIC MEGA Read them in conjunction with this manual as necessary FRENIC MEGA User s Manual RS 485 Communication User s Manual These materials are subject to change without notice Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use E Safety precautions Read this manual thoroughly before proceeding with installation connections wiring operation or maintenance and inspection Ensure you have sound knowledge of the device and familiarize yourself with all safety information and precautions before proceeding to operate the inverter Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual A W ARN N G Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to dangerous conditions possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries AC AUTI O N Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to dangerous conditions possibly resulting in minor or light bodily injuries and or substantial property damage
416. links the KEYPAD CONTROL LED and outputs the light alarm signal L ALM to a digital output terminal to alert the peripheral equipment to the occurrence of a light alarm To use the L ALM it is necessary to assign the signal to any of the digital output terminals by setting any of function codes E20 through E24 and E27 to 98 Select the desired items to be regarded as a light alarm from the following table Name Description Heat sink overheat Heat sink temperature increased to the trip level External alarm An error that has occurred in peripheral equipment turned the external alarm signal THR ON Inverter internal overheat The temperature inside the inverter abnormally has increased Braking resistor overheat Estimated temperature of the coil in the braking resistor exceeded the allowable level Overload of motor 1 through 4 Motor temperature calculated with the inverter output current reached the trip level G deyo Option communications error Communications error between the inverter and an option Option error An option judged that an error occurred Pi n n J Pn QO RS 485 communications error COM port 1 RS 485 communications error COM port 2 RS 485 communications error between the COM ports 1 and 2 Speed mismatch or excessive speed deviation S3GdO9 NOILONNA The deviation of the automatic speed regulator between the reference speed an
417. ll lt gt Large Stop behavior Response slow but smooth lt gt Response quick but hunting large Shaft holding torque Small lt gt Large Monitor for servo lock control Monitor item LED monitor Function code Remarks Operation monitor 7 Z Current position pulse i ee Only when the positioning device is Current position The upper and lower digits Upper digit Z90 in operation positioning control is appear alternately Lower digit Z91 active the LED monitor displays Operation monitor 7 777 Positioning error pulse these data When it is not in Positioning error The upper and lower digits Upper digit Z94 operation the monitor is appear alternately Lower digit Z95 zero cleared The values on the LED monitor appear based on PG pulses 4 multiplied Under servo lock no current positioning pulses or positioning error pulses are displayed on the LED monitor Notes for using servo lock 1 Positioning control error 7 If a positioning error exceeds the value equivalent to four rotations of the motor shaft when the inverter is servo locked the inverter issues a positioning control error signal 4 7 2 Stop frequency F25 under servo lock Since servo lock starts when the output frequency is below the stop frequency F25 it is necessary to specify such F25 data that does not trigger 72 that is specify the value equivalent to less than 4 rotations of the motor shaft Stop frequency F2
418. low decrease the integral time W Cancel constant peripheral speed control Hz LSC Function code E01 to E07 data 70 Turning ON HZzLSC cancels the constant peripheral speed control This disables the frequency compensation of PI operation resulting in no compensation for a take up roll getting bigger and an increase in the winding speed Use this signal to temporarily interrupt the control for repairing a thread break for example HzLSC Function OFF Enable constant peripheral speed control depending on d41 setting Cancel constant peripheral speed control V f control without compensation for a take up roll en getting bigger 5 138 W Hold the constant peripheral speed control frequency in the memory LSC HLD Function code E01 to E07 data 71 If this signal is ON under constant peripheral speed control stopping the inverter including an occurrence of an alarm and a coast to stop command or turning OFF Hz LSC saves the current frequency command compensating for a take up roll getting bigger in the memory At the time of restart the saved frequency command applies and the inverter keeps the peripheral speed constant LSC HLD Function OFF Disable no saving operation ON Enable Saving the frequency command compensating for a take up roll getting bigger Shutting down the inverter power during an operation stop loses the frequency compensation data saved in the Note
419. ls refer to Chapter 9 Section 9 6 Compliance with EN954 1 Category 3 When not using the Enable input function keep the terminals between EN and PLC short circuited with the jumper wire factory default 2 11 QD Primary grounding terminal G for inverter enclosure Two grounding terminals G are not exclusive to the power supply wiring primary circuit or motor wiring secondary circuit Be sure to ground either of the two grounding terminals for safety and noise reduction The inverter is designed for use with safety grounding to avoid electric shock fire and other disasters The grounding terminal for inverter enclosure should be grounded as follows 1 Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code 2 Use a thick grounding wire with a large surface area and keep the wiring length as short as possible Note An EMC filter built in type of inverters with a capacity of 5 5 to 11 kW both 200 V and 400 V class series has three grounding terminals For effective noise suppression connect grounding wires to the specified grounding terminals Refer to Chapter 9 Section 9 3 2 Recommended installation procedure Inverter output terminals U V and W and secondary grounding terminals G for motor Inverter s output terminals should be connected as follows 1 Connect the three wires of the 3 phase motor to terminals U V and W aligning the phases each other 2 Connect the secondary grounding wire
420. lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt x lt x lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 No function assigned Through output General purpose timer ANDing General purpose timer ORing General purpose timer XORing General purpose timer Set priority flip flop General purpose timer Reset priority flip flop General purpose timer Rising edge detector General purpose timer Failing edge detector General purpose timer Rising and failing edge detector General purpose timer Input hold General purpose timer Increment counter Decrement counter Timer with reset input 0 EOIN 5 No timer On delay timer Off delay timer Pulses Retriggerable timer Pulse train output 0 00 to 600 00 U06 U07 U08 U09 U10 Customizable Logic Step 2 Input 1 Input 2 Logic circuit Type of timer Timer See U01 01 See U02 02 See U03 See U04 lt lt See U05 U11 U12 U13 U14 U15 Customizable Logic Step 3 Input 1 Input 2 Logic circuit Type of timer See U01 01 See U02 02 See U03 See U04 lt lt See U05 U16 U17 U18 U19 U20 Customizable Logic Step 4 Input 1 Input 2 Logic circuit Type of timer Time
421. lt in any of these parts does not lead to the gt lead to the loss of the safety function loss of the safety function and a single fault is detected whenever reasonably practicable Requirements of Category 1 shall apply When faults occur the safety function is Safety related parts shall be designed so that a single fault still maintained is detected during or prior to the next demand on the safety function If this is not possible an accumulation of faults shall not lead to the loss of the safety function Q O Z TI O pa 4 lt 4 T o gt z S gt D 5 o 9 6 3 Notes 1 Wiring for terminal EN When using terminal EN be sure to remove the short circuit wire from terminals EN and PLC which has been connected at the shipment EN amp PLC terminals are safety related wire connections and therefore careful installation practices shall be applied to ensure no short circuit s can occur to these connections For opening and closing the hardware circuit between terminals EN and PLC use safety approved components such as safety switches and safety relays that comply with EN954 1 Category 3 or higher to ensure a complete shutoff Be sure to use shielded wires for connecting terminals EN and PLC and ground the shielding layer Do not connect mix any other control signal wire within the same shielded core It is the responsibility of the machinery manufacturer to guaran
422. ly the UL standards were established by Underwriters Laboratories Inc as private criteria for inspections investigations pertaining to fire accident insurance in the USA Later these standards were authorized as the official standards to protect operators service personnel and the general populace from fires and other accidents in the USA cUL certification means that UL has given certification for products to clear CSA Standards cUL certified products are equivalent to those compliant with CSA Standards 9 1 2 Considerations when using FRENIC MEGA in systems to be certified by UL and cUL If you want to use the FRENIC MEGA series of inverters as a part of UL Standards or CSA Standards cUL certified certified product refer to the related guidelines described on pages ix to xii 9 2 Compliance with European Standards The CE marking on Fuji products indicates that they comply with the essential requirements of the Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive 2004 108 EC and Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC which are issued by the Council of the European Communities The products comply with the following standards Basic type EMC filter built in type EN61800 3 2004 Immunity Second environment Industrial Emission Category C3 Depends upon a filter dedicated to EMC Directives Fuji inverters Low Voltage Directive EN61800 5 1 2003 Safety Standard EN954 1 Category 3 f connected with an exter
423. m jenoo ac al nee w w GO G9 gg CP vlo De w Yoreos ony vegnuew 10 99A t ol case a ol susie u ol SUA Y10983 101987 Trois T 10983 na vj Aguonboy x puo aun anno 700 faioedeo opour Te pnonied sopun uornednjes uorjednges uonedges uorenjes uonenjes dijs pordde Sung JO juouno Ponies uOHETLIES UOTE INOS onousey onousv onouSejA orjouse A onousv A SOL UOT PRA PROTON pori RUIWION TOO onbio onouseyy orjousvjA onouSe A A box lil replaces S or E depending on the enclosure Note 5 26 Table C Motor Parameters Continued P 0981 8601 L60 ITO S9 t 090 800t OvIII OIL 9 0Q 10 Q OIZ SOTI 8 L6 6c LTO 0II EvO 89t OTCOL OE9 660L01 0 0 9 T 9 98 19 oTo EOE 90 6116 09S 6679 0 0 09S 86 6cLL 08I 8r0 681 8v 0 TOST v II8 00s 66S 01 0700 Y69 0 9 69 Stel TOTI 601 6709 6CL 9 S8 LC vs ETO ccc Svo 6vL OSY 6 66v 00 0St SL 89 0 819 ed 89 6c0 99v 890 SLO0c COSI 00r 6 6ry 0007 9e 1680 8 8ve LL EYO oes LLO 69ET ET9S SSE 6 66E 1 0 SSE c98 0 698v I8 T Sr 9e 8L0 SHTI TEOS SIE 6PSEOO STE S S 685 0 8 ctv LC YSO 88L LTI IT L6 L ovV 08c 6 vIt 01008c 0s IL 0 98 SLEl CCC 6601 09 LTL 6
424. m frequency or the upper limit frequency whichever is lower During auto search if an overcurrent or overvoltage trip occurs the inverter restarts the suspended auto search Perform auto search at 60 Hz or below Note that auto search may not fully provide the expected designed performance depending on conditions including the load motor parameters power cable length and other externally determined events When the inverter is equipped with any of output circuit filters OFL LILILI 2 and 4 in the secondary lines it cannot perform auto search Use the filter OFL OOO DA instead W Restart mode after momentary power failure Allowable momentary power failure time H16 H16 specifies the maximum allowable duration 0 0 to 30 0 seconds from an occurrence of a momentary power failure undervoltage until the inverter is to be restarted Specify the coast to stop time which the machine system and facility can tolerate If the power is restored within the specified duration the inverter restarts in the restart mode specified by F14 If not the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut down so that the inverter does not apply the restart mode and starts normal running 5 46 G deyo S3dO9 NOILONNA Power Failure Recovery 1 DC Link Bus Voltage y a Undervoltage Level M Time Reserved for Restart About 0 3 to 0 6 s State of the Inverter Gate Signal ON Ready to Run Run Command Oper
425. m output signal ALM issued on inverter s programmable output terminals by the protective function or to keep the keypad alive even if the main power has shut down connect the auxiliary control power input terminals RO and TO to the power supply lines If a magnetic contactor MC is installed in the inverter s primary circuit connect the primary circuit of the MC to these terminals RO and TO Terminal rating 200 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Maximum current 1 0 A 200 V class series with 22 kW or below 200 to 230 VAC 50 60 Hz Maximum current 1 0 A 200 V class series with 30 kW or above 380 to 480 VAC 50 60 Hz Maximum current 0 5 A 400 V class series Note When introducing a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB connect its output secondary side to terminals RO and T0 Connecting its input primary side to those terminals causes the RCD ELCB to malfunction since the input power voltage to the inverter is three phase but the one to terminals RO and TO is single phase To avoid such problems be sure to insert an insulation transformer or auxiliary B contacts of a magnetic contactor in the location shown in Figure 2 8 Residual current operated protectice devide Earth leakage AC reactor circuit breaker Radio noise filter Magnetic Power supply Noise filter contactor Insulation transformer Power supply for inverter control Magnetic contactor Auxiliary B contacts Fig
426. mal states should be categorized as a light alarm using function codes H81 and H82 The light alarm codes are check marked in the Light alarm object column in Table 6 1 For how to check and release light alarms see Section 6 5 If the Light Alarm Indication 2 72 Appears on the LED Monitor Stall prevention When the output current exceeds the current limiter level F44 during acceleration deceleration or constant speed running this function decreases the output frequency to avoid an overcurrent trip Overload prevention control Before the inverter trips due to a heat sink overheat GH or inverter overload LiL LI this function decreases the output frequency to reduce the load Automatic deceleration Anti regenerative control If regenerative energy returned exceeds the inverter s braking capability this function automatically increases the deceleration time or controls the output frequency to avoid an overvoltage trip Deceleration characteristics Excessive regenerative energy proof braking capability During deceleration this function increases the motor energy loss and decreases the regenerative energy returned to avoid an overvoltage trip 7 Reference loss detection This function detects a reference frequency loss due to a broken wire etc continues the inverter operation at the specified frequency and issues the Command loss detected signal REF OFF Au
427. mand ON starts jogging In jogging with the key the inverter jogs only when the key is held down Releasing the key decelerates to stop Note TO start jogging operation by simultaneously entering the JOG terminal command and a run command e g FWD the input delay time between the two commands should be within 100 ms If a run command FWD is entered first the inverter does not jog the motor but runs it ordinarily until the next input of the JOG The jogging conditions should be specified beforehand using the following function codes Function code Data setting range Description C20 Jogging Frequency 0 00 to 500 00 Hz Reference frequency for jogging operation H54 Acceleration Time Jogging 0 00 to 6000 s Acceleration time for jogging operation H55 Deceleration Time Jogging 0 00 to 6000 s Deceleration time for jogging operation d09 Speed Control Jogging Speed command filter 0 090 t0 3 000 5 d10 Speed Control Jogging Speed detection filter 0 000 to 0 100 s Modification items related to speed control 1 for jogging operation under vector control dll Speed Control Jogging 0 1 to 200 0 times without with speed sensor P Gain d12 Speed Control Jogging I Integral time For adjustments refer to the descriptions of 0 001 to 9 999 s d01 to d06 d13 Speed Control Jogging Output filter 0 000 to 0 100 s c30 Frequency Command 2 Refer to F01 C31 to C35 Analog Input Adjustme
428. mercial Switch 9 Ogency 30 Stop INV itae ad i DEC HES cn OPX OPX Power 13 M2 nm supply MC3 MC2 Ti RUN OPX oX uci 113 CGT Rb Mc T2 BX Run command Driven by inverter Driven by commercial line Note 1 Emergency switch Manual switch provided for the event that the motor drive source cannot be switched normally to the commercial power due to a serious problem of the inverter Note 2 When any alarm has occurred inside the inverter the motor drive source will automatically be switched to the commercial power 5 71 Example of Operation Time Scheme Drive source is switched to commercial line because of Driven by alarm condition detected while Run command inverter Driven by commercial line Driven by inverter the motor is driven by inverter Run SW i 3S j Stop SW 5S i OPX f gt Alarm H i 3 1 1 1 MWENNNN QNM RS ites Inverter secondary delay timer T3 ON delay G deyo Inverter secondary MC2 Switch to commercial line c delay timer T1 OFF delay z O Run forward FWD o Switch to commercial line T2 OFF delay o Switch to commercial power 50 Hz SW50 o Coast to a stop BX Commercial line power supply MC3 Inverter output and motor rotation T Motor driven Motor coast to stop Motor coast to stop Motor coast to stop Inverter output coast to stop Lead in Cre Alternatively you may use the integ
429. meters for commercial frequencies The power factor cannot be measured by a commercially available power factor meter that measures the phase difference between the voltage and current To obtain the power factor measure the power voltage and current on each of the input and output sides and use the following formula W Three phase input x 100 Electric power W Power factor V3 x Voltage V x Current A 2 z m Z gt Z O m gt Z o Z 7 Z m O mn O Z Table 7 4 Meters for Measurement of Main Circuit P DC link bus 9 Input primary side Output secondary side voltage B P N g Voltage Current Voltage Current amp gt 3 9 g 9 Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter Voltmeter Wattmeter DC voltmeter V z E AR AS AT VR VS VT WR WT AU AV AW VU VV VW WU WW e o8 Moving iron Rectifier a Digital Digital AC Digital AC Digital AC Moving coil e o moving iron AC power e power meter power meter power meter type iB S59 A aS a Note Itis not recommended that meters other than a digital AC power meter be used for measuring the output voltage or output current since they may cause larger measurement errors or in the worst case they may be damaged Power supply Figure 7 1 Connection of Meters 7 5 Insulation Test Since the inverter has undergone an insulation test before shipment avoid making a Megger test at the customer s si
430. miters become activated as the percentage of the motor rated torque Function code Name Torque limit feature F40 Torque limiter 1 1 Driving torque current limiter 1 F41 Torque limiter 1 2 Braking torque current limiter 1 E16 Torque limiter 2 1 Driving torque current limiter 2 E17 Torque limiter 2 2 Braking torque current limiter 2 Although the data setting range for F40 F41 E16 and E17 is from positive to negative values 300 to 300 specify positive values in practice If a negative value is specified the inverter interprets it as an absolute value Note The torque limiter determined depending on the overload current actually limits the torque current output Therefore the torque current output is automatically limited at a value lower than 300 the maximum setting value W Analog torque limit values E61 to E63 The torque limit values can be specified by analog inputs through terminals 12 C1 and V2 voltage or current Set E61 E62 and E63 Terminal 12 Extended Function Terminal C1 Extended Function and Terminal V2 Extended Function as listed below Data for E61 E62 or E63 Analog torque limit value A Use the analog input as the torque limit value specified by function code data 7 7 or 8 Analog torque limit value B Input specifications 200 10 V or 20 mA If the same setting is made for different terminals the priority order is E61 gt E62 gt E63 W Tor
431. mpensation so no unpredictable output fluctuation results enabling stable operation with constant output frequency E V f control with slip compensation active Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics decreasing the motor rotation The inverter s slip compensation function first presumes the slip value of the motor based on the motor torque generated and raises the output frequency to compensate for the decrease in motor rotation This prevents the motor from decreasing the rotation due to the slip That is this function is effective for improving the motor speed control accuracy The compensation value is specified by combination of function codes P12 Rated slip frequency P09 Slip compensation gain for driving and P11 Slip compensation gain for braking 4 3 Z e z z 0 T m O 4 O A H68 enables or disables the slip compensation function according to the motor driving conditions Motor driving conditions Motor driving frequency zone H68 data Accl Decel Constant speed Base frequency or below Above the base frequency Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable Disable B Dynamic torque vector control To get the maximal torque out of a motor this control calculates the motor torque for the load applied and uses it to optimize the voltage and current
432. nal EMC filter dedicated to Fuji inverters the basic type of inverters that bear a CE marking but have no built in EMC filter becomes compliant with these EMC Directives CAUTION The EMC filter built in type of the FRENIC MEGA inverters is categorized as Category C3 of the EN61800 3 It is not designed for use in a domestic environment It may interfere with the operations of home appliances or office equipment due to noise emitted from it 9 3 Compliance with EMC Standards 9 3 1 General The CE marking on inverters does not ensure that the entire equipment including our CE marked products is compliant with the EMC Directive Therefore CE marking for the equipment shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer For this reason Fuji s CE mark is indicated under the condition that the product shall be used within equipment meeting all requirements for the relevant Directives Instrumentation of such equipment shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer Generally machinery or equipment includes not only our products but other devices as well Manufacturers therefore shall design the whole system to be compliant with the relevant Directives In addition to satisfy the requirements noted above use the EMC filter built in type of inverters or the combination of the basic type of inverters that have no built in EMC filter and an external filter option dedicated to Fuji inverters In either case mount inverters in a
433. nal ON and reassign the WE KP to a correct command WE KP is only a signal that allows you to change function code data so it does not protect the frequency settings or PID speed command specified by the and Q keys Tip Even when F00 1 or 3 function code data can be changed via the communications link F01 Frequency Command 1 F18 Bias Frequency command 1 C30 Frequency Command 2 C31 to C35 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 C36 to C39 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 C41 to C45 Analog Input Adjustment for V2 C50 Bias Frequency command 1 Bias base point H61 UP DOWN Control Initial frequency setting d59 d61 to d63 Command Pulse Rate Input F01 or C30 sets the command source that specifies reference frequency 1 or reference frequency 2 respectively Data for F01 C30 Function Refer to 0 Enable keys on the keypad 1 1 Enable the voltage input to terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC Enable the current input to terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC maximum frequency obtained at 20 mA DC SW5 on the control PCB should be turned to the C1 side factory default Enable the sum of voltage 0 to 10 VDC and current inputs 4 to 20 mA DC given to terminals 12 and C1 respectively See the two items listed above for the setting range and the value required for maximum frequencies SW5 on the control PCB should be turned to the C1
434. nd refer to the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Chapter 7 Section 7 3 3 Setting up frequency and PID commands J58 PID Control Detection width of dancer position deviation J59 to J61 PID Control P Gain 2 I Integral time 2 and D Differential time 2 The moment the feedback value of dancer roll position comes into the range of the dancer reference position detection width of dancer position deviation J58 the inverter switches PID constants from the combination of J03 J04 and J05 to that of J59 J60 and J61 respectively in its PID processor Giving a boost to the system response by raising the P gain may improve the system performance in the dancer roll positioning accuracy W Detection width of dancer position deviation J58 J58 specifies the bandwidth in the range of 1 to 100 Specifying 0 does not switch PID constants W P Gain 2 J59 Data setting range 0 000 to 30 000 times W Integral time 2 J60 Data setting range 0 0 to 3600 0 s W D Differential time 2 J61 Data setting range 0 00 to 600 00 s Descriptions for J59 J60 and J61 are the same as those of PID control P Gain J03 I Integral time J04 and D Differential time J05 respectively J62 PID Control PID control block selection J62 allows you to select either adding or subtracting the PID dancer processor output to or from the primary speed command Also it allows you to select either controlling the PID dancer processor output by th
435. nd 2 7 a FRN37GIBI2LI to FRN75GIB2LI FRN75GIBI 4L to FRNIIOGIBI ALI CN R red CN W white CN W white CN R red Connector configuration m When not using terminal R1 or T1 A Denisma termals Riata T Use conditions Factory default Feeding the DC linked power Combined with a PWM converter b FRN90G1 m 20 FRN132G1m 40 to FRN630G1 m 40 Connector configuration CNR FAN red CNR red CNW CNW white white diti When not using terminal R1 or T1 reso DON x 2 ml Use conditions Factory default eeding the DC linked power Combined with a PWM converter Note A box W in the above figure replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box L1 in the above figure replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination Note By factory default the fan power supply switching connectos CN R and CN W are set on the FAN and NC positions respectively Do not exchange them unless you drive the inverter with a DC linked power supply Wrong configuration of these switching connectors cannot drive the cooling fans causing a heat sink overheat alarm Litt or a charger circuit alarm FA m Location of the switching connectors The switching connectors are located on the power printed circuit board power PCB as shown below
436. nd SS8 and the selected frequencies are as follows Selected frequency command OFF OFF OFF OFF Other than multi frequency OFF OFF OFF ON C05 multi frequency 1 OFF OFF ON OFF C06 multi frequency 2 OFF OFF ON ON C07 multi frequency 3 OFF ON OFF OFF C08 multi frequency 4 OFF ON OFF ON C09 multi frequency 5 OFF ON ON OFF C10 multi frequency 6 OFF ON ON ON C11 multi frequency 7 ON OFF OFF OFF C12 multi frequency 8 ON OFF OFF ON C13 multi frequency 9 ON OFF ON OFF C14 multi frequency 10 ON OFF ON ON C15 multi frequency 11 ON ON OFF OFF C16 multi frequency 12 ON ON OFF ON C17 multi frequency 13 ON ON ON OFF C18 multi frequency 14 ON ON ON ON C19 multi frequency 15 Other than multi frequency includes frequency command 1 F01 frequency command 2 C30 and other command sources except multi frequency commands W When enabling PID control J01 1 2 or 3 Under the PID control a multi frequency command can be specified as a preset value 3 different frequencies It can also be used for a manual speed command even with the PID control being canceled Hz PID ON or for a primary reference frequency under the PID dancer control PID command SSI SS2 Command Command specified by J02 Multi frequency by C08 Multi frequency by C12 Multi frequency by C16 C08 C12 and C16 can be specified in increments
437. nd enter a run command 6 A run command with higher priority than the one attempted was active and the run command was stopped Referring to the block diagram of the frequency command block refer to the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Chapter 6 check the higher priority run command with Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad 79 Correct any incorrect function code data settings in H30 y98 etc or cancel the higher priority run command 7 No analog frequency command input Check whether the analog frequency command reference frequency is correctly inputted using Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad 2 Connect the external circuit wires to terminals 13 12 11 C1 and V2 correctly gt When terminal C1 is used check the slider position of terminal C1 property switch SW5 and the setting of the thermistor mode selection H26 8 The reference frequency was below the starting or stop frequency Check that a reference frequency has been entered correctly using Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad gt Set the reference frequency at the same or higher than that of the starting and stop frequencies F23 and F25 gt Reconsider the starting and stop frequencies F23 and F25 and if necessary change them to the lower values gt Inspect the external frequency command potentiometers signal converters switches and relay contacts Replace any ones
438. nd use shielded wires In principle ground the shielded sheath of wires if effects of external inductive noises are considerable connection to terminal 11 may be effective As shown in Figure 2 11 be sure to ground the single end of the shield to enhance the shield effect z deyo Use a twin contact relay for low level signals if the relay is used in the control circuit Do not connect the relay s contact to terminal 11 When the inverter is connected to an external device outputting the analog signal the external device may malfunction due to electric noise generated by the inverter If this happens according to the circumstances connect a ferrite core a toroidal core or equivalent to the device outputting the analog signal or connect a capacitor having the good cut off characteristics for high frequency between control signal wires as shown in Figure 2 12 Do not apply a voltage of 7 5 VDC or higher to terminal C1 Doing so could damage the internal control circuit Shielded Wire lt Control Circuit gt External Analog Capacitor lt Control Circuit gt Output Device 0 022 u F 2 13 50V 12 Y 11 111 A Potentiometer Ferrite Core 1kto5kQ Pass the same phase wires through or turn them around the ferrite core 2 or 3 times 12 H2LH3ANI JHL SNIHIM ANY ONILNNOW Figure 2 11 Connection of Shielded Wire Figure 2 12 Example of Electric Noise Reduction
439. ng destination FRENIC MEGA Three phase 400 V Nominal applied motor Inverter type FRN0 4G1I 4L 5 FRN0 75GB 4L 6 IEC60269 1 15 FRNI 5GIM ALI HD 10 IEC60269 1 22 FRN22GINI 4LI 15 IEC60269 1 3 77 FRN3 7GIWI 4A 4 0 FRNA 0G1II 4E 20 IEC60269 1 1 The ground terminal GG should always be connected to the ground Do not use only a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB as the sole method of electric shock protection Be sure to use ground wires whose size is greater than power supply lines With overcurrent protection 2 To prevent the risk of hazardous accidents that could be caused by damage of the inverter install the specified fuses in the supply side primary side according to the following tables Breaking capacity Min 10 kA Rated voltage Min 500 V Fuse rating A 3 IEC60269 1 FRN5 5GIB 4L1 HD LD 80 IEC60269 4 FRN7 5G1I 4L HD LD 80 IEC60269 4 FRNIIGIB 4LI HD LD 125 IEC60269 4 FRN15G1m 40 HD LD 125 IEC60269 4 FRN18 5GB 4L HD LD 160 IEC60269 4 FRN22G1 40 HD 160 IEC60269 4
440. ng down due to an insufficient torque when the brake is released Function code Data setting range Remarks 0 to 300 Brake OFF current Set it putting the inverter rated current at See Note below 100 Available only under Brake OFF frequency speed 0 0 to 25 0 Hz V f control Brake OFF timer 0 0 to 5 0 s Available only under Brake OFF torque 0 to 300 vector control G deyo Note The inverter rated current differs depending upon the drive mode selected HD MD or LD Turning the Brake ON When the run command is OFF and the output frequency drops below the level specified by J71 Brake signal Brake ON frequency speed and stays below the level for the period specified by J72 Brake signal Brake ON timer the inverter judges that the motor rotation is below a certain level and turns the signal BRKS OFF for activating the brake Under vector control when the reference speed or the detected one drops below the level of the stop frequency specified by F25 Stop frequency and stays below the level for the period specified by J72 Brake signal Brake ON timer the inverter judges that the motor rotation is below a certain level and turns the signal BRKS OFF for activating the brake This operation reduces the load applied to the brake extending lifetime of the brake S3dO9 NOILONNA Function code Data setting range Remarks Available only under V f Brake ON frequency speed 0 0 to
441. ng time s Duy ie ED ER EMC fter filter Compliant with EMC Directives Emission and Immunity Category C3 2nd Env EN61800 3 2004 DC reactor OCR Eee Option Applicable safety UL508C C22 2No 14 EN61800 5 1 2003 EN954 1 Cat 3 standards Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL open type IP00 UL open type Cooling method Fan cooling Weight Mass K0 Pee ss 62 105 105 90 to 630 kW Item Specifications TERN oea so 110 Nominal applied motor kW Output rating e I aes Rated voltage V Three phase 380 to 480 V with AVR function s Twsesess EV ARR T Faessens me pas se 57 as amp eo e Toe 9 v5 _ JOverioad capability JOverioad capability j 1206 min 1 j 1206 min 380 to 440 V 50 Hz Voltage frequency 380 to 480 V 60 Hz Allowable voltage frequency sme sp e e 29 0 e 5 e T T TT T T T alri ranar Built in braking resistor Braking time s Duty cycle ED EMC filter Compliant with EMC Directives Emission and Immunity Category C3 2nd Env EN61800 3 2004 DC reactor DCR Applicable safety UL508C C22 2No 14 EN61800 5 1 2003 EN954 1 Cat 3 standards Enclosure IEC60529 IPOO UL Open type Coning method Weight Mass tq 62 amp 9 9 s wo zs zs so 30 0 59 1 Fuji s standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the rated output voltage as 220 V for 200 V class series and 440 V for 400 V class s
442. ning the run command OFF completes the tuning If the run command has been given through the keypad or the communications link it automatically turns OFF upon completion of the measurements which completes the tuning Upon completion of the tuning the subsequent function code P06 appears on the keypad E Tuning errors Improper tuning would negatively affect the operation performance and in the worst case could even cause hunting or deteriorate precision Therefore if the inverter finds any abnormality in the tuning results or any error in the tuning process it displays and discards the tuning data Listed below are possible causes that trigger tuning errors Possible tuning error causes Details An interphase voltage unbalance or output phase loss has been detected Error in tuning results Tuning has resulted in an abnormally high or low value of a parameter due to the output circuit opened Output current error An abnormally high current has flown during tuning During tuning a run command has been turned OFF or STOP Force to stop BX Coast to Sequence error a stop DWP Protect from dew condensation or other similar terminal command has been received ee During tuning any of the operation limiters has been activated Error due to limitation ae zs The maximum frequency or the frequency limiter high has limited tuning operation Other errors An undervoltage or any other alarm
443. nipulated value than that generated by D action alone to suppress the deviation increase When the deviation becomes small the behavior of P action becomes small A load including the integral component in the controlled system may oscillate due to the action of the integral component if P action alone is applied In such a case use PD control to reduce the oscillation caused by P action for keeping the system stable That is PD control is applied to a system that does not contain any damping actions in its process 3 PID control PID control is implemented by combining P action with the deviation suppression of I action and the oscillation suppression of D action PID control features minimal control deviation high precision and high stability In particular PID control is effective to a system that has a long response time to the occurrence of deviation Follow the procedure below to set data to PID control function codes It is highly recommended that you adjust the PID control value while monitoring the system response waveform with an oscilloscope or equivalent Repeat the following procedure to determine the optimal solution for each system Increase the data of J03 PID control P Gain within the range where the feedback signal does not oscillate Decrease the data of J04 PID control I Integral time within the range where the feedback signal does not oscillate Increase the data of J05 PID control D Differential time
444. nitor displays one tenth of the actual value with the x10 LED lit 2 When the LED monitor displays an output voltage the 7 segment letter u in the lowest digit stands for the unit of the voltage V 3 These PID related items appear only when the inverter drives the motor under the PID control specified by function code J01 1 2 or 3 4 When the LED monitor displays a PID command or its output amount the dot decimal point attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter blinks 5 When the LED monitor displays a PID feedback amount the dot decimal point attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter lights 6 When the LED monitor displays a load factor the 7 segment letter in the lowest digit stands for 96 7 When the LED monitor displays the motor output the unit LED indicator kW blinks 8 The analog input monitor can appear only when the analog input monitor function is assigned to any of the analog input terminals by any of function codes E61 to E63 20 9 appears under the V f control 3 3 Ti Function code E42 LED display filter allows you to filter the monitoring signals for the monitor items such as output frequency and output current Increase the E42 data if the monitored values are unstable and unreadable due to fluctuation of load 3 3 2 Monitoring light alarms The FRENIC MEGA identifies abnormal states in two categories Heavy alarm and Light alarm If the former occurs the inverter immed
445. nosis However at the customer s request this company or its service network can perform the trouble diagnosis on a chargeable basis In this case the customer is asked to assume the burden for charges levied in accordance with this company s fee schedule E 2 z m Z gt Z O m gt Z o Z 7 v m O O z 2 Exclusion of liability for loss of opportunity etc Regardless of whether a breakdown occurs during or after the free of charge warranty period this company shall not be liable for any loss of opportunity loss of profits or damages arising from special circumstances secondary damages accident compensation to another company or damages to products other than this company s products whether foreseen or not by this company which this company is not be responsible for causing 3 Repair period after production stop spare parts supply period holding period Concerning models products which have gone out of production this company will perform repairs for a period of 7 years after production stop counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs In addition we will continue to supply the spare parts required for repairs for a period of 7 years counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs However if it is estimated that the life cycle of certain electronic and other parts is short and it will be difficult to procure or produce those parts there may be cases where it is diff
446. not exceed Pollution Degree 2 requirements If the environment conforms to Pollution Degree 3 or 4 install the inverter in an enclosure of IP54 or higher 6 Install the inverter AC or DC reactor input or output filter in an enclosure with minimum degree of protection of IP2X Top surface of enclosure shall be minimum IP4X when it can be easily accessed to prevent human body from touching directly to live parts of these equipment 7 Do not connect any copper wire directly to grounding terminals Use crimp terminals with tin or equivalent plating to connect them 8 When you use an inverter at an altitude of more than 2000 m you should apply basic insulation for the control circuits of the inverter The inverter cannot be used at altitudes of more than 3000 m 9 Use wires listed in EN60204 Appendix C Recommended wire size mm Main circuit MCCB or Main power RCD ELCB input 2 Rated current LUR L2 S L3 T Inverter s grounding GG W W o DCR DCR Inverter type HD LD mode Control circuit Aux fan power U V W 2 DC reactor Power supply voltage Nominal applied motor Aux control power Inverter outputs Braking resistor FRNO 4G1 20 FRNO 75G1 20 FRNI 5GIB 2LI FRN22GIB LI FRN3 7G1B 2L FRNS 5G1 20 FRN7 5G1 20 FRNIIGIBZLI FRNISGIB2LI FRNI8 5GIB 2L FRN22GIBI2LI Three
447. nput and output interface cards just like the signal status of the control circuit terminals Table 3 14 lists the assignment of digital I O signals to the LED segments Table 3 14 Segment Display for External Signal Information Segment LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 a OI 19 Il 31010110714 b 02 110 D ee aS c 03 Il B a d O4 I12 I4 EDO f e O5 113 15 g f O6 114 16 l p g 07 115 7 eam E dp d dp O8 I16 I8 LED No Bit Input terminal Output terminal 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information Menu 5 Maintenance Information Menu 5 Maintenance Information 4 44 contains information necessary for performing maintenance on the inverter The menu transition in Menu 5 Maintenance Information is just like that in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Refer to Section 3 4 4 Basic key operation To view the maintenance information set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Tum the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the amp 9 key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the S and keys to display Maintenance Information 5 HE 3 Press the amp 9 key to proceed to the list of maintenance items e g 5_ 7 4 Use the A and keys to display the desired maintenance item then press the amp key T
448. nput circuit specifications lt Control circuit gt 24 VDC I Item Operating voltage ON level Photocoupler SINK OFF level Operating voltage ON level SOURCE OFF level l i i Operating current at ON SOURCE i Input voltage is at 0 V X1 to X7 BAKD m For X7 REV CISKA Tor XA Allowable leakage current at CM OFF Figure 2 13 Digital Input Circuit qs a a gal 3 Er ion a Table 2 7 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Functions Enable input 1 Safety stop function that is compliant with EN954 1 Category 3 This terminal allows the hardware circuit to stop the inserter s output transistor and coast the motor to a stop 2 This terminal is exclusively used for the source mode input When it is short circuited with terminal PLC the Enable input is ON ready for inverter run when it is opened the inverter coasts the motor to a stop This terminal is not interlocked with the slide switch SW1 3 By factory default terminals EN and PLC are short circuited with each other using a jumper wire disabling this function To enable it be sure to remove the jumper wire For details of connection to this terminal and precautions refer to Chapter 9 Section 9 6 Compliance with EN954 1 Category 3 lt Terminal EN circuit specification gt lt Control circuit gt PLC
449. ns and pumps 1 Constant torque load l Disable Linear Constant torque load 2 V f pattern Auto torque boost To be selected if a motor may be over excited at no load 3 Variable torque Variable torque load V f pattern Paci 09 General purpose fans and pumps 4 Constant torque load Enable Linear Constant torque load 5 V f pattern Auto torque boost To be selected if a motor may be over excited at no load If a required load torque acceleration toque is more than 50 of the constant torque it is recommended to q q q q Note select the linear V f pattern factory default Under the vector control with speed sensor F37 is used to specify whether the auto energy saving operation Tip is enabled or disabled V f pattern and torque boost are disabled Data for F37 Operation 0 to2 Auto energy saving operation OFF 3 to5 Auto energy saving operation ON e Under the vector control without speed sensor both F37 and F09 are disabled The auto energy saving operation is also disabled W V fcharacteristics The FRENIC MEGA series of inverters offers a variety of V f patterns and torque boosts which include V f patterns suitable for variable torque load such as general fans and pumps and for constant torque load including special pumps requiring high starting torque Two types of torque boosts are available manual and automatic Output voltage V Output voltage V Rated volt 100
450. nstant speed Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The inverter output lines were Disconnect the wiring from the inverter output terminals U V and W and short circuited measure the interphase resistance of the motor wiring Check if the resistance is too low gt Remove the short circuited part including replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor 2 Ground faults have occurred at Disconnect the wiring from the output terminals U V and W and perform a the inverter output lines Megger test 2 Remove the grounded parts including replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor 3 Overload Measure the motor current with a measuring device to trace the current trend Then use this data to judge if the trend is over the calculated load value for your system design If the load is too heavy reduce it or increase the inverter capacity Trace the current trend and check if there are any sudden changes in the current 2 If there are any sudden changes make the load fluctuation smaller or increase the inverter capacity gt Enable instantaneous overcurrent limiting H12 1 4 Excessive torque boost Check whether decreasing the torque boost F09 decreases the output current but specified does not stall the motor when F37 0 1 3 or 4 gt If no stall occurs decrease the torque boost F09 5 The acceleration deceleration Check that the motor genera
451. nt for 12 Offset Gain Filter time constant Gain base point Polarity C36 to C39 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 Offset Gain Filter time constant Gain base point C41 to C45 Analog Input Adjustment for V2 Offset Gain Filter time constant Gain base point Polarity For details about the frequency command refer to F01 Frequency Command 1 Setting up a reference frequency using analog input You can adjust the gain polarity filter time constant and offset which are applied to analog inputs voltage inputs to terminals 12 and V2 and current input to terminal C1 Adjustable items for analog inputs Input Gain Filter time Input range Polarity terminal Gain Base point constant 0 to 10 V 10 to 4 4 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V 10 to 4 W Offset C31 C36 C41 Data setting range 5 0 to 5 0 C31 C36 or C41 configures an offset for an analog voltage current input The offset also applies to signals sent from the external equipment W Filter time constant C33 C38 C43 Data setting range 0 00 to 5 00 s C33 C38 or C43 configures a filter time constant for an analog voltage current input The larger the time constant the slower the response Specify the proper filter time constant taking into account the response speed of the machine load If the input voltage fluctuates due to line noises increase the time constant m Polarity C35 C45 C35 and C45 conf
452. nt speed Different from during deceleration in applications where the braking load is externally applied during running at a constant speed the braking load is constant Use Expressions 2 and 4 given below Braking load kW Braking load kW Time Time Applying braking load during deceleration Applying braking load during running at a constant speed W Discharging capability F50 The discharging capability refers to kWs allowable for a single braking cycle which is obtained based on the braking time and the motor rated capacity Data for F50 Function 0 To be applied to the braking resistor built in type 1 to 9000 1 to 9000 kWs OFF Disable the electronic thermal overload protection During deceleration Braking time s X Motor rated capacity kW Discharging capability KWs ee Expression 1 During running at a constant speed Discharging capability kWs Braking time s x Motor rated capacity kW Expression 2 Cip When the F50 data is set to 0 To be applied to the braking resistor built in type no specification of the P discharging capability is required W Allowable average loss F51 The allowable average loss refers to a tolerance for motor continuous operation which is obtained based on the ED 96 and motor rated capacity kW Data for F51 Function 0 001 to 99 99 0 001 to 99 99 kW During deceleration ED io x Motor rated capacity kW
453. nter of motor 4 The display method is the same as for 5_ 77 above Remaining time before the next motor 1 maintenance Shows the time remaining before the next maintenance which is estimated by subtracting the cumulative run time of motor 1 from the maintenance interval specified by H78 This function applies to motor 1 only Display range to 2777 The x10 LED turns ON Time remaining before the next maintenance hour Displayed value x 10 Number of startups 2 Shows the content of the motor 2 startup counter i e the number of run commands issued The display method is the same as for 5_ 4 above Number of startups 3 Shows the content of the motor 3 startup counter i e the number of run commands issued The display method is the same as for 5_ 4 above Number of startups 4 Shows the content of the motor 4 startup counter 1 e the number of run commands issued The display method is the same as for 5 LEI above Remaining startup times before the next maintenance 1 Shows the startup times remaining before the next maintenance which is estimated by subtracting the number of startups from the preset startup count for maintenance specified by H79 This function applies to motor 1 only The display method is the same as for 5_ 4 above Light alarm factor Latest Shows the factor of the latest light alarm as an alarm code For details refer to Chapter 6 Section 6
454. nters Running mode In that mode press the amp 9 key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears ILI f 2 Use the and keys to display the desired function code group from the choices __ through 3 Press the amp key to proceed to the list of function codes for the selected function code group 4 Use the and keys to display the desired function code then press the amp key The data of this function code appears 5 Change the function code data using the and C keys 6 Press the amp key to establish the function code data The 5 27 appears and the data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter The display will return to the function code list then move to the next function code Pressing the key instead of the amp key cancels the change made to the data The data reverts to the previous value the display returns to the function code list and the original function code reappears 7 Press the amp key to return to the menu from the function code list 3 4 3 Checking changed function codes Menu 2 Data Checking Menu 2 Data Checking in Programming mode allows you to check function codes that have been changed Only the function codes whose data has been changed from the factory defaults are displayed on the LED monitor You can refer to the function code data and change it again if necessary To check function codes in Menu 2 Data Checking it is necessary
455. ntrol 1 Notch filter resonance frequency d08 Speed Control 1 Notch filter attenuation level A49 b49 r49 Speed control 2 to 4 Notch filter resonance frequency A50 b50 r50 Speed control 2 to 4 Notch filter attenuation level These function codes specify speed control using notch filters The notch filters make it possible to decrease the speed loop gain only in the vicinity of the predetermined resonance points suppressing the mechanical resonance The notch filters are available only under vector control with speed sensor Setting the speed loop gain at a high level in order to obtain quicker speed response may cause mechanical resonance If it happens decreasing the speed loop gain is required to slow the speed response as a whole In such a case using the notch filters makes it possible to decrease the speed loop gain only in the vicinity of the predetermined resonance points and set the speed loop gain at a high level in other resonance points enabling a quicker speed response as a whole The following four types of notch filters can be specified Function code Data setting range Default setting Speed control 1 d07 1 to 200 Hz 200 ie Notch filter 1 un filter frequency Fi Speed control 1 ipi Notch filter attenuation level ure dB 0 Disable i Speed control 2 Notch filter 2 RA Notch filter resonance frequency P0700 Hz 2 c Z Speed control 2 6 OY Notch filter attenuation level
456. ntrol signal wires from external sources gt Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as possible gt Use shielded or twisted wires for control signals gt Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the external frequency command potentiometer or set a ferrite core on the signal wire Refer to Chapter 2 7 The output frequency is limited by the torque limiter Check whether data of torque limiter related function codes F40 F41 E16 and E17 is correctly configured and the TL2 TL1I terminal command Select torque limiter level 2 1 is correct gt Correct the data of F40 F41 E16 and E17 or reset them to the factory defaults gt Set the TL2 TLI correctly 2 Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 through E15 8 7 The specified acceleration or deceleration time was incorrect Check the terminal commands RTI and RT2 for acceleration deceleration times gt Correct the RTI and RT2 settings The motor does not restart even after the power recovers from a momentary power failure Possible Causes 1 The data of function code F14 is either 0 1 or 2 What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if an undervoltage trip occurs gt Change the data of function code F14 Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection to 3 4 or 5 Q The run command remains OFF even after the power has been restored
457. ntrol when the frequency drops below the level specified by J15 Stop frequency for slow flowrate for the period specified by J16 During the pressurization the PID control is in the hold state This function prolongs the stopping time of equipment with a bladder tank by pressurizing immediately before the frequency drops below the level at which the inverter stops the motor thus enabling energy saving operation Because the pressurization starting frequency J08 can be specified with a parameter pressurization setting suitable for the equipment is possible 5 126 For the pressurization control see the chart below Output frequency A Pressurization starting frequency J08 Restart frequency PID output MV A Starting frequency J1 T Stop frequency for slow flowrate J15 Slow flowrate level stop latency Pressurizing J18 time J09 A Run command A PID STP signal J10 PID Control Anti reset windup J10 suppresses overshoot in control with the PID processor As long as the deviation between the feedback and the PID command is beyond the preset range the integrator holds its value and does not perform integration operation Data setting range 0 to 200 96 PID feedback PV In this range integration does not take place PID command fu10 set value SV t J10 In this range integration takes place In this range inte
458. nverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW or above in all modes require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters Note A box LI in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination MD Medium Duty mode inverters for medium load 90 to 400 kW Type FRN___G1S 40 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 Nominal applied OU KW 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 400 450 e rating DE Rated voltage V Three phase 380 to 480 V with AVR function a Thee ase save AV INARI UO Raesent 2 255 s or es oo 89 59 79 59 T 7 1 1 1 Overload capability 150 1 min 380 to 440 V 50 Hz Voltage frequency 389 to 480 V 60 Hz Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 4 Frequency 5 to 5 ol quired capacity with fee ce ve kVA 5 140 165 199 248 271 308 388 436 489 547 7 to 12 Duty cycle coe DC reactor OCR Applicable safety UL508C C22 2No 14 EN61800 5 1 2003 EN954 1 Cat 3 standards weight Wass wg 62 amp 9x oe s so zs zs 39 39 1 1 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the rated output voltage as 220 V for 200 V class series and 440 V for 400 V class series 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage Output M Input power Max voltage V Min voltage V 4 Voltage unbalance Three pha
459. o Switching connectors in Chapter 2 Section 2 3 4 Wiring of main circuit terminals and grounding terminals Measure the output current gt Reduce the load e g Use the heat sink overheat early warning E01 through E07 or the overload early warning E34 and reduce the load before the overload protection is activated gt Decease the motor sound carrier frequency F26 gt Enable the overload prevention control H70 8 GH External alarm Problem External alarm was inputted THR when the Enable external alarm trip THR has been assigned to any of digital input terminals Possible Causes 1 An alarm function of external equipment was activated What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the operation of external equipment gt Remove the cause of the alarm that occurred 2 Wrong connection or poor contact in external alarm signal wiring Check if the external alarm signal wiring is correctly connected to the terminal to which the Enable external alarm trip terminal command THR has been assigned Any of E01 through E07 E98 and E99 should be set to 9 2 Connect the external alarm signal wire correctly 3 9 773 Inverter internal overheat Problem Temperature inside the inverter has exceeded the allowable limit Incorrect setting of function code data Possible Causes 1 10 44 Motor protection PTC NTC thermistor Problem Temperature of the motor
460. o 1 1 times of the rated current of the motor To disable the electronic thermal overload protection set the F11 data to 0 00 W Thermal time constant F12 Data setting range 0 5 to 75 0 minutes F12 specifies the thermal time constant of the motor If the current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for the time specified by F12 the electronic thermal overload protection becomes activated to detect the motor overload The thermal time constant for general purpose motors including Fuji motors is approx 5 minutes for motors of 22 kW or below and 10 minutes for motors of 30 kW or above by factory default Example When the F12 data is set at 5 minutes As shown below the electronic thermal overload protection is activated to detect an alarm condition alarm code 7 when the output current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for 5 minutes and 120 for approx 12 5 minutes The actual time required for issuing a motor overload alarm tends to be shorter than the specified value taking into account the time period from when the output current exceeds the rated current 100 until it reaches 150 of the overload detection level Example of Operating Characteristics L Specified with F12 Motor overload detection time min eb rY P aai 0 50 100 150 200 Actual output current Overload detection level x 100 5 42 G deyo S3dO9 NOILONNA F14 Restar
461. occurs consecutively ES Multiple alarm 1 Simultaneously occurring alarm code 1 is displayed if no alarm has occurred Simultaneously occurring alarm code 2 7 Multiple alarm 2 eee HIER SINN is displayed if no alarm has occurred Terminal I O signal status under rm oan communications control 7 displayed with the ON OFF of LED segments Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals under RS 485 Terminal input signal status under communications control Refer to Displaying control I O signal 5 H communications control terminals under communications control in Section 3 4 5 Checking I O in hexadecimal signal status for details Terminal output signal status 5 cu under communications control in hexadecimal blc Error sub code Secondary error code for the alarm 3 19 Table 3 16 Display Items in Alarm Information Continued LED monitor shows Description item No Running status 2 as four hexadecimal digits Running status 2 Refer to ll Displaying running status LL 7 and running status 2 3 Z7 in Section 3 4 4 Speed detected value Speed detected value Note When the same alarm occurs repeatedly in succession the alarm information for the first and the most recent occurrences will be preserved and the information for other occurrences in between will be discarded The number of consecutive occurrences will be preserve
462. ocedure given below measures the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor in comparison with initial one at shipment when the power is turned OFF The measuring result can be displayed on the keypad as a ratio to the initial capacitance Capacitance measuring procedure 1 To ensure validity in the comparative measurement put the condition of the inverter back to the state at factory shipment e Remove the option card if already in use from the inverter e Incase another inverter is connected via the DC link bus to the P and N terminals of the main circuit disconnect the wires You do not need to disconnect a DC reactor optional if any e Disconnect power wires for the auxiliary input to the control circuit RO TO Mount the remote keypad on the inverter e Turn OFF all the digital input signals fed to terminals FWD REV and X1 through X7 of the control circuit e Ifan external frequency command potentiometer is connected to terminal 13 disconnect it e If an external apparatus is attached to terminal PLC disconnect it e Ensure that transistor output signals Y 1 to Y4 and relay output signals Y5A Y5C and 30A B C will not be turned ON e Disable the RS 485 communications link Tip Tt is recommended that terminal EN be short circuited for the measurement of the capacitance N
463. of commercial power driven motor 2 Y Y N N Y 74 1074 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 3 Y Y N N Y he run time of commercial power driven motor 4 Select droop control PG alarm E customizable logic 81 1081 Clear all customizable logic timers 100 No function assigned Setting the value in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal E10 Acceleration Time 2 0 00 to 6000 s Y Y 2 Y 3 Very N 5 38 E11 Deceleration Time 2 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring Y Y 2 YI Y Y Y N 5 77 E12 Acceleration Time 3 extemal soft start and stop Y Y 2 yiYyYJYJ Y N E13 Deceleration Time 3 Y Y 2 Y Y vYj Y N E14 Acceleration Time 4 Y Y 2 baal ree an aan ll Mn i N E15 Deceleration Time 4 NA Y 2 Y Y vY Y N 2 6 00 s for inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below 20 00 s for those with 30 kW or above 5 5 gt 2 5 Seer Drive control Beteri Code Name Data setting range 2 S 9 setting page St E VIf PG w o w Torque 5 a Vif PG PG control E16 Torque Limiter 2 1 300 to 300 999 Disable Y Y 999g Y Y Y Y Y 5 57 E17 Torque Limiter 2 2 300 to 300 999 Disable vilv eoe v v v v v 577 Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding 5 77 function to terminals Y 1 to Y5A C and 30A B C as listed below E20 Terminal Y1 Function 0 1000 Inverter running
464. oltage to within the specified range 4 Peripheral equipment for the power circuit malfunctioned or the connection was incorrect Measure the input voltage to find which peripheral equipment malfunctioned or which connection is incorrect gt Replace any faulty peripheral equipment or correct any incorrect connections 5 Any other loads connected to the same power supply has required a large starting current causing a temporary voltage drop Measure the input voltage and check the voltage fluctuation gt Reconsider the power supply system configuration 6 Inverter s inrush current caused the power voltage drop because the power supply transformer capacity was insufficient 5 m Input phase loss Check if the alarm occurs when a molded case circuit breaker MCCB residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection or magnetic contactor MC is turned ON 2 Reconsider the capacity of the power supply transformer Problem Input phase loss occurred or interphase voltage unbalance rate was large Possible Causes 1 Breaks in wiring to the main power input terminals What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage gt Repair or replace the main circuit power input wires or input devices MCCB MC etc Possible Causes 2 The screws on the main power input terminals are loosely tightened What
465. omentary power failure shuts down the operating power of the magnetic contactor causing the contactor circuit to open When the contactor circuit is open the inverter is cut off from the motor and load and the voltage drop in the DC link bus is not great enough to be recognized as a power failure In such an event restart after a recovery from momentary power failure does not work properly as designed To solve this connect the interlock command JZ line to the auxiliary contact of the magnetic contactor so that a momentary power failure can sure be detected For details refer to the descriptions of E01 through E07 Function code E01 to E07 data 22 IL Description OFF No momentary power failure has occurred ON A momentary power failure has occurred Restart after a momentary power failure enabled During a momentary power failure the motor slows down After power is restored the inverter restarts at the frequency just before the momentary power failure Then the current limiting function works and the output frequency of the inverter automatically decreases When the output frequency matches the motor speed the motor accelerates up to the original output frequency See the figure below In this case the instantaneous overcurrent limiting must be enabled H12 1 5 45 Power failure Recovery F14 4 V V DC link bus Undervoltage voltage H Searching for 4 motor speed Output f
466. omponent is ineffective J05 specifies the differential time for the PID processor D Differential action An operation in which the MV manipulated value output frequency is proportional to the differential value of the deviation is called D action which outputs the MV that differentiates the deviation D action makes the inverter quickly react to a rapid change of deviation The effectiveness of D action is expressed by differential time as parameter that is J05 data Setting a long differential time will quickly suppress oscillation caused by P action when a deviation occurs Too long differential time makes the inverter output oscillation more Setting short differential time will weakens the suppression effect when the deviation occurs J codes Deviation i Time ie i MV gt Time 5 124 The combined uses of P I and D actions are described below 1 PI control PI control which is a combination of P and I actions is generally used to minimize the remaining deviation caused by P action PI control always acts to minimize the deviation even if a commanded value changes or external disturbance steadily occurs However the longer the integral time the slower the system response to quick changed control P action can be used alone for loads with very large part of integral components 2 PD control In PD control the moment that a deviation occurs the control rapidly generates greater MV ma
467. on for Motor 1 Select motor characteristics Overload detection level Thermal time constant 1 Fora general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan 2 Foran inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with separately powered cooling fan 0 00 Disable 196 to 13596 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the motor Y1 Y2 4 0 5 to 75 0 min lt lt 5 lt lt lt lt 5 41 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Mode selection 0 Trip immediately 1 Trip after a recovery from power failure 2 Trip after decelerate to stop 3 Continue to run for heavy inertia or general loads 4 Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general loads 5 Restart at the starting frequency 5 43 F15 Ee Frequency Limiter High Low 0 0 to 500 0 Hz lt lt 70 0 lt lt lt lt 0 0 to 500 0 Hz lt 0 0 lt lt lt lt z 5 49 F18 Bias Frequency command 1 100 00 to 100 0096 lt 0 00 lt lt lt lt 5 29 5 49 F20 F21 F22 DC Braking 1 Braking starting frequency Braking level Braking time 0 0 to 60 0 Hz lt lt 0 0 lt lt lt lt 0 to 100 HD mode 0 to 80 MD LD mode 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 30 00 s 0 00 5 49 F23 F24 Starting Frequency
468. on is expressed by a letter between the keys throughout this manual For example the expression 69 keys stands for pressing the amp key with the key held down 3 2 3 3 Running Mode 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status In Running mode the fourteen items listed below can be monitored Immediately after the inverter is turned ON the monitor item specified by function code E43 is displayed Press the amp key to switch between these monitor items Table 3 3 Monitoring Items Display Function 2A os sample on the LED indicator O Monitor items LED monitor W ON O OFF Meaning of displayed value paw data z l or E43 Function code E48 specifies what to be displayed on the LED monitor and LED Be Speed monitor a 0 indicators Oo Output frequency 1 ne a efore sli SALI Zz Z requency actua eing output before slip s M HzOAOkW H Frequency lly being outp E48 0 U compensation A Output frequency 2 ZUR Oo after sli LLLILI Zz Z requency actua eing output after slip SU WHzHALKkW H Frequency lly being outp E48 1 zZ compensation G RS SOG WHzHALDKkW Hz Reference frequency being set E48 2 5 5y 120 I Motor speed Lii WHzWALIKW r min Output frequency Hz x E48 3 B P01 ADT Lr m Load shaft speed UI W Hz E AOkW r min Output frequency Hz x E50 E48 4 Line speed ZU O Hz E A E kW m min Output frequency Hz x
469. on loss factor 3 0 0096 to 20 00 Y Y1Y2 000 Y Y Y Y Y r30 Magnetic saturation factor 1 0 096 to 300 096 Y v1Y2 7 YYY TY Y r31 Magnetic saturation factor 2 0 0 to 300 0 Y v1Y2 7 pal Nei px px Y r32 Magnetic saturation factor 3 0 096 to 300 096 Y v1Y2 7 EA ISO Y Y r33 Magnetic saturation factor 4 0 096 to 300 0 Y v1Y2 7 Y Ys i qo Y r34 Magnetic saturation factor 5 0 0 to 300 0 Y v1Y2 7 Y Y YY Y r35 Magnetic saturation extension 0 096 to 300 096 Y v1Y2 7 Y Y vYi v Y factor a r36 Magnetic saturation extension 0 096 to 300 096 Y v1Y2 7 Y Y vYi v Y factor b r37 Magnetic saturation extension 0 096 to 300 096 Y v1Y2 7 Y Y YY Y factor c r39 Motor 4 Selection 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series N Y1Y2 O0 YYY YYY Y 1 Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors 2 Motor characteristics 2 Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector control 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series 4 Other motors r40 Slip Compensation 4 f 0 Enable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or above N y 0 Y Y N N N Operating conditions 1 Disable during ACC DEC and enable at base frequency or above 2 Enable during ACC DEC and disable at base frequency or above 3 Disable during ACC DEC and at base frequency or above r41 Output Current Fluctuation Damping 0 00 to 0 40 Y Y 020 Y Y N N N Gain for Motor 4 r42 Motor Parameter Switching 4 0 Motor S
470. on operation After decelerate to stop operation an undervoltage alarm is issued Continue to run for heavy inertia or general loads Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general loads As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter shuts down the output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state Even if the F14 data is set to 3 the Continue to run function is disabled G deu2 If a run command has been input restoring power restarts the inverter at the output frequency saved when undervoltage was detected If a run command has been input restoring power performs auto search for idling motor speed and restarts running the motor at the frequency calculated based on the searched speed Restart at the starting frequency As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter shuts down the output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state S3GdO9 NOILONNA If a run command has been input restoring power restarts the inverter at the starting frequency specified by function code F23 If a run command has been input restoring power performs auto search for idling motor speed and restarts running the motor at the frequency calculated based on the searched speed This setting is ideal f
471. one z DC braking resistor DBR Braking unit DBR P and DB 1 Connecting an optional braking unit or DC braking resistor DBR For inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above both a braking unit and DBR are necessary Connect the terminals P and N of a braking unit to those on the inverter Arrange the inverter and the braking unit so that the wiring length comes to 5 m or less and twist the two wires or route them together in parallel Next connect the terminals P and DB of a DBR to those on the braking unit Arrange the braking unit and DBR so that the wiring length comes to 10 m or less and twist the two wires or route them together in parallel For details about the wiring refer to the Braking Unit Instruction Manual 2 Connecting other external devices A DC link bus of other inverter s or a PWM converter is connectable to these terminals Note When you need to use the DC link bus terminals P and N consult your Fuji Electric representative Switching connectors W Power switching connectors CN UX for 400 V class series with 75 kW or above The 400 V class series with 75 kW or above is equipped with a set of switching connectors male which should be configured according to the power source voltage and frequency By factory default a jumper female connector is set to U1 If the power supply to the main power inputs L1 R L2 S L3 T or the auxiliary fan power input terminals R1 T1 matches
472. onitor sss If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the LED Monitor while Neither an Alarm Code nor Light Alarm 6 6 cu Indication 1 77 is Displayed Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7 1 Daily Inspection 7 2 Periodic Inspection 7 3 List of Periodic Replacement Parts 7 3 1 Judgment on service life sss 7 4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main CUCU nenoai a Enn Enn RITE RR 7 5 Insulation Test 7 6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee 7 6 1 When making an inquiry i 7 6 2 Product warranty sesseeeeeeere Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS eee 8 1 Standard Model 1 Basic Type z 8 1 1 Three phase 200 V class series 8 1 2 Three phase 400 V class series 8 2 Standard Model 2 EMC Filter Built in Type 8 2 1 Three phase 200 V class series 8 22 Three phase 400 V class series 8 3 Common Specifications T 8 4 External Dimensions see 8 4 1 Standard models sss 8 1 2 IDGLteaCtOE see nee ence tereti Chapter 9 CONFORMITY WITH STANDARDS 9 1 9 1 Compliance with UL Standards and Canadian Standards cUL certification sss 9 1 OA Generalized ees 9 1 9 1 2 Considerations when using FRENIC MEGA in systems
473. ontrol with speed sensor Torque control Vector control without speed sensor Vector control with speed sensor For details about the drive control refer to Function code F42 Drive Control Selection 1 Note The FRENIC MEGA is a general purpose inverter whose operation is customized by frequency basis function codes like conventional inverters Under the speed basis drive control however the control target is a motor speed not a frequency so convert the frequency to the motor speed according to the following expression Motor speed r min 120 x Frequency Hz Number of poles G deyo S3dO9 NOILONNA The following tables list the function codes available for the FRENIC MEGA series of inverters F codes Fundamental Functions Code FOO Name Data Protection Data setting range 0 Disable both data protection and digital reference protection 1 Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection 2 Disable data protection and enable digital reference protection 3 Enable both data protection and digital reference protection E Change when running Data copying Default setting Drive control Vit PG Vit Y w o PG Y wl PG Y Torque control Y Frequency Command 1 A keys on keypad Voltage input to terminal 12 10 to 10 VDC Current input to terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC SR of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12
474. ooling system of peripheral equipment interlocked for an ON OFF control 5 100 H07 H08 H09 d67 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern Refer to F07 Rotational Direction Limitation HO8 inhibits the motor from running in an unexpected rotational direction due to miss operation of run commands miss polarization of frequency commands or other mistakes Data for H08 Function Disable Enable Reverse rotation inhibited Enable Forward rotation inhibited Under vector control some restrictions apply to the speed command Under vector control without speed sensor a speed estimation error caused by a motor constant error or other errors may slightly rotate the motor in the direction other than the specified one Starting Mode Auto search H49 Starting Mode Auto search delay time 1 Starting Mode Auto search H46 Starting Mode Auto search delay time 2 H09 specifies the starting mode whether to enable the auto search for idling motor speed to run the idling motor without stopping it The auto search can apply to the restart of the inverter after a momentary power failure and the normal startup of the inverter individually If the terminal command STM Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting is assigned to a digital input terminal with any of E01 to E07 data 26 the combination of the H09 data and the STM command status switches the starting modes whether auto search is enabled or disabled
475. or Y N OTET Y Y 5 107 Capacitor 0000 to FFFF hex 5 109 H48 Cumulative Run Time of Capacitors Indication for replacement of capacitors Y N YLlvY Y v Y on Printed Circuit Boards The cumulative run time can be modified or reset in units of 10 hours H49 Starting Mode 0 0 to 10 0 s y Y 0 0 YITY YI Y Y 5 101 Auto search delay time 1 5 109 H50 Non linear V f Pattern 1 Frequency 0 0 Cancel 0 1 to 500 0 Hz N Y 8 Y Y N N N 5 36 H51 Voltage 0 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage N Y2 8 Y Y N N N 5 109 for 200 V class series 0 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series H52 Non linear V f Pattern 2 Frequency 0 0 Cancel 0 1 to 500 0 Hz N Y 0 0 Y Y N N N H53 Voltage 0 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage N Y2 0 Y Y N N N for 200 V class series 0 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series H54 Acceleration Time Jogging 0 00 to 6000 s Y Y 2 YYYY N 5 38 H55 Deceleration Time Jogging 0 00 to 6000 s Y Y 2 YIYT TYTY N 5 109 H56 Deceleration Time for Forced Stop 0 00 to 6000 s Y Y 2 YIY YI Y N H57 1st S curve acceleration range 0 to 100 Y Y 10 Y Y YTY N Leading edge H58 2nd S curve acceleration range 0 to 100 Y Y 10 YYY N Trailing edge H59 1st S curve deceleration range 0 to 100 Y Y 10 XI IFY N Leading edge H60 2nd S curve deceleration range 0 to 100 Y Y 10 Y YTY Y N Trailing edge 2 6 00 s for inverters with a capaci
476. or heavy load applications such as pumps having a small moment of inertia in which the motor speed quickly goes down to zero as soon as it enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure Auto search is enabled by turning ON the digital terminal command STM Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting or setting the d67 data to 1 or 2 For details about the digital terminal command STM and auto search refer to the description of d67 Starting Mode Auto search Under vector control with speed sensor Data for F14 Description 0 Trip immediately As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter issues undervoltage alarm and shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state Trip after recovery from power failure As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state but it does not enter the undervoltage state or issue undervoltage alarm Jf LL The moment the power is restored an undervoltage alarm is issued while the motor remains in a coast to stop state Trip after decelerate to stop As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the continuous running level due to a momentary power failure decelerate to shop control
477. orter deceleration time by making good use of the inverter s regenerative capability In addition during deceleration triggered by turning the run command OFF the anti regenerative control increases the output frequency so that the inverter may not stop the load depending on the load state huge moment of inertia for example To avoid that H69 provides a choice of cancellation of the anti regenerative control to apply when three times the specified deceleration time is elapsed thus decelerating the motor forcibly Function Data for H69 Cone meds Force to stop with actual deceleration time exceeding three times the specified one 0 Disable automatic deceleration 2 Torque limit control Enable 3 DC link bus voltage control Enable 4 Torque limit control Disable DC link bus voltage control Disable W Torque Limiter Frequency increment limit for braking H76 Data setting range 0 0 to 500 0 Hz Since increasing the output frequency too much in the torque limit control mode is dangerous the inverter has a torque limiter Frequency increment limit for braking that can be specified by H76 The torque limiter limits the inverter s output frequency to less than Reference frequency H76 setting G deyo Note that the torque limiter activated restrains the anti regenerative control resulting in a trip with an overvoltage alarm in some cases Increasing the H76 data makes the anti regenerative
478. ory N Impossible W Copying data The keypad is capable of copying of the function code data stored in the inverter s memory into the keypad s memory refer to Menu 7 Data copying in Programming mode With this feature you can easily transfer the data saved in a source inverter to other destination inverters If the specifications of the source and destination inverters differ some code data may not be copied to ensure safe operation of your power system Whether data will be copied or not is detailed with the following symbols in the Data copying column of the function code tables given on the following pages Y Will be copied unconditionally Y1 Will not be copied if the rated capacity differs from the source inverter Y2 Will not be copied if the rated input voltage differs from the source inverter N Will not be copied The function code marked with N is not subject to the Verify operation either For details of copying operation refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 8 m Using negative logic for programmable I O terminals The negative logic signaling system can be used for the programmable digital input and output terminals by setting the function code data specifying the properties for those terminals Negative logic refers to the inverted ON OFF logical value 1 true 0 false state of input or output signal An active ON signal the function takes effect if the terminal is short circuited in the
479. oss detected inverter output on overload prevention control current detected 3 points low level current detected PID alarm under PID control PID control stopped due to slow flowrate low output torque detected torque detected 2 points switched to motor 1 to 4 run forward signal run reverse signal inverter in remote operation PTC status detection enabled brake signal analog frequency reference loss on the terminal C1 inverter keeping speed output speed arrived PG error detected maintenance timer light alarm alarm relay contact output for any fault braking resistor broken positioning completion signal enable circuit failure detected customizable logic output signal Analog output Terminals FM1 and FM2 Output a selected signal with analog DC voltage 0 to 10 V or analog DC current 4 to 20 mA Selectable output signals Output frequency before slip compensation after slip compensation output current output voltage output torque load factor input power PID feedback amount speed PG feedback value DC link bus voltage universal AO motor output calibration PID command SV PID output MV Indication Running stopping Speed monitor reference frequency Hz output frequency motor speed load shaft speed line speed speed in Output current output voltage torque calculation value input power PID command value PID feedback amount PID output load factor motor output torque curren
480. ossible Causes 1 Broken communications cable or poor contact What to Check and Suggested Measures Check continuity of the cable contacts and connections gt Re insert the connector firmly gt Replace the cable 2 Connecting many control wires hinders the front cover from being mounted lifting the keypad Check the mounting condition of the front cover gt Use wires of the recommended size 0 65 to 0 82 mm for wiring gt Change the wiring layout inside the unit so that the front cover can be mounted firmly 3 Inverter affected by strong electrical noise Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of communication cables and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures For details refer to the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Appendix A 4 Akeypad failure occurred Replace the keypad with another one and check whether a keypad communications error E occurs gt Replace the keypad 20 4 2 CPU error Problem A CPU error e g erratic CPU operation occurred Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Inverter affected by strong Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct electrical noise grounding and routing of signal wires communications cables and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures 21 amp Option communications
481. otate Inverters with a capacity of 1 5 kW or below are not equipped with a cooling fan Figure 4 3 Display of the LED Monitor after Power on 4 1 4 Switching between HD MD and LD drive modes The FRENIC MEGA series of inverters is applicable to three ratings high duty HD for heavy load applications medium duty MD for medium load ones and low duty LD for light load ones The MD mode is available for three phase 400 V class series of inverters with a capacity of 90 kW or above Overload Maximum Drive mode Application Continuous rated current level capability frequency HD High Duty mode MD Medium Medium load Capable of driving a motor whose capacity is one Duty mode rank higher than the inverter s one LD Low Duty mode Capable of driving a motor whose capacity is the 150 for 1 min Heavy load came as the inverter s one 200 for 3 s 150 for 1 min Capable of driving a motor whose capacity is one or two ranks higher than the inverter s one Light load 120 for 1 min The MD LD mode inverter brings out the continuous rated current level which enables the inverter to drive a motor with one or two ranks higher capacity but its overload capability against the continuous current level decreases For the rated current level see Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS Note Some versions of the optional multi function keypad TP G1 J1 do not display the content of the function code F80
482. ote If negative logic is specified for the transistor output and relay output signals they are considered ON when the inverter is not running Specify positive logic for them e Keep the surrounding temperature within 25 10 C 2 Turn ON the main circuit power 3 Confirm that the cooling fan is rotating and the inverter is in stopped state 4 Turn OFF the main circuit power 5 The inverter automatically starts the measurement of the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor Make sure that appears on the LED monitor Note If does not appear on the LED monitor the measurement has not started Check the conditions listed in 1 6 After has disappeared from the LED monitor turn ON the main circuit power again 7 Select Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode and note the reading relative capacitance 96 of the DC link bus capacitor 7 4 2 Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions When bit 3 of H98 data is 1 the inverter automatically measures the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor under ordinary operating conditions when the power is turned OFF This measurement requires setting up the load conditions for ordinary operation and measuring the reference capacitance when the inverter is introduced to the practical operation using the setup procedure given below Reference capacitance
483. output kW Twice the rated motor output 14 Calibration Full scale output of the meter calibration du ays Outputs heful scale 0J 5 54 G deyo c z O e Z Q J m o Data for Function Meter scale F31 F35 FM1 FM2 output Monitor the following Full scale at 100 15 PID command SV Command value under PID control 100 of the feedback amount Output level of the PID controller under 16 PID output MV PID control Frequency command Maximum frequency F03 If F31 F35 16 PID output J01 3 Dancer control and J62 2 or 3 Ratio compensation enabled the PID output is equivalent to the ratio against the primary reference frequency and may vary within 300 of the frequency The monitor displays the PID output in a converted absolute value To indicate the value up to the full scale of 300 set F30 F34 data to 33 Note Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 F09 Torque Boost 1 H67 Auto Energy Saving Operation Mode selection F37 specifies V f pattern torque boost type and auto energy saving operation in accordance with the characteristics of the load Specify the torque boost level with F09 in order to assure sufficient starting torque Data for F37 V f pattern Torque boost Auto energy saving Applicable load 0 Variable torque Variable torque load V f pattern RUE 09 General purpose fa
484. ove 20 00 s Initializing the motor 1 parameters with the function code H03 2 automatically updates the data of function codes P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 After that perform the auto tuning E Tuning procedure 1 Selection of tuning type Check the machinery conditions and perform the tuning while the motor is rotating under vector control P04 3 Adjust the acceleration and deceleration times F07 and F08 in view of the motor rotation And specify the rotation direction that matches the actual rotation direction of the machinery Note If the tuning while the motor is rotating under vector control P04 3 cannot be selected due to restrictions on the Tuning type Tune while the motor stops Drive control abbreviation Motor parameters subjected to tuning Primary resistance R1 P07 Leakage reactance X P08 Rated slip frequency P12 X correction factor 1 and 2 P53 and P54 machinery refer to the lE If tuning while the motor is rotating cannot be selected below and w PG vector control with speed sensor Tuning with the motor stopped Select under the following conditions Cannot rotate the motor V f V f control w o PG vector control without speed sensor Drive control V f w o PG w PG Tune while the motor is rotating under V f control No load current P06 Primary resistance R1 P07 Leakage reactance X P08
485. p 66 3 Charging lamp je 16 5 ee IRO TO 22 22 22 16 28 28 23 ROTO 23 23 23 ev 9 6 9 230 30 30 u v w es QOO QOO LAR L2 S L3T U v iw Q O Q 22 22 22 66165 22 22 22 O O O LIR Las Lar ejeleg8gelelele Br UN NO LAIR L2 S L3 T DB P P NO O O P1 P NC 1S 25 25 25 LTO wooo 13 66 ec ec 37 37 37 kd z 5 QO O O O ec ec ec ec ec 23 23 23 23 For Fig F For Fig G For Fig F For Fig G Figure H Figure Figure J Charging lamp Sot Charging 7 6 6 3X Charging lamp ae eses ie R1IT1 RO TO EH 51 51 51 51 51 al ail Pacis pei pa asi LUR Las L3t u v w LIR L2 S Lait U v w Oo O OLR S PO A 0 Oo g T TAS O O O O O O Les oe Les LTR 121S Lat U V w x 51 37 For Fig H 51 51 51 51 51 51 For Fig H For Fig 51 For Fig 1 ec P1 P NC nee Oo O O RN ww a ec 51 Figure K Figure M 3X Charging lamp es Se f 6 6 3X Charging lamp Edd 66 Ed OTOJ 36_ _36_ 36 45 45 45 36_ _36_ 36 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 rt a p O Oo Oo o O O Oo LUR L2s P1 jem nof U v w Oj LO LO L1 R Lis L3 T P1 u v w OJ O LO OJ O O ec ec O Oo QO O O O O 40 40 LIR Las L3 T P1 U v w 51 51 51 51 51 51 51 P NC IS Oo Oo T5 517 51 51 T7OU5B Figure L HL 6 6 ees IR1IT1IRO TO O L2 S L2 S 51 51 Viewed from A
486. p output signals 001 to SO10 in customizable logic input setting U9 U02 ete Input to the inverter s sequence Select one of the internal step output signals 001 to SO10 processor to be connected to customizable logic output signals 1 to5 U71 to U75 e g Select multi frequency SS7 CLO iB LOS MaREIERARORERERIRRERSROR ESEE CECEECET ES e PORE ETERETEEE Run forward FWD Select an inverter s sequence processor input function to which one of the customizable logic output signals 1 to 5 U81 to U85 CLO1 to CLO5 is to be connected Same as in E01 General purpose digital output Select one of the internal step output signals O01 to SO10 to be connected to customizable logic output signals 1 to 5 U71 to U75 Y terminals CLOI to CLOS To specify a general purpose digital output function on Y terminals to which one of the customizable logic output signals 1 to 5 CLOI to CLO5 is to be connected select one of CLOI to CLOS by specifying the general purpose digital output function on any Y terminal E20 to E24 E27 Note General purpose digital outputs on Y terminals are updated every 5 ms To securely output a customizable logic signal via Y terminals include on or off delay timers in the customizable logic Otherwise short ON or OFF signals may not be reflected on those terminals Function code Output selection Output selection Output selection Output selection Output selection
487. pdates the motor parameters PO1 PO3 PO6 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 When accessing the function code P02 take into account that changing the PO2 data automatically updates the data of the function codes P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 The motor rating should be specified properly when performing auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring auto energy saving torque limiting automatic deceleration anti regenerative control auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation torque vector control droop control or overload stop Note In any of the following cases the full control performance may not be obtained from the inverter because the motor parameters differ from the factory defaults so perform auto tuning Refer to Section 4 1 7 The motor to be driven is not a Fuji product or is a non standard product The wiring distance between the inverter and the motor is too long generally 20 m or more A reactor is inserted between the inverter and the motor 4 1 11 Function code basic settings and tuning lt 6 gt Under V f control with speed sensor F42 3 or dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor F42 4 any of the following cases requires configuring the basic function codes given below and auto tuning Refer to Figure 4 1 on page 4 1 Driving a non Fuji motor or non standard motor Driving a Fuji general purpose motor provided that the wiring distance between the inverte
488. period 5 143 Remarks Hold previous Set priority W General purpose timer U04 etc The table below lists the general purpose timers available Data Function Description 0 No timer 1 On delay timer Turning an input signal ON starts the on delay timer When the period specified by the timer has elapsed an output signal turns ON Turning the input signal OFF turns the output signal OFF 2 Off delay timer Turning an input signal ON turns an output signal ON Turning the input signal OFF starts the off delay timer When the period specified by the timer has elapsed the output signal turns OFF 3 Pulses 1 shot Turning an input signal ON issues a one shot pulse whose length is specified by the timer 4 Retriggerable timer Turning an input signal ON issues a one shot pulse whose length is specified by the timer If an input signal is turned ON again during the preceding one shot pulse length however the logic circuit issues another one shot pulse 5 Pulse train output If an input signal turns ON the logic circuit issues the ON and OFF pulses whose lengths are specified by the timer alternately and repeatedly This function is used to flash a luminescent device The operation schemes for individual timers are shown below 1 On delay timer 2 Off delay timer OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
489. phase 200 V FRN30GIBI2LI FRN37GIBI2LI FRNA5GIBI2LI FRN55GIB 2LI FRN75GIB2LI FRN90GIBI 2L Note A box Wi in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box L1 in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection will vary depending on the power transformer capacity Refer to the related technical documentation for details 2 The recommended wire size for main circuits is for the 70 C 600 V PVC wires used at a surrounding temperature of 40 C vi Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Continued ANWARNING A m 2 Recommended wire size mm MCCB or Main circuit RCD ELCB 1 Main power input 2 Rated current LUR L2 S L3 T Inverter s grounding G W W o DCR DCR Inverter type HD MD LD mode Control circuit Aux fan power Power supply voltage Nominal applied motor Aux control power Inverter outputs DC reactor Braking resistor FRN0 4GI 8 40 FRN0 75G1I 4L1 FRNI 5GIBI 4LI FRN22GIB 4L1 FRN3 7G1WI 4A FRN4 0G1W 4E FRN5 5GIB 4L1 FRN7 5G1 40 FRNIIGIMI 4LI FRNISGIB 4L1 FRNI18 5GIB 4L1 FRN22GIBI 4L1 FR
490. ping destination See Table C 9 These function codes are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 5 10 E Drive control 2 Detault Refer Code Name Data setting range 2 oz setting to EP A g Vit PG w o w Torque page 5 Vif PG PG control H09 Starting Mode Auto search 0 Disable N y 0 Y Y N N N 5 101 1 Enable At restart after momentary power failure 2 Enable At restart after momentary power failure and at normal start H11 Deceleration Mode 0 Normal deceleration 1 Coast to stop Y Y 0 Y Y vY v N 5 102 H12 Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting 0 Disable Y Y 1 Y Y N N N 5 64 Mode selection 4 Enable 5 102 H13 Restart Mode after Momentary 0 1 to 10 0s Y v1Y2 3 Y Y YY N 5 43 Power Failure Restart time 5 102 H14 Frequency fall rate 0 00 Deceleration time selected by F08 Y Y 999 Y Y Y N N 0 01 to 100 00 Hz s 999 Follow the current limit command H15 Continuous running level 200 to 300 V for 200 V class series Y Y2 285 Y Y Y Y N 400 to 600 V for 400 V class series 470 H16 Allowable momentary power 0 0 to 30 0 s Y Y 999 Y Y Y Y N failure time 999 Automatically determined by inverter H18 Torque Limiter Mode selection 0 Disable Speed control N Y 0 NI N Y Y Y 5 103 2 En
491. played with ON OFF of the LED segment or in hexadecimal Displaying the I O signal status with ON OFF of each LED segment na As shown in Table 3 12 and the figure below each of segments a to dp on LED1 and LED2 lights when the corresponding digital input terminal circuit FWD REV X1 to X7 is closed it goes OFF when it is open Each of segments a to e on LED3 lights when the circuit between output terminal Y1 Y2 Y3 or Y4 and terminal CMY or between terminals Y5A and Y5C is closed respectively it goes OFF when the circuit is open Segment a on LED4 is for terminals 30A B C and lights when the circuit between terminals 30C and 30A is short circuited ON and goes OFF when it is open CT If all terminal signals are OFF open segments g on all of LED1 to LED4 will light Table 3 12 Segment Display for External Signal Information Segment LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 r1 r1 r1 r1 30A B C Y1 CMY L1 UL a z Y3 CMY Y4 CMY T I Y5A Y5C e l 3 XF E dp XR RST No corresponding control circuit terminal exists XF XR and RST are assigned for communications control Refer to B Displaying control I O signal terminals under communications control on the next page Displaying I O signal status in hexadecimal Each I O terminal is assigned to bit 15 through bit 0 as shown in Table 3 13 An unassigned bi
492. put current differs between the HD and MD LD modes W Braking time F22 Data setting range 0 01 to 30 00 s 0 00 Disable F22 specifies the braking period that activates DC braking 5 49 W Braking response mode H95 H95 specifies the DC braking response mode When vector control without with speed sensor is selected the response is constant Data for H95 Characteristics Note Slow response Slows the rising edge of the current Insufficient braking torque may result at the 0 thereby preventing reverse rotation at the start of DC start of DC braking braking Quick response Quickens the rising edge of the Reverse rotation may result depending on the 1 current thereby accelerating the build up of the moment of inertia of the mechanical load and braking torque the coupling mechanism Output frequency Start of decelerating to stop Hz DC braking 1 Braking starting frequency F20 0 gt Time DC braking 1 Braking time DC Braking 1 Braking level DC braking current F21 0 Sie he Time DC braking Braking response mode H95 It is also possible to use an external digital input signal as an Enable DC braking terminal command CTip DCBRK As long as the DCBRK command is ON the inverter performs DC braking regardless of the braking time specified by F22 Refer to E01 through E07 data 13 Turning the DCBRK command ON even when the
493. que current command 3 Enable Torque control with torque command m Torque Commands Torque commands can be given as analog voltage input via terminals 12 and V2 or analog current input via terminal C1 or via the communications link communication dedicated function codes S02 and S03 To use analog voltage current inputs it is necessary to set E61 for terminal 12 E62 for terminal C1 or E63 for terminal V2 data to 10 or 11 Input Command form Function code setting Specifications Terminal 12 Torque command E61 10 Motor rated torque 200 10 V 10 V to 10 V Torque current command E61 11 Motor rated torque current 200 10V Terminal V2 Torque command E63 10 Motor rated torque 200 10V 10 V to 10 V Torque current command E63 11 Motor rated torque current 200 10V Terminal C1 Torque command E62 10 Motor rated torque 200 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Torque current command E62 11 Motor rated torque current 200 20 mA S02 0 327 68 to 327 67 Torque command Motor rated torque 100 00 S03 S 0 327 68 to 327 67 Torque current command Motor rated torque current 100 00 m Polarity of Torque Commands The polarity of a torque command switches according to the combination of the polarity of an external torque command and a run command on terminal FWD or REV as listed below Polari
494. que limiter levels specified via communications link S10 S11 The torque limiter levels can be changed via the communications link Function codes S10 and S11 exclusively reserved for the communications link respond to function codes F40 and F41 W Switching torque limiters The torque limiters can be switched by the function code setting and the terminal command TLZ TLI Select torque limiter level 2 1 assigned to any of the digital input terminals To assign the TLZ TL1 as the terminal function set any of E01 through E07 to 14 If no TL2 TL1 is assigned torque limiter levels 1 1 and 1 2 F40 and F41 take effect by default Analog torque limit value A Driving torque limiter Torque limiter 2 1 E16 O ON E61 to E63 TL2 TL1 Torque limiter 1 2 F41 S11 Analog torque limit value B Torque limiter 2 2 E17 O ON Braking torque limiter G deyo s3dO09 NOILONNA W Torque limiter Operating conditions H73 H73 specifies whether the torque limiter is enabled or disabled during acceleration deceleration and running at constant speed Data for H73 During accelerating decelerating During running at constant speed 0 Enable Enable 1 Disable Enable 2 Enable Disable W Torque limiter Frequency increment limit for braking H76 Data setting range 0 0 to 500 0 Hz H76 specifies the increment limit of the frequency in limiting torque for braking The factory default is 5
495. que limiteriA Torque limiter B Fourth quadrant Forward braking First quadrant Forward driving Torque limiter A Torque limiter A Third quadrant Reverse driving Torque limiter A Fourth quadrant Forward braking G deyo S3GdO9 NOILONNA Torque limiter A applies to the upper limit and torque limiter B to the lower limit Depending upon the polarity of torque limiters A and B the following patterns are available Torque limiter A Torque limiter B Pattern 1 Positive Positive Pattern 2 Positive Negative Pattern 3 Negative Negative Second quadrant Reverse braking Torque limiter A Third quadrant Reverse driving Tbrque limiter B i gt First quadrant Forward driving Reverse braking Second quadrant First quadrant Forward driving Torque limiter A Forward braking Fourth quadrant Third quadrant Reverse driving Torque limiter B Fourth quadrant Forward braking Pattern 2 Pattern 1 Second quadrant Reverse M First quadrant Forward driving Torque limiter A Torque limiter B Third quadrant Reverse driving Fourth quadrant Forward braking Pattern 3 If the value of torque limiter A is less than that of torque limiter B torque limiter A applies to both the upper and lower limits Selecting the Upper lower torque limits may cause reciprocating oscillation between the
496. quency Current alarm code e mE 1 second intervals X enn __ OU SILI Eg a Te amp ONTO Item Switching at approx Output current amp DI 1 second intervals gt sy 1 OL tO i Item Switching at approx Speed detected value 5 23 1 second intervals gt 509 1 i i 3rd last alarm code gt d Same as above E g 30HH Figure 3 7 Menu Transition in Alarm Mode 3 23 deu QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOILV H3dO 3 6 USB Connectivity The keypad has a USB port mini B connector on its face To connect a USB cable open the USB port cover as shown below USB port cover Connecting the inverter to a PC with a USB cable enables remote control from FRENIC Loader On the PC running FRENIC Loader it is possible to edit check manage and monitor the function code data in real time to start or stop the inverter and to monitor the running or alarm status of the inverter For the instructions on how to use the FRENIC Loader refer to the FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual In addition using the keypad as a temporary storage media allows you to store the running status information in the keypad detach the keypad from the inverter connect it to a PC running FRENIC Loader at an office or off site place For details on how to store data into the keypad refer to Section 3 4 8 Copying data 3 24 Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR 4 1 Running the Motor for a Test 4 1 1 Test run procedure Make a test run of th
497. quency level If F38 data is set to 1 reference speed the inverter can stop without fail because the reference speed reaches the stop frequency level even if the detected speed does not When such a situation is expected select the reference speed for the general fail safe operation 5 52 F26 F27 Motor Sound Carrier frequency and Tone H98 Protection Maintenance Function Mode selection W Motor Sound Carrier frequency F26 F26 controls the carrier frequency so as to reduce an audible noise generated by the motor or electromagnetic noise from the inverter itself and to decrease a leakage current from the main output secondary wirings Item Characteristics Remarks 0 4 to 55 kW HD mode I OEKE 5 5 to 18 5 kW LD mode 75 to 400 kW HD mode sus Ny Aton ene 22 to 55 kW LD mode Camierteg ency Tm 500 and 630 kW HD mode 9 75 to 500 kW LD mode 0 75 to 4kHz 630 kW LD mode 0 75 to 2kHz 90 to 400 kW MD mode Motor sound noise emission High Low Motor temperature due to harmonics components High Low Ripples in output current waveform Lage lt gt Small Leakage current Low lt High Electromagnetic noise emission Low lt High Inverter loss Low lt High Specifying a too low carrier frequency will cause the output current waveform to have a large amount of ripples As a result the motor loss increases causing the motor temperature to rise Furthermore the
498. quency or insert an output circuit filter OFL LILILI L1A as shown below When the inverter drives two or more motors connected in parallel group drive in particular using shielded wires the stray capacitance to the earth is large so lower the carrier frequency or insert an output circuit filter OFL LILILI L1A No output circuit filter installed Output circuit filter installed Max 5m y Output circuit filter gt Max 50 m lt E Max 100 m Max 400 m For an inverter with an output circuit filter installed the total secondary wiring length should be 400 m or less 100 m or less under the vector control If further longer secondary wiring is required consult your Fuji Electric representative 5 Precautions for surge voltage in driving a motor by an inverter especially for 400 V class general purpose motors If the motor is driven by a PWM type inverter surge voltage generated by switching the inverter component may be superimposed on the output voltage and may be applied to the motor terminals Particularly if the wiring length is long the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation resistance of the motor Implement any of the following measures Usea motor with insulation that withstands the surge voltage All Fuji standard motors feature reinforced insulation Connect a surge suppressor unit SSU50 100TA NS at the motor terminal Connect an output circuit filter OFL LILILI L1A to the
499. r Check whether the actual speed overshoots the commanded one in higher speed operation gt Increase the speed controller gain d03 Depending on the situations reconsider the setting of the filter constant or the integral time 6 15 Possible Causes 3 Noises superimposed on the PG wire 17 AL PG wire break What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of signal wires and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures For details refer to the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Appendix A Problem The pulse generator PG wire has been broken somewhere in the circuit Possible Causes 1 The wire between the pulse generator PG and the option card has been broken What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the pulse generator PG is correctly connected to the option card or any wire is broken gt Check whether the PG is connected correctly Or tighten up the related terminal screws 2 Check whether any joint or connecting part bites the wire sheath gt Replace the wire 2 PGrelated circuit affected by strong electrical noise 18 Memory error Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of signal wires communication cables and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures gt Separ
500. r See U01 01 See U02 02 See U03 lt lt See U04 x lt lt See U05 U21 U22 U23 U24 U25 Customizable Logic Step 5 Input 1 Input 2 Logic circuit Type of timer Timer Timer See U01 01 See U02 02 See U03 See U04 lt lt See U05 z z z iz iz z jz iz z z ziziziz z z zizizizi z lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 5 139 5 21 5 o 2 Dm Drive control Refer Code Name Data setting range gc 8 setting to SE g Vit PG w o w Torque page 5 a Vif PG PG control U26 Customizable Logic Input 1 See U01 N Y 0 See U01 5 139 U27 Step 6 Input 2 See U02 NIY 0 See U02 U28 Logic circuit See U03 N Y 0 YEMEN Y U29 Type of timer See U04 N NY 0 Y vY vi v Y U30 Timer See U05 N vjoolv v v v v U31 Customizable Logic Input 1 See U01 N Y 0 See U01 U32 Step 7 Input 2 See U02 NIY 0 See U02 U33 Logic circuit See U03 N XY 0 YN Yer Y U34 Type of timer See U04 N Y 0 Y vY vi v Y U35 Timer See U05 N
501. r Light Alarm Indication 7 is Displayed 1 center bar appears Problem A center bar appeared on the LED monitor Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 When PID control had been Make sure that when you wish to view other monitor items E43 is not set to 10 disabled J01 0 you PID command or 12 PID feedback amount changed E43 LED Monitor gt Set E43 to a value other than 10 or 12 It lecti to 10 or 12 E us RM pia d Make sure that when you wish to view a PID command or a PID feedback amount 101 1 2 or 3 disabled J01 PID control is not set to 0 Disable 1 2 or 3 you disable PID control J01 M when the gt Set J01 to 1 Enable Process control normal operation 2 Enable Process LED monitor had been set to control inverse operation or 3 Enable Dancer control display the PID command or PID feedback amount by pressing the amp key 2 The keypad was poorly Prior to proceed check that pressing the amp key does not change the display on the connected LED monitor Check continuity of the extension cable for the keypad used in remote operation gt Replace the cable 2 ___ _ under bar appears Problem Although you pressed the key or entered a run forward command FWD or a run reverse command REV the motor did not start and an under bar appeared on the LED monitor Possible Causes What to Check and Sugge
502. r failure Motor overload early warning Keypad operation enabled Inverter ready to run Switch motor drive source between commercial power and inverter output For MC on commercial line E01 to E07 Switch motor drive source between commercial power and inverter output SW52 2 For secondary side Switch motor drive source between commercial power and inverter output For primary side Select AX terminal function For MC on primary side lt lt z Z Z AX Inverter output limiting with delay IOL2 IOL 5 H06 ERN Cooling fan in operation FAN Auto resetting TRY Universal DO U DO Heat sink overheat early warning OH See Section 7 3 E32 E36 E65 RUN 0 H70 Lifetime alarm LIFE Frequency speed detected 2 FDT2 Reference loss detected REF OFF Inverter output on RUN2 Overload prevention control OLP Current detected ID Current detected 2 ID2 Current detected 3 ID3 Low current detected IDL PID alarm PID ALM Under PID control PID CTL Motor stopped due to slow flowrate under PID control E34 E35 E37 E38 E55 E56 J11 to J13 Jol PID STP J08 J09 Low output torque detected U TL Torque detected 1 TD1 Torque detected 2 TD2 E78 to E81 lt l RR ll lll ll RR lll K lt l RR ll lll ll RR lill bx o kll KL KK lil RR lill K bx o lall llli K lill lt le z Zl Zl lt lt K
503. r 1 Parameters P codes High Performance Functions H codes Motor 2 3 and 4 Parameters A b and r codes Application Functions 1 2 and 3 J d and U codes Link Functions y codes and Option Functions o codes To determine the property of each function code set data to the function code This manual does not contain the descriptions of Option Function o codes For Option Function o codes refer to the instruction manual for each option The following descriptions supplement those given in the function code tables on the following pages W Changing validating and saving function code data when the inverter is running Function codes are indicated by the following based on whether they can be changed or not when the inverter is running Notation Change when running Validating and saving function code data If the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with WN and K keys the change will immediately take effect however the change is not saved into the b o Possible inverter s memory To save the change press the key If you press the key without pressing the key to exit the current state then the changed data will be discarded and the previous data will take effect for the inverter operation Even if the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with and keys Y Possible the change will not take effect Pressing the key will make the change take effect and save it into the inverter s mem
504. r above in all modes require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters Note A box LI in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 8 6 MD Medium Duty mode inverters for medium load 90 to 400 kW Type FRN___G1E 40 90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 Nominal applied mgr kW 110 132 160 200 220 250 315 355 400 450 e rating were spe oec pe oe cen pas enses esc ps Rated voltage V Three phase 380 to 480 V with AVR function Rataconertiay 210 25 aoe 57 s e 5 oo 7o 59 O a Overload S 150 1 min 380 to 440 V 50 Hz Voltage frequency 389 to 480 V 60 Hz Allowable voltage frequency equired sapasi with DCR kVA 140 165 199 248 271 308 388 436 489 547 Torque 7 to 12 Braking transistor ilt in braking resistor SEES Ne Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 4 Frequency 5 to 5 Braking time s Duty cycle ED EMC filter Compliant with EMC Directives Emission and Immunity Category C3 2nd Env EN61800 3 2004 DC reactor OCR Applicable safety f standards UL508C C22 2No 14 EN61800 5 1 2003 EN954 1 Cat 3 Enclosure IEC60529 IPOO UL Open type Cooling method Weight Mass ca 62 ea 9 s so ze 25 359 359 T Fuji been standard motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the rated output voltage as 220 V for 200 V class series
505. r and its data set function code E51 to 0 000 When the input watt hour exceeds 999 900 kWh the counter will be reset to 0 Input watt hour data Shows the value expressed by input watt hour kWh x E51 whose data range is 0 000 to 9 999 Unit None Display range 7217 to 577 The data cannot exceed 9999 It will be fixed at 9 999 once the calculated value exceeds 9999 Depending on the value of integrated input watt hour data the decimal point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitors resolution To reset the integrated input watt hour data set function code E51 to 0 000 deu QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOI LV H3dO LED Monitor shows Table 3 15 Display Items in Maintenance Information Continued Number of RS 485 communications errors COM port 1 Description Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in RS 485 communication COM port 1 connection to keypad after the power is turned ON Once the count exceeds 9999 the counter will be reset to 0 Content of RS 485 communications error COM port 1 Shows the latest error that has occurred in RS 485 communication COM port 1 in decimal For error contents refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual Number of option errors 1 Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in the option being connected to the A port Once the count exceeds 9999 the counter will be reset to 0
506. r and motor is long or a reactor is connected Configure the function codes listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design values For the motor ratings check the ratings printed on the motor s nameplate For your machinery design values ask system designers about them Q For details on how to modify the function code data see Chapter 3 Section 3 4 2 Setting up function codes Menu 1 Data Setting 4 12 200 V class series 200 V class series 60 0 Hz Z ILI CSELY Base frequency 1 400 V class series 400 V class series 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz Motor ratings 200 V class series 200 V class series nu Rated voltage 220 V IL IL EE at base frequency 1 p inu on the nameplate of the 400 V class series 400 V class series TAE 415 V 400 V o ns Motor 1 mm i E ominal applied motor capaci diss Rated capacity PP pacity m 95 Motor 1 Rated current of nominal applied motor boi Rated current PP 200 V class series 200 V class series 3 60 0 Hz C OC oce Maximum frequency 1 Machinery design values 400 V class series 400 V class series 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz n3 Acceleration time 1 Note For a test driving of the motor 22 kW or below 6 00 s Note increase values so that they are longer than your machinery design values If Deceleration time 1 30 kW or above 20 00 s the specified time is short the inverter
507. r control signal wires use twisted or shielded twisted wires When using shielded twisted wires connect the shield of them to the common terminals of the control circuit To prevent malfunction due to noise keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible recommended 10 cm or more Never install them in the same wire duct When crossing the control circuit wiring with the main circuit wiring set them at right angles The connection diagram shows factory default functions assigned to digital input terminals X1 to X7 FWD and REV transistor output terminals Y1 to Y4 and relay contact output terminals Y5A C and 30A B C Switching connectors in the main circuits For details refer to Switching connectors later in this section Slide switches on the control printed circuit board control PCB Use these switches to customize the inverter operations For details refer to Section 2 3 6 Setting up the slide switches When using the Enable input function be sure to remove the jumper wire from terminals EN and PLC For opening and closing the hardware circuit between terminals EN and PLC use safety components such as safety relays and safety switches that comply with EN954 1 Category 3 or higher Be sure to use shielded wires exclusive to terminals EN and PLC Do not put them together with any other control signal wire in the same shielded core Ground the shielding layer For detai
508. r factory defaults You can refer to or change those function code data 3 Drive Monitorine bP BE Displays the running information required for maintenance or 8 AREG test running 4 I O Checking oa Displays external interface information 5 Maintenance Tnt rmation GEHE Displays maintenance information including cumulative run tme co Displays the recent four alarm codes You can refer to the 6 Alarm Information OI ree 3 running information at the time when the alarm occurred 7 Data Copying apy Allows you to read or write function code data as well as verifying it QJ For details of each menu item refer to Chapter 3 KEYPAD FUNCTIONS E54 Frequency Detection 3 Level Refer to E31 E55 E56 Current Detection 3 Level Timer Refer to E34 5 89 E61 to E63 Terminal 12 Extended Function Terminal C1 Extended Function Terminal V2 Extended Function E61 E62 and E63 define the function of the terminals 12 C1 and V2 respectively There is no need to set up these terminals if they are to be used for frequency command sources Data for E61 Input assigned to Desesatol E62 or E63 12 C1 and V2 P 0 None Auxiliary frequency input to be added to the reference frequency 1 Auxiliary frequency given by frequency command 1 F01 This is not added to any other command 1 reference frequencies given by frequency command 2 and multi frequency commands
509. r frequency F26 4 The activation level H27 of the PTC thermistor for motor overheat protection was set inadequately Check the PTC thermistor specifications and recalculate the detection voltage 2 Modify the data of function code H27 5 Settings for the PTC NTC thermistor are improper Check the setting of the thermistor mode selection H26 and the slider position of terminal C1 property switch SWS 2 Change the H26 data in accordance with the thermistor used and set the SWS to the PTC NTC position 6 Excessive torque boost specified F09 Check whether decreasing the torque boost F09 does not stall the motor gt If no stall occurs decrease the F09 data 7 The V f pattern did not match the motor Check if the base frequency F04 and the rated voltage at base frequency F05 match the values on the motor s nameplate gt Match the function code data with the values on the motor s nameplate 8 Incorrect setting of function code data Although no PTC NTC thermistor is used the thermistor mode is enabled H26 gt Set the H26 data to 0 Disable 11 c Braking resistor overheated Problem The electronic thermal protection for the braking resistor has been activated Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Braking load is too heavy Reconsider the relationship between the braking load estimated and the real load gt Lower the re
510. r ignores the setting of the function code d59 and accepts only the pulse train sign pulse train input The table below lists pulse train formats and their operations Pulse train input format selected by d59 0 Pulse train sign Frequency speed command according to the pulse train rate is given to the inverter Pulse train input The pulse train sign specifies the polarity of the frequency speed command Operation overview e For the inverter without an optional PG interface card Pulse train input PIN assigned to the digital terminal X7 data 48 Pulse train sign SIGN assigned to a digital terminal other than X7 data 49 If no SIGN is assigned polarity of any pulse train input is positive 1 Forward rotation Frequency speed command according to the pulse train rate is given to the inverter pulse Reverse rotation The forward rotation pulse gives a frequency speed command with positive pulse polarity and a reverse rotation pulse with negative polarity 2 A and B phases with 90 Pulse trains generated by A and B phases with 90 degree phase difference give a degree phase difference frequency speed command based on their pulse rate and the phase difference to an inverter For details of operations using the optional PG interface card refer to the Instruction Manual for it 5 33 Positive gt Negative gt polarity polarity Pulse train sign OFF ON Pulse train input Pulse train sign Pulse train input
511. r keypad DBR Dynamic Braking Resistor DCR DC Reactor RCD Residual current operated protective device ELCB Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker Sw3 MC Magnetic Contactor 11 MCCB Molded Case Circuit Breaker 2 9 2 FRN GIB E with SOURCE mode input by factory default z deyo MCCBor RCD ELCB 1 Power supply 400 V class series 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz Auxiliary control power input 8 Power switching connector CN UX 10 Auxiliary fan power input 4 EA R1 Fan power supply switching connector T1 CN RCN W 10 Grounding terminal e G G e Grounding terminal T T ct ae Analog input dixo END SON L Control circuit 9 S23LH3ANI JHL SNIHIM ANY ONILNNOW Potentiometer power supply 10 VDC 0 V Contact outputs 9 Voltage input for Alarm output frequency setting gt for any alarm 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 10 VDC i Voltage input for frequency setting A _ ud 0 to 10 VDC Cue EU ior p Transistor outputs 9 frequency Setting 9 Motor overload early warning 4 to 20 mA DC Ly PTC NTC Frequency speed detected i sw5 11 Frequency speed arrival i Inverter running l 24 V
512. r output l i i frequency A A l l Auto reset i j 0 Time G deyo S3dO9 NOILONNA n the figure below the inverter failed to restart normal operation within the number of reset times specified by H04 in this case 3 times H04 3 and issued the alarm output for any alarm ALM Protective function Tripped state f i I Inverter output frequency Auto reset i signal TRY i Alarm output for any alarm ALM 0 Time m Auto resetting TRY E20 to E24 and E27 data 26 This output signal comes ON when auto resetting resetting alarms automatically is in progress H06 Cooling Fan ON OFF Control ETTM To prolong the service life of the cooling fan and reduce fan noise during running the cooling fan stops when the temperature inside the inverter drops below a certain level while the inverter stops However since frequent switching of the cooling fan shortens its service life the cooling fan keeps running for 10 minutes once started H06 specifies whether to keep running the cooling fan all the time or to control its ON OFF Data for H06 Cooling fan ON OFF 0 Disable Always in operation 1 Enable ON OFF controllable W Cooling fan in operation FAN E20 to E24 and E27 data 25 With the cooling fan ON OFF control enabled H06 1 this output signal is ON when the cooling fan is in operation and OFF when it is stopped This signal can be used to make the c
513. r stops P04 1 by following the procedure below Compared to the former tuning the latter may show rather inferior performance in the speed control accuracy or stability perform sufficient tests beforehand by connecting the motor with the machinery 1 For Fuji standard motors 8 series 6 series or Fuji VG motors exclusively designed for vector control D Specify the P99 data according to the motor type Q Initialize the motor 1 parameters by setting H03 data to 2 Specify the F04 F05 P02 and P03 data according to the motor rated values Perform the tuning while the motor stops P04 1 2 For motors whose motor ratings are unknown such as ones made by other manufacturers D Specify the F04 F05 P02 and P03 data according to the motor rated values printed on the motor s nameplate Q Specify motor parameters the data of PO6 P16 to P23 by obtaining the appropriate values on the datasheet issued from the motor manufacturer For details of conversion from data on the datasheet into ones to be entered as function code data contact your Fuji Electric representative amp Perform the tuning with the motor stops P04 1 3 Tuning Tune while the motor stops Set function code P04 to 1 and press the amp key The blinking of on the LED monitor will slow down Enter a run command The factory default is ey key on the keypad for forward rotation To select the terminal signal FWD or REV as
514. r to H18 d41 Application Defined Control The constant peripheral speed control is available as an application which suppresses an increase in peripheral speed line speed resulting from the increasing radius of the take up roll in a winder system In a winder system e g roving frames wiredrawing machines if the inverter continues to run the motor at a constant speed the take up roll gets bigger with materials roving wire etc and its radius increases so that the winding speed of the take up roll increases Under the application defined control to keep the peripheral speed winding speed constant the inverter detects the winding speed using an encoder and controls the motor rotation according to the encoder feedback W Application Defined Control d41 d41 specifies whether to enable or disable the constant peripheral speed control Data for d41 Function 0 Disable Ordinary control 1 Enable Constant peripheral speed control Note This control is valid only when V f control with speed sensor or Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor is selected with F42 A14 b14 or r14 data 3 or 4 Mechanical configuration of a winder system and function code settings Shown below is a typical mechanical configuration of a winder system for which it is necessary to configure the function codes as listed below Winder The radius of the take up roll increases as the roll rotates Radius of
515. rated sequence by which some of the actions above are automatically performed by the inverter itself For details refer to the description of ISW50 and ISW60 W Cancel PID control Hz PID Function code data 20 Turning this terminal command ON disables the PID control If the PID control is disabled with this command the inverter runs the motor with the reference frequency manually set by any of the multi frequency keypad analog input etc Terminal command Hz PID Function OFF Enable PID control Ecodes ON Disable PID control Enable manual frequency settings Refer to the descriptions of JO1 through J19 and J56 through J62 W Switch normal inverse operation IVS Function code data 21 This terminal command switches the output frequency control between normal proportional to the input value and inverse in analog frequency setting or under PID process control To select the inverse operation turn the IVS ON Output frequency Inverse 10096 cro i Normal 0 OV 10V Analog input voltage 4mA 20 mA Analog input current The normal inverse switching operation is useful for air conditioners that require switching between cooling and heating In cooling the speed of the fan motor output frequency of the inverter is increased to lower the temperature In heating it is reduced to lower the temperature This switching is realized by this IVS terminal command Tip 5 72 When the inverter is driven
516. ration Mode selection Refer to F37 Slip Compensation 1 Operating conditions Refer to F42 Automatic Deceleration Mode selection H76 Torque Limiter Frequency increment limit for braking H69 enables or disables the anti regenerative control In the inverter not equipped with a PWM converter or braking unit if the regenerative energy returned exceeds the inverter s braking capability an overvoltage trip occurs To avoid such an overvoltage trip enable the automatic deceleration anti regenerative control with this function code and the inverter controls the output frequency to keep the braking torque around 0 N m in both the deceleration and constant speed running phases FRENIC MEGA series of inverters have two braking control modes torque limit control and DC link bus voltage control Understand the feature of each control and select the suitable one Control mode Control process Operation mode Features Torque limit control H69 2 or 4 Controls the output frequency to keep the braking torque at around 0 Enabled during acceleration running at the constant speed and deceleration Quick response Causes less overvoltage trip with heavy impact load DC link bus voltage control H69 3 or 5 Control the output frequency to lower the DC link bus voltage if the voltage exceeds the limiting level Enabled during deceleration Disabled during running at the constant speed 5 109 Sh
517. ration at the frequency of the commercial power will not be continued and the inverter will be started at the ordinary starting frequency If you wish to switch the motor drive source from the commercial line to the inverter be sure to turn BX OFF before the Switch to commercial power signal is turned OFF When switching the motor drive source from the inverter to commercial power adjust the inverter s reference frequency at or slightly higher than that of the commercial power frequency beforehand taking into consideration the motor speed down during the coast to stop period produced by switching Note that when the motor drive source is switched from the inverter to the commercial power a high inrush current will be generated because the phase of the commercial power usually does not match the motor speed at the switching Make sure that the power supply and all the peripheral equipment are capable of withstanding this inrush current If you have enabled Restart after momentary power failure F14 3 4 or 5 keep BX ON during commercial power driven operation to prevent the inverter from restarting after a momentary power failure 5 70 Example of Sequence Circuit Main power supply Operation mode switch Coast to stop INV Commercial BX Run 38 43 So di FWD Normal Emergency Stop Inverter 5S 44 30A 30 43 Note e 44 Note 2 P Emergency i Normal Emer Alarm E 55 o o Com
518. ration level 0 00 Disable 1 to 200 of inverter rated current Motor characteristics 1 Enable For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling fan 2 Enable For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with separately powered cooling fan W Motor overload early warning signal OL The OL signal is used to detect a symptom of an overload condition alarm code 7 of the motor so that the user can take an appropriate action before the alarm actually happens The OL signal turns ON when the inverter output current exceeds the level specified by E34 In typical cases set E34 data to 80 to 90 against F11 data Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 Overload detection level Specify also the thermal characteristics of the motor with F10 Select motor characteristics and F12 Thermal time constant W Current detected Current detected 2 and Current detected 3 ID ID2 and ID3 When the inverter output current exceeds the level specified by E34 E37 or E55 for the period specified by E35 E38 or E56 the ID ID2 or ID3 signal turns ON respectively When the output current drops below 90 of the rated operation level the ZD ID2 or ID3 turns OFF The minimum ON duration is 100 ms Output Current lt lt ON ID ID2 ID3 i W Low current detected IDL This signal turns ON when the output current drops below the level specified by E37 Low current detection Level for the period specifi
519. ration pattern with S curve or curvilinear pattern gt Select the linear pattern H07 0 gt Shorten the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 through E15 2 The current limiting operation prevented the output frequency from increasing during acceleration Make sure that F43 Current limiter Mode selection is set to 2 Enable during acceleration and at constant speed then check that the setting of F44 Current limiter Level is reasonable gt Readjust the setting of F44 to appropriate value or disable the function of current limiter with F43 gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 through E15 The automatic deceleration Anti regenerative control is enabled during deceleration 3 Check the data of function code H69 Automatic deceleration Mode selection gt Increase the deceleration time F08 E11 E13 and E15 4 Overload Measure the output current gt Reduce the load For fans or pumps decrease the frequency limiter value F15 In winter the load tends to increase Possible Causes 5 Torque generated by the motor was insufficient What to Check and Suggested Measures Check that the motor starts running if the value of the torque boost F09 is increased 2 Increase the value of the torque boost F09 6 An external potentiometer is used for frequency setting Check that there is no noise in the co
520. rct Bxpxpx WSS l I L J Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The power supply voltage exceeded the inverter s specification range Measure the input voltage gt Decrease the voltage to within the specified range Possible Causes 2 Asurge current entered the input power supply What to Check and Suggested Measures In the same power line if a phase advancing capacitor is turned ON OFF or a thyristor converter is activated a surge momentary large increase in the voltage or current may be caused in the input power gt Install a DC reactor 3 The deceleration time was too short for the moment of inertia for load Recalculate the deceleration torque based on the moment of inertia for the load and the deceleration time gt Increase the deceleration time F08 E11 E13 E15 and H56 gt Enable the automatic deceleration anti regenerative control H69 or deceleration characteristics H71 gt Enable torque limiter F40 F41 E16 E17 and H73 gt Set the rated voltage at base frequency F05 to 0 to improve the braking capability gt Consider the use of a braking resistor 4 The acceleration time was too short Check if the overvoltage alarm occurs after rapid acceleration gt Increase the acceleration time F07 E10 E12 and E14 gt Select the S curve pattern H07 gt Consider the use of a braking resistor 5 Braking load
521. rcuited with other wires Twist the end of the stripped wires for easy insertion and insert it firmly into the wire inlet on the control circuit terminal If the insertion is difficult hold down the clamp release button on the terminal with a flat screwdriver When disconnecting the wires from the terminal hold down the clamp release button on the terminal with a flat screwdriver and pull out the wires Connecting wire to terminal Disconnecting wire from terminal Flat screwdriver Clamp release button 2 16 z deyo H2LH3ANI JHL ONIMIM ANY ONILNNOW Table 2 7 lists the symbols names and functions of the control circuit terminals The wiring to the control circuit terminals differs depending upon the setting of the function codes which reflects the use of the inverter Route wires properly to reduce the influence of noise 2 E a amp en 2 E g lt Table 2 7 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Power supply for the potentiometer Functions Power supply 10 VDC for an external frequency command potentiometer Variable resistor 1 to 5kQ The potentiometer of 1 2 W rating or more should be connected Analog setting voltage input 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external voltage input 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Normal operation 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Inverse operation 2 In addition to frequency setting PID command PID feedback signal auxili
522. re Auto search is enabled by turning ON the digital terminal command STM Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting or setting the H09 data to 1 or 2 For details about the digital terminal command STM and auto search refer to the description of H09 Starting Mode Auto search 5 43 Under vector control without speed sensor Data for F14 Description 0 Trip immediately Auto search disabled Auto search enabled As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter issues undervoltage alarm and shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state Trip after recovery from power failure As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state but it does not enter the undervoltage state or issue undervoltage alarm LL The moment the power is restored an undervoltage alarm is issued while the motor remains in a coast to stop state Trip after decelerate to stop As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the continuous running level due to a momentary power failure decelerate to shop control is invoked Decelerate to stop control regenerates kinetic energy from the load s moment of inertia slowing down the motor and continuing the decelerati
523. rectly 10 Bias and gain incorrectly specified Check the data of function codes F18 C50 C32 C34 C37 C39 C42 and C44 gt Readjust the bias and gain to appropriate values 3 The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command Possible Causes 1 Wiring to the motor is incorrect What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the wiring to the motor gt Connect terminals U V and W of the inverter to the U V and W terminals of the motor respectively Q Incorrect connection and settings for run commands and rotation direction commands FWD and REV Check the data of function codes E98 and E99 and the connection to terminals FWD and REV gt Correct the data of the function codes and the connection 3 Arun command with fixed rotational direction from the keypad is active but the rotational direction setting is incorrect Check the data of function code F02 Run command gt Change the data of function code F02 to 2 Quy 69 keys on keypad forward or 3 N 69 keys on keypad reverse 4 The rotation direction specification of the motor is opposite to that of the inverter The rotation direction of IEC compliant motors is opposite to that of incompliant motors gt Switch the FWD REV signal setting 4 Speed fluctuation or current oscillation e g hunting occurs during running at constant speed Possible Causes 1 The frequ
524. remove the cover when the inverter power is ON Otherwise an electric shock could occur Do not operate switches with wet hands Doing so could cause electric shock Ifthe auto reset function has been selected the inverter may automatically restart and drive the motor depending on the cause of tripping Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured at the time of restarting Otherwise an accident could occur If the stall prevention function current limiter automatic deceleration anti regenerative control or overload prevention control has been selected the inverter may operate with acceleration deceleration or frequency different from the commanded ones Design the machine so that safety is ensured even in such cases The 69 key on the keypad is effective only when the keypad operation is enabled with function code F02 0 2 or 3 When the keypad operation is disabled prepare an emergency stop switch separately for safe operations Switching the run command source from keypad local to external equipment remote by turning ON the Enable communications link command LE disables the 6 key To enable the 69 key for an emergency stop select the STOP key priority with function code H96 1 or 3 If any of the protective functions have been activated first remove the cause Then after checking that the all run commands are set to OFF release the alarm If the alarm is released while any run commands
525. rent A data write operation has been performed while the inverter is running The copy destination inverter is data protected function code F00 1 In the copy destination inverter the Enable write from keypad command WE KP is OFF A data read operation has been performed for the inverter whose data protection was enabled 2 If FE is blinking any of the following problems has arisen The function codes stored in the keypad and ones registered in the inverter are not compatible with each other Either of the two may have been revised or upgraded in a non standard or incompatible manner Consult your Fuji Electric representative 3 22 3 5 Alarm Mode If an abnormal condition arises the protective function is invoked and issues an alarm then the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode At the same time an alarm code appears on the LED monitor B Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode Remove the cause of the alarm and press the key to release the alarm and return to Running mode The alarm can be removed using the amp key only when the alarm code is displayed m Displaying the alarm history It is possible to display the most recent 3 alarm codes in addition to the one currently displayed Previous alarm codes can be displayed by pressing the key while the current alarm code is displayed m Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm When the alarm code is displayed you may c
526. requency M Motor speed i gt x Acceleration Auto restarting after 4 i momentary power failure ON IPF i i E Time Auto restarting after momentary power failure PF This output signal is ON during the period after the occurrence of momentary power failure until the completion of restart the output has reached the reference frequency When the IPF is ON the motor slows down so perform necessary operations EJ For details about IPF refer to E20 through E24 and E27 data 6 W Restart mode after momentary power failure Basic operation with auto search enabled Auto search for idling motor speed will become unsuccessful if it is done while the motor retains residual voltage It is therefore necessary to leave the motor for the time auto search delay time enough to discharge the residual voltage The delay time is specified by H46 Starting Mode Auto search delay time 2 The inverter will not start unless the time specified by H46 has elapsed even if the starting conditions are satisfied LA For details refer to H09 and d67 Power failure Recovery i Y DC link bus voltage Motor speed Output frequency Output frequency CNote To use auto search for idling motor speed it is necessary to tune the inverter beforehand When the estimated speed exceeds the maximum frequency or the upper limit frequency the inverter disables auto search and starts running the motor with the maximu
527. requency F38 Stop Frequency Detection mode F39 Stop Frequency Holding time H92 Continuity of Running P H93 Continuity of Running I d24 Zero Speed Control Under V f control At the startup of an inverter the initial output frequency is equal to the starting frequency 1 specified by F23 The inverter stops its output when the output frequency reaches the stop frequency specified by F25 Set the starting frequency to a level at which the motor can generate enough torque for startup Generally set the motor s rated slip frequency as the starting frequency In addition F24 specifies the holding time for the starting frequency 1 in order to compensate for the delay time for the establishment of a magnetic flux in the motor F39 specifies the holding time for the stop frequency in order to stabilize the motor speed at the stop of the inverter Output frequency Starting Stop frequency 1 frequency Holding time Holding time F24 F39 Starting M Stop frequency 1 i frequency F25 Time 1 I 1 1 Inverter Out of running Out of running running state Gate OFF In running Gate ON Gate OFF Time W Starting frequency 1 F23 Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 Hz F23 specifies the starting frequency at the startup of an inverter Under V f control even if the starting frequency is set at 0 0 Hz the inverter starts at 0 1 Hz W Starting frequency 1 Hold
528. requency at 120 Hz or below Under vector control with speed sensor set the maximum frequency at 200 Hz or below and under vector control without speed sensor at 120 Hz or below If a setting exceeding the maximum setting value e g 500 Hz is made the reference speed and analog output FMA will be based on the full scale reference value 10V 500 Hz However the frequency is internally limited Even if 10 V is inputted the frequency 500 Hz will be internally limited to 200 Hz ANWARNING The inverter can easily accept high speed operation When changing the speed setting carefully check the specifications of motors or equipment beforehand S3dO9 NOILONNA Otherwise injuries could occur Modifying F03 data to allow a higher reference frequency requires also changing F15 data specifying a Note frequency limiter high F04 to F05 Base Frequency 1 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 F06 Maximum Output Voltage 1 H50 H51 Non linear V f Pattern 1 Frequency and Voltage H52 H53 Non linear V f Pattern 2 Frequency and Voltage H65 H66 Non linear V f Pattern 3 Frequency and Voltage These function codes specify the base frequency and the voltage at the base frequency essentially required for running ET the motor properly If combined with the related function codes H50 through H53 H65 and H66 these function codes may profile the non linear V f pattern by specifying increase or decrease in voltage at any
529. res Applications Highly concentrated sulfidizing gas or other corrosive gases Corrosive gases cause parts inside the inverter to corrode resulting in an inverter malfunction Any of the following measures may be necessary Mount the inverter in a sealed panel with IP6X or air purge mechanism Place the panel in a room free from influence of the gases Paper manufacturing sewage disposal sludge treatment tire manufacturing gypsum manufacturing metal processing and a particular process in textile factories A lot of conductive dust or foreign material e g metal powders or shavings carbon fibers or carbon dust Entry of conductive dust into the inverter causes a short circuit Any of the following measures may be necessary Mount the inverter in a sealed panel Place the panel in a room free from influence of the conductive dust Wiredrawing machines metal processing extruding machines printing presses combustors and industrial waste treatment A lot of fibrous or paper dust Fibrous or paper dust accumulated on the heat sink lowers the cooing effect Entry of dust into the inverter causes the electronic circuitry to malfunction Any of the following measures may be necessary Mount the inverter in a sealed panel that shuts out dust Ensure a maintenance space for periodical cleaning of the heat sink in panel engineering design Employ ext
530. restart after searching for idling motor speed Hardware current limiter Current limiter operation level 20 to 200 Overcurrent limiting by hardware This can be canceled Torque limiter Torque limit value 300 Torque limiter 1 2 torque limiter enabled disabled analog torque limit value Control functions Analog input adjustment gain offset filter time constant frequency limiter high and low bias frequency jump frequency jogging operation pre excitation switch to commercial power commercial power switching sequence cooling fan ON OFF control select motor 2 to 4 protect motor from dew condensation universal DI universal DO universal AO rotational direction limitation Overload prevention control auto search slip compensation automatic deceleration anti regenerative control droop control PID process control PID dancer control Deceleration characteristics improving braking capability auto energy saving function Auto tuning offline Life early warning cumulative inverter run time cumulative motor run time Light alarm retry command loss detection Digital input Run forward command run reverse command select multi frequency select ACC DEC time enable 3 wire operation coast to a stop reset alarm enable external alarm trip ready for jogging select frequency command 2 1 select motor 1 to 4 enable DC braking select torque limiter level switch to commercial power
531. rforming auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring auto energy saving torque limiting automatic deceleration anti regenerative control auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation torque vector control droop control or overload stop Note In any of the following cases the full control performance may not be obtained from the inverter because the motor parameters differ from the factory defaults so perform auto tuning Refer to Section 4 1 7 The motor to be driven is not a Fuji product or is a non standard product The wiring distance between the inverter and the motor is too long generally 20 m or more A reactor is inserted between the inverter and the motor 4 1 7 Function code basic settings and tuning 2 Under the V f control F42 0 or 2 or dynamic torque vector control F42 1 any of the following cases requires configuring the basic function codes given below and auto tuning Refer to Figure 4 1 on page 4 1 Driving a non Fuji motor or non standard motor Driving a Fuji general purpose motor provided that the wiring distance between the inverter and motor is long or a reactor is connected Configure the function codes listed below according to the motor ratings and your machinery design values For the motor ratings check the ratings printed on the motor s nameplate For your machinery design values ask system designers about them For details on how to modify the function code
532. ries 400 V class series 50 0 Hz 200 V class series 220 V 400 V class series 415 V 200 V class series 400 V class series 400 V Motor 1 selection 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series Motor 1 Rated capacity Capacity of motor connected Nominal applied motor capacity Maximum frequency 1 Acceleration time 1 Note Deceleration time 1 Machinery design values Note For a test driving of the motor increase values so that they are longer than your machinery design values If the specified time is short the inverter 200 V class series 60 0 Hz 400 V class series 50 0 Hz 200 V class series 400 V class series 50 0 Hz 22 kW or below 6 00 s 30 kW or above 20 00 s 22 kW or below 6 00 s 30 kW or above 20 00 s Note may not run the motor properly Pulse count of the target motor encoder 0400 hex 1024 P R Reduction ratio between the motor and the encoder Feedback input Encoder pulse resolution 0400 Er Feedback input Pulse count factor 1 Motor speed Encoder speed x d17 d16 Feedback input Pulse count factor 2 After the above configuration initialize motor 1 with the function code H03 2 It automatically u
533. rite pps E e Write error Incompatible or code QIO roc CPE el L x eq m vers gt HEr End of End A pt c verification No data to be saved or Verification error GO m F 5 isin E a verification error CHEL gt CHEC H CA End of read Al er fe m CJ shows Blinking Figure 3 6 Menu Transition in Menu 7 Data Copying 3 20 Basic keying operation 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the and keys to display Data Copying 7 4 3 Press the key to proceed to the list of data copying functions e g EA 4 Use the W and keys to select the desired function then press the key to execute the selected function e g EM will blink 5 When the selected function has been completed 4 7 appears Press the key to return to the list of data copying functions Press the amp key again to return to the menu Table 3 17 below lists details of the data copying functions Table 3 17 List of Data Copying Functions Display on LED Monitor Function Description Efl Read data Reads the function code data out of the inverter s memor
534. rmal control Note For using the Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control the sensor is mounted on the motor shaft directly Set both the pulse count factor 1 d16 and pulse count factor 2 d17 to 1 d22 Speed Agreement PG Error Hysteresis width and Detection timer PG Error Processing These function codes specify the detection levels of the speed agreement signal DSAG and PG error detected signal PG ERR Speed agreement signal DSAG E20 to E24 and E27 data 71 W Speed Agreement PG Error Hysteresis width d21 Data setting range 0 0 to 50 0 100 at the maximum speed Detection timer d22 Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 s If the speed regulator s deviation between the reference speed and detected one is within the specified range d21 the signal DSAG turns ON If the deviation is out of the specified range d21 for the period specified by d22 the signal turns OFF This signal allows the user to check whether the speed regulator works properly or not PG error detected signal PG ERR E20 to E24 and E27 data 76 W Speed Agreement PG Error Hysteresis width d21 Data setting range 0 0 to 50 0 100 at the maximum speed Detection timer d22 Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 s PG Error Processing d23 Data for d23 Function 0 Continue to run 1 Stop running with alarm 1 4 2 Stop running with alarm 2 4 If the deviation between the reference speed and
535. rminal Aux Fan power supply Aux fan power supply 75 C Cu wire Remarks 60 C Cu wire 75 C Cu wire Remarks Aux control power supply 60 C Cu wire Aux control power supply 300x2 350x2 152x2 177 2 400x2 400x2 203x2 203x2 250x2 300x2 FRN280G 127x2 152x2 FRN280G 300x2 350x2 FRN315G 152x2 177x2 FRN280G FRN220G 400x2 400x2 FRN315G 2032 2032 FRN355G FRN315G 500x2 500x2 FRN355G 253x2 253x2 FRN400G FRN355G 600x2 600x2 304x2 304x2 gt e N S a mal Q D z Ei FRN400G 350x3 400x3 177x3 203x3 FRN500G 5003 6003 253x3 304x3 FRN630G 600x3 500x4 304x3 253x4 Note 1 Control circuit terminals Tightening torque 6 1 Ib in 0 7 N m Recommended wire size AWG 19 or 18 0 65 to 0 82 mm Note 2 A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure A box L1 in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination 1 No terminal end treatment is required for connection 2 Use 75 C Cu wire only 3 The wire size of UL Open Type and Enclosed Type are common Please contact us if UL Open Type exclusive wire is necessary 4 It is showing the wire size for UL Open Type See additional material INR SIA7 1365 for UL Enclosed Type Pack with TYPE k
536. rning E34 and reduce the load before the overload protection is activated In winter the load tends to increase 5 Excessive torque boost specified F09 15 Z Inverter overload Check whether decreasing the torque boost F09 does not stall the motor gt If no stall occurs decrease the F09 data Problem Temperature inside inverter has risen abnormally Possible Causes 1 Temperature around the inverter exceeded the inverter s specification range What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the temperature around the inverter 9 deyo gt Lower the temperature e g ventilate the panel where the inverter is mounted 2 Excessive torque boost specified F09 Check whether decreasing the torque boost F09 does not stall the motor gt If no stall occurs decrease the F09 data 3 The specified acceleration deceleration time was too short Recalculate the acceleration deceleration torque and time needed for the load based on the moment of inertia for the load and the acceleration deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 through E15 and H56 4 Overload Measure the output current gt Reduce the load e g Use the overload early warning E34 and reduce the load before the overload protection is activated In winter the load tends to increase gt Decrease the motor sound Carrier frequency F26
537. rounding EUNT e G G e Grounding terminal i td eine we eee eee ae abd Analog input Ce ee ee Control circuit 8 Potentiometer power supply 10 VDC _oV_ Contact outputs 9 Voltage input for Alarm output frequency setting gt for any alarm 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 10 VDC i Voltage input for frequency setting j T nd 0 to 10 VDC Crentinpui for m Transistor outputs 9 frequency Setting 9 Motor overload early warning 4 to 20 mA DC Ly PTC NTC Frequency speed detected sw5 11 Frequency speed arrival Inverter running l 24 VDCJ OV Common terminal PLC Y nag gX EN Enable input a S gt Oto 10 i Safety switch pine ee o i mA Bus 4 11 nalog frequenc sink i1 eee APLC S 0 to 10 4 i Tswa VDC f jFM2 Tv 41020 9 igital i 9 OUR mA DC boat 77 Digital input l SOURCE 4 Swe ti Wt Analog frequency mS meter Run forward command em al DX Run reverse command gt Dx i Data transmission Digital input common terminal i 1 Select multi frequency 0 to 1 step i x I Swa SD Select multi frequency 0 to 3 step x3 Fes RS 485 COM port 2 Select multi frequency 0 to 7 step TB x4 Select multi frequency 0 to 15 step x5 ii Select ACC DEC time 2 steps T x6 i 4 Select ACC DEC time 4 steps t T x7 4 Reset alarm t LTCM gt Digital input common terminal RS 485 COM port 1 i RJ 45 connector fo
538. rque boost per F09 ensures high driving stability since the output voltage remains constant regardless of the load fluctuation Specify the F09 data in percentage to the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 At factory shipment F09 is preset to a level that assures approx 100 of starting torque Grote Specifying a high torque boost level will generate a high torque but may cause overcurrent due to over excitation at no load If you continue to drive the motor it may overheat To avoid such a situation adjust torque boost to an appropriate level When the non linear V f pattern and the torque boost are used together the torque boost takes effect below the frequency on the non linear V f pattern s point Output voltage V Rated voltage at base frequency 1 sont 00000 n 4 5 Increased output voltage i using torque boost 1 F09 Non linear V f pattern 1 Voltage H51 Torque boost 1 F09 Output frequency 0 Non linear V f Base Hz pattern 1 frequency 1 Frequency H50 F04 Auto torque boost If the auto torque boost is selected the inverter automatically optimizes the output voltage to fit the motor with its load Under light load the inverter decreases the output voltage to prevent the motor from over excitation Under heavy load it increases the output voltage to increase the output torque of the motor Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base
539. rror Problem An excessive positioning deviation has occurred when the servo lock function was activated Possible Causes 1 Insufficient gain in positioning control system What to Check and Suggested Measures Readjust the settings of J97 Servo lock Gain and d03 Speed control 1 P Gain 2 Incorrect control completion width Check whether the setting of J99 Servo lock Completion width is correct gt Correct the setting of J99 6 20 34 Z Enable circuit failure Problem The circuit that detects the status of the enable circuit safety stop circuit is broken Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Circuit related to the Enable Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct circuit affected by strong grounding and routing of signal wires communication cables and main circuit electrical noise wires gt Implement noise control measures 2 Separate the signal wires from the main power wires as far as possible Note The Reset alarm terminal command RST cannot reset this alarm ELF If even a power off reset cannot restore the inverter state the inverter needs to be repaired 6 5 If the Light Alarm Indication 7 Appears on the LED Monitor If the inverter detects a minor abnormal state light alarm it can continue the current operation without tripping while displaying the light alarm indication 7 on the LED monitor In
540. rter for motor operation 4 1 13 Preparation for practical operation 4 2 Special Operations 4 2 1 Jogging operation sse 4 2 2 Remote and local modes x 4 2 3 External run frequency command 4 17 Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES ee 5 1 5 1 Function Code Tables 5 1 xiii 5 2 Details of Function Codes 5 2 1 Fundamental Functions 5 29 5 2 2 E codes Extension Terminal Functions 5 67 5 2 3 C codes Control functions 5 92 5 2 4 P codes Motor 1 Parameters 5 95 5 2 5 H codes High Performance Functions 5 99 5 2 6 Acodes Motor 2 Parameters b codes Motor 3 Parameters r codes Motor 4 Parameters 5 117 5 2 7 J codes Application Functions 1 5 120 5 2 8 d codes Application Functions 2 re 5 2 9 U codes Application functions 3 5 139 5 2 10 y codes Link Functions ssss 5 147 Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING cee 6 1 6 1 Protective Functions 6 1 6 2 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting 6 3 6 3 If Neither an Alarm Code Nor Light Alarm Indication Appears on the LED Monitor 6 4 6 3 1 Abnormal motor operation ss 6 4 6 3 2 Problems with inverter settings 6 4 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor 6 10 6 5 Ifthe Light Alarm Indication 77 Appears on the LED M
541. s O Fuji standard motors 8 series N Y1Y2 0 YIYJYJY Y 5 98 1 Motor characteristics 1 HP rating motors 2 Motor characteristics 2 Fuji motors exclusively designed for vector control 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series 4 Other motors F codes H codes High Performance Functions E codes E o o Drive control Refer E c Code Name Data setting range gE 8 gt eres to C codes t 2 ia P codes H03 Data Initialization 0 Disable initialization N N 0 Y Y YY Y 5 99 1 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults 2 Initialize motor 1 parameters 3 Initialize motor 2 parameters 4 Initialize motor 3 parameters A codes 5 Initialize motor 4 parameters H04 Auto reset Times 0 Disable 1 to 10 Y Y 0 Y Yl vY vi Y b codes H05 Reset interval 0 5 to 20 0 s Y Y 5 0 YIYY Y Y H06 Cooling Fan ON OFF Control 0 Disable Always in operation Y Y 0 Y Y vY v Y 5 100 r codes 1 Enable ON OFF controllable H07 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern 0 Linear Y Y 0 Y Y YY N 5 38 J codes 1 S curve Weak 5 101 2 S c rve Arbitrary according to H57 to H60 data d codes 3 Curvilinear H08 Rotational Direction Limitation 0 Disable N Y 0 Y Y YY N 5 101 U cod 1 Enable Reverse rotation inhibited coges 2 Enable Forward rotation inhibited y codes The shaded function codes 9 are applicable to the quick setup 7 The motor parameters are automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and ship
542. s a phenomenon in which enough torque is not generated at the moment of the motor start To obtain enough torque even at the moment of motor start enable the pre excitation with H84 and H85 so that magnetic flux is established before a motor start W Pre excitation Initial level H84 Data setting range 100 to 400 Ratio to the motor s no load current H84 specifies the forcing function for the pre excitation It is used to shorten the pre excitation time Basically there is no need to modify the default setting W Pre excitation Time H85 Data setting range 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 30 00 s H85 specifies the pre excitation time before starting operation When a run command is inputted the pre excitation starts After the pre excitation time specified by H85 has elapsed the inverter judges magnetic flux to have been established and starts acceleration Specify H85 data so that enough time is secured for establishing magnetic flux The appropriate value for H85 data depends on the motor capacity Use the default setting value of H13 data as a guide ie Motor speed zi 9 oO Tr c gt z t S Magnetic flux O Z gt Q H85 Pre excitation time S lt gt m a Qo FWD ON gt m Pre excitation EXITE E01 to E07 data 32 When this input signal comes ON pre excitation starts After the delay time for establishing magnetic flux has elapsed a run command is inputted When the run command
543. s an output signal independent of the inverter operation L For the procedure for access to Universal DO via the RS 485 communications link or fieldbus refer to the respective instruction manual m Heat sink overheat early warning OH Function code data 28 This output signal is used to issue a heat sink overheat early warning that enables you to take a corrective action before an overheat trip 47 actually happens This signal comes ON when the temperature of the heat sink exceeds the overheat trip temperature minus 5 C and it goes OFF when it drops down to the overheat trip temperature minus 8 C This signal comes ON also when the internal air circulation DC fan 45 kW or above for 200 V class series or 75 kW or above for 400 V class series has locked W Lifetime alarm LIFE Function code data 30 This output signal comes ON when it is judged that the service life of any one of capacitors DC link bus capacitors and electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards and cooling fan has expired This signal should be used as a guide for replacement of the capacitors and cooling fan If this signal comes ON use the specified maintenance procedure to check the service life of these parts and determine whether the parts should be replaced or not Refer to Chapter 7 Section 7 3 List of Periodic Replacement Parts This signal comes ON also when the internal air circulation DC fan 45 kW or above for 200 V class series
544. s are used change the rated current data to that printed on the motor nameplate Motor selection V f control data Data 0 or 4 Fuji standard motors 8 series 4 poles 220 V 60 Hz 415 V 50 Hz 400 V 50 Hz Data 2 Fuji motors exclusively designed for 4 noles 50 Hz 50 Hz Data 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series 4 poles 220 V 60 Hz 415 V 50 Hz 400 V 50 Hz Data 1 HP rating motors 4poles 230 V 60 Hz 460 V 60 Hz 400 V 50 Hz for the FRN _ GIN 4E Note When accessing function code P02 with the keypad take into account that PO2 data automatically updates data of function codes P03 P06 through P23 P53 through P56 and H46 Also when accessing function code A16 b16 or r16 data of related function codes for each are automatically updated H04 H05 Auto Reset Times and Reset interval H04 and H05 specify the auto reset function that makes the inverter automatically attempt to reset the tripped state and restart without issuing an alarm output for any alarm even if any protective function subject to reset is activated and the inverter enters the forced to stop state tripped state If the protective function is activated in excess of the times specified by H04 the inverter will issue an alarm output for any alarm and not attempt to auto reset the tripped state Listed below are the protective functions subject to auto reset Protective function FKWY o ULI E a gT h LiL or reu
545. s you to customize the operation mode of the analog output terminals digital I O terminals and communications ports The locations of those switches are shown in Figure 2 20 To access the slide switches remove the front cover so that you can see the control PCB For inverters with a capacity of 30 kW or above open also the keypad enclosure For details on how to remove the front cover and how to open and close the keypad enclosure refer to Section 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the front cover and the wiring guide 2 23 Table 2 8 lists function of each slide switch Switch Table 2 8 Function of Each Slide Switch Function Switches the service mode of the digital input terminals between SINK and SOURCE This switches the input mode of digital input terminals X1 to X7 FWD and REV to be used as the SINK or SOURCE mode The factory default for FRN GIB 2A 4A is SINK for FRN GIB 4E SOURCE Switches the terminating resistor of RS 485 communications port on the inverter ON and OFF RS 485 communications port 2 on the control PCB If the inverter is connected to the RS 485 communications network as a terminating device turn SW2 to ON Switches the terminating resistor of RS 485 communications port on the inverter ON and OFF RS 485 communications port 1 for connecting the keypad To connect a keypad to the inverter turn SW3 to OFF Factory default If the inverter is connected to the RS 485
546. sary to configure the function codes listed in the table below Note In braking the inverter increases the output frequency to limit the output torque Depending on the conditions during operation the output frequency could dangerously increase H76 Frequency increment limit for braking is provided to limit the increasing frequency component Related function codes Function code V f control Vector control Remarks F40 Torque Limiter 1 1 F41 Torque Limiter 1 2 E16 Torque Limiter 2 1 E17 Torque Limiter 2 2 H73 Torque Limiter Operating conditions H74 Torque Limiter Control target H75 Torque Limiter Target quadrants H76 Torque Limiter Frequency increment limit for braking Terminal 12 Extended Function E61 to E63 Terminal C1 Extended Function 8 Anal limit value B Terminal V2 Extended Function a Analog torque imit vaiu 7 Analog torque limit value A W Torque limit control mode Torque limit is performed by limiting torque current flowing across the motor The graph below shows the relationship between the torque and the output frequency at the constant torque current limit Torque Constant torque limit A Constant output current limit Output frequency Base frequency 5 57 W Torque limiter 1 1 1 2 2 1 and 2 2 F40 F41 E16 and E17 Data setting range 300 to 300 999 Disable These function codes specify the operation level at which the torque li
547. se average voltage V x 67 IEC 61800 3 If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 5 Required when a DC reactor DCR is used 6 Average braking torque for the motor running alone It varies with the efficiency of the motor 7 A DC reactor DCR is optionally provided Note that inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW or above in all modes require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters Note A box LI in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destination g deu SNOILVOIJIO3dS LD Low Duty mode inverters for light load 5 5 to 75 kW Item PIT Gm Type FRN___G1S 40 o4 075 15 22 22 Nominal applied ess KW 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 Output rating sa tpe tele lebe e ie Rated voltage V 3 Three phase 380 to 480 V with AVR function CO a tee ee aR Rated current A 16 5 30 5 37 45 75 91 112 ESI NN LCIECRETURESECKR SECHETRETORE SES Overload capability 120 1 min Allowable Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 5 voltage frequency Frequency 5 to 5 Required P ie with DCR kVA 10 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 70 Tio 12 Seana RU eS es Built in braking resistor 37s 34s Duyeyele WED 22 34 DC reator DCR e o Option Applicable safety UL508C C22 2No 14 EN61800 5 1 2003 EN954 1 Cat 3 standards Enclosure Enclosure IEC60529
548. se operation P codes Motor 1 Parameters 5 o i t g gt Defaui Drive control Refer Name Data setting range ee 8 settin to Sel gs 9 Vit PG w o w Torque page ra a Vif PG PG control P01 Motor 1 No of poles 2 to 22 poles N Y1Y2 4 Y vY vi v Y 5 95 Rated capacity 0 01 to 1000 kW when P99 0 2 3 or 4 N Y1Y2 7 Y vY vi v Y 5 96 0 01 to 1000 HP when P99 1 Rated current 0 00 to 2000 A N Y1Y2 7 YYYY Y Auto tuning 0 Disable N N 0 Y vY vi v Y 1 Tune while the motor stops R1 X and rated slip frequency 2 Tune while the motor is rotating under V f control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c 3 Tune while the motor is rotating under vector control R1 X rated slip frequency no load current magnetic saturation factors 1 to 5 and magnetic saturation extension factors a to c Available when the vector control is enabled Q P06 No load current 0 00 to 2000 A N Y1Y2 7 Y Y 5X Y 5 97 m P07 R1 0 00 to 50 00 Y Y1Y2 7 Y Y vY v Y P08 X 0 00 to 50 00 Y v1Y2 7 YYYY Y hdi P09 Slip compensation gain for driving 0 0 to 200 0 Y Y 10000 Y Y Y Y N P10 Slip compensation response tim
549. ses 1 The fuse blew due to short circuiting inside the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether there has been any excess surge or noise coming from outside gt Take measures against surges and noise gt Have the inverter repaired 13 ASE Charger circuit fault Problem The magnetic contactor for short circuiting the charging resistor failed to work Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The control power was not Check that in normal connection of the main circuit not a connection via the DC supplied to the magnetic link bus the connector CN R on the power printed circuit board power PCB is contactor intended for not inserted to NC short circuiting the charging gt Insert the connector CN R to FAN resistor Check whether you quickly turned the circuit breaker ON and OFF to confirm safety after cabling wiring gt Wait until the DC link bus voltage has dropped to a sufficiently low level and then release the current alarm After that turn ON the power again Do not tum the circuit breaker ON and OFF quickly Turning ON the circuit breaker supplies power to the control circuit to the operation level lighting the LEDs on the keypad in a short period Immediately turning it OFF even retains the control circuit power for a time while it shuts down the power to the magnetic contactor intended for short circuiting the charging resistor sinc
550. setup procedure 1 Set function code H98 Protection maintenance function to enable the user to specify the judgment criteria for the service life of the DC link bus capacitor Bit 3 1 refer to function code H98 2 Turn OFF all run commands 3 Make the inverter ready to be turned OFF under ordinary operating conditions 4 Set both function codes H42 Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor and H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor to 0000 5 Turn OFF the inverter and the following operations are automatically performed The inverter measures the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor and saves the result in function code H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor The conditions under which the measurement has been conducted will be automatically collected and saved During the measurement will appear on the LED monitor 6 Turn ON the inverter again Confirm that H42 Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor and H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor hold right values Shift to Menu 5 Maintenance Information and confirm that the relative capacitance ratio to full capacitance is 10095 Note If the measurement has failed 0001 is entered into both H42 and H47 Remove the factor of the failure and conduct the measurement again Hereafter each time the inverter is turned OFF it automatically measures the discharging time of t
551. sible to monitor the running status in real time If a light alarm occurs the appears on the LED monitor This mode allows you to configure function code data and check a variety of information relating to the Programming inverter status and maintenance mode If an alarm condition arises the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode in which you can view the corresponding alarm code and its related information on the LED monitor Alarm mode Alarm code Indicates the cause of the alarm condition For details first see Table 6 1 Abnormal States Detectable Heavy Alarm and Light Alarm Objects in Chapter 6 Section 6 1 Protective Functions and then read the troubleshooting of each alarm Figure 3 1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes Power ON 8 Programming mode i E Configuration of function code data and monitor of maintenance alarm info and various status Detection of e Release of I L a light alarm a light alarm H a I I L 1 We ce ex Jd E Press this key if d an alarm has 4 t occurred Ne N N Occurrence of N x Release of N a heavy alarm a heavy alarm x x Display of alarm status Figure 3 1 Status Transition between Operation Modes Tip Simultaneous keying Simultaneous keying means pressing two keys at the same time The simultaneous keying operati
552. side factory default Note If the sum exceeds the maximum frequency F03 the maximum frequency will apply Enable the voltage input to terminal V2 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC SW5 on the control circuit board should be turned to the V2 position factory default 2 Enable UP and DOWN commands assigned to the digital input terminals The UP command any of E01 to E07 17 and DOWN command any of E01 to E07 18 should be assigned to any of digital input terminals X1 to X7 For details refer to the descriptions of E01 through E07 3 Enable 3 keys on the keypad balanceless bumpless switching available 1 Enable a digital input interface card option For details refer to the Digital Input Interface Card Instruction Manual 12 Enable the Pulse train input PIN command assigned to digital input terminal X7 E07 48 ora PG interface card option 4 5 29 W Setting up a reference frequency 1 Using the keypad F01 0 factory default or 8 1 Set F01 data to 0 or 8 This can be done only when the inverter is in Running mode 2 Press the 9 key to display the current reference frequency The lowest digit on the LED monitor will blink 3 To change the reference frequency press the e QO key again To save the new setting into the inverter s memory press the key when E64 1 factory default When
553. specified by Slide switch SW4 VOI IOI Function code Function code F29 0 1 F31 Slide switch SW6 Vo2 IO2 Function code Function code F32 0 1 F35 The signal content can be selected from the following with function codes F31 and F35 Terminal FM1 FM2 Output frequency Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback amount Speed PG feedback value DC link bus voltage Universal AO Motor output Calibration PID command PID output Analog output Input impedance of the external device Min 5kQ at 0 to 10 VDC output While the terminal is outputting 0 to 10 VDC it is capable of driving up to two analog voltmeters with 10 k impedance Input impedance of the external device Max 5000 at 4 to 20 mA DC output Adjustable range of the gain 0 to 300 Analog Two common terminals for analog input and output signals common These terminals are electrically isolated from terminals CM and CMY 2 20 Table 2 7 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Functions Transistor 1 Various signals such as inverter running speed freq arrival and overload early output 1 warning can be assigned to any terminals Y1 to Y4 by setting function code E20 Transist to E24 Refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 2 Details of Function Codes for details Ga 2 Switches the logic value 1 0 for
554. ss series 200 V class series Rated voltage at base 220 V frequency 1 400 V class series 400 V class series 415 V 400 V Function Function code data Base frequency 1 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard motors 8 series 0 Motor characteristics 0 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard motors 8 series Fuji standard motors 6 series Motor 1 selection Motor 1 Rated capacity Capacity of motor connected Nominal applied motor capacity 200 V class series 200 V class series 60 0 Hz 400 V class series 400 V class series 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz Acceleration time 1 Note For a test driving of the motor 22 kW or below 6 00 s increase values so that they are longer Note than your machinery design values If 30 kW or above 20 00 s Maximum frequency 1 Machinery design values Deceleration time 1 the specified time is short the inverter 22 kW or below 6 00 s Note may not run the motor properly 30 kW or above 20 00 s After the above configuration initialize motor 1 with the function code H03 2 It automatically updates the motor parameters P01 P03 PO6 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 When accessing the function code P02 take into account that changing the PO2 data automatically updates the data of the function codes P03 P06 to P23 P53 to P56 and H46 The motor rating should be specified properly when pe
555. ssary to replace the power or control printed circuit board gt Contact your Fuji Electric representative What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the following function code data PO01 Motor No of poles d15 Feedback encoder pulse count rev and d16 and d17 Feedback pulse correction factor 1 and 2 gt Specify data of function codes P01 d15 d16 and d17 in accordance with the motor and PG ONILOOHS3 I8n04 L 2 Overload Measure the inverter output current gt Reduce the load Check whether any mechanical brake is working 2 Release the mechanical brake 3 The motor speed does not rise due to the current limiter operation Check the data of function code F44 Current limiter Level gt Change the F44 data correctly Or set the F43 data to 0 Disable if the current limiter operation is not needed Check the data of function codes F04 F05 and P01 through P12 to ensure that the V f pattern setting is right gt Match the V f pattern setting with the motor ratings gt Change the function code data in accordance with the motor parameters 4 Function code settings do not match the motor characteristics Check whether the data of PO1 P02 P03 PO6 PO7 POS8 PO9 P10 and P12 match the parameters of the motor gt Perform auto tuning of the inverter using the function code P04 5 Wrong wiring between the pulse generator PG and the inverter
556. ssigned to this relay contact to use it for signal output Relay output 3 Switching of the normal negative logic output is applicable to the following two contact output modes Active ON Terminals 30A and 30C are closed excited if the signal is active and Active OFF Terminals 30A and 30C are opened non excited if the signal is active while they are normally closed 2 21 g ig a S 2 S S O DX DX SD Table 2 7 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued RS 485 communications port 2 Terminals on control PCB Functions A communications port transmits data through the RS 485 multipoint protocol between the inverter and a personal computer or other equipment such as a PLC For setting of the terminating resistor refer to Section 2 3 6 Setting up the slide switches RJ 45 connector for the keypad RS 485 communications port 1 Standard RJ 45 connector 1 Used to connect the inverter with the keypad The inverter supplies the power to the keypad through the pins specified below The extension cable for remote operation also uses wires connected to these pins for supplying the keypad power 2 Remove the keypad from the standard RJ 45 connector and connect the RS 485 communications cable to control the inverter through the PC or PLC Programmable Logic Controller For setting of the terminating resistor r
557. st check that the inverter is correctly wired referring to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 4 Wiring of main circuit terminals and grounding terminals 2 Check whether an alarm code or the light alarm indication 4i is displayed on the LED monitor If neither an alarm code nor light alarm indication 1 4i_ appears on the LED monitor Abnormal motor operation Go to Section 6 3 1 1 The motor does not rotate 2 The motor rotates but the speed does not increase 3 The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command 4 Speed fluctuation or current oscillation e g hunting occurs during running at constant speed 5 Grating sound is heard from the motor or the motor sound fluctuates 6 The motor does not accelerate or decelerate within the specified time 7 The motor does not restart even after the power recovers from a momentary power failure 8 The motor abnormally heats up 9 The motor does not run as expected Problems with inverter settings J Go to Section 6 3 2 1 Nothing appears on the LED monitor 2 The desired menu is not displayed 3 Data of function codes cannot be changed If an alarm code appears on the LED monitor Goo to Section 6 4 If the light alarm indication 1 4i_ appears on the LED monitor
558. st 4 alarms in alarm code Further it is also possible to display alarm information that indicates the status of the inverter when the alarm occurred Figure 3 5 shows the menu transition in Menu 6 Alarm Information and Table 3 16 lists the details of the alarm information f Li i i i OE s Lu nc Running status info at the time i i 4 List of alarm codes an alarm occurred OHIO ig e i i f 5A TE Item Switching at approx Output frequency n LL lt z 6 00 1 second intervals nnm g 3 3 Switching at approx Output current 1 second intervals BLU lt a tt Item Switching at approx Error sub code 1 second intervals ch lt lt gt e pe E A Same as above Figure 3 5 Menu Transition in Menu 6 Alarm Information Basic key operation To view the alarm information set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 Use the S and keys to display Alarm Information 5 27 3 Press the amp 9 key to proceed to a list of alarm codes e g 7 In the list of alarm codes the alarm
559. stance of the NTC thermistor gt Replace the motor Problem The LED displays the alarm 7 Possible Causes 1 The 69 amp 9 keys were held down for more than 5 seconds What to Check and Suggested Measures gt To escape from this alarm state press the amp key 31 Zo PID feedback wire break Problem The PID feedback wire is broken Possible Causes 1 The PID feedback signal wire is broken What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the PID feedback signal wires are connected correctly gt Check whether the PID feedback signal wires are connected correctly Or tighten up the related terminal screws gt Check whether any contact part bites the wire sheath 2 PID feedback related circuit affected by strong electrical noise Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of signal wires communication cables and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures gt Separate the signal wires from the main power wires as far as possible 32 25 7 Braking transistor error Problem A braking transistor error is detected Possible Causes 1 The braking transistor is broken What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether resistance of the braking resistor is correct or there is a misconnection of the resistor gt Consult your Fuji Electric representative for repair 33 7 Positioning control e
560. sted Measures 1 The voltage of the DC link bus Select 5_ under Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode on was low the keypad then check the voltage of the DC link bus which should be 200 VDC or below for three phase 200 V class series and 400 VDC or below for three phase 400 V class series gt Connect the inverter to a power supply that meets its input specifications 2 The main power is not ON Check whether the main power is turned ON while the auxiliary input power Turn the main power ON to the control circuit is supplied 3 Although power is supplied not Check the connection to the main power and check if the H72 data is set to 1 via the commercial power line factory default but via the DC link bus the gt Correct the H72 data main power down detection is enabled H72 1 3 3 appears Problem Parentheses C 7 appeared on the LED monitor during speed monitoring on the keypad Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The display data overflows the LED monitor Check whether the product of the output frequency and the display coefficient E50 exceeds 99999 gt Correct the E50 data 6 22 Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Perform daily and periodic inspections to avoid trouble and keep reliable operation of the inverter for a long time When performing inspections follow the instructions given in this chapter A WARNINGA
561. stem iM Object to which the limit is applied Frequency Limiter Frequency Limiter High F15 V f control Output frequency Vector control without with speed sensor Reference speed reference frequency Frequency Limiter Low F16 Reference frequency Reference speed reference frequency Note When the limit is applied to the reference frequency or reference speed delayed responses of control may cause an overshoot or undershoot and the frequency may temporarily go beyond the limit level W low Limiter Mode selection H63 H63 specifies the operation to be carried out when the reference frequency drops below the low level specified by F16 as follows Data for H63 The output frequency will be held at the low level specified by F16 The inverter decelerates to stop the motor Output frequency Output frequency Maximum frequency Maximum frequency 7 F03 F03 Frequency limiter Frequency limiter 7 High F15 High F15 Frequency limiter Low F16 H63 0 i Reference 1009 frequency Frequency limiter Low F16 i Reference 0 100 frequency H63 1 When you change the frequency limiter High F15 in order to raise the reference frequency be sure to change the maximum frequency F03 accordingly Maintain the following relationship among the data for frequency control F15 gt F16 F15 gt F23 and F15 gt F2
562. stems prescribes the basic safety requirements for machinery categorized according to the requirement level Category 3 represents the requirements that the machinery shall be designed with redundancy so that a single fault does not lead to the loss of the safety function Table 9 3 shows an outline of the category levels and their safety requirements For detailed requirements refer to EN 954 1 Table 9 3 Category Summary of requirements System behavior Safety related parts of control systems and or their safety The occurrence of a fault can lead to the devices and their components shall be designed loss of the safety function constructed selected assembled and combined in accordance with the relevant standards so that they can withstand the expected influence Requirements of Category B shall apply The occurrence of a fault can lead to the loss of the safety function but the probability of occurrence is lower than for Category B Well tried safety principles and well tried components shall be used Requirements of Category 1 shall apply The occurrence of a fault can lead to the loss of the safety function between the The safety function shall be checked at intervals suitable checks for the machinery Requirements of Category 1 shall apply When the single fault occurs the safety Safety related parts shall be designed so that function is still maintained Accumulation of undetected faults can asingle fau
563. stor and inverter s internal units Use this output signal DBAL to detect abnormal operation of the built in braking transistor and to cut off power to the magnetic contactor in inverter primary circuits for preventing spread of the damage Note 5 81 E30 Frequency Arrival Hysteresis width ra ed Operating condition 1 Operating condition 2 FAR 1 Both signals come ON when the FAR always goes OFF when run commands are difference between the output OFF or the reference speed is 0 frequency estimated detected speed When run commands are OFF the reference and the reference frequency reference speed is regarded as 0 so FAR3 comes ON FAR3 72 speed comes within the frequency when the output frequency estimated detected arrival hysteresis width specified by speed is within the range of 0 the frequency E30 arrival hysteresis width specified by E30 Data setting range 0 0 to 10 0 Hz The operation timings of each signal are shown below Frequency Speed Frequency arrival hysteresis width Reference gt frequency Output frequency Reference speed 0 Frequency arrival hysteresis width Run command i Frequency speed on i arrival signal FAR Frequency speed ON oN ON arrival signal 3 FAR3 E31 E32 Frequency Detection Level and Hysteresis width E36 E54 Frequency Detection 2 and 3 Level When the output frequency excee
564. t 7 VDC to 100 set the gain C32 for analog input adjustment at 143 as calculated below 10 V iv 143 Feedback 100 F 7 uA Input at terminal 12 7V 10V d E esae 100 Example 2 When the output level of the external sensor is 0 to 10 VDC Use terminal 12 since the connection terminal is for voltage input When the external sensor s output is of unipolar the inverter controls the speed within the range of 0 to 100 Feedback 100 0 Input at terminal 12 OV 10V In this example it is recommended that the dancer reference position be set around the 5 V 50 point PID Display Coefficient and Monitoring To monitor the PID command and its feedback value set the display coefficient to convert the values into easy to understand mnemonic physical quantities such as temperature LL Refer to function codes E40 and E41 for details on display coefficients and to E43 for details on monitoring 5 123 J03 to J06 PID Control P Gain Integral time D Differential time Feedback filter W P gain J03 Data setting range 0 000 to 30 000 times J03 specifies the gain for the PID processor P Proportional action An operation in which the MV manipulated value output frequency is proportional to the deviation is called P action which outputs the MV in proportion to deviation However the MV alone cannot eliminate deviation Gain is data that det
565. t flux command analog signal input monitor input watt hour Life early warning cumulative inverter run time cumulative motor run time input watt hour number of startups I O checking energy saving monitor input power input power x coefficient charges for input power Trip mode Trip history Saves and displays the last 4 trip factors and their detailed description Other features Communications RS 485 COM port 1 for keypad connection RS 485 COM port 2 on terminal block and USB port on the keypad face Protection against momentary power failure Upon detection of a momentary power failure lasting more than 15 ms this function stops the inverter output If restart after momentary power failure is selected this function invokes a restart process if power is restored within a predetermined period allowable momentary power failure time 8 10 8 4 External Dimensions 8 4 1 Standard models
566. t Mode after Momentary Power Failure Mode selection H13 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart time H14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Frequency fall rate H15 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Continuous running level H16 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Allowable momentary power failure time H92 Continuity of running P H93 Continuity of running I F14 specifies the action to be taken by the inverter such as trip and restart in the event of a momentary power failure W Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection F14 Under V f control Data for F14 Description Auto search disabled Auto search enabled 0 Trip immediately As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter issues undervoltage alarm and shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state Trip after recovery As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a from power failure momentary power failure the inverter shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state but it does not enter the undervoltage state or issue undervoltage alarm LL The moment the power is restored an undervoltage alarm is issued while the motor remains in a coast to stop state Trip after As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below t
567. t cover fixing screw Wiring guide Control circuit terminal block Main circuit terminal block a FRN11G1 40 Internal air circulation fan Keypad enclosure openable Front cover b FRN220G1B 4L1 Figure 1 2 Outside and Inside Views of Inverters A WARNING A Control circuit inal block WRISK OF INJURY OR ELECTRIC SHOCK Refer to the instruction manual before installation and operation Do not remove this cover while applying power This cover can be removed after at least 10 min of power off and after the CHARGE lamp turns off More than one live circuit See instruction manual Do not insert fingers or anything else into the inverter Securely ground earth the equipment High touch current AS SES WE Rr BE 5 se o A e cin 12 HAS Bd EE HR TEULER B OE REC TR e iB REITJERT S A e Br 10 SSL RRNA ZERTETTERE E RR e HAFREN SERITUR ERR BD RR RO T0 R1 11 T XOU BT e Bf d RT Eas dA Ej ABR RACER A e RE A SEES W 275 RBOHtNdDO e EA GUBISESORIIC Zi P BURESRUE EA CEO CHES TE o SEHA RED EEUN Eo e RED ERISA BRL vl ODL FBR F p DSY TDK UID SRB UCI SITS TE e XE ARDA SAMEA RO TO RIT iF Ue U CU C CTERESBU CS ET2 C6 e RAED RARKETH ICH MORE OREA H RWSHALBUCE e iEXICHIEEBCBRC Only type B of RCD is allowed See manual for details FO Front cover Sub nameplate Warning label Main circuit terminal
568. t is suppose b Display value at 0 then Display coefficient B 2b A Q For details about the PID control refer to the description of J01 and later LQ For the display method of the PID command and its feedback refer to the description of E43 W Display coefficient for analog input monitor By inputting analog signals from various sensors such as temperature sensors in air conditioners to the inverter you can monitor the state of peripheral devices via the communications link By using an appropriate display coefficient you can also have various values converted into physical values such as temperature and pressure before they are displayed Value displayed A PID display coefficient A E40 PID display coefficient B E41 Analog input 0 100 gt terminals 12 V2 C1 To set up the analog input monitor use function codes E61 through E63 Use E43 to choose the item to be displayed E42 LED Display Filter E42 specifies a filter time constant to be applied for displaying the output frequency output current and other running status monitored on the LED monitor on the keypad If the display varies unstably so as to be hard to read due to load fluctuation or other causes increase this filter time constant Data setting range 0 0 to 5 0 s 5 85 E43 LED Monitor Item selection E48 LED Monitor Speed monitor item E43 specifies the running status item to be monitored and displayed on the LED mon
569. t is interpreted as 0 Allocated bit data is displayed on the LED monitor as four hexadecimal digits to each On the FRENIC MEGA digital input terminals FWD and REV are assigned to bits 0 and 1 respectively Terminals X1 through X7 are assigned to bits 2 through 10 The bit is set to 1 when the corresponding input terminal is short circuited ON and it is set to 0 when the terminal is open OFF For example when FWD and X1 are ON short circuited and all the others are OFF open 77 5 is displayed on LED4 to LEDI Digital output terminals Y 1 through Y4 are assigned to bits 0 through 3 Each bit is set to 1 when the output terminal Y 1 Y2 Y3 or Y4 is short circuited with CMY ON and 0 when it is open OFF The status of the relay contact output terminal Y5A C is assigned to bit 4 It is set to 1 when the circuit between output terminals Y5A and Y5C is closed The status of the relay contact output terminals 30A B C is assigned to bit 8 It is set to 1 when the circuit between output terminals 30A and 30C is closed and 0 when the circuit between 30A and 30C is open For example if Y1 is ON Y2 through Y4 are OFF the circuit between YSA and Y5C is open and the circuit between 30A and 30C is closed then 7 77 is displayed on the LED4 through LEDI Table 3 13 presents bit assignment and an example of corresponding hexadecimal display on the 7 segment LED
570. t terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T three phase input The three phase input power lines are connected to these terminals 1 For safety make sure that the molded case circuit breaker MCCB or magnetic contactor MC is turned OFF before wiring the main circuit power input terminals 2 Connect the main circuit power supply wires L1 R L2 S and L3 T to the input terminals of the inverter via an MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB and an MC if necessary It is not necessary to align phases of the power supply wires and the input terminals of the inverter with each other With overcurrent protection Tip It is recommended to insert a manually operable magnetic contactor MC that allows you to disconnect the inverter from the power supply in an emergency e g when the protective function is activated preventing a failure or accident from causing secondary disasters Note To drive the inverter with single phase input power consult your Fuji Electric representative Auxiliary control power input terminals RO and TO for inverters with a capacity of 1 5 kW or above In general the inverter runs normally without power supplied to the auxiliary control power input terminals RO and TO If the inverter main power is shut down however no power is supplied to the control circuit so that the inverter cannot issue a variety of output signals or display on the keypad To retain an alar
571. tage for 400 V class series Sets the voltage component at an arbitrary point in the non linear V f pattern Note The factory default values for H50 and H51 differ depending on the inverter capacity For inverters with a capacity of 22 kW or below H50 0 0 Hz and H51 0 V For those with a capacity of 30 kW or above refer to the table below Destination Asia EU Inverter type FRN GIN2A FRN GIBEH 4A FRN GIB 4E Voltage 200 V class series 400 V class series 400 V class series H50 6 0 Hz 5 0 Hz 5 0 Hz H51 22 V 42 V 40 V Note A box W in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure W Maximum Output Voltage 1 F06 Data setting range 80 to 240 V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series Set the voltage for the maximum frequency 1 F03 If F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 is set to 0 settings of H50 through H53 H65 H66 and F06 do not take effect When the non linear point is below the base frequency the linear V f pattern applies when it is above the output voltage is kept constant Note F07 F08 Acceleration Time 1 Deceleration Time 1 E10 E12 E14 Acceleration Time 2 3 and 4 E11 E13 E15 Deceleration Time 2 3 and 4 H07 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern H56 Deceleration Time for Forced Stop H54 H55 Acceleration Time Deceleration Time Jogging H57
572. te Ifa Megger test is unavoidable for the main circuit observe the following instructions otherwise the inverter may be damaged A withstand voltage test may also damage the inverter if the test procedure is wrong When the withstand voltage test is necessary consult your Fuji Electric representative 1 Megger test of main circuit 1 Use a 500 VDC Megger and shut off the main power supply without fail before measurement 2 If the test voltage leaks to the control circuit due to the wiring disconnect all the wiring from the control circuit 3 Connect the main circuit terminals with a common line as shown in Figure 7 2 4 The Megger test must be limited to across the common line of the main circuit and the ground 5 Value of 5 MQ or more displayed on the Megger indicates a correct state The value is measured on an inverter alone Inverter W RO TO R1 L1 R L2 S L3 T DB P1 P NC U Megger Figure 7 2 Main Circuit Terminal Connection for Megger Test 2 Insulation test of control circuit Do not make a Megger test or withstand voltage test for the control circuit Use a high resistance range tester for the control circuit 1 Disconnect all the external wiring from the control circuit terminals 2 Perform a continuity test to the ground One MQ or a larger measurement indicates a correct state 3 Insulation test of external main circuit and sequence control circuit Disconnect all the wiring connec
573. ted to the inverter so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter 7 6 7 6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee 7 6 1 When making an inquiry Upon breakage of the product uncertainties failure or inquiries inform your Fuji Electric representative of the following information 1 Inverter type Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 2 SER No serial number of equipment Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 3 Function codes and their data that you changed Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 3 4 ROM version Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 5 Date of purchase 6 Inquiries for example point and extent of breakage uncertainties failure phenomena and other circumstances 7 6 2 Product warranty To all our customers who purchase Fuji Electric products included in this documentation Please take the following items into consideration when placing your order When requesting an estimate and placing your orders for the products included in these materials please be aware that any items such as specifications which are not specifically mentioned in the contract catalog specifications or other materials will be as mentioned below In addition the products included in these materials are limited in the use they are put to and the place where they can be used etc and may require periodic inspection Please confirm these points with your sales representative or directly with this company Furthermore regarding purchas
574. tee that a short circuiting or other fault does not occur in wiring of external safety components between terminals EN and PLC Fault examples Terminals EN and PLC are short circuited due to the wiring being caught in the door of the control panel so that a current continues to flow in terminal EN although the safety component is OFF and therefore the safety function will may NOT operate The wiring is in contact with any other wire so that a current continues to flow in terminal EN and therefore the safety function will may NOT operate 2 Other notes When configuring the product safety system with this safety stop function make a risk assessment of not only the external equipment and wiring connected to terminal EN but also the whole system including other equipment devices and wiring against the product safety system required by the machinery manufacturer under the manufacturer s responsibility in order to confirm that the whole system conforms to the product safety system required by the machinery manufacturer In addition as preventive maintenance the machinery manufacturer must perform periodical inspections to check that the product safety system properly functions To make the inverter compliant with EN954 1 Category 3 it is necessary to install the inverter on a control panel with the enclosure rating of IP54 or above This safety stop function coasts the motor to a stop When a mechanical brake is used to s
575. tep 2 S002 YI Y Y 2003 3003 Output of step 3 SO03 Y vY vi v Y 2004 3004 Output of step 4 S004 Y vY vi v Y 2005 3005 Output of step 5 SO05 Y p Up Y 2006 3006 Output of step 6 S006 YVI Y Y 2007 3007 Output of step 7 S007 Y vY vi v Y 5 20 Code Name Data setting range Change when running Data copying Default setting Drive control Vit PG Vif w o PG Torque control Refer to page U03 U04 U05 Logic circuit Type of timer Timer 4006 5006 Termina Output of step 8 Output of step 9 Output of step 10 Terminal X1 input signal X2 input signal X3 input signal X4 input signal X5 input signal X6 input signal X7 input signal FWD input signal REV input signal Final run command Termina Termina Termina Termina Termina Terminal FI Terminal Final FWD run command FL Fl Final REV run command During acceleration During deceleration Under anti regenerative control Within dancer reference position Alarm factor presence X7 WD REV FL RUN WD FL REV DACC DDEC REGA DR REF ALM ACT Setting the value in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic output to a terminal True if OFF lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt K lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt
576. ter output voltage should be sufficiently higher than the motor induced voltage Generally the voltage difference is about 20 V for 200 V class series about 40 V for 400 V class series The voltage the inverter can output is at the same level as the inverter input voltage Configure these voltages correctly in accordance with the motor specifications When a Fuji VG motor exclusively designed for vector control is used configuring the inverter for using a VG motor with P02 Rated capacity and P99 Motor 1 Selection automatically configures F04 Base Frequency 1 and F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 When enabling the vector control without speed sensor using a general purpose motor set the F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 data at the rated voltage of the motor The voltage difference described above is specified by function code P56 Induced voltage factor under vector control Generally there is no need to modify the initial setting 5 37 m Non linear V f Patterns 1 2 and 3 for Frequency H50 H52 and H65 Data setting range 0 0 cancel 0 1 to 500 0 Hz Set the frequency component at an arbitrary point in the non linear V f pattern Note Setting 0 0 to H50 H52 or H65 disables the non linear V f pattern operation m Non linear V f Patterns 1 2 and 3 for Voltage H51 H53 and H66 Data setting range 0 to 240 V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 0 to 500 V Output an AVR controlled vol
577. ter to separate the inverter from the power supply apart from the MCCB or RCD ELCB when necessary Connect a surge absorber in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter The RO and TO terminals are provided for inverters with a capacity of 1 5 kW or above To retain an alarm output signal ALM issued on inverter s programmable output terminals by the protective function or to keep the keypad alive even if the main power has shut down connect these terminals to the power supply lines Without power supply to these terminals the inverter can run Normally no need to be connected Use these terminals when the inverter is equipped with a high power factor regenerative PWM converter RHC series When connecting an optional DC reactor DCR remove the jumper bar from the terminals P1 and P Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW in LD mode and inverters with 75 kW or above require a DCR to be connected Be sure to connect it to those inverters Use a DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity or when there are thyristor driven loads in the same power supply line Inverters with a capacity of 7 5 kW or below have a built in braking resistor DBR between the terminals P and DB When connecting an external braking resistor DBR be sure to disconnect the built in one A grounding terminal for a motor Use this terminal if needed Fo
578. tes enough torque required during time was too short acceleration deceleration That torque is calculated from the moment of inertia for the load and the acceleration deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 through E15 and H56 gt Enable the current limiter F43 and torque limiter F40 F41 E16 and E17 gt Increase the inverter capacity 6 Malfunction caused by noise Check if noise control measures are appropriate e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures For details refer to the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Appendix A gt Enable the Auto reset H04 gt Connect a surge absorber to magnetic contactor s coils or other solenoids if any causing noise 2 Ground fault Problem A ground fault current flew from the output terminal of the inverter Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Inverter output terminal s grounded ground fault Disconnect the wiring from the output terminals U V and W and perform a Megger test gt Remove the grounded parts including replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor 3 Gn Overvoltage Problem The DC link bus voltage was over the detection level of overvoltage al it Overvoltage occurred during acceleration Overvoltage occurred during deceleration Overvoltage occurred during running at constant speed
579. th capacitance probe 1 2 No abnormalities 3 The discharge time should not be shorter than the one specified by the replacement manual Transformer and reactor Check for abnormal roaring noise and odor Auditory visual and olfactory inspection No abnormalities Magnetic contactor and relay 1 Check for chatters during operation 2 Check that contact surface is not rough 1 Auditory inspection 2 Visual inspection 1 2 No abnormalities Printed circuit board Control circuit 1 Check for loose screws and connectors 2 Check for odor and discoloration 3 Check for cracks breakage deformation and remarkable rust 4 Check the capacitors for electrolyte leaks and deformation 1 Retighten 2 Olfactory and visual inspection 3 4 Visual inspection 1 2 3 4 No abnormalities Cooling fan 1 Check for abnormal noise and excessive vibration 2 Check for loose bolts 3 Check for discoloration caused by overheat 1 Auditory and visual inspection or turn manually be sure to turn the power OFF 2 Retighten 3 Visual inspection 1 Smooth rotation 2 3 No abnormalities Cooling system Ventilation path Check the heat sink intake and exhaust ports for clogging and foreign materials Visual inspection No abnormalities Remove dust accumulating on the inverter with a vacuum cleaner If the inverter is stained wipe
580. that the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below Otherwise an electric shock could occur Maintenance inspection and parts replacement should be made only by qualified persons Take off the watch rings and other metallic objects before starting work Use insulated tools Otherwise an electric shock or injuries could occur Never modify the inverter Doing so could cause an electric shock or injuries Disposal ANCAUTION Treat the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it Otherwise injuries could occur GENERAL PRECAUTIONS Drawings in this manual may be illustrated without covers or safety shields for explanation of detail parts Restore the covers and shields in the original state and observe the description in the manual before starting operation Icons The following icons are used throughout this manual as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can result in accidents This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or operations Note This icon indicates information which if not heeded can result in the inverter not operating to full efficiency as well Tip E This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information
581. the starting frequency and then start up the inverter again Setting the speed command at below the starting and stop frequencies So saw and turning a run command ON enables the zero speed control The table below shows the conditions for zero speed control to be enabled or disabled ze c z O O Z Q O 0 m o Speed command Run command Data for d24 Operation Stop Gate OFF Stop Gate OFF Zero speed control Below the starting and At startup stop frequencies Zero speed control Stop Gate OFF At stop Below the stop frequency Speed command lt Starting frequency and Stop frequency Speed command lt Stop frequency Speed command Starting frequency and Stop frequency Speed command Starting frequency 1 Holding time F24 Zero speed control Zero speed control d24 1 eN Speed S 4 ON Gate ON un comman Gate OFF Gate OFF W Stop Frequency Detection mode F38 Under vector control with speed sensor Data setting range 0 Detected speed 1 Reference speed F38 specifies whether the inverter judges when to shutdown its output by the detected speed or reference speed Although the inverter generally judges it by the detected speed if a load exceeding the inverter capability such as external excess load is applied the inverter may not stop because the motor may not stop normally and the detected speed may not reach the stop fre
582. the critical value of 35 mA AC or 10 mA DC IEC 61800 5 1 the minimum cross sectional area of the PE conductor should be 10 mm Cu conductors 16 mm Al conductors Input Power Three phase 200 V Table 9 1 Leakage Current of EMC Filter Built in Type of Inverters Inverter type 1 FRNO 4G1E 20 FRNO 75G1E 20 Leakage current mA FRN1 5G1E 20 FRN2 2GIE2LI FRN3 7G1E 20 FRN5 5GIE2LI FRN7 5G1E 20 FRNIIGIE 2LI FRNISGIE 2LI FRNI8 5GIE2LI FRN22G1E 20 FRN30GIE 2LI FRN37GIE 2LI FRNA45GIE 2LI FRNSSGIE 20 FRN75GIE 2LI FRN90GIE 2LI Inverter type 1 Leakage current Three phase 400 V FRNO 4G1E 40 FRNO 75G1E 40 mA FRN1 5G1E 40 FRN2 2G1E 40 FRN3 7G1E 4A FRN4 0G1E 4E FRNS S5G1E 40 FRN7 5G1E 40 FRNIIGIE 40 FRNISGIE 40 FRN18 5G1E 40 FRN22GIE 4LI FRN30GIE 4LI FRN37GIE 4LI FRNA45GIE 4LI 11 FRN55GIE 4LI FRN75GIE 4LI FRN90GIE 4LI FRNII10GIE 4LI FRNI32GIE 4LI FRNI60GIE 4LI FRN200G1E 40 FRN220GIE 4LI FRN280GIE 4LI FRN315GIE 4LI FRN355GIE 4LI FRN400G1E 40 FRN500GIE 4LI FRN630GIE 4LI FRN4 0GI1E 4E for the EU in which the nominal applied motor rating is 4 0 kW A box L1 in the above table replaces A or E depending on the shipping destin
583. the judgment procedure according to the keypad type and the measuring conditions following the flowchart given on the next page 7 3 Selection of life judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor What keypad type is mounted on the inverter See Multi function keypad Remote keypad YES Setting up the load conditions in ordinary operation See Modify the measuring conditions applied at NO shipment Measuring under the conditions applied at shipment See Measurement under Comparison with the initial ordinary operating capacitance at shipment conditions when the power See 1 is turned OFF See 2 Ina machine system where the inverter main power is rarely shut down the inverter does not measure the discharging time For such an inverter the ON time counting is provided The ON time counting result can be represented as elapsed lr 27 time 5 75 and time remaining before the end of life 5_ 7 as shown in Table 7 3 On the LED monitor Note When the inverter uses an auxiliary control power input the load conditions widely differ so that the discharging time cannot be accurately measured To prevent unintended measuring the discharging time measurement can be disabled with the function code H98 Bit 4 0 1 Measuring the capacitance of DC link bus capacitor in comparison with initial one at shipment When bit 3 of H98 data is 0 the measuring pr
584. the power is turned ON next time the new setting will be used as an initial reference frequency Tip In addition to the saving with the key described above auto saving is also available when E64 0 If you have set FOl data to 0 or 8 but have selected a frequency command source other than frequency command 1 ie frequency command 2 frequency command via communication or multi frequency command then the and keys are disabled to change the current frequency command even in Running mode Pressing either of these keys just displays the current reference frequency e When you start specifying the reference frequency or any other parameter with the key the least significant digit on the display blinks that is the cursor lies in the least significant digit Holding down the key changes data in the least significant digit and generates a carry while the cursor remains in the least significant digit e While the least significant digit is blinking by pressing the key holding down the key for more than 1 second moves the cursor from the least significant digit to the most significant digit Further holding it down moves the cursor to the next lower digit This cursor movement allows you to easily move the cursor to the desired digit and change the data in higher digits Setting F01 data to 8 enables the balanceless bumpless switching When the frequency command source is switched to the keypad from any
585. their respective function codes If P04 tuning is performed for instance the tuning results will be saved into P codes Motor 1 parameters 2 Preparation of machinery Perform appropriate preparations on the motor and its load such as disengaging the coupling from the motor and deactivating the safety devices 3 Tuning Tune while the motor is rotating under vector control QD Set function code P04 to 3 and press the amp key The blinking of 7 on the LED monitor will slow down Enter a run command The factory default is amp key on the keypad for forward rotation To switch to reverse rotation or to select the terminal signal FWD or REV as a run command change the data of function code F02 The moment a run command is entered the display of 7 lights up and tuning starts with the motor stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 40 to 75 s Next the motor is accelerated to approximately 50 of the base frequency and then tuning starts Upon completion of measurements the motor decelerates to a stop Estimated tuning time Acceleration time 20 to 75 s Deceleration time e After the motor decelerates to a stop in above tuning continues with the motor stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 20 to 35 s The motor is again accelerated to approximately 50 of the base frequency and then tuning starts Upon completion of measurements the motor decelerates to a stop Estimated tuning time Accelerat
586. this data when the control target machinery is oscillatory due to deflection of a drive belt or other causes so that ripples oscillatory components are superimposed on the detected speed causing hunting undesirable oscillation of the system and blocking the PI processor gain from increasing resulting in a slow response speed of the inverter In addition if the lower encoder PG resolution makes the system oscillatory try to modify this data Increasing the time constant stabilizes the detected speed and raises the PI processor gain even with ripples superimposed on the detected speed However the detected speed itself delays resulting in a slower speed response larger overshoot or hunting W P gain 003 Data setting range 0 1 to 200 0 times integral time d04 Data setting range 0 001 to 9 999 s d03 and d04 specify the gain and integral time of the speed regulator PI processor respectively P gain Definition of P gain 1 0 is that the torque command is 100 100 torque output of each inverter capacity when the speed deviation reference speed actual speed is 100 equivalent to the maximum speed Determine the P gain according to moment of inertia of machinery loaded to the motor output shaft Larger moment of inertia needs larger P gain to keep the flat response in whole operations Specifying a larger P gain improves the quickness of control response but may cause a motor speed overshooting or hunting undes
587. ticore cable for the purpose of handling their wirings together Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output secondary circuit Doing so could cause a fire Be sure to connect an optional DC reactor DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the inverter rated capacity Otherwise a fire could occur Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code Be sure to ground the inverter s grounding terminals G Otherwise an electric shock or a fire could occur Qualified electricians should carry out wiring Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power OFF Otherwise an electric shock could occur Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter unit Otherwise an electric shock or injuries could occur Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected Otherwise a fire or an accident could occur Do not connect the power supply wires to output terminals U V and W When connecting a DC braking resistor DBR never connect it to terminals other than terminals P and DB Doing so could cause fire or an accident n general sheaths of the control signal wires are not specifically designed to withstand a high voltage 1 e reinforced insulation is not applied Therefore if a control s
588. tion of Commercial Power Switching Sequence J22 specifies whether or not to automatically switch to commercial power operation when an inverter alarm occurs Data for J22 Sequence upon occurrence of an alarm 0 Keep inverter operation Stop due to alarm 1 Automatically switch to commercial power operation Note The sequence operates normally also even when W52 1 is not used and the main power of the inverter is supplied at all times Using SW52 1 requires connecting the input terminals RO and TO for an auxiliary control power Without the connection turning SW52 1 OFF loses also the control power The sequence operates normally even if an alarm occurs in the inverter except when the inverter itself is broken Therefore for a critical facility be sure to install an emergency switching circuit outside the inverter Turning ON both the magnetic contactor MC 88 at the commercial power side and the MC 52 2 at the inverter output side at the same time supplies main power mistakenly from the output secondary side of the inverter which may damage the inverter To prevent it be sure to set up an interlocking logic outside the inverter 5 75 Examples of Sequence Circuits 1 Standard sequence Main power Commercial power 7 z selection switch Operation selection switch E A 3S run inverter is selected Run RO TO CM FWD x2 xt HLD ISW50 3S 43 Inverter SW52 1 SW52 2 SW88 ALM CME Y3 Y2
589. to 400 kW F27 Tone 0 Level 0 Inactive Y Y 0 Y Y N N Y 1 Level 1 2 Level2 3 Level 3 F29 Analog Output FM1 0 Output in voltage 0 to 10 VDC Y Y 0 Y Y vYi v Y 5 54 Mode selection 4 Output in current 4 to 20 mA DC F30 Voltage adjustment 0 to 300 Y Y 100 Y Y Y Y Y F31 Function Select a function to be monitored from the followings Y Y 0 Y Y vYi v Y e 0 Output frequency 1 before slip compensation gt 1 Output frequency 2 after slip compensation m 2 Output current 3 Output voltage eo 4 Output torque 5 Load factor mm 6 Input power c 7T PID feedback amount z 8 PG feedback value 9 9 DC link bus voltage 10 Universal AO 2 13 Motor output 14 Calibration Q 15 PID command SV 2 16 PID output MV m F32 Analog Output FM2 0 Output in voltage 0 to 10 VDC Y Y 0 Y Y YHY Y n Mode selection 4 Output in current 4 to 20 mA DC F34 Voltage adjustment 0 to 300 Y Y 100 Y Y Y Y Y F35 Function Select a function to be monitored from the followings Y Y 0 Y Y Y Y Y 0 Output frequency 1 before slip compensation 1 Output frequency 2 after slip compensation 2 Output current 3 Output voltage 4 Output torque 5 Load factor 6 Input power 7T PID feedback amount 8 PG feedback value 9 DC link bus voltage 10 Universal AO 13 Motor output 14 Calibration 15
590. to Check and Suggested Measures Check if the screws on the main power input terminals have become loose gt Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque 3 Interphase voltage unbalance between three phases was too large Measure the input voltage gt Connect an AC reactor ACR to lower the voltage unbalance between input phases gt Increase the inverter capacity 4 Overload cyclically occurred Measure the ripple wave of the DC link bus voltage gt Ifthe ripple is large increase the inverter capacity 5 Single phase voltage was input to the three phase input inverter Check the inverter type 3 Apply three phase power The FRENIC MEGA of three phase input cannot be driven by single phase power C Note The input phase loss protection can be disabled with the function code H98 Protection Maintenance Function 6 G amp Output phase loss Problem Output phase loss occurred Possible Causes 1 Inverter output wires are broken What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the output current gt Replace the output wires 2 The motor winding is broken Measure the output current gt Replace the motor 3 The terminal screws for inverter output were not tight enough Check if any screws on the inverter output terminals have become loose gt Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque 4 Asingle phase motor has been connected 7 7
591. to set function code E52 to 1 Function code data check mode or 2 Full menu mode The menu transition in Menu 2 Data Checking is just like that in Menu 0 Quick Setup deu QVdA3 AHL ONISN NOILV H3dO 3 4 4 Monitoring the running status Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Menu 3 Drive Monitoring is used to monitor the running status during maintenance and trial running The display items for Drive Monitoring are listed in Table 3 6 Figure 3 3 shows the menu transition in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring List of monitoring items Running status info QC a JE G 300 4 eet OJO e 3 a gt 49 50 Output frequency J Lt LI zi Output current f c3 ul 89 dp d 328 gt Aime Position deviation J CUO le LILILILI pulse 4 multiplied Figure 3 3 Menu Transition in Menu 3 Drive Monitoring Basic key operation To monitor the running status in Drive monitoring set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode beforehand 1 Turn the inverter ON It automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the amp key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears In this example is displayed 2 Use the and keys to display Drive Monitoring i t 3 Press the amp key to proceed to a list of monitoring items e g
592. to set the protection level Use Cu wire only 3 Use Class 1 wire only for control circuits Short circuit rating Suitable For Use On A Circuit Of Delivering Not More Than 100 000 rms Symmetrical Amperes 240 Volts Maximum for 200V class input 22 kW or less 230 Volts maximum for 200V class input 30 kW or above when protected by Class J Fuses or a Circuit Breaker having an interrupting rating not less than 100 000 rms Symmetrical Amperes 240 Volts Maximum Models FRN rated for 200V class input Suitable For Use On A Circuit Of Delivering Not More Than 100 000 rms Symmetrical Amperes 480 Volts Maximum when protected by Class J Fuses or a Circuit Breaker having an interrupting rating not less than 100 000 rms Symmetrical Amperes 480 Volts Maximum Models FRN rated for 400V class input Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any additional local codes Field wiring connections must be made by a UL Listed and CSA Certified closed loop terminal connector sized for the wire gauge involved Connector must be fixed using the crimp tool specified by the connector manufacturer All circuits with terminals L1 R L2 S L3 T RO TO R1 TI must have a common disconnect and be connected to the same pole of the disconnect if the terminals are connected to the power supply MCCB Disconnect or MC
593. tomatic lowering of carrier frequency Before the inverter trips due to an abnormal surrounding temperature or output current this function automatically lowers the carrier frequency to avoid a trip Dew condensation prevention Even when the inverter is in stopped state this function feeds DC current across the motor at certain intervals to raise the motor temperature for preventing dew condensation Motor overload early warning When the inverter output current has exceeded the specified level this function issues the Motor overload early warning signal OL before the thermal overload protection function causes the inverter to trip for motor protection This function exclusively applies to the 1st motor Auto reset When the inverter has stopped because of a trip this function allows the inverter to automatically reset and restart itself The number of retries and the latency between stop and reset can be specified Forced stop Upon receipt of the Force to stop terminal command STOP this function interrupts the run and other commands currently applied in order to forcedly decelerate the inverter to a stop Surge protection This function protects the inverter from a surge voltage invaded between main circuit power lines and the ground 6 1 9 deyo ONILOOHS3 I8nO4 L Table 6 1 Abnormal States Detectable Heavy Alarm and Light Alarm Objects Instantaneous overcurrent Hea
594. top or hold the motor for the sake of the product safety system of whole system do not use the inverter s control signals such as output from terminal Y Using control signals does not satisfy the safety standards because of software intervention Use safety components complying with EN954 1 Category 3 or higher to activate mechanical brakes The safety shutdown circuit between terminal EN input section and inverter s output shutdown section is dual configured redundant circuit so that an occurrence of a single fault does not detract the safety stop function If a single fault is detected in the safety shutdown circuit the inverter coasts the motor to a stop even with the terminal EN PLC state being ON as well as outputting an alarm to external equipment Note that the alarm output function is not guaranteed to all of single faults This safety stop function may not completely shut off the power supply to the motor electrically Before performing wiring or maintenance jobs be sure to disconnect isolate the input power to the inverter and wait at least 5 minutes for 22 kW or below of inverters and at least 10 minutes for 30 kW or above High Performance Multifunction Inverter FRENIC MEGA Instruction Manual First Edition September 2008 Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd The purpose of this instruction manual is to provide accurate information in handling setting up and operating of the FRENIC MEGA series of inverters Please
595. tor is connected phase loss or line to line voltage unbalance may not be detected because of the relatively small stress on the apparatus connected to the main circuit Output phase loss protection 7 Bit 2 Upon detection of phase loss in the output while the inverter is running this feature stops the inverter and displays an IC alarm Li Note Where a magnetic contactor is installed in the inverter output circuit if the magnetic contactor goes OFF during operation all the phases will be lost In such a case this protection feature does not work Judgment threshold on the life of DC link bus capacitor Bit 3 Bit 3 is used to select the threshold for judging the life of the DC link bus capacitor the factory default level or user setup level Note ifthe multi function keypad is mounted the inverter does not perform automatic capacitance measurement of the DC link bus capacitor using the factory default level since the inverter s conditions are different from the ones applied at shipment It is therefore necessary to select the user setup level Using the user setup level requires performing the setup procedure for the user ordinary operation beforehand Refer to the description of H42 Judgment on the life of DC link bus capacitor Bit 4 Whether the DC link bus capacitor has reached its life is determined by measuring the length of time for discharging after power OFF The discharging time is determined by the
596. trol for frequency setting it is necessary to set F01 data to 7 and assign the UP and DOWN commands to any of digital input terminals X1 to X7 FWD and REV with any of E01 to E07 data 17 or 18 UP DOWN f Function Data 17 Data 18 OFF OFF Keep the current output frequency ON OFF Increase the output frequency with the acceleration time currently specified OFF ON Decrease the output frequency with the deceleration time currently specified ON ON Keep the current output frequency W Specifying the initial value for the UP DOWN control Specify the initial value to start the UP DOWN control Data for H61 Initial value to start the UP DOWN control Mode fixing the value at 0 The inverter automatically clears the value to 0 when restarted including powered ON Speed up by the UP command Mode holding the final output frequency in the previous UP DOWN control The inverter internally holds the last output frequency set by the UP DOWN control and applies the held frequency at the next restart including powering ON At the time of restart if an UP or DOWN terminal command is entered before the internal frequency reaches the output frequency saved in the memory the inverter saves the current output frequency into the memory and starts the UP DOWN control with the new frequency Pressing one of these keys overwrites the frequency held in the inverter Note 5 32 G deyo
597. tuning results of motor parameters will be automatically saved into their respective function codes If P04 tuning is performed for instance the tuning results will be saved into P codes Motor 1 parameters 2 Preparation of machinery Perform appropriate preparations on the motor and its load such as disengaging the coupling from the motor and deactivating the safety devices 3 Tuning QD Set function code P04 to 1 or 2 and press the 9 key The blinking of or on the LED monitor will slow down Enter a run command The factory default is GY key on the keypad for forward rotation To switch to reverse rotation or to select the terminal signal FWD or REV as a run command change the data of function code F02 8 The moment a run command is entered the display of or lights up and tuning starts with the motor stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 40 to 80 s 0 If P04 2 after the tuning in above the motor is accelerated to approximately 50 of the base frequency and then tuning starts Upon completion of measurements the motor decelerates to a stop Estimated tuning time Acceleration time 20 to 75 s Deceleration time e If P04 2 after the motor decelerates to a stop in above tuning continues with the motor stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 40 to 80 s If the terminal signal FWD or REV is selected as a run command F02 1 r appears upon completion of the measurements Tur
598. ty of 22 kW or below 20 00 s for those with 30 kW or above 3 The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity See Table B 7 The motor parameters are automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping des ination See Table C 8 The factory default differs depending upon the inverter s capacity See the table under m Non linear V f Patterns 1 2 and 3 for Voltage in the description of F04 5 11 Drive control 9 These function codes are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 10 0 10 for 200 V class series of inverters with a capacity of 37 kW or above 11 2 for 200 V class series of inverters with a capacity of 37 kW or above 5 12 o E s 2g 2 Refer Code Name Data setting range oe 8 2 ore to SE n g vk PG w o w Torque page 5 Vif PG PG control H61 UP DOWN Control 0 0 00 Hz N Y 1 Y vY vi v N 5 29 Initial frequency setting 1 Last UP DOWN command value on releasing the run 5 109 command H63 Low Limiter Mode selection 0 Limit by F16 Frequency limiter Low and continue to Y Y 0 Y Y vi v N 5 49 run 5 109 1 If the output frequency lowers below the one limited by F16 Frequency limiter Low decelerate to stop the motor H64 Lower limiting frequency
599. ty of torque command Run command ON Torque polarity Positive FWD Positive torque Forward driving Reverse braking REV Negative torque Forward braking Reverse driving Negative FWD Negative torque Forward braking Reverse driving REV Positive torque Forward driving Reverse braking W Cancel torque control Hz TRQ E01 to E07 data 23 When the torque control is enabled H18 2 or 3 assigning the terminal command Hz TRQ Cancel torque control to any of the general purpose digital input terminals data 23 enables switching between the speed control and the torque control Cancel torque control signal Hz TRO Operation ON Cancel torque control Enable speed control OFF Enable torque control W Torque Control Speed limits 1 and 2 d32 d33 Torque control controls the motor generating torque not the speed The speed is determined secondarily by load torque mechanical inertia and other factors To prevent a dangerous situation however the speed limit functions d32 and d33 are provided inside the inverter Note If a regenerative load which is not generated usually is generated under droop control or if function codes are incorrectly configured the motor may rotate at an unintended high speed You can specify the overspeed level at any value to protect the mechanical system Forward overspeed level Maximum frequency 1 F03 x Speed limit 1 d32 x 120 96 Reverse overspeed level
600. ue Detection 2 Low Torque Detection Level and Timer E78 specifies the operation level and E79 specifies the timer for the output signal TDI E80 specifies the operation level and E81 specifies the timer for the output signal TD2 or U TL Output signal Assigned data Operation level Range 0 to 300 Range 0 01 to 600 00 s W Torque detected 1 TD1 Torque detected 2 TD2 The output signal TDI or TD2 comes ON when the torque value calculated by the inverter or torque command exceeds the level specified by E78 or E80 Torque detection Level for the period specified by E79 or E81 Torque detection Timer respectively The signal turns OFF when the calculated torque drops below the level specified by E78 or E80 minus 5 of the motor rated torque The minimum ON duration is 100 ms Calculated torque or torque command TD1 TD2 W Low output torque detected U TL This output signal comes ON when the torque value calculated by the inverter or torque command drops below the level specified by E80 Low torque detection Level for the period specified by E81 Low torque detection Timer The signal turns OFF when the calculated torque exceeds the level specified by E80 plus 5 of the motor rated torque The minimum ON duration is 100 ms 5 91 E98 Calculated torque or torque comand eee eee ee nas Level 5 Timer _ U TL In the inverter s low frequency op
601. ue limit value A Use the analog input as the torque limit value specified by function code data 7 7 or 8 Analog torque limit value B Input specifications 200 10 V or 20 mA If the same setting is made for different terminals the priority order is E61 gt E62 gt E63 W Torque limiter levels specified via communications link S10 S11 The torque limiter levels can be changed via the communications link Function codes S10 and S11 exclusively reserved for the communications link respond to function codes F40 and F41 W Switching torque limiters The torque limiters can be switched by the function code setting and the terminal command TLZ TLI Select torque limiter level 2 1 assigned to any of the digital input terminals To assign the TLZ TL1 as the terminal function set any of E01 through E07 to 14 If no TL2 TL1 is assigned torque limiter levels 1 1 and 1 2 F40 and F41 take effect by default Torque limiter 1 1 F40 S10 Analog torque limit value A Torque limiter 2 1 E16 O ON Torque limiter A TLA E61 to E63 Torque limiter 1 2 F41 S11 Analog torque limit value B o Torque limiter 2 2 E17 O ON Torque limiter B TLB 5 61 F42 W Torque limiter Operating conditions H73 H73 specifies whether the torque limiter is enabled or disabled during acceleration deceleration and running at constant speed Data for H73 During accelerating de
602. uency 2 A06 Electronic Thermal Overload 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling Y Y 1 YiY Y v Y Protection for Motor 2 fan Select motor characteristics 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with separately powered cooling fan A07 Overload detection level 0 00 Disable Y Y1Y2 4 Ye pox ONE X Y 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the motor A08 Thermal time constant 0 5 to 75 0 min Y Y 5 ball i alib SZ Y A09 DC Braking 2 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Y Y 0 0 YiY Y v N Braking starting frequency A10 Braking level 0 to 100 HD mode 0 to 80 MD LD mode Y Y 0 Y Y YY N A11 Braking time 10 00 Disable 0 01 to 30 00 s Y Y 000 YY Y Y N A12 Starting Frequency 2 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Y Y 0 5 YILI Y v N A13 Load Selection 0 Variable torque load N Y 1 YIYI NIY N A Ls Roost 1 Constant torque load uto energy SAVN prato 2 Auto torque boost 3 Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC 4 Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC 5 Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during ACC DEC A14 Drive Control Selection 2 0 V f control with slip compensation inactive N Y 0 YlY Y v Y 1 Dynamic torque vector control 2 VIf control with slip compensation active 3 V f control with speed sensor 4 Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor 5 Vector control without speed sensor 6 Vector control with
603. ulse count factor 1 d62 f Hz Frequency reference Np kp s Input pulse rate In the case of A and B phases with 90 degree phase difference note that the pulse train rate is not the one 4 multiplied 5 34 F02 The pulse train sign forward reverse rotation pulse and A B phase difference define the polarity of the pulse train input Combination of the polarity of the pulse train input and the FWD REV command determines the rotational direction of the motor The table below shows the relationship between the polarity of the pulse train input and the motor rotational direction Pulse Train Polarity Run command Motor rotational direction Positive FWD Run forward command Forward Positive REV Run reverse command Reverse Negative FWD Run forward command Reverse Negative REV Run reverse command Forward Mounting an optional PG interface card automatically switches the pulse train input source to the card and New disables the input from the terminal X7 W Filter time constant d61 d61 specifies a filter time constant for pulse train input Choose an appropriate value for the time constant taking into account the response speed of the mechanical system since a large time constant slows down the response When the reference frequency fluctuates due to small number of pulses specify a larger time constant Switching frequency command Using the terminal command Hz2 Hz1 ass
604. umber LVL Exporting E Storage environment The storage environment in which the inverter is stored after purchase is different from the operation environment For details refer to the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Chapter 2 1 3 B Wiring precautions 1 Route the wiring of the control circuit terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as possible Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions 2 Fix the control circuit wires inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the main circuit such as the terminal block of the main circuit 3 If more than one motor is to be connected to a single inverter the wiring length should be the sum of the length of the wires to the motors 4 Precautions for high frequency leakage currents If the wiring distance between an inverter and a motor is long high frequency currents flowing through stray capacitance across wires of phases may cause an inverter overheat overcurrent trip increase of leakage current or it may not assure the accuracy in measuring leakage current Depending on the operating condition an excessive leakage current may damage the inverter To avoid the above problems when directly connecting an inverter to a motor keep the wiring distance 50 m or less for inverters with a capacity of 3 7 kW or below and 100 m or less for inverters with a higher capacity If the wiring distance longer than the specified above is required lower the carrier fre
605. unt The PID control expands the application area of the inverter to the process control e g flow control pressure control and temperature control and the speed control e g dancer control If PID control is enabled JO1 1 2 or 3 the frequency control of the inverter is switched from the drive frequency command generator block to the PID command generator block M Mode Selection J01 Data for JO1 Function JO1 selects the PID control mode Disable Enable Process control normal operation Enable Process control inverse operation Enable Dancer control Manual speed command 9 O Frequency command PID processor 4 PID process command PID feedback PID process control block diagram Take up roll Fixed roll Fixed roll Rotation speed control Upper limit position Reference position Position data Ove Inverter ex 0 V to 10V Potentiometer Lower limit position Speed command Primary command Upper limit Ne PID command Dancer reference position processor Lower limit PID feedback B 4 Dancer position feedback PID dancer control block diagram Using J01 enables switching between normal and inverse operations against the PID control output so you can specify an increase decrease of the motor rotating speed to the difference error component between the commanded input and feedback amounts
606. ure 2 8 Connection Example of Residual current operated Protective Device RCD Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker ELCB 2 15 When connecting a PWM converter with an inverter do not connect the power supply line directly to terminals RO and T0 If a PWM is to be connected insert an insulation transformer or auxiliary B contacts of a magnetic contactor at the power supply side For connection examples at the PWM converter side refer to the PWM Converter Instruction Manual Molded case circuit breaker or Residual current operated protectice device Earth leakage circuit breaker Note Filter Boost PWM FRN G1S reactor reactor converter R P 9 P S Magnetic contactor Insulation transformer 100 VA Magnetic contactor Auxiliary B contacts Figure 2 9 Connection Example of PWM Converter Auxiliary fan power input terminals R1 and T1 The 200 V class series with 37 kW or above and 400 V class series with 75 kW or above are equipped with terminals R1 and T1 Only if the inverter works with the DC linked power input whose source is a PWM converter these terminals are used to feed AC power to the fans while they are not used in any power system of ordinary configuration In this case set up the fan power supply switching connectors CN R and CN W Terminal rating 200 to 220 VAC 50 Hz 200 to 230 VAC 60 Hz Maximum current 1 0 A 200 V class series with 37 kW or above 380 to 440 VAC 50 Hz 380 to 480 VAC 60 H
607. urned OFF immediately 3 If a run command is present after an elapse of t1 0 2 sec time specified by H13 the commercial power circuit SW88 is turned ON Switching from commercial power operation to inverter operation ISW50 ISW60 OFF gt ON 1 The inverter primary circuit SW52 1 is turned ON immediately 2 The commercial power circuit SW88 is turned OFF immediately 3 After an elapse of t2 0 2 sec time required for the main circuit to get ready from when W52 1 is turned ON the inverter secondary circuit SW52 2 is turned ON 4 After an elapse of t3 0 2 sec time specified by H13 from when SW52 2 is turned ON the inverter harmonizes once the motor that has been freed from the commercial power to the commercial power frequency Then the motor returns to the operation driven by the inverter Inverter Commercial power operation i operation i Inverter operation ISW50 60 ON ON SW52 1 ON ON i 1 t2 1 o SW52 2 ON ON tt snas NUM 1 PS Inverter operation Inverter drive at Commercial commercial power power frequency frequency Motor pou ena ogg nan o nens speed Om E i i Frequency set by inverter tl 0 2 sec Time specified by H13 Restart mode after momentary power failure t2 0 2 sec Time required for the main circuit to get ready t3 02 sec Time specified by H13 Restart mode after momentary power failure Selec
608. urns to 1 y98 Bus Link Function Mode selection Refer to H30 y99 Loader Link Function Mode selection This is a link switching function for FRENIC Loader Rewriting the data of y99 to enable RS 485 communications from Loader helps Loader send the inverter the frequency and or run commands Since the data to be set in the function code of the inverter is automatically set by Loader no keypad operation is required While Loader is selected as the source of the run command if the computer runs out of control and cannot be stopped by a stop command sent from Loader disconnect the RS 485 communications cable from the port 1 or the USB cable connect a keypad instead and reset the y99 data to 0 This setting 0 in y99 means that the run and frequency command source specified by function code H30 takes place instead of FRENIC Loader Note that the inverter cannot save the setting of y99 When power is turned off the data in y99 is lost y99 is reset to 0 Function Data for y99 Frequency command Follow H30 and y98 data Run command Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS 485 link FRENIC Loader Follow H30 and y98 data Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS 485 link FRENIC Loader Via RS 485 link FRENIC Loader 5 149 Via RS 485 link FRENIC Loader Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 Protective Functions The FRENIC MEGA series of inverters has various protective functions as listed below to prev
609. ustomizable Logic Timer Monitor Step selection The customizable logic function allows the user to form a logic circuit for digital input output signals modify them arbitrarily and configure a simple relay sequence inside the inverter In a customizable logic one step component is composed of 2 inputs and 1 output logical operation including timer and a total of ten steps can be used to configure a sequence W Specifications Item Specifications Input signal 2 inputs Operation block Logical operation counter etc 13 types Timer 5 types Output signal 1 output Number of steps 10 steps Customizable logic output signal 5 outputs Customizable logic processing time 2 ms 5 139 W Block diagram Customizable logic Input signals Operation Output signals block Customizable logic ci U03 to U05 output signals Operation block Operation block G deyo Digital inputs Digital outputs X terminals Y terminals S3dO9 NOILONNA Inverter s sequence processor Internal input signals Internal output signals W Customizable Logic Mode selection U00 U00 specifies whether to enable the sequence configured by the customizable logic function or disable it to operate the inverter only by input terminal signals and others Data for U00 Function 0 Disable 1 Enable Customizable logic operation W Customizable Logic Setting U01 to
610. ut speed sensor This control estimates the motor speed based on the inverter s output voltage and current to use the estimated speed for speed control In addition it decomposes the motor drive current into the exciting and torque current components and controls each of those components in vector No PG pulse generator interface card is required It is possible to obtain the desired response by adjusting the control constants PI constants using the speed regulator PI controller Since this control controls the motor current it is necessary to secure some voltage margin between the voltage that the inverter can output and the induced voltage of the motor by keeping the former lower than the latter Although the voltage of the general purpose motor has usually been adjusted to match the commercial power keeping the motor terminal voltage low is necessary in order to secure the voltage margin If the motor is driven under this control with the motor terminal voltage being kept low however the rated torque cannot be obtained even when the rated current originally specified for the motor is applied To secure the rated torque therefore it is necessary to use a motor with higher rated current This also applies to the vector control with speed sensor This control is not available for MD mode inverters so do not set F42 data to 5 for those inverters B Vector control with speed sensor This control requires an optional PG pulse generator an
611. v8 TTO l ve0 09 L o0 l 0c 16 v lov OST 66L7 91 0 0ST f T9S 0 rore 6 0 T 8 81T L 801 9 8t 809 6cL T98 T E6 Sc 890 8r 6l 6vT orb 6 cee Occ 6 6vcor0 Occ us vts 0 c 60 v9tl Lee 8601 9v 0709 ETL 8 616 9 I 990 99 8 orl 8THL Orte 00c 6617 0007 ev c8v o LVC 0 8r1 SOE 9v 69r 98S VIL 8 v8 Cc6 os 99 0 Or8l LSI 76 99 TEIT 091 6661 00091 TY v6t0 0 07 Srl 9 Lc 6TIT 9 97 SLs 869 618 06 08 990 S9L 9 I 9L 6s OLIT CEL 66ST 1 0 CET S E 8L 0 0 081 vcr V9cI CH Slr L 8S LOL 9 c8 06 L 99 0 Ly l 981 LELY 0c8l OLL ETET OOL TE oreo ely O s 00 O s IT Orr ovs 0 s9 06L 3 88 IET 080 00 s c9 9v 1s SOSIT 06 6601 00 06 8T TOTO 8 ccl rr 8 6c 6 vil 6cv TYS E9 0 8L U88 EET 080 c8s S8 I 9rtv T OTI SL 6668 9 00 SL 9t 4970 70 06 881 Cot CLIT ler 9te L v9 6L C68 svt v60 OTST OTT Ov 0e 9cCc6 SS 66 VL 91 00 SS St TLTO S9 tL 8l 0971 Cll vvv vss 8 99 L 6L 0768 SIT 080 TISI LET 69vC EL SL Sp 66v 0100 SV ST OST O 95 09 9 tvl voc CH vtr TYS y s9 68L L 88 OET 08 0 Les BST 8S1c 9TE9 LE 66vv 0100 ET coco Or6r 6tsl ETE srl sr TLS L 89 918 T06 ore 080 vor src ETOT 68 S OE 66 9E 91 00 0E T 8cC0 109 SISI TOEI THII v8v 16s 6 89 I8 L 68 8ct 060 66vl EST LOEL OGLE TE 66 67 91 00 C Bi oT EPTO 870E Ly 6 LE Ve L8 66 LOL 0 t8 L 06 vet L80 ces ELT OTTI tottc 81 661c910 8I 5 ISTO Sevc 87 l EIT 0 601 6v L 09 UTL S ES 06 TEE ell LES SOE SEOL 62 97 SI 6V819100 6I el TETO 0081 6Ltl COE
612. vYi v N 35 1035 Select local keypad operation LOC Y Y vYi v Y 36 1036 Select motor 3 M3 Y Y vYi v Y 37 1037 Select motor 4 M4 Y Y xj Y 39 Protect motor from dew condensation DWP Y Y vYj v Y 40 Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 50 Hz ISW50 Y Y N N N 41 Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 60 Hz ISW60 Y Y N N N 47 1047 Servo lock command LOCK NIN N Y N 49 1049 Pulse train sign SIGN Y Y vYi v Y 70 1070 Cancel constant peripheral speed control Hz LSC Y Y vYi v N 71 1071 Hold the constant peripheral speed control frequency in the memory LSC HLD Y Y vYi v N 72 1072 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 1 NN Y 73 1073 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 2 NN Y 74 1074 Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 3 NN Y Count the run time of commercial power driven motor 4 NN Y Select droop control Y Y N Cancel PG alarm NIY Y 81 1081 Clear all customizable logic timers CLTC YIT Y Y 98 Run forward FWD Y Y vYi v Y 99 Run reverse REV YoY YoY Y 100 No function assigned NONE Y Y Yo Y Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input to a terminal U91 Customizable Logic Timer Monitor 1 Step 1 N Y 1 Y cp rx Y Step selection 5 s ep 2 3 Step 3 4 Step4 5 Step 5 6 Step6 7 Step 8 Step8 9 Step9 10 Step 10 y codes LINK Functions E 2
613. values on bar charts Item displayed Full scale Output frequency Maximum frequency F03 Output current Inverter rated current x 200 Calculated torque Motor rated torque x 200 5 87 E46 LCD Monitor Language selection E46 specifies the language to display on the multi function keypad as follows Data for E46 Language TP G1 J1 Language TP G1 C1 Japanese Chinese English English German Japanese French Korean Spanish Italian E47 LCD Monitor Contrast control E47 adjusts the contrast of the LCD monitor on the multi function keypad as follows Data for E47 0O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 E48 LED Monitor Speed monitor item Refer to E43 E50 Coefficient for Speed Indication E50 specifies the coefficient that is used when the load shaft speed or line speed is displayed on the LED monitor Refer to the description of E43 Load shaft speed r min E50 Coefficient for speed indication x Output frequency Hz Line speed m min E50 Coefficient for speed indication x Output frequency Hz Data setting range 0 01 to 200 00 E51 Display Coefficient for Input Watt hour Data E51 specifies a display coefficient multiplication factor for displaying the input watt hour data 5_ 7 in a part of maintenance information on the keypad Input watt hour data Display coefficient E51 data x Input watt hour kWh Data setting range 0 000 cancel reset 0 001 to 99
614. ve for the Ist S curve for the 2nd S curve Trailing edge Leading edge Trailing edge G deyo lt S curve acceleration deceleration weak when the frequency change is 10 or more of the maximum frequency gt Acceleration or deceleration time s 2 x 5 100 90 100 2 x 5 100 x reference acceleration or deceleration time 1 1 x reference acceleration or deceleration time lt S curve acceleration deceleration arbitrary when the frequency change is 30 or more of the maximum frequency 10 at the leading edge and 20 at the trailing edge gt c z O O Z Q O J m o Acceleration or deceleration time s 2 x 10 100 70 100 2 x 20 100 x reference acceleration or deceleration time 1 3 x reference acceleration or deceleration time Curvilinear acceleration deceleration Acceleration deceleration is linear below the base frequency constant torque but it slows down above the base frequency to maintain a certain level of load factor constant output This acceleration deceleration pattern allows the motor to accelerate or decelerate with its maximum performance Torque Output Acc torque Acc output kW Output frequency The figures at left show the acceleration characteristics Base frequency F04 a x Similar characteristics apply to the deceleration Output frequency Maximum frequency F03 Base frequency 77777 F04 Time Reference
615. ve the base frequency Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Disable Enable Enable Disable 5 62 G deyo s3dO9 NOILONNA W Dynamic torque vector control To get the maximal torque out of a motor this control calculates the motor torque for the load applied and uses it to optimize the voltage and current vector output Selecting this control automatically enables the auto torque boost and slip compensation function This control is effective for improving the system response to external disturbances such as load fluctuation and the motor speed control accuracy Note that the inverter may not respond to a rapid load fluctuation since this control is an open loop V f control that does not perform the current control unlike the vector control The advantages of this control include larger maximum torque per output current than that the vector control W V f control with speed sensor Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics decreasing the motor rotation Under V f control with speed sensor the inverter detects the motor rotation using the encoder mounted on the motor shaft and compensates for the decrease in slip frequency by the PI control to match the motor rotation with the commanded speed This improves the motor speed control accuracy W Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor The dif
616. vector output Selecting this control automatically enables the auto torque boost and slip compensation function This control is effective for improving the system response to external disturbances such as load fluctuations and the motor speed control accuracy Note that the inverter may not respond to a rapid load fluctuation since this control is an open loop V f control that does not perform the current control unlike the vector control The advantages of this control include larger maximum torque per output current than that the vector control W V f control with speed sensor Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics decreasing the motor rotation Under V f control with speed sensor the inverter detects the motor rotation using the encoder mounted on the motor shaft and compensates for the decrease in slip frequency by the PI control to match the motor rotation with the commanded speed This improves the motor speed control accuracy m Dynamic torque vector control with speed sensor The difference from the V f control with speed sensor stated above is to calculate the motor torque for the load applied and use it to optimize the voltage and current vector output for getting the maximal torque out of a motor This control is effective for improving the system response to external disturbances such as load fluctuations and the motor speed control accuracy W Vector control witho
617. verload capability 150 1 min 200 3 0 s 200 to 220 V 50 Hz Voltage frequency 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz 200 to 230 V 60 Hz Allowable voltage frequency Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 5 Frequency 5 to 5 Input power Required capacity with DCR kVA 6 1 2 2 2 3 1 5 2 74 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 Torque 150 100 10 to 15 Built in braking resistor Braking time s oyee s 3 Ts T3 T2 Ts Ta DC reactor DCR Option Applicable safety standards Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL open type IP00 UL open type LD Low Duty mode inverters for light load Brakin 5s UL508C C22 2No 14 EN61800 5 1 2003 EN954 1 Cat 3 Item Specifications Type FR GiS2t 04 075 15 22 1 z Nominal applied AUT kW 75 15 18 5 22 30 37 45 55 75 110 Output rating vues pere pein jn pepe blab Rated voltage Three phase 200 to 240 V Three phase 200 to 230 V g with AVR function with AVR function 29 pos i5 pes 80 107 7 loveroadicapabllty Overload capability _ Soe i min Voltage frequency E ES 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz 200 to 220 V 50 Hz 200 to 230 V 60 Hz Allowable o o x d voltage frequency EIER Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 5 Frequency 5 to 5 Required capacity with De kVA 6 10 15 20 25 30 40 48 58 71 116 143 7 _ pee 2 Braking transistor Baking vans Built Buti Built in braking ap 37s 134s Braking
618. verse rotation pulse 2 A B phase with 90 degree phase shift d15 Encoder pulse resolution 0014 to EA60 hex N Y 0400 N Y N Y Y 20 to 60000 pulses 1024 d16 Pulse count factor 1 1 to 9999 N Y 1 NIY N Y Y d17 Pulse count factor 2 1 to 9999 N Y 1 NI Y N Y Y d21 Speed Agreement PG Error 0 0 to 50 0 Y Y 100 N Y Y Y N 5 136 Hysteresis width d22 Detection timer 0 00 to 10 00 s Y Y 050 NL Y Y Y N d23 PG Error Processing 0 Continue to run N Y 2 N Yo Y J Y Y 1 Stop running with alarm 1 2 Stop running with alarm 2 d24 Zero Speed Control 0 Not permit at startup N Y 0 N N Y Y N 5 51 1 Permit at startup 5 136 d25 ASR Switching Time 0 000 to 1 000 s Y Y 000 N Y Y Y Y 5 117 5 136 d32 Torque Control Speed limit 1 O to 110 96 Y Y 100 N N Y Y Y 5 103 d33 Speed limit 2 O to 110 96 Y Y 100 N N Y Y Y 5 137 d41 Application defined Control 0 Disable Ordinary control N Y 0 N Y N N N 5 137 1 Enable Constant peripheral speed control d51 Reserved 9 0 to 500 N Y 12 15 139 d52 Reserved 9 0 to 500 N Y 12 d53 Reserved 9 0 to 500 N Y 12 d54 Reserved 9 0 to 500 N Y 12 d55 Reserved 9 0 1 N Y 0 d59 Command Pulse Rate Input 0 Pulse train sign Pulse train input N Y 0 Y Y vi v Y 5 29 Pulse input format 4 Forward rotation pulse Reverse rotation pulse 5 139 2 A B phase with 90 degree phase shift d61 Filter time constant
619. vi v Y 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series b04 Maximum Output Voltage 3 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage N Y2 1 Y Y N N Y for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series b05 Torque Boost 3 0 0 to 20 0 Y Y 3 Y Y N N N percentage with respect to b03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 3 b06 Electric Thermal Overload 1 For a general purpose motor with shaft driven cooling Y Y 1 YiY Y v Y Protection for Motor 3 d fan Select motor characteristics 2 For an inverter driven motor non ventilated motor or motor with separately powered cooling fan b07 Overload detection level 0 00 Disable Y Y1Y2 4 Y vY vi v Y 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the motor b08 Thermal time constant 0 5 to 75 0 min Y Y 5 Y vY vi v Y b09 DC Braking 3 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Y Y 0 0 YITY YI Y N Braking starting frequency b10 Braking level 0 to 100 HD mode 0 to 80 MD LD mode Y Y 0 YVI YTY N b11 Braking time 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 30 00 s Y Y 000 YY Y Y N b12 Starting Frequency 3 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Y Y 0 5 YiY Y v N b13 Load Selection 0 Variable torque load N Y 1 YIY NIY N Auo D Boot Or 1 Constant torque load Hip EReTgy avg pel auo 2 Auto torque boost 3 Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC 4 Auto energy savin
620. vy alarm objects a Light alarm objects Remarks Ground fault 30 kW or above Overvoltage Undervoltage Input phase loss Output phase loss Heat sink overheat External alarm Inverter internal overheat Motor protection PTC NTC thermistor Braking resistor overheat N ay a lt lt J Se 22 kW or below Fuse blown 200 V class series with 75 kW or above 400 V class series with 90 kW or above Charger circuit fault 200 V class series with 37 kW or above 400 V class series with 75 kW or above ru W I L 1O Li LI 7 Overload of motor 1 through 4 Ure Inverter overload Overspeed PG wire break Memory error Keypad communications error CPU error Option communications error Option error Operation protection Tuning error RS 485 communications error COM port 1 RS 485 communications error COM port 2 Data saving error during undervoltage A A A A 4 EI A A A 4 A A EI Hardware error 200 V class series with 37 kW or above 400 V class series with 45 kW or above Speed mismatch or excessive speed deviation NTC wire break error Mock alarm PID feedback wire break Braking transistor broken Positioning control error Enable circuit failure Light alarm DC fan locked 200 V class series with 45 kW or above 400 V
621. was too heavy Compare the braking torque of the load with that of the inverter 9 deyo gt Set the rated voltage at base frequency F05 to 0 to improve the braking capability gt Consider the use of a braking resistor 6 Malfunction caused by noise 4 Z Undervoltage Check if the DC link bus voltage was below the protective level when the overvoltage alarm occurred gt Implement noise control measures For details refer to the FRENIC MEGA User s Manual Appendix A gt Enable the auto reset H04 gt Connect a surge absorber to magnetic contactor s coils or other solenoids if any causing noise ONILOOHS3 I8n04 L Problem DC link bus voltage has dropped below the undervoltage detection level Possible Causes 1 A momentary power failure occurred What to Check and Suggested Measures gt Release the alarm gt If you want to restart running the motor without treating this condition as an alarm set F14 to 3 4 or 5 depending on the load type 2 The power to the inverter was switched back to ON too soon when F14 1 Check if the power to the inverter was switched back to ON while the control power was still alive Check whether the LEDs on the keypad light gt Turn the power ON again after all LEDs on the keypad go off 3 The power supply voltage did not reach the inverter s specification range Measure the input voltage 2 Increase the v
622. when its output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level Under the current limit processing the inverter immediately turns OFF its output gate to suppress the further current increase and continues to control the output frequency Data for H12 Function 0 Disable m An overcurrent trip occurs at the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level 1 Enable If any problem occurs in use of the equipment or machine is expected when the motor torque temporarily drops during current limiting processing it is necessary to cause an overcurrent trip H12 0 and actuate a mechanical brake at the same time Rote e Since the current limit operation with F43 and F44 is performed by software it may cause a delay in control oe If you need a quick response current limiting also enable the instantaneous overcurrent limiting with H12 Ifan excessive load is applied when the current limiter operation level is set extremely low the inverter will rapidly lower its output frequency This may cause an overvoltage trip or dangerous turnover of the motor rotation due to undershooting Depending on the load extremely short acceleration time may activate the current limiting to suppress the increase of the inverter output frequency causing the system oscillation hunting or activating the inverter overvoltage trip alarm When specifying the acceleration time therefore you need to take into account machinery characterist
623. witch to the 4th motor N Y 0 Y vY vi v Y 5 117 Mode selection 4 Parameter Switch to particular r codes 7 The motor parameters are automatically set depending upon the inverter s capacity and shipping des ination See Table C 2 Drive control 221 amp Default Refer Code Name Data setting range gE 8 setting to EP E VIf PG w o w Torque page 5 a Vif PG PG control r43 Speed Control 4 0 000 to 5 000 s Y Y 002 N Y Y Y N Speed command filter r44 Speed detection filter 0 000 to 0 100 s Ys Y 0005 N Y Y Y N r45 P Gain 0 1 to 200 0 times Ys Y 10 0 N Y Y Y N r46 Integral time 0 001 to 9 999 s Yt Y 0100 N Y Y Y N r48 Output filter 0 000 to 0 100 s Y Y 0002 N Y Y Y N r49 Notch filter resonance frequency 1 to 200 Hz Y Y 200 N N NI Y N r50 Notch filter attenuation level 0 to 20 dB Y Y 0 NI N Nj Y N r51 Cumulative Motor Run Time 4 0 to 9999 The cumulative run time can be modified or reset N N YI Y Y Y Y in units of 10 hours r52 Startup Counter for Motor 4 Indication of cumulative startup count Y N YN Y Y Y 0000 to FFFF hex r53 Motor 4 X correction factor 1 096 to 300 Y j 1Y2 100 Y Y Y Y Y r54 X correction factor 2 0 to 30
624. ws down above the base frequency to maintain a certain level of load factor constant output This acceleration deceleration pattern allows the motor to accelerate or decelerate with the maximum performance of the motor S curve acceleration deceleration To reduce an impact that acceleration deceleration would make on the machine the inverter gradually accelerates or decelerates the motor in both the starting and ending zones of acceleration or deceleration Two types of S curve acceleration deceleration rates are available applying 5 weak of the maximum frequency to all of the four inflection zones and specifying arbitrary rate for each of the four zones with function codes H57 to H60 The reference acceleration deceleration time determines the duration of acceleration deceleration in the linear period hence the actual acceleration deceleration time is longer than the reference acceleration deceleration time 5 39 Maximum frequency Output frequency lt A Acceleration time Deceleration time Reference acceleration time Reference deceleration time Acceleration Time Deceleration S curve Weak Starting zone 596 Ending zone Starting zone Ending zone 5 5 5 S curve Arbitrary Setting range 0 to 100 H57 Acceleration rate for the 1st S curve Leading edge H58 H59 H60 Acceleration rate Deceleration rate Deceleration rate for the 2nd S cur
625. y and stores it into the keypad memory Also reads out inverter s current running status information which can be checked by FRENIC Loader such as information of I O system alarm and running status ICI Pressing the amp key during a read operation when zZz is blinking immediately aborts the L1 operation and displays 777 blinking If this happens the entire contents of the memory of the keypad will be completely cleared Write data Writes data stored in the keypad memory into the inverter s memory If you press the amp 9 key during a write operation when is blinking the write operation pu that is under way will be aborted and will appear blinking If this happens the contents of the inverter s memory i e function code data have been partly updated and remain partly old Therefore do not operate the inverter Instead perform initialization or rewrite the entire data If this function does not work refer to I If data copying does not work on page 3 22 Verify data Verifies collates the data stored in the keypad memory with that in the inverter s memory If any mismatch is detected the verify operation will be aborted with the function code in disagreement displayed blinking Pressing the amp key again causes the verification to continue from the next function code Pressing the amp key during a verify operation when LEr is blinking immediately aborts the operation and displays
626. z Maximum current 1 0 A 400 V class series with 75 kW to 400 kW 380 to 440 VAC 50 Hz 380 to 480 VAC 60 Hz Maximum current 2 0 A 400 V class series with 500 kW and 630 kW 2 3 5 Wiring for control circuit terminals ANWARNING In general the covers of the control signal wires are not specifically designed to withstand a high voltage 1 e reinforced insulation is not applied Therefore if a control signal wire comes into direct contact with a live conductor of the main circuit the insulation of the cover might break down which would expose the signal wire to a high voltage ofthe main circuit Make sure that the control signal wires will not come into contact with live conductors of the main circuit Failure to observe these precautions could cause electric shock or an accident ANCAUTION Noise may be emitted from the inverter motor and wires Take appropriate measures to prevent the nearby sensors and devices from malfunctioning due to such noise An accident could occur m Connecting disconnecting wires to from a control circuit terminal QD Strip the wire end by 8 to 10 mm as shown below uuum EL Strip length of wire end 8to 10 mm Type of screwdriver tip shape Flat 0 6 x 3 5 mm Note For strand wires the strip length specified above should apply after twisting of them If the strip length is out of the specified range the wire may not be firmly clamped or may be short ci

FUS G1E/ 3G1E, Commissioning instructions

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents